GE Industrial Systems UR Series C60 Breaker Management Relay Instruction manual

Title Page
g
GE Industrial Systems
C60 Breaker Management Relay
UR Series Instruction Manual
C60 Revision: 3.4x
Manual P/N: 1601-0100-F4 (GEK-106438C)
Copyright © 2009 GE Multilin
834719A1.CDR
E83849
RE
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
ISO9001:2000
EM
G
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
I
N
GE Multilin
D
T
GIS ERE
U LT I L
GE Multilin's Quality Management
System is registered to
ISO9001:2000
QMI # 005094
UL # A3775
Addendum
g
GE Industrial Systems
ADDENDUM
This Addendum contains information that relates to the C60 Breaker Management Relay relay, version 3.4x. This
addendum lists a number of information items that appear in the instruction manual GEK-106438C (revision F4) but
are not included in the current C60 operations.
The following functions/items are not yet available with the current version of the C60 relay:
• Signal Sources SRC 5 and SRC 6
The UCA2 specifications are not yet finalized. There will be changes to the object models described in
Appendix C: UCA/MMS Protocol.
NOTE
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue, Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
Tel: (905) 294-6222 Fax: (905) 201-2098
Internet: http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
Table of Contents
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1.1.1
1.1.2
CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS ........................................................................... 1-1
INSPECTION CHECKLIST ................................................................................ 1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
INTRODUCTION TO THE UR ........................................................................... 1-2
HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE ......................................................................... 1-3
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE.......................................................................... 1-4
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................................................. 1-4
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1
1.3.2
1.3.3
PC REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 1-5
INSTALLATION.................................................................................................. 1-5
CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE C60 ................................ 1-8
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
MOUNTING AND WIRING............................................................................... 1-10
COMMUNICATIONS........................................................................................ 1-10
FACEPLATE DISPLAY .................................................................................... 1-10
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5.1
1.5.2
1.5.3
1.5.4
1.5.5
1.5.6
1.5.7
2. PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
FACEPLATE KEYPAD..................................................................................... 1-11
MENU NAVIGATION ....................................................................................... 1-11
MENU HIERARCHY ........................................................................................ 1-11
RELAY ACTIVATION....................................................................................... 1-12
RELAY PASSWORDS ..................................................................................... 1-12
FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION................................................................... 1-12
COMMISSIONING ........................................................................................... 1-12
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.1
2.1.2
OVERVIEW........................................................................................................ 2-1
ORDERING........................................................................................................ 2-3
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.1
2.2.2
2.2.3
2.2.4
2.2.5
2.2.6
2.2.7
2.2.8
2.2.9
2.2.10
2.2.11
2.2.12
2.2.13
2.2.14
3. HARDWARE
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ............................................................................... 2-5
USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS ............................................................. 2-6
MONITORING .................................................................................................... 2-7
METERING ........................................................................................................ 2-7
INPUTS .............................................................................................................. 2-8
POWER SUPPLY .............................................................................................. 2-8
OUTPUTS .......................................................................................................... 2-9
COMMUNICATIONS.......................................................................................... 2-9
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS ............................................................... 2-10
ENVIRONMENTAL .......................................................................................... 2-10
TYPE TESTS ................................................................................................... 2-11
PRODUCTION TESTS .................................................................................... 2-11
APPROVALS ................................................................................................... 2-11
MAINTENANCE ............................................................................................... 2-11
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.1.3
PANEL CUTOUT ............................................................................................... 3-1
MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION ..................................................... 3-4
REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT............................................................................... 3-5
3.2 WIRING
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.2.7
3.2.8
3.2.9
GE Multilin
TYPICAL WIRING.............................................................................................. 3-6
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ................................................................................. 3-7
CONTROL POWER ........................................................................................... 3-8
CT/VT MODULES .............................................................................................. 3-8
CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ....................................................................... 3-10
TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS ................................................................ 3-16
RS232 FACEPLATE PORT ............................................................................. 3-17
CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS .................................................................... 3-17
IRIG-B .............................................................................................................. 3-19
C60 Breaker Management Relay
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1
3.3.2
3.3.3
3.3.4
3.3.5
3.3.6
3.3.7
3.3.8
4. HUMAN INTERFACES
DESCRIPTION .................................................................................................3-20
FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS ......................................................3-22
FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS .....................................................................3-22
G.703 INTERFACE...........................................................................................3-23
RS422 INTERFACE .........................................................................................3-26
RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE .....................................................................3-28
G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE ......................................................................3-28
IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE................................................................................3-29
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP INTERFACE
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.3
4.1.4
INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................4-1
CREATING A SITE LIST ....................................................................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW...........................................4-1
ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW ....................................4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.2.4
4.2.5
4.2.6
4.2.7
5. SETTINGS
FACEPLATE .......................................................................................................4-4
LED INDICATORS..............................................................................................4-5
DISPLAY.............................................................................................................4-8
KEYPAD .............................................................................................................4-8
BREAKER CONTROL ........................................................................................4-8
MENUS ...............................................................................................................4-9
CHANGING SETTINGS ...................................................................................4-11
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.1
5.1.2
5.1.3
SETTINGS MAIN MENU ....................................................................................5-1
INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS ......................................................................5-3
INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES..................................................................5-5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.1
5.2.2
5.2.3
5.2.4
5.2.5
5.2.6
5.2.7
5.2.8
5.2.9
5.2.10
5.2.11
5.2.12
5.2.13
5.2.14
5.2.15
5.2.16
5.2.17
5.2.18
PASSWORD SECURITY....................................................................................5-7
DISPLAY PROPERTIES ....................................................................................5-8
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS ..............................................................................5-10
COMMUNICATIONS ........................................................................................5-11
MODBUS USER MAP ......................................................................................5-17
REAL TIME CLOCK .........................................................................................5-17
FAULT REPORT ..............................................................................................5-18
OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................5-19
DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................5-21
DEMAND ..........................................................................................................5-21
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS .....................................................................5-23
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS .........................................................5-26
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS ............................................................................5-26
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS....................................................5-28
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS ..........................................................................5-29
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS ........................................................................5-30
DIRECT I/O.......................................................................................................5-32
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................5-37
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1
AC INPUTS.......................................................................................................5-38
5.3.2
ON A 14.4 KV SYSTEM WITH A DELTA CONNECTION AND A VT PRIMARY TO
SECONDARY TURNS RATIO OF 14400:120, THE VOLTAGE VALUE ENTERED WOULD BE
120, I.E. 14400 / 120.POWER SYSTEM5-39
5.3.3
SIGNAL SOURCES ..........................................................................................5-40
5.3.4
LINE ..................................................................................................................5-42
5.3.5
BREAKERS ......................................................................................................5-43
5.3.6
FLEXCURVES™ ..............................................................................................5-46
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.1
5.4.2
5.4.3
vi
INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™................................................................5-53
FLEXLOGIC™ RULES .....................................................................................5-60
FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION ..........................................................................5-60
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5.4.4
5.4.5
5.4.6
5.4.7
5.4.8
FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE ............................................................................... 5-61
FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR ............................................................... 5-65
FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS................................................................................... 5-65
FLEXELEMENTS™ ......................................................................................... 5-66
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES ............................................................................. 5-70
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1
5.5.2
5.5.3
5.5.4
5.5.5
5.5.6
5.5.7
5.5.8
OVERVIEW...................................................................................................... 5-71
SETTING GROUP ........................................................................................... 5-71
BREAKER FAILURE ........................................................................................ 5-72
PHASE CURRENT .......................................................................................... 5-81
NEUTRAL CURRENT...................................................................................... 5-90
GROUND CURRENT....................................................................................... 5-93
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS .................................................................................... 5-96
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER............................................................. 5-101
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1
5.6.2
5.6.3
5.6.4
5.6.5
5.6.6
5.6.7
5.6.8
OVERVIEW.................................................................................................... 5-104
SETTING GROUPS ....................................................................................... 5-104
SELECTOR SWITCH..................................................................................... 5-105
SYNCHROCHECK......................................................................................... 5-111
AUTORECLOSE ............................................................................................ 5-115
DIGITAL ELEMENTS..................................................................................... 5-126
DIGITAL COUNTERS .................................................................................... 5-129
MONITORING ELEMENTS ........................................................................... 5-131
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7.1
5.7.2
5.7.3
5.7.4
5.7.5
5.7.6
5.7.7
5.7.8
5.7.9
CONTACT INPUTS........................................................................................ 5-134
VIRTUAL INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-136
CONTACT OUTPUTS.................................................................................... 5-137
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS ...................................................................................... 5-139
REMOTE DEVICES ....................................................................................... 5-140
REMOTE INPUTS.......................................................................................... 5-141
REMOTE OUTPUTS...................................................................................... 5-142
RESETTING................................................................................................... 5-143
DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS ......................................................................... 5-143
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8.1
5.8.2
DCMA INPUTS .............................................................................................. 5-147
RTD INPUTS.................................................................................................. 5-148
5.9 TESTING
5.9.1
5.9.2
5.9.3
6. ACTUAL VALUES
TEST MODE .................................................................................................. 5-149
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS .......................................................................... 5-149
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ...................................................................... 5-150
6.1 OVERVIEW
6.1.1
ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU ........................................................................ 6-1
6.2 STATUS
6.2.1
6.2.2
6.2.3
6.2.4
6.2.5
6.2.6
6.2.7
6.2.8
6.2.9
6.2.10
6.2.11
6.2.12
6.2.13
CONTACT INPUTS............................................................................................ 6-3
VIRTUAL INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
REMOTE INPUTS.............................................................................................. 6-3
CONTACT OUTPUTS........................................................................................ 6-4
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS .......................................................................................... 6-4
AUTORECLOSE ................................................................................................ 6-4
REMOTE DEVICES ........................................................................................... 6-4
DIGITAL COUNTERS ........................................................................................ 6-5
SELECTOR SWITCHES.................................................................................... 6-5
FLEX STATES ................................................................................................... 6-5
ETHERNET........................................................................................................ 6-6
DIRECT INPUTS................................................................................................ 6-6
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS.............................................................................. 6-7
6.3 METERING
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
GE Multilin
METERING CONVENTIONS ............................................................................. 6-8
SOURCES ....................................................................................................... 6-11
SYNCHROCHECK........................................................................................... 6-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
vii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.3.4
6.3.5
6.3.6
6.3.7
TRACKING FREQUENCY................................................................................6-15
FLEXELEMENTS™ ..........................................................................................6-15
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER ...............................................................6-15
TRANSDUCER I/O ...........................................................................................6-16
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.1
6.4.2
6.4.3
6.4.4
6.4.5
FAULT REPORTS ............................................................................................6-17
EVENT RECORDS ...........................................................................................6-19
OSCILLOGRAPHY ...........................................................................................6-19
DATA LOGGER ................................................................................................6-19
BREAKER MAINTENANCE .............................................................................6-20
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5.1
6.5.2
7. COMMANDS AND
TARGETS
MODEL INFORMATION ...................................................................................6-21
FIRMWARE REVISIONS..................................................................................6-21
7.1 COMMANDS
7.1.1
7.1.2
7.1.3
7.1.4
7.1.5
COMMANDS MENU ...........................................................................................7-1
VIRTUAL INPUTS ..............................................................................................7-1
CLEAR RECORDS .............................................................................................7-1
SET DATE AND TIME ........................................................................................7-2
RELAY MAINTENANCE .....................................................................................7-2
7.2 TARGETS
7.2.1
7.2.2
7.2.3
TARGETS MENU ...............................................................................................7-3
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................................................7-3
RELAY SELF-TESTS .........................................................................................7-3
A. FLEXANALOG
PARAMETERS
A.1 PARAMETER LIST
B. MODBUS
COMMUNICATIONS
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1.1
B.1.2
B.1.3
B.1.4
INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................... B-1
PHYSICAL LAYER ............................................................................................ B-1
DATA LINK LAYER ........................................................................................... B-1
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ....................................................................................... B-2
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1
B.2.2
B.2.3
B.2.4
B.2.5
B.2.6
SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES ................................................................... B-3
READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H) ........... B-3
EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)........................................... B-4
STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)....................................... B-4
STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H) ................................ B-5
EXCEPTION RESPONSES............................................................................... B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1
B.3.2
OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS........................................................ B-6
MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION ............................................................... B-7
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1
B.4.2
C. UCA/MMS
COMMUNICATIONS
viii
MODBUS MEMORY MAP ................................................................................. B-8
DATA FORMATS............................................................................................. B-42
C.1 OVERVIEW
C.1.1
C.1.2
C.1.3
UCA ................................................................................................................... C-1
MMS .................................................................................................................. C-1
UCA REPORTING ............................................................................................. C-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
TABLE OF CONTENTS
D. IEC 60870-5-104
COMMUNICATIONS
D.1 OVERVIEW
E. DNP COMMUNICATIONS
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
D.1.1
D.1.2
E.1.1
E.1.2
INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT ...................................................................D-1
POINT LIST......................................................................................................D-10
DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE ..........................................................................E-1
IMPLEMENTATION TABLE ...............................................................................E-4
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1
E.2.2
E.2.3
E.2.4
F. MISCELLANEOUS
BINARY INPUTS................................................................................................E-8
BINARY/CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT.............................................................E-13
COUNTERS .....................................................................................................E-14
ANALOG INPUTS ............................................................................................E-15
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
F.1.1
F.1.2
REVISION HISTORY ......................................................................................... F-1
CHANGES TO THE C60 MANUAL.................................................................... F-1
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................... F-4
F.3 WARRANTY
F.3.1
GE MULTILIN WARRANTY ............................................................................... F-6
INDEX
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
ix
TABLE OF CONTENTS
x
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.1 IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1 GETTING STARTED 1.1IMPORTANT PROCEDURES
1
Please read this chapter to help guide you through the initial setup of your new relay.
1.1.1 CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS
WARNING
CAUTION
Before attempting to install or use the relay, it is imperative that all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS in this manual are reviewed to help prevent personal injury, equipment damage, and/
or downtime.
1.1.2 INSPECTION CHECKLIST
•
Open the relay packaging and inspect the unit for physical damage.
•
View the rear nameplate and verify that the correct model has been ordered.
C60
Breaker Management Relay
GE Power Management
Technical Support:
Tel: (905) 294-6222
Fax: (905) 201-2098
RATINGS:
Control Power: 88-300V DC @ 35W / 77-265V AC @ 35VA
Contact Inputs: 300V DC Max 10mA
Contact Outputs: Standard Pilot Duty / 250V AC 7.5A
360V A Resistive / 125V DC Break
4A @ L/R = 40mS / 300W
®
http://www.ge.com/indsys/pm
®
C60D00HCHF8AH6AM6BP8BX7A
000
ZZZZZZ
D
MAZB98000029
D
1998/01/05
Model:
Mods:
Wiring Diagram:
Inst. Manual:
Serial Number:
Firmware:
Mfg. Date:
Made in
Canada
-
M
A
A
B
9
7
0
0
0
0
9
9
-
Figure 1–1: REAR NAMEPLATE (EXAMPLE)
•
Ensure that the following items are included:
• Instruction Manual
• GE enerVista CD (includes the EnerVista UR Setup software and manuals in PDF format)
• mounting screws
•
For product information, instruction manual updates, and the latest software updates, please visit the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
If there is any noticeable physical damage, or any of the contents listed are missing, please contact GE
Multilin immediately.
NOTE
GE MULTILIN CONTACT INFORMATION AND CALL CENTER FOR PRODUCT SUPPORT:
GE Multilin
215 Anderson Avenue
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6E 1B3
TELEPHONE:
FAX:
E-MAIL:
HOME PAGE:
GE Multilin
(905) 294-6222,
1-800-547-8629 (North America only)
(905) 201-2098
[email protected]
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-1
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2UR OVERVIEW
1
1.2.1 INTRODUCTION TO THE UR
Historically, substation protection, control, and metering functions were performed with electromechanical equipment. This
first generation of equipment was gradually replaced by analog electronic equipment, most of which emulated the singlefunction approach of their electromechanical precursors. Both of these technologies required expensive cabling and auxiliary equipment to produce functioning systems.
Recently, digital electronic equipment has begun to provide protection, control, and metering functions. Initially, this equipment was either single function or had very limited multi-function capability, and did not significantly reduce the cabling and
auxiliary equipment required. However, recent digital relays have become quite multi-functional, reducing cabling and auxiliaries significantly. These devices also transfer data to central control facilities and Human Machine Interfaces using electronic communications. The functions performed by these products have become so broad that many users now prefer the
term IED (Intelligent Electronic Device).
It is obvious to station designers that the amount of cabling and auxiliary equipment installed in stations can be even further
reduced, to 20% to 70% of the levels common in 1990, to achieve large cost reductions. This requires placing even more
functions within the IEDs.
Users of power equipment are also interested in reducing cost by improving power quality and personnel productivity, and
as always, in increasing system reliability and efficiency. These objectives are realized through software which is used to
perform functions at both the station and supervisory levels. The use of these systems is growing rapidly.
High speed communications are required to meet the data transfer rates required by modern automatic control and monitoring systems. In the near future, very high speed communications will be required to perform protection signaling with a
performance target response time for a command signal between two IEDs, from transmission to reception, of less than 5
milliseconds. This has been established by the Electric Power Research Institute, a collective body of many American and
Canadian power utilities, in their Utilities Communications Architecture 2 (MMS/UCA2) project. In late 1998, some European utilities began to show an interest in this ongoing initiative.
IEDs with the capabilities outlined above will also provide significantly more power system data than is presently available,
enhance operations and maintenance, and permit the use of adaptive system configuration for protection and control systems. This new generation of equipment must also be easily incorporated into automation systems, at both the station and
enterprise levels. The GE Multilin Universal Relay (UR) has been developed to meet these goals.
1-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1.2.2 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE
1
a) UR BASIC DESIGN
The UR is a digital-based device containing a central processing unit (CPU) that handles multiple types of input and output
signals. The UR can communicate over a local area network (LAN) with an operator interface, a programming device, or
another UR device.
Input Elements
CPU Module
Contact Inputs
Contact Outputs
Protective Elements
Pickup
Dropout
Output
Operate
Virtual Inputs
Analog Inputs
Output Elements
Input
CT Inputs
Status
VT Inputs
Table
Status
Logic Gates
Table
Virtual Outputs
Analog Outputs
Remote Outputs
-DNA
-USER
Remote Inputs
Direct Inputs
Direct Outputs
LAN
Programming
Device
Operator
Interface
827822A2.CDR
Figure 1–2: UR CONCEPT BLOCK DIAGRAM
The CPU module contains firmware that provides protection elements in the form of logic algorithms, as well as programmable logic gates, timers, and latches for control features.
Input elements accept a variety of analog or digital signals from the field. The UR isolates and converts these signals into
logic signals used by the relay.
Output elements convert and isolate the logic signals generated by the relay into digital or analog signals that can be used
to control field devices.
b) UR SIGNAL TYPES
The contact inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with connections to hard-wired contacts. Both ‘wet’ and ‘dry’
contacts are supported.
The virtual inputs and outputs are digital signals associated with UR-series internal logic signals. Virtual inputs include
signals generated by the local user interface. The virtual outputs are outputs of FlexLogic™ equations used to customize
the device. Virtual outputs can also serve as virtual inputs to FlexLogic™ equations.
The analog inputs and outputs are signals that are associated with transducers, such as Resistance Temperature Detectors (RTDs).
The CT and VT inputs refer to analog current transformer and voltage transformer signals used to monitor AC power lines.
The UR-series relays support 1 A and 5 A CTs.
The remote inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point state information between remote UR-series
devices. The remote outputs interface to the remote inputs of other UR-series devices. Remote outputs are FlexLogic™
operands inserted into UCA2 GOOSE messages and are of two assignment types: DNA standard functions and userdefined (UserSt) functions.
The direct inputs and outputs provide a means of sharing digital point states between a number of UR-series IEDs over a
dedicated fiber (single or multimode), RS422, or G.703 interface. No switching equipment is required as the IEDs are connected directly in a ring or redundant (dual) ring configuration. This feature is optimized for speed and intended for pilotaided schemes, distributed logic applications, or the extension of the input/output capabilities of a single relay chassis.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-3
1.2 UR OVERVIEW
1 GETTING STARTED
c) UR SCAN OPERATION
1
The UR-series devices operate in a cyclic scan fashion. The device reads the inputs into an input status table, solves the
logic program (FlexLogic™ equation), and then sets each output to the appropriate state in an output status table. Any
resulting task execution is priority interrupt-driven.
Read Inputs
Protection elements
serviced by sub-scan
Protective Elements
Solve Logic
PKP
DPO
OP
Set Outputs
827823A1.CDR
Figure 1–3: UR-SERIES SCAN OPERATION
1.2.3 SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE
The firmware (software embedded in the relay) is designed in functional modules which can be installed in any relay as
required. This is achieved with Object-Oriented Design and Programming (OOD/OOP) techniques.
Object-Oriented techniques involve the use of ‘objects’ and ‘classes’. An ‘object’ is defined as “a logical entity that contains
both data and code that manipulates that data”. A ‘class’ is the generalized form of similar objects. By using this concept,
one can create a Protection Class with the Protection Elements as objects of the class such as Time Overcurrent, Instantaneous Overcurrent, Current Differential, Undervoltage, Overvoltage, Underfrequency, and Distance. These objects represent completely self-contained software modules. The same object-class concept can be used for Metering, I/O Control,
HMI, Communications, or any functional entity in the system.
Employing OOD/OOP in the software architecture of the Universal Relay achieves the same features as the hardware
architecture: modularity, scalability, and flexibility. The application software for any Universal Relay (e.g. Feeder Protection,
Transformer Protection, Distance Protection) is constructed by combining objects from the various functionality classes.
This results in a ’common look and feel’ across the entire family of UR-series platform-based applications.
1.2.4 IMPORTANT CONCEPTS
As described above, the architecture of the UR-series relays differ from previous devices. To achieve a general understanding of this device, some sections of Chapter 5 are quite helpful. The most important functions of the relay are contained in
“elements”. A description of the UR-series elements can be found in the Introduction to Elements section in Chapter 5. An
example of a simple element, and some of the organization of this manual, can be found in the Digital Elements section. An
explanation of the use of inputs from CTs and VTs is in the Introduction to AC Sources section in Chapter 5. A description of
how digital signals are used and routed within the relay is contained in the Introduction to FlexLogic™ section in Chapter 5.
1-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1.3.1 PC REQUIREMENTS
The faceplate keypad and display or the EnerVista UR Setup software interface can be used to communicate with the relay.
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface is the preferred method to edit settings and view actual values because the PC
monitor can display more information in a simple comprehensible format.
The following minimum requirements must be met for the EnerVista UR Setup software to properly operate on a PC.
•
Pentium class or higher processor (Pentium II 300 MHz or higher recommended)
•
Windows 95, 98, 98SE, ME, NT 4.0 (Service Pack 4 or higher), 2000, XP
•
64 MB of RAM (256 MB recommended) and 50 MB of available hard drive space (200 MB recommended)
•
Video capable of displaying 800 x 600 or higher in High Color mode (16-bit color)
•
RS232 and/or Ethernet port for communications to the relay
1.3.2 INSTALLATION
After ensuring the minimum requirements for using EnerVista UR Setup are met (see previous section), use the following
procedure to install the EnerVista UR Setup from the enclosed GE enerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE enerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Click the Install Now button and follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge enerVista software.
3.
When installation is complete, start the enerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the Launch Pad window.
5.
In the enerVista Launch Pad window, click the Install Software button and select the “C60 Breaker Management
Relay” from the Install Software window as shown below. Select the “Web” option to ensure the most recent software
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-5
1
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1 GETTING STARTED
release, or select “CD” if you do not have a web connection, then click the Check Now button to list software items for
the C60.
1
6.
Select the C60 software program and release notes (if desired) from the list and click the Download Now button to
obtain the installation program.
7.
enerVista Launchpad will obtain the installation program from the Web or CD. Once the download is complete, doubleclick the installation program to install the EnerVista UR Setup software.
8.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista UR Setup will be installed.
9.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory indicated and the installation program
will automatically create icons and add EnerVista UR Setup to the Windows start menu.
1-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
10. Click Finish to end the installation. The C60 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the enerVista Launchpad window, as shown below.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-7
1
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3.3 CONNECTING ENERVISTA UR SETUP WITH THE C60
1
This section is intended as a quick start guide to using the EnerVista UR Setup software. Please refer to the EnerVista UR
Setup Help File and Chapter 4 of this manual for more information.
a) CONFIGURING AN ETHERNET CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the back of the relay. To
setup the relay for Ethernet communications, it will be necessary to define a Site, then add the relay as a Device at that site.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin (see previous section for installation instructions).
2.
Select the “UR” device from the enerVista Launchpad to start EnerVista UR Setup.
3.
Click the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window, then click the Add Site button to define a new site.
4.
Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
5.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
6.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
7.
Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
8.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
9.
•
Enter the relay IP address (from SETTINGS
in the “IP Address” field.
•
Enter the relay Modbus address (from the PRODUCT SETUP
BUS SLAVE ADDRESS setting) in the “Slave Address” field.
•
Enter the Modbus port address (from the PRODUCT SETUP
MODBUS TCP PORT NUMBER setting) in the “Modbus Port” field.
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS)
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MOD-
MODBUS PROTOCOL
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the C60 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the three EnerVista UR Setup values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to Section c) below to begin communications.
b) CONFIGURING AN RS232 CONNECTION
Before starting, verify that the RS232 serial cable is properly connected to the RS232 port on the front panel of the relay.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista UR Setup software (available from the GE enerVista CD or online
from http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
2.
Select the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the “Site Name” field. If desired, a short description of site can also be entered along
with the display order of devices defined for the site. Click the OK button when complete.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista UR Setup window. Click on the new site name and then
click the Device Setup button to re-open the Device Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the “Device Name” field and a description (optional) of the site.
7.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of interface parameters that must be
entered for proper serial communications.
1-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE
•
Enter the relay slave address and COM port values (from the SETTINGS
SERIAL PORTS menu) in the “Slave Address” and “COM Port” fields.
•
Enter the physical communications parameters (baud rate and parity settings) in their respective fields.
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
1
8.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the C60 device and upload the order code. If an communications
error occurs, ensure that the EnerVista UR Setup serial communications values entered in the previous step correspond to the relay setting values.
9.
Click “OK” when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added to the Site List window (or
Online window) located in the top left corner of the main EnerVista UR Setup window.
The Site Device has now been configured for RS232 communications. Proceed to Section c) Connecting to the Relay
below to begin communications.
c) CONNECTING TO THE RELAY
1.
Open the Display Properties window through the Site List tree as shown below:
Expand the Site List by double-clicking
or by selecting the [+] box
Communications Status Indicator
Green = OK, Red = No Comms
2.
The Display Properties window will open with a flashing status indicator on the lower left of the EnerVista UR Setup
window.
3.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the Ethernet network cable is properly connected to the Ethernet port on the
back of the relay and that the relay has been properly setup for communications (steps A and B earlier).
4.
The Display Properties settings can now be edited, printed, or changed according to user specifications.
Refer to Chapter 4 in this manual and the EnerVista UR Setup Help File for more information about the
using the EnerVista UR Setup software interface.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-9
1.4 UR HARDWARE
1 GETTING STARTED
1.4UR HARDWARE
1
1.4.1 MOUNTING AND WIRING
Please refer to Chapter 3: Hardware for detailed mounting and wiring instructions. Review all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS
carefully.
1.4.2 COMMUNICATIONS
The EnerVista UR Setup software communicates to the relay via the faceplate RS232 port or the rear panel RS485 / Ethernet ports. To communicate via the faceplate RS232 port, a standard “straight-through” serial cable is used. The DB-9 male
end is connected to the relay and the DB-9 or DB-25 female end is connected to the PC COM1 or COM2 port as described
in the CPU Communications Ports section of Chapter 3.
Figure 1–4: RELAY COMMUNICATIONS OPTIONS
To communicate through the C60 rear RS485 port from a PC RS232 port, the GE Multilin RS232/RS485 converter box is
required. This device (catalog number F485) connects to the computer using a “straight-through” serial cable. A shielded
twisted-pair (20, 22, or 24 AWG) connects the F485 converter to the C60 rear communications port. The converter terminals (+, –, GND) are connected to the C60 communication module (+, –, COM) terminals. Refer to the CPU Communications Ports section in Chapter 3 for option details. The line should be terminated with an R-C network (i.e. 120 Ω, 1 nF) as
described in the Chapter 3.
1.4.3 FACEPLATE DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
1-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1.5USING THE RELAY
1.5.1 FACEPLATE KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The
key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The
MESSAGE
keys navigate through the subgroups. The
VALUE
keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The
key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The
key stores altered setting values.
key may be
1.5.2 MENU NAVIGATION
Press the
key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the
key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
SETTINGS
COMMANDS
TARGETS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active
Targets
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
User Display 1
1.5.3 MENU HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and
keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE
key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the
MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
1-11
1
1.5 USING THE RELAY
1 GETTING STARTED
1.5.4 RELAY ACTIVATION
1
The relay is defaulted to the “Not Programmed” state when it leaves the factory. This safeguards against the installation of
a relay whose settings have not been entered. When powered up successfully, the Trouble LED will be on and the In Service LED off. The relay in the “Not Programmed” state will block signaling of any output relay. These conditions will remain
until the relay is explicitly put in the “Programmed” state.
Select the menu message SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To put the relay in the “Programmed” state, press either of the
VALUE
keys once and then press
. The faceplate Trouble LED will turn off and the In Service LED will turn on. The settings for the relay can be programmed manually
(refer to Chapter 5) via the faceplate keypad or remotely (refer to the EnerVista UR Setup Help file) via the EnerVista UR
Setup software interface.
1.5.5 RELAY PASSWORDS
It is recommended that passwords be set up for each security level and assigned to specific personnel. There are two user
password security access levels, COMMAND and SETTING:
1. COMMAND
The COMMAND access level restricts the user from making any settings changes, but allows the user to perform the following operations:
•
operate breakers via faceplate keypad
•
change state of virtual inputs
•
clear event records
•
clear oscillography records
•
operate user-programmable pushbuttons
2. SETTING
The SETTING access level allows the user to make any changes to any of the setting values.
Refer to the Changing Settings section in Chapter 4 for complete instructions on setting up security level
passwords.
NOTE
1.5.6 FLEXLOGIC™ CUSTOMIZATION
FlexLogic™ equation editing is required for setting up user-defined logic for customizing the relay operations. See the FlexLogic™ section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
1.5.7 COMMISSIONING
Templated tables for charting all the required settings before entering them via the keypad are available from the GE Multilin website at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
1-12
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION 2.1INTRODUCTION
2.1.1 OVERVIEW
The C60 Breaker Management Relay is a microprocessor based relay designed for breaker monitoring, control and protection.
Voltage, current, and power metering is built into the relay as a standard feature. Current parameters are available as total
waveform RMS magnitude, or as fundamental frequency only RMS magnitude and angle (phasor).
Diagnostic features include an Event Recorder capable of storing 1024 time-tagged events, oscillography capable of storing up to 64 records with programmable trigger, content and sampling rate, and Data Logger acquisition of up to 16 channels, with programmable content and sampling rate. The internal clock used for time-tagging can be synchronized with an
IRIG-B signal or via the SNTP protocol over the Ethernet port. This precise time stamping allows the sequence of events to
be determined throughout the system. Events can also be programmed (via FlexLogic™ equations) to trigger oscillography
data capture which may be set to record the measured parameters before and after the event for viewing on a personal
computer (PC). These tools significantly reduce troubleshooting time and simplify report generation in the event of a system fault.
A faceplate RS232 port may be used to connect to a PC for the programming of settings and the monitoring of actual values. A variety of communications modules are available. Two rear RS485 ports allow independent access by operating and
engineering staff. All serial ports use the Modbus® RTU protocol. The RS485 ports may be connected to system computers
with baud rates up to 115.2 kbps. The RS232 port has a fixed baud rate of 19.2 kbps. Optional communications modules
include a 10BaseF Ethernet interface which can be used to provide fast, reliable communications in noisy environments.
Another option provides two 10BaseF fiber optic ports for redundancy. The Ethernet port supports MMS/UCA2, Modbus®/
TCP, and TFTP protocols, and allows access to the relay via any standard web browser (UR web pages). The IEC 608705-104 protocol is supported on the Ethernet port. DNP 3.0 and IEC 60870-5-104 cannot be enabled at the same time.
The C60 IEDs use flash memory technology which allows field upgrading as new features are added. The following Single
Line Diagram illustrates the relay functionality using ANSI (American National Standards Institute) device numbers.
Table 2–1: ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
DEVICE
NUMBER
FUNCTION
25
Synchrocheck
50P BF
Phase IOC, Breaker Failure
27P
Phase Undervoltage
51G
Ground Time Overcurrent
27X
Auxiliary Undervoltage
51N
Neutral Time Overcurrent
32
Sensitive Directional Power
51P
Phase Time Overcurrent
50G
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent
52
AC Circuit Breaker
50N
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
59N
Neutral Overvoltage
50N BF
Neutral IOC, Breaker Failure
59X
Auxiliary Overvoltage
50P
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent
79
Autoreclose
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-1
2
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
BF2
2
50P1
50P2
50P3
59
50N1
50N2
50N3
27
25
TRIP
52
27
CLOSE
METERING
79
CLOSE
52
TM
FlexElement
TRIP
50P1
50P2
50P3
Transducer
Input
50N1
50N2
50N3
27
25
BF2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
834710AB.CDR
Figure 2–1: SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM
Table 2–2: OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS
FUNCTION
FUNCTION
Breaker Arcing Current (I2t)
MMS/UCA Communications
Breaker Control
MMS/UCA Remote Inputs/Outputs (“GOOSE”)
Contact Inputs (up to 96)
Modbus Communications
Contact Outputs (up to 64)
Modbus User Map
Control Pushbuttons
Non-Volatile Latches
Data Logger
Non-Volatile Selector Switch
Demand
Oscillography
Digital Counters (8)
Setting Groups (6)
Digital Elements (16)
Time Synchronization over SNTP
Direct Inputs/Outputs (32)
Transducer I/O
Disturbance Detection
User Definable Displays
DNP 3.0 or IEC 60870-5-104 Communications
User Programmable LEDs
Event Recorder
User Programmable Pushbuttons
Fault Detector and Fault Report
User Programmable Self-Tests
FlexElements™ (8)
Virtual Inputs (32)
FlexLogic™ Equations
Virtual Outputs (64)
Metering: Current, Voltage, Power, Energy, Frequency
VT Fuse Failure
2-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2.1.2 ORDERING
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, and consists of
the following module functions: power supply, CPU, CT/VT DSP, digital input/output, transducer input/output. Each of these
modules can be supplied in a number of configurations which must be specified at the time of ordering. The information
required to completely specify the relay is provided in the following table (full details of available relay modules are contained in Chapter 3: Hardware).
2
Table 2–3: C60 ORDER CODES
C60 - * 00 - H * * - F ** - H ** - M ** - P ** - U ** - W **
BASE UNIT
CPU
SOFTWARE
MOUNT/
FACEPLATE
C60 - * 00 - V
C60
|
|
|
A |
|
C |
|
D |
|
00
|
H
H
V
POWER
SUPPLY
CT/VT DSP
DIGITAL I/O
TRANSDUCER I/O
(maximum of 3 per unit)
*
|
|
|
|
|
C
P
F
* - F ** - H ** - M **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
H
|
|
|
L
|
|
|
8A
|
8A
8B
|
8B
8C
|
8C
8D
|
8D
|
XX
4A
4A
4B
4B
4C
4C
4L
4L
67
67
6A
6A
6B
6B
6C
6C
6D
6D
6E
6E
6F
6F
6G
6G
6H
6H
6K
6K
6L
6L
6M
6M
6N
6N
6P
6P
6R
6R
6S
6S
6T
6T
6U
6U
5C
5C
5E
5E
5F
5F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
5C
5E
5F
INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
NOTE
For vertical mounting units, # = slot P for digital and transducer
input/output modules; # = slot R for inter-relay communications
modules
GE Multilin
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
5C
5E
5F
- # **
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
XX
4A
4B
4C
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
5C
5E
5F
7A
7B
7C
7D
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7P
7R
7S
7T
7W
72
73
76
77
Full Size Horizontal Mount
Reduced Size Vertical Mount (see note below for value of slot #)
Base Unit
RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP)
RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, Modbus TCP/IP, DNP)
No Software Options
Horizontal (19” rack)
Horizontal (19” rack) with User-Programmable Pushbuttons
Vertical (3/4 rack)
125 / 250 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
No Module
4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs
8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs
2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 2 Form-C outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Volt w/ opt Curr) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
8 Form-C Outputs
16 Digital Inputs
4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
8 Fast Form-C Outputs
4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Curr w/ opt Volt) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
8 RTD Inputs
4 RTD Inputs, 4 dcmA Inputs
8 dcmA Inputs
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-3
2.1 INTRODUCTION
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
The order codes for replacement modules to be ordered separately are shown in the following table. When ordering a
replacement CPU module or Faceplate, please provide the serial number of your existing unit.
Table 2–4: ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES
UR - ** POWER SUPPLY
2
CPU
FACEPLATE
DIGITAL I/O
CT/VT DSP
UR INTER-RELAY
COMMUNICATIONS
TRANSDUCER I/O
2-4
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
1H
1L
9A
9C
9D
3C
3F
4A
4B
4C
4L
67
6A
6B
6C
6D
6E
6F
6G
6H
6K
6L
6M
6N
6P
6R
6S
6T
6U
8A
8B
8C
8D
7A
7B
7C
7D
7E
7F
7G
7Q
7H
7I
7J
7K
7L
7M
7P
7R
7S
7T
7W
72
73
74
75
76
77
5C
5E
5F
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
125 / 250 V AC/DC
24 to 48 V (DC only)
RS485 + RS485 (ModBus RTU, DNP 3.0)
RS485 + 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
RS485 + Redundant 10BaseF (MMS/UCA2, ModBus TCP/IP, DNP 3.0)
Horizontal Faceplate with Display & Keypad
Vertical Faceplate with Display & Keypad
4 Solid-State (No Monitoring) MOSFET Outputs
4 Solid-State (Voltage w/ opt Current) MOSFET Outputs
4 Solid-State (Current w/ opt Voltage) MOSFET Outputs
14 Form-A (No Monitoring) Latchable Outputs
8 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
8 Form-C Outputs
16 Digital Inputs
4 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
8 Fast Form-C Outputs
4 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (Voltage w/ opt Current) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-C & 4 Fast Form-C Outputs
2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (Current w/ opt Voltage) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 2 Form-C Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
2 Form-A (No Monitoring) & 4 Form-C Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
4 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 8 Digital Inputs
6 Form-A (No Monitoring) Outputs, 4 Digital Inputs
Standard 4CT/4VT
Sensitive Ground 4CT/4VT
Standard 8CT
Sensitive Ground 8CT
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only)
Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode LED (L90 only)
Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode ELED (L90 only)
Channel 1: G.703; Channel 2: 820 nm, single-mode LASER (L90 only)
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
G.703, 1 Channel
G.703, 2 Channels
RS422, 1 Channel
RS422, 2 Channels
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
Channel 1 - G.703, Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single -mode, LASER (L90 only)
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
8 RTD Inputs
4 dcmA Inputs, 4 RTD Inputs
8 dcmA Inputs
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2SPECIFICATIONSSPECIFICATIONS ARE SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE
2.2.1 PROTECTION ELEMENTS
NOTE
The operating times below include the activation time of a trip rated Form-A output contact unless otherwise indicated. FlexLogic™ operands of a given element are 4 ms faster. This should be taken into account when using
FlexLogic™ to interconnect with other protection or control elements of the relay, building FlexLogic™ equations, or
interfacing with other IEDs or power system devices via communications or different output contacts.
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND TOC
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
Current:
Phasor or RMS
Pickup level:
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Dropout level:
102 to 103% of Pickup
Dropout level:
97% to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Curve shapes:
GE IAV Inverse;
Definite Time (0.1s base curve)
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
IEEE Moderately/Very/Extremely
Inverse; IEC (and BS) A/B/C and Short
Inverse; GE IAC Inverse, Short/Very/
Extremely Inverse; I2t; FlexCurves™
(programmable); Definite Time (0.01 s
base curve)
Timing accuracy:
Operate at < 0.90 × Pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Time Dial = 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of
0.01
Dropout level:
102 to 103% of pickup
Level accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Reset type:
Instantaneous/Timed (per IEEE)
Curve shapes:
GE IAV Inverse, Definite Time
Timing accuracy:
Operate at > 1.03 × actual Pickup
±3.5% of operate time or ±½ cycle
(whichever is greater)
Curve multiplier:
Time Dial = 0 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
Timing accuracy:
±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
(whichever is greater)
Level accuracy:
for 0.1 to 2.0 × CT:
for > 2.0 × CT:
Curve shapes:
Curve multiplier:
±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
(whichever is greater)
±1.5% of reading > 2.0 × CT rating
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
PHASE/NEUTRAL/GROUND IOC
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup level:
0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup level:
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of pickup
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
Level accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating:
±0.5% of reading or ±1% of rated
(whichever is greater)
±1.5% of reading
0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
Pickup delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Reset delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
<2%
Timing accuracy:
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Operate time:
< 30 ms at 1.10 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Reset delay:
0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
Operate time:
<20 ms at 3 × Pickup at 60 Hz
Pickup level:
Timing accuracy:
Operate at 1.5 × Pickup
±3% or ±4 ms (whichever is greater)
Dropout level:
97 to 98% of Pickup
Level accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
> 2.0 × CT rating
Overreach:
Pickup delay:
0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
Pickup delay:
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Measured power:
3-phase, true RMS
Reset delay:
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Number of stages:
2
Timing accuracy:
Characteristic angle:
0 to 359° in steps of 1
±3% of operate time or ±4 ms
(whichever is greater)
Calibration angle:
0.00 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
Operate time:
< 30 ms at 1.10 × pickup at 60 Hz
Minimum power:
–1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
BREAKER FAILURE
Pickup level accuracy:
±1% or ±0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Mode:
1-pole, 3-pole
Hysteresis:
2% or 0.001 pu, whichever is greater
Current supervision:
Phase, Neutral Current
Pickup delay:
0 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
Current supv. pickup:
0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Time accuracy:
±3% or ±4 ms, whichever is greater
Current supv. dropout:
97 to 98% of Pickup
Operate time:
50 ms
Current supv. accuracy:
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating: ±0.75% of reading or ±2% of rated
(whichever is greater)
above 2 × CT rating: ±2.5% of reading
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-5
2
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
SYNCHROCHECK
AUTORECLOSURE
Max voltage difference: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
Two breakers applications
Max angle difference:
0 to 100° in steps of 1
Single- and three-pole tripping schemes
Max freq. difference:
0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Up to 2 reclose attempts before lockout
Hysteresis for max. freq. diff.: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
Dead source function:
2
Selectable reclosing mode and breaker sequence
None, LV1 & DV2, DV1 & LV2, DV1 or
DV2, DV1 xor DV2, DV1 & DV2
(L = Live, D = Dead)
2.2.2 USER-PROGRAMMABLE ELEMENTS
FLEXLOGIC™
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
Programming language: Reverse Polish Notation with graphical
visualization (keypad programmable)
Number:
48 plus Trip and Alarm
Programmability:
from any logical variable, contact, or virtual input
Self-reset or Latched
Lines of code:
512
Internal variables:
64
Reset mode:
Supported operations:
NOT, XOR, OR (2 to 16 inputs), AND (2
to 16 inputs), NOR (2 to 16 inputs),
NAND (2 to 16 inputs), Latch (Reset
dominant), Edge Detectors, Timers
LED TEST
Inputs:
Number of timers:
Pickup delay:
Dropout delay:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input
32
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
0 to 60000 (ms, sec., min.) in steps of 1
4 (A through D)
Reset points:
40 (0 through 1 of pickup)
Operate points:
80 (1 through 20 of pickup)
Time delay:
from any digital input or user-programmable condition
Number of tests:
3, interruptible at any time
Duration of full test:
approximately 3 minutes
Test sequence 1:
all LEDs on
Test sequence 2:
all LEDs off, one LED at a time on for 1 s
Test sequence 3:
all LEDs on, one LED at a time off for 1 s
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
FLEXCURVES™
Number:
Initiation:
0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FLEX STATES
Number:
up to 256 logical variables grouped
under 16 Modbus addresses
Programmability:
any logical variable, contact, or virtual
input
Number of displays:
16
Lines of display:
2 × 20 alphanumeric characters
Parameters:
up to 5, any Modbus register addresses
Invoking and scrolling:
keypad, or any user-programmable condition, including pushbuttons
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
Number of pushbuttons: 7
Operation:
drive FlexLogic™ operands
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS (OPTIONAL)
Number of pushbuttons: 12
FLEXELEMENTS™
Number of elements:
8
Mode:
Self-Reset, Latched
Operating signal:
any analog actual value, or two values in
differential mode
Display message:
2 lines of 20 characters each
SELECTOR SWITCH
Operating signal mode: Signed or Absolute Value
Number of elements:
Operating mode:
Level, Delta
Upper position limit:
1 to 7 in steps of 1
Comparator direction:
Over, Under
Selecting mode:
Time-out or Acknowledge
Pickup Level:
–30.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
Time-out timer:
3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Hysteresis:
0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
Control inputs:
step-up and 3-bit
Delta dt:
20 ms to 60 days
Power-up mode:
restore from non-volatile memory or synchronize to a 3-bit control input or Synch/
Restore mode
Pickup & dropout delay: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
Type:
Set-dominant or Reset-dominant
Number:
16 (individually programmed)
Output:
Stored in non-volatile memory
Execution sequence:
As input prior to protection, control, and
FlexLogic™
2-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.3 MONITORING
DATA LOGGER
OSCILLOGRAPHY
Maximum records:
64
Number of channels:
1 to 16
Sampling rate:
64 samples per power cycle
Parameters:
Any available analog actual value
Triggers:
Any element pickup, dropout or operate
Digital input change of state
Digital output change of state
FlexLogic™ equation
Sampling rate:
1 sec.; 1, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 min.
Storage capacity:
(NN is dependent on memory)
Data:
AC input channels
Element state
Digital input state
Digital output state
Data storage:
In non-volatile memory
1-second rate:
↓
60-minute rate:
2
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
↓
01 channel for NN days
16 channels for NN days
FAULT LOCATOR
EVENT RECORDER
Method:
Single-ended
Maximum accuracy if:
Fault resistance is zero or fault currents
from all line terminals are in phase
±1.5% (V > 10 V, I > 0.1 pu)
Capacity:
1024 events
Time-tag:
to 1 microsecond
Relay accuracy:
Triggers:
Any element pickup, dropout or operate
Digital input change of state
Digital output change of state
Self-test events
Data storage:
In non-volatile memory
Worst-case accuracy:
(user data)
VT%error +
CT%error +
(user data)
ZLine%error + (user data)
METHOD%error + (Chapter 6)
RELAY ACCURACY%error + (1.5%)
2.2.4 METERING
RMS CURRENT: PHASE, NEUTRAL, AND GROUND
VAR-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy at
0.1 to 2.0 × CT rating:
Accuracy:
±2.0% of reading
Range:
±0 to 2 × 109 Mvarh
Parameters:
3-phase only
Update rate:
50 ms
> 2.0 × CT rating:
±0.25% of reading or ±0.1% of rated
(whichever is greater)
±1.0% of reading
RMS VOLTAGE
Accuracy:
±0.5% of reading from 10 to 208 V
REAL POWER (WATTS)
Accuracy:
±1.0% of reading at
–0.8 < PF ≤ –1.0 and 0.8 < PF ≤ 1.0
REACTIVE POWER (VARS)
Accuracy:
Accuracy at
V = 0.8 to 1.2 pu:
I = 0.1 to 0.25 pu:
I > 0.25 pu:
±1.0% of reading at –0.2 ≤ PF ≤ 0.2
±1.0% of reading
Measurements:
Phases A, B, and C present and maximum measured currents
3-Phase Power (P, Q, and S) present
and maximum measured currents
Accuracy:
±2.0%
WATT-HOURS (POSITIVE AND NEGATIVE)
Accuracy:
±2.0% of reading
Range:
±0 to 2 × 109 MWh
Parameters:
3-phase only
Update rate:
50 ms
GE Multilin
±0.01 Hz (when voltage signal is used
for frequency measurement)
±0.05 Hz
±0.02 Hz (when current signal is used for
frequency measurement)
DEMAND
APPARENT POWER (VA)
Accuracy:
FREQUENCY
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-7
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2.5 INPUTS
RTD INPUTS
AC CURRENT
2
Types (3-wire):
100 Ω Platinum, 100 & 120 Ω Nickel, 10
Ω Copper
CT rated primary:
1 to 50000 A
CT rated secondary:
1 A or 5 A by connection
Nominal frequency:
20 to 65 Hz
Sensing current:
5 mA
Relay burden:
< 0.2 VA at rated secondary
Range:
–50 to +250°C
Conversion range:
Standard CT:
0.02 to 46 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Sensitive Ground module:
0.002 to 4.6 × CT rating RMS symmetrical
Current withstand:
20 ms at 250 times rated
1 sec. at 100 times rated
continuous at 3 times rated
Accuracy:
±2°C
Isolation:
36 V pk-pk
IRIG-B INPUT
Amplitude modulation:
1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift:
TTL
Input impedance:
22 kΩ
REMOTE INPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
AC VOLTAGE
VT rated secondary:
50.0 to 240.0 V
Number of input points: 32, configured from 64 incoming bit pairs
VT ratio:
1.00 to 24000.00
Number of remote devices:16
Nominal frequency:
20 to 65 Hz
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Relay burden:
< 0.25 VA at 120 V
DIRECT INPUTS
Conversion range:
1 to 275 V
Number of input points: 32
Voltage withstand:
continuous at 260 V to neutral
1 min./hr at 420 V to neutral
No. of remote devices:
Ring configuration:
CONTACT INPUTS
16
Default states on loss of comms.: On, Off, Latest/Off, Latest/On
Yes, No
Dry contacts:
1000 Ω maximum
Data rate:
64 or 128 kbps
Wet contacts:
300 V DC maximum
CRC:
32-bit
Selectable thresholds:
17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Recognition time:
< 1 ms
Debounce timer:
0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
CRC alarm:
Responding to:
Rate of messages failing the CRC
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold:
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
DCMA INPUTS
Current input (mA DC):
0 to –1, 0 to +1, –1 to +1, 0 to 5, 0 to 10,
0 to 20, 4 to 20 (programmable)
Input impedance:
379 Ω ±10%
Conversion range:
–1 to + 20 mA DC
Accuracy:
±0.2% of full scale
Type:
Passive
Unreturned message alarm:
Responding to:
Rate of unreturned messages in the ring
configuration
Monitoring message count: 10 to 10000 in steps of 1
Alarm threshold:
1 to 1000 in steps of 1
2.2.6 POWER SUPPLY
LOW RANGE
ALL RANGES
Nominal DC voltage:
24 to 48 V at 3 A
Volt withstand:
2 × Highest Nominal Voltage for 10 ms
Min/max DC voltage:
20 / 60 V
Voltage loss hold-up:
50 ms duration at nominal
NOTE: Low range is DC only.
Power consumption:
Typical = 35 VA; Max. = 75 VA
HIGH RANGE
INTERNAL FUSE
RATINGS
Nominal DC voltage:
125 to 250 V at 0.7 A
Min/max DC voltage:
88 / 300 V
Nominal AC voltage:
100 to 240 V at 50/60 Hz, 0.7 A
Min/max AC voltage:
88 / 265 V at 48 to 62 Hz
Low range power supply: 7.5 A / 600 V
High range power supply: 5 A / 600 V
INTERRUPTING CAPACITY
AC:
DC:
2-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
100 000 A RMS symmetrical
10 000 A
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.7 OUTPUTS
FAST FORM-C RELAY
FORM-A RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
Make and carry:
0.1 A max. (resistive load)
Minimum load impedance:
Carry continuous:
6A
Break at L/R of 40 ms:
0.25 A DC max. at 48 V
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V
INPUT
VOLTAGE
Operate time:
Contact material:
IMPEDANCE
2 W RESISTOR
1 W RESISTOR
< 4 ms
250 V DC
20 KΩ
50 KΩ
Silver alloy
120 V DC
5 KΩ
2 KΩ
LATCHING RELAY
48 V DC
2 KΩ
2 KΩ
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 30 A as per ANSI C37.90
24 V DC
2 KΩ
2 KΩ
Carry continuous:
6A
Break at L/R of 40 ms:
0.25 A DC max.
Operate time:
< 4 ms
Operate time:
Contact material:
Silver alloy
INTERNAL LIMITING RESISTOR:
Control:
separate operate and reset inputs
Power:
2 watts
operate-dominant or reset-dominant
Resistance:
100 ohms
Control mode:
Note: values for 24 V and 48 V are the same due to a
required 95% voltage drop across the load impedance.
< 0.6 ms
Applicable voltage:
approx. 15 to 250 V DC
CONTROL POWER EXTERNAL OUTPUT
(FOR DRY CONTACT INPUT)
Trickle current:
approx. 1 to 2.5 mA
Capacity:
100 mA DC at 48 V DC
Isolation:
±300 Vpk
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
FORM-A CURRENT MONITOR
Threshold current:
REMOTE OUTPUTS (MMS GOOSE)
approx. 80 to 100 mA
FORM-C AND CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY
Make and carry for 0.2 s: 10 A
Standard output points: 32
User output points:
Carry continuous:
6A
DIRECT OUTPUTS
Break at L/R of 40 ms:
0.25 A DC max. at 48 V
0.10 A DC max. at 125 V
Output points:
Operate time:
< 8 ms
Contact material:
Silver alloy
2
32
32
2.2.8 COMMUNICATIONS
ETHERNET PORT
RS232
19.2 kbps, Modbus® RTU
10Base-F:
1 or 2 rear ports:
Up to 115 kbps, Modbus® RTU, isolated
together at 36 Vpk
820 nm, multi-mode, supports halfduplex/full-duplex fiber optic with ST
connector
Redundant 10Base-F:
Typical distance:
1200 m
820 nm, multi-mode, half-duplex/fullduplex fiber optic with ST connector
Front port:
RS485
10Base-T:
RJ45 connector
Power budget:
10 db
Max optical Ip power:
–7.6 dBm
Typical distance:
1.65 km
SNTP clock synchronization error: <10 ms (typical)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-9
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2.9 INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS
SHIELDED TWISTED-PAIR INTERFACE OPTIONS
INTERFACE TYPE
TYPICAL DISTANCE
RS422
1200 m
G.703
100 m
2
NOTE
RS422 distance is based on transmitter power
and does not take into consideration the clock
source provided by the user.
TYPICAL LINK DISTANCE
EMITTER TYPE
FIBER TYPE CONNECTOR
TYPE
TYPICAL
DISTANCE
820 nm LED
Multimode
ST
1300 nm LED
Multimode
ST
3.8 km
1300 nm ELED
Singlemode
ST
11.4 km
1300 nm Laser
Singlemode
ST
64 km
1550 nm Laser
Singlemode
ST
105 km
1.65 km
LINK POWER BUDGET
Typical distances listed are based on the following assumptions for system loss. As
actual losses will vary from one installation to
another, the distance covered by your system
may vary.
EMITTER,
FIBER TYPE
TRANSMIT
POWER
RECEIVED
SENSITIVITY
POWER
BUDGET
820 nm LED,
Multimode
–20 dBm
–30 dBm
10 dB
1300 nm LED,
Multimode
–21 dBm
–30 dBm
9 dB
1300 nm ELED,
Singlemode
–21 dBm
–30 dBm
9 dB
CONNECTOR LOSSES (TOTAL OF BOTH ENDS)
1300 nm Laser,
Singlemode
–1 dBm
–30 dBm
29 dB
FIBER LOSSES
1550 nm Laser,
Singlemode
+5 dBm
–30 dBm
35 dB
NOTE
These Power Budgets are calculated from the
manufacturer’s worst-case transmitter power
and worst case receiver sensitivity.
MAXIMUM OPTICAL INPUT POWER
NOTE
ST connector
2 dB
820 nm multimode
3 dB/km
1300 nm multimode
1 dB/km
1300 nm singlemode
0.35 dB/km
1550 nm singlemode
0.25 dB/km
Splice losses:
One splice every 2 km,
at 0.05 dB loss per splice.
SYSTEM MARGIN
EMITTER, FIBER TYPE
MAX. OPTICAL
INPUT POWER
820 nm LED, Multimode
–7.6 dBm
1300 nm LED, Multimode
–11 dBm
1300 nm ELED, Singlemode
–14 dBm
1300 nm Laser, Singlemode
–14 dBm
1550 nm Laser, Singlemode
–14 dBm
3 dB additional loss added to calculations to compensate for
all other losses.
Compensated difference in transmitting and receiving (channel
asymmetry) channel delays using GPS satellite clock: 10 ms
2.2.10 ENVIRONMENTAL
OPERATING TEMPERATURES
OTHER
Cold:
IEC 60068-2-1, 16 h at –40°C
Dry Heat:
IEC 60068-2-2, 16 h at +85°C
Humidity (noncondensing): IEC 60068-2-30, 95%, Variant 1, 6
days
2-10
Altitude:
Up to 2000 m
Installation Category:
II
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2.2.11 TYPE TESTS
Electrical fast transient: ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60255-22-4
Oscillatory transient:
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1
IEC 61000-4-12
Insulation resistance:
IEC 60255-5
Dielectric strength:
IEC 60255-6
ANSI/IEEE C37.90
Conducted RFI:
IEC 61000-4-6
Voltage dips/interruptions/variations:
IEC 61000-4-11
IEC 60255-11
Power frequency magnetic field immunity:
IEC 61000-4-8
2
Vibration test (sinusoidal): IEC 60255-21-1
Shock and bump:
Electrostatic discharge: EN 61000-4-2
IEC 60255-21-2
Type test report available upon request.
Surge immunity:
EN 61000-4-5
RFI susceptibility:
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2
IEC 61000-4-3
IEC 60255-22-3
Ontario Hydro C-5047-77
NOTE
2.2.12 PRODUCTION TESTS
THERMAL
Products go through an environmental test based upon an
Accepted Quality Level (AQL) sampling process.
2.2.13 APPROVALS
APPROVALS
CE:
LVD 73/23/EEC:
EMC 81/336/EEC:
UL Listed for the USA and Canada
IEC 1010-1
EN 50081-2, EN 50082-2
2.2.14 MAINTENANCE
MOUNTING
CLEANING
Attach mounting brackets using 20 inch-pounds (±2 inch-pounds)
of torque.
Normally, cleaning is not required; but for situations where dust
has accumulated on the faceplate display, a dry cloth can be used.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
2-11
2.2 SPECIFICATIONS
2 PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
2
2-12
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE 3.1DESCRIPTION
3.1.1 PANEL CUTOUT
The relay is available as a 19-inch rack horizontal mount unit or as a reduced size (¾) vertical mount unit, with a removable
faceplate. The modular design allows the relay to be easily upgraded or repaired by a qualified service person. The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules, and is itself removable to allow mounting on doors with limited rear depth. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over the faceplate, which must be removed when attempting
to access the keypad or RS232 communications port.
The vertical and horizontal case dimensions are shown below, along with panel cutout details for panel mounting. When
planning the location of your panel cutout, ensure that provision is made for the faceplate to swing open without interference to or from adjacent equipment.
The relay must be mounted such that the faceplate sits semi-flush with the panel or switchgear door, allowing the operator
access to the keypad and the RS232 communications port. The relay is secured to the panel with the use of four screws
supplied with the relay.
e
UR SERIES
Figure 3–1: C60 VERTICAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-1
3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
3
Figure 3–2: C60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING INSTALLATION
3-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3
Figure 3–3: C60 VERTICAL SIDE MOUNTING REAR DIMENSIONS
Figure 3–4: C60 HORIZONTAL MOUNTING AND DIMENSIONS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-3
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3 HARDWARE
3.1.2 MODULE WITHDRAWAL AND INSERTION
WARNING
Module withdrawal and insertion may only be performed when control power has been removed from the
unit. Inserting an incorrect module type into a slot may result in personal injury, damage to the unit or connected equipment, or undesired operation!
Proper electrostatic discharge protection (i.e. a static strap) must be used when coming in contact with
modules while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay, being modular in design, allows for the withdrawal and insertion of modules. Modules must only be replaced with
like modules in their original factory configured slots.
3
The faceplate can be opened to the left, once the sliding latch on the right side has been pushed up, as shown below. This
allows for easy accessibility of the modules for withdrawal.
Figure 3–5: UR MODULE WITHDRAWAL/INSERTION
WITHDRAWAL: The ejector/inserter clips, located at the top and bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously to
release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay. Record
the original location of the module to ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted into the correct slot. Modules
with current input provide automatic shorting of external CT circuits.
INSERTION: Ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips
located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as the module is smoothly inserted
into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the clips simultaneously. When the clips
have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
NOTE
3-4
Type 9C and 9D CPU modules are equipped with 10Base-T and 10Base-F Ethernet connectors for communications. These connectors must be individually disconnected from the module before it can be removed from the
chassis.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.1 DESCRIPTION
3.1.3 REAR TERMINAL LAYOUT
3
834707A9.CDR
Figure 3–6: REAR TERMINAL VIEW
Do not touch any rear terminals while the relay is energized!
WARNING
The relay follows a convention with respect to terminal number assignments which are three characters long assigned in
order by module slot position, row number, and column letter. Two-slot wide modules take their slot designation from the
first slot position (nearest to CPU module) which is indicated by an arrow marker on the terminal block. See the following
figure for an example of rear terminal assignments.
Figure 3–7: EXAMPLE OF MODULES IN F & H SLOTS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-5
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2WIRING
3.2.1 TYPICAL WIRING
TYPICAL CONFIGURATION
THE AC SIGNAL PATH IS CONFIGURABLE
52
52
H 7a
H 7c
H 8a
H 8c
H 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
H 7a
H 7c
H 8a
H 8c
H7b
H 8b
SURGE
P 5a
P 5c
P 6a
P 6c
P 5b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
P 5a
P 5c
P 6a
P 6c
P5b
P 7a
P 7c
P 8a
P 8c
P 7b
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
P 7a
P 7c
P 8a
P 8c
P7b
P 8b
SURGE
Tx1
Rx110BaseF
Fibre
Optic
Tx2
Rx210BaseF
10BaseT
Co-axial
D3b
D4b
D5b
D5a
D6a
D7b
COM
No. 10AWG
Minimum
GROUND BUS
MODULES MUST BE
GROUNDED IF
TERMINAL IS
PROVIDED
CONTROL
POWER
SURGE
FILTER
M 4b
M 4c
IG
IG1
M 3c
M 4a
IG5
M 3a
M 3b
IC5
IC
M 2b
M 2c
IB
IB5
IB1
M 1c
M 2a
IA1
VX
M 1a
M 8a
VC
M 1b
M 7a
M 7c
VC
M 6a
M 6c
VA
VB
M 5a
M 5c
VA
VB
F 4b
IG5
F 4c
IC1
IG
F 3c
F 4a
IC
IG1
F 3a
F 3b
IC5
F 2b
F 2c
IB5
IB
F 1c
F 2a
IA1
IB1
F 1a
F 1b
IA
IC1
V
I
H2
V
I
H3
V
I
H4
V
6G
DIGITAL I/O
I
P1
V
I
P2
V
I
P3
V
I
P4
V
H 1a
H 1b
H 1c
H 2a
H 2b
H 2c
H 3a
H 3b
H 3c
H 4a
H 4b
H 4c
P 1a
P 1b
P 1c
P 2a
P 2b
P 2c
P 3a
P 3b
P 3c
P 4a
P 4b
P 4c
TC1
TC2
UR
NORMAL
1
2
3
4
SGND 5
6
7
8
9
GE Multilin
TXD
RXD
C60
BREAKER MANAGEMENT RELAY
9D
AC or DC
48 VDC
OUTPUT
I
H1
COMPUTER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
3 RXD
2 TXD
20
7 SGND
6
4
5
22
25 PIN
CONNECTOR
9 PIN
CONNECTOR
ALTERNATE COM
1
TEST ONLY
CONTACTS SHOWN
WITH NO
CONTROL POWER
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
SURGE GROUND
RS-232
DB-9
PERSONAL
COMPUTER
(front)
CPU
DC
CRITICAL
FAILURE
6G
DIGITAL I/O
POWER SUPPLY
B 1b
B 1a
B 2b
B 3a
B 3b
B5b HI
B 6b LO
B 6a
B 8a
B 8b
CURRENT INPUTS
8A / 8B
1
H 5a
H 5c
H 6a
H 6c
H5b
IA5
F 8a
F 8c
VX
VC
VX
F 7a
F 7c
VC
F 6a
F 6c
VB
VA
VB
F 5a
F 5c
VA
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
CONTACT IN
COMMON
VOLTAGE INPUTS
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE SUPV.
H 5a
H 5c
H 6a
H 6c
H 5b
8A / 8B
VOLT &
CURRENT SUPV.
( DC ONLY )
VOLTAGE INPUTS
IA
CONNECTION
AS REQUIRED
CONNECTION
AS REQUIRED
IA5
A
B
C
VX M 8c
3
834701BB.CDR
MODULE ARRANGEMENT
X W V
U T
S R
6
P N M L
I/O
8
K
CT/VT
J
6
H G
I/O
8
F
CT/VT
D
9
CPU
B
1
Power
Supply
(Rear View)
This diagram is based on the following order code: C60-A00-HCL-F8A-H6B-M6K-P5F.
CAUTION
The purpose of this diagram is to provide an example of how the relay is typically wired, not specifically how to wire your own relay. Please
refer to the following pages for examples to help you wire your relay correctly based on your own relay configuration and order code.
Figure 3–8: TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM
3-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.2 DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
The dielectric strength of UR module hardware is shown in the following table:
Table 3–1: DIELECTRIC STRENGTH OF UR MODULE HARDWARE
1
MODULE
TYPE
MODULE FUNCTION
1
TERMINALS
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH
(AC)
FROM
TO
Power Supply
High (+); Low (+); (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
1
Power Supply
48 V DC (+) and (–)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
1
Power Supply
Relay Terminals
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute 1
2
Reserved for Future
N/A
N/A
N/A
3
Reserved for Future
N/A
N/A
N/A
4
Reserved for Future
N/A
N/A
N/A
5
Analog I/O
All except 8b
Chassis
< 50 V DC
6
Digital I/O
All (See Precaution 2)
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
8
CT/VT
All
Chassis
2000 V AC for 1 minute
9
CPU
All except 7b
Chassis
< 50 VDC
3
See TEST PRECAUTION 1 below.
Filter networks and transient protection clamps are used in module hardware to prevent damage caused by high peak voltage transients, radio frequency interference (RFI) and electromagnetic interference (EMI). These protective components
can be damaged by application of the ANSI/IEEE C37.90 specified test voltage for a period longer than the specified one
minute. For testing of dielectric strength where the test interval may exceed one minute, always observe the following precautions:
1.
The connection from ground to the Filter Ground (Terminal 8b) and Surge Ground (Terminal 8a) must be removed
before testing.
2.
Some versions of the digital I/O module have a Surge Ground connection on Terminal 8b. On these module types, this
connection must be removed before testing.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-7
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.3 CONTROL POWER
CAUTION
NOTE
CONTROL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE RELAY MUST BE CONNECTED TO THE MATCHING POWER SUPPLY
RANGE OF THE RELAY. IF THE VOLTAGE IS APPLIED TO THE WRONG TERMINALS, DAMAGE MAY
OCCUR!
The C60 relay, like almost all electronic relays, contains electrolytic capacitors. These capacitors are well
known to be subject to deterioration over time if voltage is not applied periodically. Deterioration can be
avoided by powering the relays up once a year.
The power supply module can be ordered with either of two possible voltage ranges. Each range has a dedicated input
connection for proper operation. The ranges are as shown below (see the Technical Specifications section for details):
3
•
LO range: 24 to 48 V (DC only) nominal
•
HI range: 125 to 250 V nominal
The power supply module provides power to the relay and supplies power for dry contact input connections.
The power supply module provides 48 V DC power for dry contact input connections and a critical failure relay (see the
Typical Wiring Diagram earlier). The critical failure relay is a Form-C that will be energized once control power is applied
and the relay has successfully booted up with no critical self-test failures. If on-going self-test diagnostic checks detect a
critical failure (see the Self-Test Errors Table in Chapter 7) or control power is lost, the relay will de-energize.
Figure 3–9: CONTROL POWER CONNECTION
3.2.4 CT/VT MODULES
A CT/VT module may have voltage inputs on Channels 1 through 4 inclusive, or Channels 5 through 8 inclusive. Channels
1 and 5 are intended for connection to Phase A, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 2 and 6 are intended for
connection to Phase B, and are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 3 and 7 are intended for connection to Phase C and
are labeled as such in the relay. Channels 4 and 8 are intended for connection to a single phase source. If voltage, this
channel is labelled the auxiliary voltage (VX). If current, this channel is intended for connection to a CT between a system
neutral and ground, and is labelled the ground current (IG).
a) CT INPUTS
CAUTION
3-8
VERIFY THAT THE CONNECTION MADE TO THE RELAY NOMINAL CURRENT OF 1 A OR 5 A MATCHES
THE SECONDARY RATING OF THE CONNECTED CTs. UNMATCHED CTs MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT
DAMAGE OR INADEQUATE PROTECTION.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
The CT/VT module may be ordered with a standard ground current input that is the same as the phase current inputs (Type
8A) or with a sensitive ground input (Type 8B) which is 10 times more sensitive (see the Technical Specifications section for
more details). Each AC current input has an isolating transformer and an automatic shorting mechanism that shorts the
input when the module is withdrawn from the chassis. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current transformers with 1 to 50000 A primaries and 1 A or 5 A secondaries may be used.
CT connections for both ABC and ACB phase rotations are identical as shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram.
The exact placement of a Zero Sequence CT so that ground fault current will be detected is shown below. Twisted pair
cabling on the zero sequence CT is recommended.
3
Figure 3–10: ZERO-SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE CT INSTALLATION
b) VT INPUTS
~ 4b
~ 4c
~ 3c
IG1
~ 3b
IC1
~ 4a
~ 3a
IC
IG
~ 2c
IC5
IG5
~ 2b
IB1
~ 2a
~ 1a
VOLTAGE INPUTS
IB
~ 8c
IA5
~ 1c
~ 8a
VX
IB5
~ 7c
VX
~ 1b
~ 7a
VC
IA1
~ 6c
VC
IA
~ 6a
VB
~ 5c
VA
VB
~ 5a
VA
The phase voltage channels are used for most metering and protection purposes. The auxiliary voltage channel is used as
input for the Synchrocheck and Volts/Hertz features.
CURRENT INPUTS
8A / 8B
~ 7a
~ 7b
~ 7c
~ 8a
IC5
IC
IC1
IG5
~ 8c
~ 6c
IB1
~ 8b
~ 6b
IB
IG
~ 6a
IB5
IG1
~ 5c
~ 4a
IG5
IA1
~ 3c
IC1
~ 5b
~ 3b
IC
IA
~ 3a
IC5
~ 5a
~ 2c
IB1
IA5
~ 2b
IB
~ 4c
~ 2a
IB5
IG1
~ 1c
IA1
~ 4b
~ 1b
IA
IG
~ 1a
IA5
827831A9-X5.CDR
CURRENT INPUTS
8C / 8D
827831A9-X3.CDR
Figure 3–11: CT/VT MODULE WIRING
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-9
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.5 CONTACT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Every digital input/output module has 24 terminal connections. They are arranged as 3 terminals per row, with 8 rows in
total. A given row of three terminals may be used for the outputs of one relay. For example, for Form-C relay outputs, the
terminals connect to the normally open (NO), normally closed (NC), and common contacts of the relay. For a Form-A output, there are options of using current or voltage detection for feature supervision, depending on the module ordered. The
terminal configuration for contact inputs is different for the two applications. When a digital input/output module is ordered
with contact inputs, they are arranged in groups of four and use two rows of three terminals. Ideally, each input would be
totally isolated from any other input. However, this would require that every input have two dedicated terminals and limit the
available number of contacts based on the available number of terminals. So, although each input is individually optically
isolated, each group of four inputs uses a single common as a reasonable compromise. This allows each group of four outputs to be supplied by wet contacts from different voltage sources (if required) or a mix of wet and dry contacts.
3
The tables and diagrams on the following pages illustrate the module types (6A, etc.) and contact arrangements that may
be ordered for the relay. Since an entire row is used for a single contact output, the name is assigned using the module slot
position and row number. However, since there are two contact inputs per row, these names are assigned by module slot
position, row number, and column position.
UR-SERIES FORM-A / SOLID STATE (SSR) OUTPUT CONTACTS:
Some Form-A/SSR outputs include circuits to monitor the DC voltage across the output contact when it is open, and the DC
current through the output contact when it is closed. Each of the monitors contains a level detector whose output is set to
logic “On = 1” when the current in the circuit is above the threshold setting. The voltage monitor is set to “On = 1” when the
current is above about 1 to 2.5 mA, and the current monitor is set to “On = 1” when the current exceeds about 80 to 100
mA. The voltage monitor is intended to check the health of the overall trip circuit, and the current monitor can be used to
seal-in the output contact until an external contact has interrupted current flow. The block diagrams of the circuits are below
above for the Form-A outputs with:
a) optional voltage monitor
b) optional current monitor
c) with no monitoring
~#a
~#a
I
I
~#b
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
V
~#b
~#c
+
Voltage monitoring only
~#a
V
V
~#b
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
Load
~#c
b) Current with optional
voltage monitoring
Load
+
Both voltage and current monitoring
~#a
I
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
V
Load
~#c
a) Voltage with optional
current monitoring
-
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
+
Current monitoring only
I
~#b
If Idc ~ 80mA, Cont Op x Ion
otherwise Cont Op x Ioff
If Idc ~ 1mA, Cont Op x Von
otherwise Cont Op x Voff
~#c
Load
+
Both voltage and current monitoring
(external jumper a-b is required)
827821A5.CDR
~#a
~#b
Load
c) No monitoring
~#c
+
Figure 3–12: FORM-A /SOLID STATE CONTACT FUNCTIONS
3-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
The operation of voltage and current monitors is reflected with the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (Cont Op # Von, Cont
Op # Voff, Cont Op # Ion, and Cont Op # Ioff) which can be used in protection, control and alarm logic. The typical application of
the voltage monitor is breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring; a typical application of the current monitor is seal-in of the
control command. Refer to the Digital Elements section of Chapter 5 for an example of how Form-A/SSR contacts can be
applied for breaker trip circuit integrity monitoring.
WARNING
Relay contacts must be considered unsafe to touch when the unit is energized! If the relay contacts need to
be used for low voltage accessible applications, it is the customer’s responsibility to ensure proper insulation levels!
USE OF FORM-A/SSR OUTPUTS IN HIGH IMPEDANCE CIRCUITS
NOTE
For Form-A/SSR output contacts internally equipped with a voltage measuring cIrcuit across the contact, the circuit
has an impedance that can cause a problem when used in conjunction with external high input impedance monitoring equipment such as modern relay test set trigger circuits. These monitoring circuits may continue to read the
Form-A contact as being closed after it has closed and subsequently opened, when measured as an impedance.
The solution to this problem is to use the voltage measuring trigger input of the relay test set, and connect the
Form-A contact through a voltage-dropping resistor to a DC voltage source. If the 48 V DC output of the power supply is used as a source, a 500 Ω, 10 W resistor is appropriate. In this configuration, the voltage across either the
Form-A contact or the resistor can be used to monitor the state of the output.
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module; wherever a number
sign "#" appears, substitute the contact number
NOTE
NOTE
When current monitoring is used to seal-in the Form-A/SSR contact outputs, the FlexLogic™ operand driving the contact output should be given a reset delay of 10 ms to prevent damage of the output contact (in
situations when the element initiating the contact output is bouncing, at values in the region of the pickup
value).
Table 3–2: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE ASSIGNMENTS
~6A I/O MODULE
~6B I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6C I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6D I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-C
~1a, ~1c
2 Inputs
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2a, ~2c
2 Inputs
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3a, ~3c
2 Inputs
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4a, ~4c
2 Inputs
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6E I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~6F I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~6G I/O MODULE
~6H I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Fast Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Fast Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Fast Form-C
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Fast Form-C
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-11
3
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
~6K I/O MODULE
~6L I/O MODULE
~6M I/O MODULE
~6N I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-C
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-C
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Fast Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Fast Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7
Fast Form-C
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8
Fast Form-C
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
3
~6P I/O MODULE
~6R I/O MODULE
~6S I/O MODULE
~6T I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-C
~3
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-C
~4
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~5
Form-C
~5a, ~5c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-A
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~6
Form-C
~6a, ~6c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~6U I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
OUTPUT OR
ASSIGNMENT
INPUT
~67 I/O MODULE
~4A I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
~4B I/O MODULE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Form-A
~1
Form-A
~1
Not Used
~1
Not Used
~2
Form-A
~2
Form-A
~2
Solid-State
~2
Solid-State
~3
Form-A
~3
Form-A
~3
Not Used
~3
Not Used
~4
Form-A
~4
Form-A
~4
Solid-State
~4
Solid-State
~5
Form-A
~5
Form-A
~5
Not Used
~5
Not Used
~6
Form-A
~6
Form-A
~6
Solid-State
~6
Solid-State
~7a, ~7c
2 Inputs
~7
Form-A
~7
Not Used
~7
Not Used
~8a, ~8c
2 Inputs
~8
Form-A
~8
Solid-State
~8
Solid-State
~4C I/O MODULE
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
3-12
~4L I/O MODULE
OUTPUT
TERMINAL
ASSIGNMENT
OUTPUT
~1
Not Used
~1
2 Outputs
~2
Solid-State
~2
2 Outputs
~3
Not Used
~3
2 Outputs
~4
Solid-State
~4
2 Outputs
~5
Not Used
~5
2 Outputs
~6
Solid-State
~6
2 Outputs
~7
Not Used
~7
2 Outputs
~8
Solid-State
~8
Not Used
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3
827719CY-X1.dwg
Figure 3–13: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (1 of 2)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-13
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3
– MOSFET Solid State Contact
827719CY-X2.dwg
Figure 3–14: DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT MODULE WIRING (2 of 2)
CORRECT POLARITY MUST BE OBSERVED FOR ALL CONTACT INPUT AND SOLID STATE OUTPUT CONNECTIONS FOR PROPER FUNCTIONALITY.
CAUTION
3-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
A dry contact has one side connected to Terminal B3b. This is the positive 48 V DC voltage rail supplied by the power supply module. The other side of the dry contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. Each contact input group
has its own common (negative) terminal which must be connected to the DC negative terminal (B3a) of the power supply
module. When a dry contact closes, a current of 1 to 3 mA will flow through the associated circuit.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power supply. The other side of this contact
is connected to the required contact input terminal. If a wet contact is used, then the negative side of the external source
must be connected to the relay common (negative) terminal of each contact group. The maximum external source voltage
for this arrangement is 300 V DC.
The voltage threshold at which each group of four contact inputs will detect a closed contact input is programmable as
17 V DC for 24 V sources, 33 V DC for 48 V sources, 84 V DC for 110 to 125 V sources, and 166 V DC for 250 V sources.
DIGITAL I/O
~ 7a + CONTACT IN
~ 7c + CONTACT IN
~ 8a + CONTACT IN
~ 8c + CONTACT IN
~ 7b COMMON
SURGE
B 1b
CRITICAL
B 1a
FAILURE
B 2b
B 3a 48 VDC
OUTPUT
B 3b +
B 5b HI+
CONTROL
B 6b LO+
POWER
B 6a B 8a
SURGE
B 8b
FILTER
(Wet)
24-250V
DIGITAL I/O
6B
~ 7a + CONTACT IN ~ 7a
~ 7c + CONTACT IN ~ 7c
~ 8a + CONTACT IN ~ 8a
~ 8c + CONTACT IN ~ 8c
~ 7b COMMON ~ 7b
~ 8b
3
SURGE
1
~ 8b
6B
~ 7a
~ 7c
~ 8a
~ 8c
~ 7b
POWER SUPPLY
(Dry)
827741A4.CDR
Figure 3–15: DRY AND WET CONTACT INPUT CONNECTIONS
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
Contact outputs may be ordered as Form-A or Form-C. The Form A contacts may be connected for external circuit supervision. These contacts are provided with voltage and current monitoring circuits used to detect the loss of DC voltage in the
circuit, and the presence of DC current flowing through the contacts when the Form-A contact closes. If enabled, the current monitoring can be used as a seal-in signal to ensure that the Form-A contact does not attempt to break the energized
inductive coil circuit and weld the output contacts.
There is no provision in the relay to detect a DC ground fault on 48 V DC control power external output. We
recommend using an external DC supply.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-15
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
3.2.6 TRANSDUCER INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Transducer input/output modules can receive input signals from external dcmA output transducers (dcmA In) or resistance
temperature detectors (RTD). Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from these external transducers and
convert these signals into a digital format for use as required.
Every transducer input/output module has a total of 24 terminal connections. These connections are arranged as three terminals per row with a total of eight rows. A given row may be used for either inputs or outputs, with terminals in column "a"
having positive polarity and terminals in column "c" having negative polarity. Since an entire row is used for a single input/
output channel, the name of the channel is assigned using the module slot position and row number.
Each module also requires that a connection from an external ground bus be made to Terminal 8b. The figure below illustrates the transducer module types (5C, 5E, and 5F) and channel arrangements that may be ordered for the relay.
3
Wherever a tilde “~” symbol appears, substitute with the Slot Position of the module.
NOTE
827831A9-X1.CDR
Figure 3–16: TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING
3-16
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
3.2.7 RS232 FACEPLATE PORT
A 9-pin RS232C serial port is located on the relay’s faceplate for programming with a portable (personal) computer. All that
is required to use this interface is a personal computer running the EnerVista UR Setup software provided with the relay.
Cabling for the RS232 port is shown in the following figure for both 9 pin and 25 pin connectors.
Note that the baud rate for this port is fixed at 19200 bps.
3
Figure 3–17: RS232 FACEPLATE PORT CONNECTION
3.2.8 CPU COMMUNICATION PORTS
a) OPTIONS
RS485
9C
10Base-F and 10Base-T
RS485
9D
Redundant 10Base-F
RS485
COM
COM
Tx
9A
RS485
COM 1
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
SURGE
CPU
D2a
D3a
D4a
D3b
D4b
D5b
D5a
D6a
D7b
Rx 10BaseF
NORMAL
10BaseT
NORMAL
D3b
D4b
D5b
D5a
D6a
D7b
COM
COM
1
Tx2
Rx210BaseF
10BaseT
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
SURGE
Tx1
Rx110BaseF
D3b
D4b
D5b
D5a
D6a
D7b
COM
NORMAL
9D
COM2
RS485
ALTERNATE COM
1
NORMAL
RS485
COM 2
IRIG-B
SURGE GROUND
CPU
COM1
9A
CPU
CPU TYPE
9C
In addition to the RS232 port on the faceplate, the relay provides the user with two additional communication port(s)
depending on the CPU module installed.
827831A9-X6.CDR
Figure 3–18: CPU MODULE COMMUNICATIONS WIRING
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-17
3.2 WIRING
3 HARDWARE
b) RS485 PORTS
RS485 data transmission and reception are accomplished over a single twisted pair with transmit and receive data alternating over the same two wires. Through the use of these port(s), continuous monitoring and control from a remote computer,
SCADA system or PLC is possible.
To minimize errors from noise, the use of shielded twisted pair wire is recommended. Correct polarity must also be
observed. For instance, the relays must be connected with all RS485 “+” terminals connected together, and all RS485 “–”
terminals connected together. The COM terminal should be connected to the common wire inside the shield, when provided. To avoid loop currents, the shield should be grounded at one point only. Each relay should also be daisy chained to
the next one in the link. A maximum of 32 relays can be connected in this manner without exceeding driver capability. For
larger systems, additional serial channels must be added. It is also possible to use commercially available repeaters to
increase the number of relays on a single channel to more than 32. Star or stub connections should be avoided entirely.
3
Lightning strikes and ground surge currents can cause large momentary voltage differences between remote ends of the
communication link. For this reason, surge protection devices are internally provided at both communication ports. An isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface also acts to reduce noise coupling. To ensure maximum reliability, all
equipment should have similar transient protection devices installed.
Both ends of the RS485 circuit should also be terminated with an impedance as shown below.
ZT (*)
SHIELD
RELAY
TWISTED
PAIR
D2a
DATA
RS485 +
RS485 PORT
D3a
DATA
RS485 36V
COM
D7b
SURGE
D4a
COMP 485COM
Required
CHASSIS GROUND
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
GROUND SHIELD AT
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER
ONLY
OR AT UR RELAY
ONLY
RELAY
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT
EACH END (TYPICALLY 120 Ohms and 1 nF)
D2a
RS485 +
D3a
485 -
D7b
SURGE
D4a
COMP 485COM
UP TO 32 DEVICES,
MAXIMUM 4000 FEET
RELAY
ZT (*)
D2a
485 +
D3a
485 -
D7b
SURGE
D4a
COMP 485COM
LAST DEVICE
827757A5.DWG
Figure 3–19: RS485 SERIAL CONNECTION
3-18
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.2 WIRING
c) 10BASE-F FIBER OPTIC PORT
ENSURE THE DUST COVERS ARE INSTALLED WHEN THE FIBER IS NOT IN USE. DIRTY OR SCRATCHED
CONNECTORS CAN LEAD TO HIGH LOSSES ON A FIBER LINK.
CAUTION
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
The fiber optic communication ports allow for fast and efficient communications between relays at 10 Mbps. Optical fiber
may be connected to the relay supporting a wavelength of 820 nanometers in multimode. Optical fiber is only available for
CPU types 9C and 9D. The 9D CPU has a 10BaseF transmitter and receiver for optical fiber communications and a second
pair of identical optical fiber transmitter and receiver for redundancy.
The optical fiber sizes supported include 50/125 µm, 62.5/125 µm and 100/140 µm. The fiber optic port is designed such
that the response times will not vary for any core that is 100 µm or less in diameter. For optical power budgeting, splices are
required every 1 km for the transmitter/receiver pair (the ST type connector contributes for a connector loss of 0.2 dB).
When splicing optical fibers, the diameter and numerical aperture of each fiber must be the same. In order to engage or disengage the ST type connector, only a quarter turn of the coupling is required.
3.2.9 IRIG-B
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM
GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
RELAY
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
+
D5a IRIG-B(+)
-
D6a IRIG-B(-)
RECEIVER
827756A4.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
Figure 3–20: IRIG-B CONNECTION
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows stamping of events to be synchronized among connected devices within
1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shifted or amplitude modulated (AM). Third party equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic locations can also be synchronized.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-19
3
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
3.3DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.1 DESCRIPTION
The C60 direct inputs/outputs feature makes use of the Type 7 series of communications modules. These modules are also
used by the L90 Line Differential Relay for inter-relay communications. The Direct I/O feature uses the communications
channel(s) provided by these modules to exchange digital state information between relays. This feature is available on all
UR-series relay models except for the L90 Line Differential relay.
The communications channels are normally connected in a ring configuration as shown below. The transmitter of one module is connected to the receiver of the next module. The transmitter of this second module is then connected to the receiver
of the next module in the ring. This is continued to form a communications ring. The figure below illustrates a ring of four
UR-series relays with the following connections: UR1-Tx to UR2-Rx, UR2-Tx to UR3-Rx, UR3-Tx to UR4-Rx, and UR4-Tx
to UR1-Rx. A maximum of sixteen (16) UR-series relays can be connected in a single ring
3
UR #1
UR #2
UR #3
UR #4
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
Tx
Rx
842006A1.CDR
Figure 3–21: DIRECT I/O SINGLE CHANNEL CONNECTION
The following diagram shows the interconnection for dual-channel Type 7 communications modules. Two channel modules
allow for a redundant ring configuration. That is, two rings can be created to provide an additional independent data path.
The required connections are as follows: UR1-Tx1 to UR2-Rx1, UR2-Tx1 to UR3-Rx1, UR3-Tx1 to UR4-Rx1, and UR4-Tx1
to UR1-Rx1 for the first ring; and UR1-Tx2 to UR2-Rx2, UR2-Tx2 to UR3-Rx2, UR3-Tx2 to UR4-Rx2, and UR4-Tx2 to UR1Rx2 for the second ring.
Tx1
UR #1
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #3
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
Tx1
UR #4
Rx1
Tx2
Rx2
842007A1.CDR
Figure 3–22: DIRECT I/O DUAL CHANNEL CONNECTION
3-20
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
The following diagram shows the interconnection for three UR-series relays using two independent communication channels. UR1 and UR3 have single Type 7 communication modules; UR2 has a dual-channel module. The two communication
channels can be of different types, depending on the Type 7 modules used. To allow the Direct I/O data to ‘cross-over’ from
Channel 1 to Channel 2 on UR2, the DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting should be “Enabled” on UR2. This forces UR2
to forward messages received on Rx1 out Tx2, and messages received on Rx2 out Tx1.
UR #1
Tx
Rx
Channel #1
Tx1
UR #2
Rx1
3
Tx2
Rx2
Channel #2
UR #3
Tx
Rx
842013A1.CDR
Figure 3–23: DIRECT I/O SINGLE/DUAL CHANNEL COMBINATION CONNECTION
The interconnection requirements are described in further detail in this section for each specific variation of Type 7 communications module. These modules are listed in the following table. All fiber modules use ST type connectors.
Table 3–3: CHANNEL COMMUNICATION OPTIONS
MODULE
TYPE
7A
SPECIFICATION
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7B
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
7C
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 1 Channel
7D
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
7H
820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7I
1300 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
7J
1300 nm, single-mode, ELED, 2 Channels
7K
1300 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channels
7L
Channel 1: RS422, Channel: 820 nm, multi-mode, LED
7M
Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, multi-mode, LED
7N
Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, ELED
7P
Channel 1: RS422, Channel 2: 1300 nm, single-mode, LASER
7R
G.703, 1 Channel
7S
G.703, 2 Channels
7T
RS422, 1 Channel
7W
RS422, 2 Channels
72
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 1 Channel
73
1550 nm, single-mode, LASER, 2 Channel
74
Channel 1 - RS422; Channel 2 - 1550 nm, single-mode, LASER
76
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 1 Channel
77
IEEE C37.94, 820 nm, multi-mode, LED, 2 Channels
OBSERVING ANY FIBER TRANSMITTER OUTPUT MAY CAUSE INJURY TO THE EYE.
CAUTION
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-21
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
3.3.2 FIBER: LED AND ELED TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7H, 7I, and 7J fiber-only modules.
Module:
Connection Location:
7A / 7B / 7C
7H / 7I / 7J
Slot X
Slot X
RX1
RX1
TX1
TX1
3
RX2
TX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831719A2.CDR
Figure 3–24: LED AND ELED FIBER MODULES
3.3.3 FIBER-LASER TRANSMITTERS
The following figure shows the configuration for the 72, 73, 7D, and 7K fiber-laser module.
Module:
72/ 7D
73/ 7K
Connection Location:
Slot X
Slot X
TX1
TX1
RX1
RX1
TX2
RX2
1 Channel
2 Channels
831720A3.CDR
Figure 3–25: LASER FIBER MODULES
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
3-22
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.4 G.703 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the 64K ITU G.703 co-directional interface configuration.
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections, with the shield grounded only at one end. Connecting the shield to Pin X1a or X6a grounds the shield since these pins are internally connected to ground. Thus, if
Pin X1a or X6a is used, do not ground at the other end. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices.
Tx Rx Tx +
7R
Shld.
G.703
CHANNEL 1
3
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx +
SURGE
L90 COMM.
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
Figure 3–26: G.703 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two G.703 interfaces. For the actual physical arrangement of these pins, see the Rear Terminal Assignments section earlier in this chapter. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
L90 COMM.
Shld.
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
X 6a
X 6b
X 7a
X 7b
X 8a
X 8b
Shld.
Tx Rx -
7R
Tx -
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Tx +
Rx +
SURGE
Shld.
Tx Rx Tx +
G.703
CHANNEL 2
Rx +
SURGE
L90 COMM.
7R
Shld.
Figure 3–27: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO G.703 INTERFACES
NOTE
Pin nomenclature may differ from one manufacturer to another. Therefore, it is not uncommon to see pinouts numbered TxA, TxB, RxA and RxB. In such cases, it can be assumed that “A” is equivalent to “+” and
“B” is equivalent to “–”.
b) G.703 SELECTION SWITCH PROCEDURES
1.
Remove the G.703 module (7R or 7S):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes.
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6.
Re-insert the G.703 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position.
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position as
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-23
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage the
clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
3
Figure 3–28: G.703 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
Table 3–4: G.703 TIMING SELECTIONS
SWITCHES
FUNCTION
S1
OFF → Octet Timing Disabled
ON → Octet Timing 8 kHz
S5 and S6
S5 = OFF and S6 = OFF → Loop Timing Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = OFF → Internal Timing Mode
S5 = OFF and S6 = ON → Minimum Remote Loopback Mode
S5 = ON and S6 = ON → Dual Loopback Mode
c) OCTET TIMING (SWITCH S1)
If Octet Timing is enabled (ON), this 8 kHz signal will be asserted during the violation of Bit 8 (LSB) necessary for connecting to higher order systems. When C60s are connected back to back, Octet Timing should be disabled (OFF).
d) TIMING MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)
•
Internal Timing Mode: The system clock generated internally. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection should be in the
Internal Timing Mode for back-to-back (UR-to-UR) connections. For Back to Back Connections, set for Octet Timing
(S1 = OFF) and Timing Mode = Internal Timing (S5 = ON and S6 = OFF).
•
Loop Timing Mode: The system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the G.703 timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems. For connection to a higher order system (URto-multiplexer, factory defaults), set to Octet Timing (S1 = ON) and set Timing Mode = Loop Timing (S5 = OFF and S6
= OFF).
3-24
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
e) TEST MODES (SWITCHES S5 AND S6)
MINIMUM REMOTE LOOPBACK MODE:
In Minimum Remote Loopback mode, the multiplexer is enabled to return the data from the external interface without any
processing to assist in diagnosing G.703 Line Side problems irrespective of clock rate. Data enters from the G.703 inputs,
passes through the data stabilization latch which also restores the proper signal polarity, passes through the multiplexer
and then returns to the transmitter. The Differential Received Data is processed and passed to the G.703 Transmitter module after which point the data is discarded. The G.703 Receiver module is fully functional and continues to process data and
passes it to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module. Since timing is returned as it is received, the timing source is
expected to be from the G.703 line side of the interface.
DMR
DMX
G7X
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
3
G7R
DUAL LOOPBACK MODE:
In Dual Loopback Mode, the multiplexers are active and the functions of the circuit are divided into two with each Receiver/
Transmitter pair linked together to deconstruct and then reconstruct their respective signals. Differential Manchester data
enters the Differential Manchester Receiver module and then is returned to the Differential Manchester Transmitter module.
Likewise, G.703 data enters the G.703 Receiver module and is passed through to the G.703 Transmitter module to be
returned as G.703 data. Because of the complete split in the communications path and because, in each case, the clocks
are extracted and reconstructed with the outgoing data, in this mode there must be two independent sources of timing. One
source lies on the G.703 line side of the interface while the other lies on the Differential Manchester side of the interface.
GE Multilin
DMR
G7X
DMX
G7R
DMR = Differential Manchester Receiver
DMX = Differential Manchester Transmitter
G7X = G.703 Transmitter
G7R = G.703 Receiver
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-25
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
3.3.5 RS422 INTERFACE
a) DESCRIPTION
The following figure shows the RS422 2-Terminal interface configuration at 64K baud. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external connections. This interface module is protected by surge suppression devices which optically isolated.
SHIELD TERMINATION
The shield pins (6a and 7b) are internally connected to the ground pin (8a). Proper shield termination is as follows:
Site 1: Terminate shield to pins 6a and/or 7b; Site 2: Terminate shield to ‘COM’ pin 2b.
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
W 5b
W 5a
W 4a
W 6b
W 7b
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
3
Tx Rx -
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Tx +
Rx +
W7W
The clock terminating impedance should match the impedance of the line.
Shld.
Tx Rx -
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Tx +
Rx +
Shld.
+
CLOCK
com
SURGE
RS422.CDR
p/o 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–29: RS422 INTERFACE CONFIGURATION
The following figure shows the typical pin interconnection between two RS422 interfaces. All pin interconnections are to be
maintained for a connection to a multiplexer.
Rx Tx +
Rx +
Shld.
CLOCK
+
com
SURGE
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
+
Tx Rx Tx +
Rx +
7T
7T
Tx -
RS422
CHANNEL 1
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Shld.
+
-
CLOCK
com
SURGE
64 KHz
831728A3.CDR
Figure 3–30: TYPICAL PIN INTERCONNECTION BETWEEN TWO RS422 INTERFACES
b) TWO CHANNEL APPLICATIONS VIA MULTIPLEXERS
The RS422 Interface may be used for ‘1 channel’ or ‘2 channel’ applications over SONET/SDH and/or Multiplexed systems.
When used in 1 channel applications, the RS422 interface links to higher order systems in a typical fashion observing Tx,
Rx, and Send Timing connections. However, when used in 2 channel applications, certain criteria have to be followed due
to the fact that there is 1 clock input for the two RS422 channels. The system will function correctly if the following connections are observed and your Data Module has a feature called Terminal Timing. Terminal Timing is a common feature to
most Synchronous Data Units that allows the module to accept timing from an external source. Using the Terminal Timing
feature, 2 channel applications can be achieved if these connections are followed: The Send Timing outputs from the Multiplexer - Data Module 1, will connect to the Clock inputs of the UR–RS422 interface in the usual fashion. In addition, the
Send Timing outputs of Data Module 1 will also be paralleled to the Terminal Timing inputs of Data Module 2. By using this
configuration the timing for both Data Modules and both UR–RS422 channels will be derived from a single clock source. As
a result, data sampling for both of the UR–RS422 channels will be synchronized via the Send Timing leads on Data Module
1 as shown in the following figure. If the Terminal Timing feature is not available or this type of connection is not desired, the
G.703 interface is a viable option that does not impose timing restrictions.
3-26
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
Data Module 1
Signal Name
7W
Pin No.
Tx1(+)
Tx1(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 1
Rx1(+)
Rx1(-)
Shld.
+
CLOCK
Tx2(+)
L90 COMM.
Tx2(-)
RS422
CHANNEL 2
Rx2(+)
Rx2(-)
Shld.
com
SURGE
SD(A) - Send Data
W 2a
W 3b
W 4b
W 3a
W 6a
W 7a
W 8b
W 4a
W 5b
W 6b
W 5a
W 7b
W 2b
W 8a
SD(B) - Send Data
RD(A) - Received Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
RT(A) - Receive Timing
RT(B) - Receive Timing
CS(A) - Clear To Send
CS(B) - Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Signal Ground
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
3
Data Module 2
Signal Name
Pin No.
TT(A) - Terminal Timing
TT(B) - Terminal Timing
SD(A) - Sand Data
SD(B) - Sand Data
RD(A) - Received Data
RD(B) - Received Data
RS(A) - Request to Send (RTS)
RS(B) - Request to Send (RTS)
CS(A) - Clear To Send
CS(B) - Clear To Send
Local Loopback
Remote Loopback
Signal Ground
ST(A) - Send Timing
ST(B) - Send Timing
831022A2.CDR
Figure 3–31: TIMING CONFIGURATION FOR RS422 TWO-CHANNEL, 3-TERMINAL APPLICATION
Data Module 1 provides timing to the C60 RS422 interface via the ST(A) and ST(B) outputs. Data Module 1 also provides
timing to Data Module 2 TT(A) and TT(B) inputs via the ST(A) and AT(B) outputs. The Data Module pin numbers have been
omitted in the figure above since they may vary depending on the manufacturer.
c) TRANSIT TIMING
The RS422 Interface accepts one clock input for Transmit Timing. It is important that the rising edge of the 64 kHz Transmit
Timing clock of the Multiplexer Interface is sampling the data in the center of the Transmit Data window. Therefore, it is
important to confirm Clock and Data Transitions to ensure Proper System Operation. For example, the following figure
shows the positive edge of the Tx Clock in the center of the Tx Data bit.
Tx Clock
Tx Data
Figure 3–32: CLOCK AND DATA TRANSITIONS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-27
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
d) RECEIVE TIMING
The RS422 Interface utilizes NRZI-MARK Modulation Code and; therefore, does not rely on an Rx Clock to recapture data.
NRZI-MARK is an edge-type, invertible, self-clocking code.
To recover the Rx Clock from the data-stream, an integrated DPLL (Digital Phase Lock Loop) circuit is utilized. The DPLL is
driven by an internal clock, which is over-sampled 16X, and uses this clock along with the data-stream to generate a data
clock that can be used as the SCC (Serial Communication Controller) receive clock.
3.3.6 RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The following figure shows the combined RS422 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, and 74
modules are used in 2-terminal with a redundant channel or 3-terminal configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the
RS422 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and Channel 2 via direct fiber.
AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external RS422 connections and the shield should be grounded only at
one end. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly.
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
W 3b
W 3a
W 2a
W 4b
W 6a
Tx1 Rx1 Tx1 +
Rx1 +
Shld.
Tx2
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Rx2
W 7a
W 8b
W 2b
W 8a
RS422
CHANNEL 1
+
-
W7L, M, N, P and 74
WARNING
CLOCK
(CHANNEL1)
com
SURGE
L907LMNP.CDR
P/O 827831A6.CDR
Figure 3–33: RS422 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
Connections shown above are for multiplexers configured as DCE (Data Communications Equipment) units.
3.3.7 G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE
The figure below shows the combined G.703 plus Fiber interface configuration at 64K baud. The 7E, 7F, 7G, 7Q, and 75
modules are used in configurations where Channel 1 is employed via the G.703 interface (possibly with a multiplexer) and
Channel 2 via direct fiber. AWG 22 twisted shielded pair is recommended for external G.703 connections connecting the
shield to Pin 1A at one end only. For the direct fiber channel, power budget issues should be addressed properly. See previous sections for more details on the G.703 and Fiber interfaces.
When using a LASER Interface, attenuators may be necessary to ensure that you do not exceed Maximum
Optical Input Power to the receiver.
WARNING
X 1a
X 1b
X 2a
X 2b
X 3a
X 3b
Shld.
Tx Rx -
G.703
CHANNEL 1
Tx +
Rx +
Tx2
Rx2
SURGE
W7E, F, G and Q
3
FIBER
CHANNEL 2
Figure 3–34: G.703 AND FIBER INTERFACE CONNECTION
3-28
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
3 HARDWARE
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3.3.8 IEEE C37.94 INTERFACE
The UR-series IEEE C37.94 communication modules (76 and 77) are designed to interface with IEEE C37.94 compliant
digital multiplexers and/or an IEEE C37.94 compliant interface converter for use with direct input/output applications for
firmware revisions 3.30 and higher. The IEEE C37.94 standard defines a point-to-point optical link for synchronous data
between a multiplexer and a teleprotection device. This data is typically 64 kbps, but the standard provides for speeds up to
64n kbps, where n = 1, 2,…, 12. The UR-series C37.94 communication module is 64 kbps only with n fixed at 1. The frame
is a valid International Telecommunications Union (ITU-T) recommended G.704 pattern from the standpoint of framing and
data rate. The frame is 256 bits and is repeated at a frame rate of 8000 Hz, with a resultant bit rate of 2048 kbps.
The specifications for the module are as follows:
IEEE standard: C37.94 for 1 × 64 kbps optical fiber interface
Fiber optic cable type: 50 mm or 62.5 mm core diameter optical fiber
Fiber optic mode: multi-mode
Fiber optic cable length: up to 2 km
Fiber optic connector: type ST
Wavelength: 830 ±40 nm
Connection: as per all fiber optic connections, a Tx to Rx connection is required.
3
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected directly to any compliant digital multiplexer that supports
the IEEE C37.94 standard as shown below.
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
Digital
Multiplexer
IEEE C37.94
compliant
UR series
relay
up to 2 km
The UR-series C37.94 communication module can be connected to the electrical interface (G.703, RS422, or X.21) of a
non-compliant digital multiplexer via an optical-to-electrical interface converter that supports the IEEE C37.94 standard, as
shown below.
IEEE C37.94
Fiber Interface
UR series
relay
RS422
Interface
Digital
Multiplexer
with EIA-422
Interface
IEEE C37.94
Converter
up to 2 km
The UR-series C37.94 communication module has six (6) switches that are used to set the clock configuration. The functions of these control switches is shown below.
Loop Timed
Internal Timing Mode
te
xt
te
1
te
xt
te
2
ON
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
3
4
5
6
Switch
GE Multilin
ON
OFF
Internal
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
xt
te
xt
1
2
3
4
5
6
OFF
Loop Timed
1
ON
2
ON
OFF
OFF
3
OFF
OFF
4
OFF
OFF
5
OFF
OFF
6
OFF
OFF
C60 Breaker Management Relay
3-29
3.3 DIRECT I/O COMMUNICATIONS
3 HARDWARE
For the Internal Timing Mode, the system clock is generated internally. Therefore, the timing switch selection should be
Internal Timing for Relay 1 and Loop Timed for Relay 2. There must be only one timing source configured.
For the Looped Timing Mode, the system clock is derived from the received line signal. Therefore, the timing selection
should be in Loop Timing Mode for connections to higher order systems.
The C37.94 communications module cover removal procedure is as follows:
1.
Remove the C37.94 module (76 or 77):
The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module, must be pulled simultaneously in order
to release the module for removal. Before performing this action, control power must be removed from the relay.
The original location of the module should be recorded to help ensure that the same or replacement module is inserted
into the correct slot.
3
2.
Remove the module cover screw.
3.
Remove the top cover by sliding it towards the rear and then lift it upwards.
4.
Set the Timing Selection Switches (Channel 1, Channel 2) to the desired timing modes (see description above).
5.
Replace the top cover and the cover screw.
6.
Re-insert the C37.94 module Take care to ensure that the correct module type is inserted into the correct slot position. The ejector/inserter clips located at the top and at the bottom of each module must be in the disengaged position
as the module is smoothly inserted into the slot. Once the clips have cleared the raised edge of the chassis, engage
the clips simultaneously. When the clips have locked into position, the module will be fully inserted.
Figure 3–35: C37.94 TIMING SELECTION SWITCH SETTING
3-30
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES 4.1ENERVISTA UR SETUP INTERFACE
4.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a graphical user interface (GUI) as one of two human interfaces to a UR device.
The alternate human interface is implemented via the device’s faceplate keypad and display (see Faceplate Interface section in this chapter).
The EnerVista UR Setup software provides a single facility to configure, monitor, maintain, and trouble-shoot the operation
of relay functions, connected over local or wide area communication networks. It can be used while disconnected (i.e. offline) or connected (i.e. on-line) to a UR device. In off-line mode, settings files can be created for eventual downloading to
the device. In on-line mode, you can communicate with the device in real-time.
The EnerVista UR Setup software, provided with every C60 relay, can be run from any computer supporting Microsoft Windows® 95, 98, NT, 2000, ME, and XP. This chapter provides a summary of the basic EnerVista UR Setup software interface
features. The EnerVista UR Setup Help File provides details for getting started and using the EnerVista UR Setup software
interface.
4.1.2 CREATING A SITE LIST
To start using the EnerVista UR Setup software, a site definition and device definition must first be created. See the EnerVista UR Setup Help File or refer to the Connecting EnerVista UR Setup with the C60 section in Chapter 1 for details.
4.1.3 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
a) ENGAGING A DEVICE
The EnerVista UR Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to directly communicate with a UR relay.
Communicating relays are organized and grouped by communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected from the UR product series.
b) USING SETTINGS FILES
The EnerVista UR Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to relay settings:
•
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later download to communicating relays.
•
While connected to a communicating relay to directly modify any relay settings via relay data view windows, and then
save the settings to the relay.
•
You can create/edit settings files and then write them to the relay while the interface is connected to the relay.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file contains data pertaining to the
following types of relay settings:
•
Device Definition
•
Product Setup
•
System Setup
•
FlexLogic™
•
Grouped Elements
•
Control Elements
•
Inputs/Outputs
•
Testing
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
c) CREATING FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATIONS
You can create or edit a FlexLogic™ equation in order to customize the relay. You can subsequently view the automatically
generated logic diagram.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-1
4
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
d) VIEWING ACTUAL VALUES
You can view real-time relay data such as input/output status and measured parameters.
e) VIEWING TRIGGERED EVENTS
While the interface is in either on-line or off-line mode, you can view and analyze data generated by triggered specified
parameters, via one of the following:
•
Event Recorder facility: The event recorder captures contextual data associated with the last 1024 events, listed in
chronological order from most recent to oldest.
•
Oscillography facility: The oscillography waveform traces and digital states are used to provide a visual display of
power system and relay operation data captured during specific triggered events.
f) FILE SUPPORT
•
Execution: Any EnerVista UR Setup file which is double clicked or opened will launch the application, or provide focus
to the already opened application. If the file was a settings file (has a URS extension) which had been removed from
the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the Settings List tree menu.
•
Drag and Drop: The Site List and Settings List control bar windows are each mutually a drag source and a drop target
for device-order-code-compatible files or individual menu items. Also, the Settings List control bar window and any
Windows Explorer directory folder are each mutually a file drag source and drop target.
4
New files which are dropped into the Settings List window are added to the tree which is automatically sorted alphabetically with respect to settings file names. Files or individual menu items which are dropped in the selected device menu
in the Site List window will automatically be sent to the on-line communicating device.
g) FIRMWARE UPGRADES
The firmware of a C60 device can be upgraded, locally or remotely, via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The corresponding instructions are provided by the EnerVista UR Setup Help file under the topic “Upgrading Firmware”.
NOTE
4-2
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding data items (i.e. default
values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change slightly from version to version of firmware. The
addresses are rearranged when new features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified. The
“EEPROM DATA ERROR” message displayed after upgrading/downgrading the firmware is a resettable, self-test
message intended to inform users that the Modbus addresses have changed with the upgraded firmware. This
message does not signal any problems when appearing after firmware upgrades.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.1 ENERVISTA UR SETUP INTERFACE
4.1.4 ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
The EnerVista UR Setup software main window supports the following primary display components:
a.
Title bar which shows the pathname of the active data view
b.
Main window menu bar
c.
Main window tool bar
d.
Site List control bar window
e.
Settings List control bar window
f.
Device data view window(s), with common tool bar
g.
Settings File data view window(s), with common tool bar
h.
Workspace area with data view tabs
i.
Status bar
4
Figure 4–1: ENERVISTA UR SETUP SOFTWARE MAIN WINDOW
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-3
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.1 FACEPLATE
The keypad/display/LED interface is one of two alternate human interfaces supported. The other alternate human interface
is implemented via the EnerVista UR Setup software. The faceplate interface is available in two configurations: horizontal
or vertical. The faceplate interface consists of several functional panels.
The faceplate is hinged to allow easy access to the removable modules. There is also a removable dust cover that fits over
the faceplate which must be removed in order to access the keypad panel. The following two figures show the horizontal
and vertical arrangement of faceplate panels.
LED PANEL 1
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
LED PANEL 2
LED PANEL 3
RESET
DISPLAY
GE Multilin
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
1
USER 4
4
3
5
7
9
11
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
2
4
6
8
10
12
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
USER 5
ESCAPE
USER 6
USER LABEL
USER 7
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS 1-7
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
USER LABEL
ENTER
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS 1-12
VALUE
KEYPAD
827801A5.CDR
Figure 4–2: UR-SERIES HORIZONTAL FACEPLATE PANELS
DISPLAY
MENU
HELP
MESSAGE
ESCAPE
ENTER
VALUE
7
8
9
4
5
6
1
2
3
0
.
+/-
KEYPAD
LED PANEL 3
LED PANEL 2
827830A1.CDR
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
LED PANEL 1
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
Figure 4–3: UR-SERIES VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS
4-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.2 LED INDICATORS
a) LED PANEL 1
This panel provides several LED indicators, several keys, and a communications port. The RESET key is used to reset any
latched LED indicator or target message, once the condition has been cleared (these latched conditions can also be reset
via the SETTINGS
INPUT/OUTPUTS
RESETTING menu). The USER keys are used by the Breaker Control feature. The
RS232 port is intended for connection to a portable PC.
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
Figure 4–4: LED PANEL 1
STATUS INDICATORS:
•
IN SERVICE: Indicates that control power is applied; all monitored inputs/outputs and internal systems are OK; the
relay has been programmed.
•
TROUBLE: Indicates that the relay has detected an internal problem.
•
TEST MODE: Indicates that the relay is in test mode.
•
TRIP: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as a Trip switch has operated. This indicator always
latches; the RESET command must be initiated to allow the latch to be reset.
•
ALARM: Indicates that the selected FlexLogic™ operand serving as an Alarm switch has operated. This indicator is
never latched.
•
PICKUP: Indicates that an element is picked up. This indicator is never latched.
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS:
These indicate the input type that was involved in a condition detected by an element that is operated or has a latched flag
waiting to be reset.
•
VOLTAGE: Indicates voltage was involved.
•
CURRENT: Indicates current was involved.
•
FREQUENCY: Indicates frequency was involved.
•
OTHER: Indicates a composite function was involved.
•
PHASE A: Indicates Phase A was involved.
•
PHASE B: Indicates Phase B was involved.
•
PHASE C: Indicates Phase C was involved.
•
NEUTRAL/GROUND: Indicates neutral or ground was involved.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-5
4
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) LED PANELS 2 AND 3
These panels provide 48 amber LED indicators whose operation is controlled by the user. Support for applying a customized label beside every LED is provided.
User customization of LED operation is of maximum benefit in installations where languages other than English are used to
communicate with operators. Refer to the User-Programmable LEDs section in Chapter 5 for the settings used to program
the operation of the LEDs on these panels.
Figure 4–5: LED PANELS 2 AND 3 (INDEX TEMPLATE)
4
c) DEFAULT LABELS FOR LED PANEL 2
SETTINGS IN USE
BREAKER 1
SYNCHROCHECK
GROUP 1
OPEN
NO1 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 2
CLOSED
NO2 IN-SYNCH
GROUP 3
TROUBLE
GROUP 4
RECLOSE
GROUP 5
BREAKER 2
ENABLED
GROUP 6
OPEN
DISABLED
GROUP 7
CLOSED
IN PROGRESS
GROUP 8
TROUBLE
LOCKED OUT
Figure 4–6: LED PANEL 2 DEFAULT LABELS
The default labels are intended to represent:
•
GROUP 1...8: The illuminated GROUP is the active settings group.
•
BREAKER n OPEN: The breaker is open.
•
BREAKER n CLOSED: The breaker is closed.
•
BREAKER n TROUBLE: A problem related to the breaker has been detected.
•
SYNCHROCHECK NO n IN-SYNCH: Voltages have satisfied the synchrocheck element.
•
RECLOSE ENABLED: The recloser is operational.
•
RECLOSE DISABLED: The recloser is not operational.
•
RECLOSE IN PROGRESS: A reclose operation is in progress.
•
RECLOSE LOCKED OUT: The recloser is not operational and requires a reset.
NOTE
Firmware revisions 2.9x and earlier support eight user setting groups; revisions 3.0x and higher support
six setting groups. For convenience of users using earlier firmware revisions, the relay panel shows eight
setting groups. Please note that the LEDs, despite their default labels, are fully user-programmable.
The relay is shipped with the default label for the LED panel 2. The LEDs, however, are not pre-programmed. To match the
pre-printed label, the LED settings must be entered as shown in the User-Programmable LEDs section of Chapter 5. The
LEDs are fully user-programmable. The default labels can be replaced by user-printed labels for both LED panels 2 and 3
as explained in the next section.
4-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
d) CUSTOM LABELING OF LEDS
Custom labeling of an LED-only panel is facilitated through a Microsoft Word file available from the following URL:
http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin/support/ur/
This file provides templates and instructions for creating appropriate labeling for the LED panel. The following procedures
are contained in the downloadable file. The panel templates provide relative LED locations and located example text (x)
edit boxes. The following procedure demonstrates how to install/uninstall the custom panel labeling.
1.
Remove the clear Lexan Front Cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1501-0014).
Push in
and gently lift
up the cover.
2.
Pop out the LED Module and/or the Blank Module with a screwdriver as shown below. Be careful not to damage the
plastic.
( LED MODULE )
( BLANK MODULE )
3.
Place the left side of the customized module back to the front panel frame, then snap back the right side.
4.
Put the clear Lexan Front Cover back into place.
e) CUSTOMIZING THE LED DISPLAY
The following items are required to customize the UR display module:
•
Black and white or color printer (color preferred)
•
Microsoft Word 97 or later software
•
1 each of: 8.5" x 11" white paper, exacto knife, ruler, custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1516-0069),
and a custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015)
1.
Open the LED panel customization template with Microsoft Word. Add text in places of the LED x text placeholders on
the template(s). Delete unused place holders as required.
2.
When complete, save the Word file to your local PC for future use.
3.
Print the template(s) to a local printer.
4.
From the printout, cut-out the Background Template from the three windows, using the cropmarks as a guide.
5.
Put the Background Template on top of the custom display module (GE Multilin Part Number: 1513-0069) and snap the
clear custom module cover (GE Multilin Part Number: 1502-0015) over it and the templates.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-7
4
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2.3 DISPLAY
All messages are displayed on a 2 × 20 character vacuum fluorescent display to make them visible under poor lighting conditions. An optional liquid crystal display (LCD) is also available. Messages are displayed in English and do not require the
aid of an instruction manual for deciphering. While the keypad and display are not actively being used, the display will
default to defined messages. Any high priority event driven message will automatically override the default message and
appear on the display.
4.2.4 KEYPAD
Display messages are organized into ‘pages’ under the following headings: Actual Values, Settings, Commands, and Targets. The
key navigates through these pages. Each heading page is broken down further into logical subgroups.
The
MESSAGE
keys navigate through the subgroups. The
VALUE
keys scroll increment or decrement
numerical setting values when in programming mode. These keys also scroll through alphanumeric values in the text edit
mode. Alternatively, values may also be entered with the numeric keypad.
The
key initiates and advance to the next character in text edit mode or enters a decimal point. The
pressed at any time for context sensitive help messages. The
key stores altered setting values.
key may be
4
7
8
9
MESSAGE
4
5
6
1
2
3
VALUE
0
.
+/-
MENU
HELP
ESCAPE
ENTER
Figure 4–7: KEYPAD
4.2.5 BREAKER CONTROL
a) INTRODUCTION
The C60 can interface with associated circuit breakers. In many cases the application monitors the state of the breaker,
which can be presented on faceplate LEDs, along with a breaker trouble indication. Breaker operations can be manually
initiated from faceplate keypad or automatically initiated from a FlexLogic™ operand. A setting is provided to assign names
to each breaker; this user-assigned name is used for the display of related flash messages. These features are provided for
two breakers; the user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be breaker No. 1.
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS
TION setting is "Enabled" for each breaker.
SYSTEM SETUP
BREAKERS
BREAKER n
BREAKER FUNC-
b) CONTROL MODE SELECTION AND MONITORING
Installations may require that a breaker is operated in the three-pole only mode (3-Pole), or in the one and three-pole (1Pole) mode, selected by setting. If the mode is selected as 3-pole, a single input tracks the breaker open or closed position.
If the mode is selected as 1-Pole, all three breaker pole states must be input to the relay. These inputs must be in agreement to indicate the position of the breaker.
SYSTEM SETUP
BREAKERS
BREAKER n
BREAKER
For the following discussion it is assumed the SETTINGS
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL setting is "Enabled" for each breaker. The C60 has features required for single-pole operation.
Inputs that trip individual breaker poles and cause a breaker reclose are passed directly to this element.
c) FACEPLATE (USER KEY) CONTROL
After the 30 minute interval during which command functions are permitted after a correct command password, the user
cannot open or close a breaker via the keypad. The following discussions begin from the not-permitted state.
d) CONTROL OF TWO BREAKERS
For the following example setup, the symbol (Name) represents the user-programmed variable name.
4-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
For this application (setup shown below), the relay is connected and programmed for both breaker No. 1 and breaker No. 2.
The USER 1 key performs the selection of which breaker is to be operated by the USER 2 and USER 3 keys. The USER 2
key is used to manually close the breaker and the USER 3 key is used to manually open the breaker.
ENTER COMMAND
PASSWORD
This message appears when the USER 1, USER 2, or USER 3 key is pressed and a
is required; i.e. if COMMAND PASSWORD is enabled and no commands have been issued within the last 30 minutes.
COMMAND PASSWORD
Press USER 1
To Select Breaker
This message appears if the correct password is entered or if none is required. This message will be maintained for 30 seconds or until the USER 1 key is pressed again.
BKR1-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
This message is displayed after the USER 1 key is pressed for the second time. Three
possible actions can be performed from this state within 30 seconds as per items (1), (2)
and (3) below:
(1)
USER 2 OFF/ON
To Close BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 2 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 2 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to close breaker No. 1.
(2)
USER 3 OFF/ON
To Open BKR1-(Name)
If the USER 3 key is pressed, this message appears for 20 seconds. If the USER 3 key is
pressed again within that time, a signal is created that can be programmed to operate an
output relay to open breaker No. 1.
(3)
BKR2-(Name) SELECTED
USER 2=CLS/USER 3=OP
If the USER 1 key is pressed at this step, this message appears showing that a different
breaker is selected. Three possible actions can be performed from this state as per (1),
(2) and (3). Repeatedly pressing the USER 1 key alternates between available breakers.
Pressing keys other than USER 1, 2 or 3 at any time aborts the breaker control function.
e) CONTROL OF ONE BREAKER
For this application the relay is connected and programmed for breaker No. 1 only. Operation for this application is identical
to that described for two breakers.
4.2.6 MENUS
a) NAVIGATION
Press the
key to select the desired header display page (top-level menu). The header title appears momentarily followed by a header display page menu item. Each press of the
key advances through the main heading pages as
illustrated below.
ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
SETTINGS
COMMANDS
TARGETS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
No Active
Targets
USER DISPLAYS
(when in use)
User Display 1
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-9
4
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
b) HIERARCHY
The setting and actual value messages are arranged hierarchically. The header display pages are indicated by double
scroll bar characters ( ), while sub-header pages are indicated by single scroll bar characters ( ). The header display
pages represent the highest level of the hierarchy and the sub-header display pages fall below this level. The MESSAGE
and
keys move within a group of headers, sub-headers, setting values, or actual values. Continually pressing the
MESSAGE
key from a header display displays specific information for the header category. Conversely, continually
pressing the
MESSAGE key from a setting value or actual value display returns to the header display.
HIGHEST LEVEL
LOWEST LEVEL (SETTING VALUE)
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
4
c) EXAMPLE MENU NAVIGATION
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
Press the
key until the header for the first Actual Values page appears. This
page contains system and relay status information. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE
keys to display the other actual value headers.
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
Press the
key until the header for the first page of Settings appears. This page
contains settings to configure the relay.
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
Press the MESSAGE
key to move to the next Settings page. This page contains
settings for System Setup. Repeatedly press the
MESSAGE
keys to display
the other setting headers and then back to the first Settings page header.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
From the Settings page one header (Product Setup), press the MESSAGE
once to display the first sub-header (Password Security).
key
Press the MESSAGE
key once more and this will display the first setting for Password Security. Pressing the MESSAGE
key repeatedly will display the remaining
setting messages for this sub-header.
PASSWORD
SECURITY
Press the MESSAGE
key once to move back to the first sub-header message.
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
Pressing the MESSAGE
key will display the second setting sub-header associated with the Product Setup header.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Press the MESSAGE
play Properties.
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25%
To view the remaining settings associated with the Display Properties subheader,
repeatedly press the MESSAGE
key. The last message appears as shown.
4-10
key once more and this will display the first setting for Dis-
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4.2.7 CHANGING SETTINGS
a) ENTERING NUMERICAL DATA
Each numerical setting has its own minimum, maximum, and increment value associated with it. These parameters define
what values are acceptable for a setting.
For example, select the SETTINGS
setting.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
MESSAGE TIME
MINIMUM:
MAXIMUM:
Press the
key to view the minimum and maximum values. Press the
again to view the next context sensitive help message.
0.5
10.0
PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
FLASH
key
Two methods of editing and storing a numerical setting value are available.
•
0 to 9 and
(decimal point): The relay numeric keypad works the same as that of any electronic calculator. A number is entered one digit at a time. The leftmost digit is entered first and the rightmost digit is entered last. Pressing the
MESSAGE
key or pressing the ESCAPE key, returns the original value to the display.
•
VALUE
: The VALUE
key increments the displayed value by the step value, up to the maximum value
allowed. While at the maximum value, pressing the VALUE
key again will allow the setting selection to continue
upward from the minimum value. The VALUE
key decrements the displayed value by the step value, down to the
minimum value. While at the minimum value, pressing the VALUE
key again will allow the setting selection to continue downward from the maximum value.
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 2.5 s
As an example, set the flash message time setting to 2.5 seconds. Press the appropriate
numeric keys in the sequence “2 . 5". The display message will change as the digits are
being entered.
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Until
is pressed, editing changes are not registered by the relay. Therefore, press
to store the new value in memory. This flash message will momentarily appear as
confirmation of the storing process. Numerical values which contain decimal places will
be rounded-off if more decimal place digits are entered than specified by the step value.
b) ENTERING ENUMERATION DATA
Enumeration settings have data values which are part of a set, whose members are explicitly defined by a name. A set is
comprised of two or more members.
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
For example, the selections available for ACCESS LEVEL are "Restricted", "Command",
"Setting", and "Factory Service".
Enumeration type values are changed using the VALUE keys. The VALUE
VALUE
key displays the previous selection.
key displays the next selection while the
ACCESS LEVEL:
Setting
If the ACCESS LEVEL needs to be "Setting", press the VALUE keys until the proper selection is displayed. Press
at any time for the context sensitive help messages.
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
Changes are not registered by the relay until the
key is pressed. Pressing
stores the new value in memory. This flash message momentarily appears as confirmation of the storing process.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-11
4
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
c) ENTERING ALPHANUMERIC TEXT
Text settings have data values which are fixed in length, but user-defined in character. They may be comprised of upper
case letters, lower case letters, numerals, and a selection of special characters.
There are several places where text messages may be programmed to allow the relay to be customized for specific applications. One example is the Message Scratchpad. Use the following procedure to enter alphanumeric text messages.
For example: to enter the text, “Breaker #1”
1.
Press
to enter text edit mode.
2.
Press the VALUE keys until the character 'B' appears; press
3.
Repeat step 2 for the remaining characters: r,e,a,k,e,r, ,#,1.
4.
Press
5.
If you have any problem, press
to view context sensitive help. Flash messages will sequentially appear for several seconds each. For the case of a text setting message, pressing
displays how to edit and store new values.
to advance the cursor to the next position.
to store the text.
d) ACTIVATING THE RELAY
4
When the relay is powered up, the Trouble LED will be on, the In Service LED off, and
this message displayed, indicating the relay is in the "Not Programmed" state and is
safeguarding (output relays blocked) against the installation of a relay whose settings
have not been entered. This message remains until the relay is explicitly put in the
"Programmed" state.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
To change the RELAY SETTINGS: "Not Programmed" mode to "Programmed", proceed as follows:
1.
Press the
key until the SETTINGS header flashes momentarily and the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP message
appears on the display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE
key until the PASSWORD SECURITY message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE
key until the INSTALLATION message appears on the display.
4.
Press the MESSAGE
key until the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message is displayed.
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
↓
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
5.
After the RELAY SETTINGS: Not Programmed message appears on the display, press the VALUE keys change the
selection to "Programmed".
6.
Press the
key.
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
4-12
RELAY SETTINGS:
Programmed
C60 Breaker Management Relay
NEW SETTING
HAS BEEN STORED
GE Multilin
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
7.
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
When the "NEW SETTING HAS BEEN STORED" message appears, the relay will be in "Programmed" state and the
In Service LED will turn on.
e) ENTERING INITIAL PASSWORDS
To enter the initial Setting (or Command) Password, proceed as follows:
1.
Press the
key until the 'SETTINGS' header flashes momentarily and the ‘SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP’ message appears on the display.
2.
Press the MESSAGE
key until the ‘ACCESS LEVEL:’ message appears on the display.
3.
Press the MESSAGE
display.
key until the ‘CHANGE SETTING (or COMMAND) PASSWORD:’ message appears on the
SETTINGS
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD
SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
4
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ---------ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ---------4.
After the 'CHANGE...PASSWORD' message appears on the display, press the VALUE
change the selection to Yes.
key or the VALUE
5.
Press the
6.
Type in a numerical password (up to 10 characters) and press the
7.
When the 'VERIFY NEW PASSWORD' is displayed, re-type in the same password and press
key to
key and the display will prompt you to 'ENTER NEW PASSWORD'.
key.
.
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: Yes
ENTER NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
VERIFY NEW
PASSWORD: ##########
NEW PASSWORD
HAS BEEN STORED
8.
When the 'NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED' message appears, your new Setting (or Command) Password will
be active.
f) CHANGING EXISTING PASSWORD
To change an existing password, follow the instructions in the previous section with the following exception. A message will
prompt you to type in the existing password (for each security level) before a new password can be entered.
In the event that a password has been lost (forgotten), submit the corresponding Encrypted Password from the PASSWORD
menu to the Factory for decoding.
SECURITY
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
4-13
4.2 FACEPLATE INTERFACE
4 HUMAN INTERFACES
4
4-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS 5.1OVERVIEW
SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
5.1.1 SETTINGS MAIN MENU
PASSWORD
SECURITY
See page 5-7.
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
See page 5-8.
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
See page 5-10.
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS USER MAP
REAL TIME
CLOCK
FAULT REPORT
OSCILLOGRAPHY
DATA LOGGER
DEMAND
See page 5-17.
See page 5-18.
See page 5-19.
See page 5-21.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
See page 5-26.
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-26.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
See page 5-28.
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
See page 5-29.
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
See page 5-30.
AC INPUTS
POWER SYSTEM
SIGNAL SOURCES
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5
See page 5-21.
See page 5-23.
INSTALLATION
GE Multilin
See page 5-17.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
DIRECT I/O
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
See page 5-11.
See page 5-32.
See page 5-37.
See page 5-38.
See page 5-39.
See page 5-40.
5-1
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
LINE
See page 5-42.
BREAKERS
See page 5-43.
FLEXCURVES
SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
See page 5-65.
FLEXLOGIC
TIMERS
See page 5-65.
FLEXELEMENTS
NON-VOLATILE
LATCHES
SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
See page 5-46.
SETTING GROUP 1
See page 5-66.
See page 5-70.
See page 5-71.
SETTING GROUP 2
5
↓
SETTING GROUP 6
SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUPS
SELECTOR SWITCH
SYNCHROCHECK
AUTORECLOSE
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
SETTINGS
INPUTS / OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
5-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
See page 5-104.
See page 5-105.
See page 5-111.
See page 5-115.
See page 5-126.
See page 5-129.
See page 5-131.
See page 5-134.
See page 5-136.
See page 5-137.
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE INPUTS
See page 5-141.
See page 5-142.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt BIT PAIRS
See page 5-143.
DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT OUTPUTS
DCMA INPUTS
RTD INPUTS
SETTINGS
TESTING
See page 5-140.
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA BIT PAIRS
RESETTING
SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
See page 5-139.
See page 5-143.
See page 5-143.
See page 5-143.
See page 5-147.
5
See page 5-148.
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
See page 5-149.
TEST MODE INITIATE:
On
See page 5-149.
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
See page 5-149.
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
See page 5-150.
5.1.2 INTRODUCTION TO ELEMENTS
In the design of UR relays, the term “element” is used to describe a feature that is based around a comparator. The comparator is provided with an input (or set of inputs) that is tested against a programmed setting (or group of settings) to determine if the input is within the defined range that will set the output to logic 1, also referred to as “setting the flag”. A single
comparator may make multiple tests and provide multiple outputs; for example, the time overcurrent comparator sets a
Pickup flag when the current input is above the setting and sets an Operate flag when the input current has been at a level
above the pickup setting for the time specified by the time-current curve settings. All comparators, except the Digital Element which uses a logic state as the input, use analog parameter actual values as the input.
Elements are arranged into two classes, GROUPED and CONTROL. Each element classed as a GROUPED element is
provided with six alternate sets of settings, in setting groups numbered 1 through 6. The performance of a GROUPED element is defined by the setting group that is active at a given time. The performance of a CONTROL element is independent
of the selected active setting group.
The main characteristics of an element are shown on the element logic diagram. This includes the input(s), settings, fixed
logic, and the output operands generated (abbreviations used on scheme logic diagrams are defined in Appendix F).
Some settings for current and voltage elements are specified in per-unit (pu) calculated quantities:
pu quantity = (actual quantity) / (base quantity)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-3
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
•
For current elements, the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal secondary or primary current of the CT. Where the current
source is the sum of two CTs with different ratios, the ‘base quantity’ will be the common secondary or primary current
to which the sum is scaled (i.e. normalized to the larger of the 2 rated CT inputs). For example, if CT1 = 300 / 5 A and
CT2 = 100 / 5 A, then in order to sum these, CT2 is scaled to the CT1 ratio. In this case, the ‘base quantity’ will be 5 A
secondary or 300 A primary.
•
For voltage elements the ‘base quantity’ is the nominal primary voltage of the protected system which corresponds
(based on VT ratio and connection) to secondary VT voltage applied to the relay. For example, on a system with a
13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with 14400:120 V Delta-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu)
would be:
13800
---------------- × 120 = 115 V
14400
(EQ 5.1)
For Wye-connected VTs, the secondary nominal voltage (1 pu) would be:
13800
---------------- × 120
---------- = 66.4 V
14400
3
(EQ 5.2)
Many settings are common to most elements and are discussed below:
5
•
FUNCTION setting: This setting programs the element to be operational when selected as “Enabled”. The factory
default is “Disabled”. Once programmed to “Enabled”, any element associated with the Function becomes active and
all options become available.
•
NAME setting: This setting is used to uniquely identify the element.
•
SOURCE setting: This setting is used to select the parameter or set of parameters to be monitored.
•
PICKUP setting: For simple elements, this setting is used to program the level of the measured parameter above or
below which the pickup state is established. In more complex elements, a set of settings may be provided to define the
range of the measured parameters which will cause the element to pickup.
•
PICKUP DELAY setting: This setting sets a time-delay-on-pickup, or on-delay, for the duration between the Pickup
and Operate output states.
•
RESET DELAY setting: This setting is used to set a time-delay-on-dropout, or off-delay, for the duration between the
Operate output state and the return to logic 0 after the input transits outside the defined pickup range.
•
BLOCK setting: The default output operand state of all comparators is a logic 0 or “flag not set”. The comparator
remains in this default state until a logic 1 is asserted at the RUN input, allowing the test to be performed. If the RUN
input changes to logic 0 at any time, the comparator returns to the default state. The RUN input is used to supervise
the comparator. The BLOCK input is used as one of the inputs to RUN control.
•
TARGET setting: This setting is used to define the operation of an element target message. When set to Disabled, no
target message or illumination of a faceplate LED indicator is issued upon operation of the element. When set to SelfReset, the target message and LED indication follow the Operate state of the element, and self-resets once the operate element condition clears. When set to Latched, the target message and LED indication will remain visible after the
element output returns to logic 0 - until a RESET command is received by the relay.
•
EVENTS setting: This setting is used to control whether the Pickup, Dropout or Operate states are recorded by the
event recorder. When set to Disabled, element pickup, dropout or operate are not recorded as events. When set to
Enabled, events are created for:
(Element) PKP (pickup)
(Element) DPO (dropout)
(Element) OP (operate)
The DPO event is created when the measure and decide comparator output transits from the pickup state (logic 1) to
the dropout state (logic 0). This could happen when the element is in the operate state if the reset delay time is not ‘0’.
5-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.1 OVERVIEW
5.1.3 INTRODUCTION TO AC SOURCES
a) BACKGROUND
The C60 may be used on systems with breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations. In these applications, each of the two
three-phase sets of individual phase currents (one associated with each breaker) can be used as an input to a breaker failure element. The sum of both breaker phase currents and 3I_0 residual currents may be required for the circuit relaying
and metering functions. For a three-winding transformer application, it may be required to calculate watts and vars for each
of three windings, using voltage from different sets of VTs. These requirements can be satisfied with a single UR, equipped
with sufficient CT and VT input channels, by selecting the parameter to measure. A mechanism is provided to specify the
AC parameter (or group of parameters) used as the input to protection/control comparators and some metering elements.
Selection of the parameter(s) to measure is partially performed by the design of a measuring element or protection/control
comparator by identifying the type of parameter (fundamental frequency phasor, harmonic phasor, symmetrical component,
total waveform RMS magnitude, phase-phase or phase-ground voltage, etc.) to measure. The user completes the process
by selecting the instrument transformer input channels to use and some of the parameters calculated from these channels.
The input parameters available include the summation of currents from multiple input channels. For the summed currents of
phase, 3I_0, and ground current, current from CTs with different ratios are adjusted to a single ratio before summation.
A mechanism called a “Source” configures the routing of CT and VT input channels to measurement sub-systems.
Sources, in the context of UR series relays, refer to the logical grouping of current and voltage signals such that one source
contains all the signals required to measure the load or fault in a particular power apparatus. A given source may contain all
or some of the following signals: three-phase currents, single-phase ground current, three-phase voltages and an auxiliary
voltage from a single VT for checking for synchronism.
To illustrate the concept of Sources, as applied to current inputs only, consider the breaker-and-a-half scheme below. In this
application, the current flows as shown by the arrows. Some current flows through the upper bus bar to some other location
or power equipment, and some current flows into transformer Winding 1. The current into Winding 1 is the phasor sum (or
difference) of the currents in CT1 and CT2 (whether the sum or difference is used depends on the relative polarity of the CT
connections). The same considerations apply to transformer Winding 2. The protection elements require access to the net
current for transformer protection, but some elements may need access to the individual currents from CT1 and CT2.
CT1
Through Current
WDG 1
UR
Platform
CT2
Power
Transformer
WDG 2
CT3
CT4
827791A2.CDR
Figure 5–1: BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME
In conventional analog or electronic relays, the sum of the currents is obtained from an appropriate external connection of
all CTs through which any portion of the current for the element being protected could flow. Auxiliary CTs are required to
perform ratio matching if the ratios of the primary CTs to be summed are not identical. In the UR series of relays, provisions
have been included for all the current signals to be brought to the UR device where grouping, ratio correction and summation are applied internally via configuration settings.
A major advantage of using internal summation is that the individual currents are available to the protection device; for
example, as additional information to calculate a restraint current, or to allow the provision of additional protection features
that operate on the individual currents such as breaker failure.
Given the flexibility of this approach, it becomes necessary to add configuration settings to the platform to allow the user to
select which sets of CT inputs will be added to form the net current into the protected device.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-5
5
5.1 OVERVIEW
5 SETTINGS
The internal grouping of current and voltage signals forms an internal source. This source can be given a specific name
through the settings, and becomes available to protection and metering elements in the UR platform. Individual names can
be given to each source to help identify them more clearly for later use. For example, in the scheme shown in the above
diagram, the configures one Source to be the sum of CT1 and CT2 and can name this Source as “Wdg 1 Current”.
Once the sources have been configured, the user has them available as selections for the choice of input signal for the protection elements and as metered quantities.
b) CT/VT MODULE CONFIGURATION
CT and VT input channels are contained in CT/VT modules. The type of input channel can be phase/neutral/other voltage,
phase/ground current, or sensitive ground current. The CT/VT modules calculate total waveform RMS levels, fundamental
frequency phasors, symmetrical components and harmonics for voltage or current, as allowed by the hardware in each
channel. These modules may calculate other parameters as directed by the CPU module.
A CT/VT module contains up to eight input channels, numbered 1 through 8. The channel numbering corresponds to the
module terminal numbering 1 through 8 and is arranged as follows: Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are always provided as a group,
hereafter called a “bank,” and all four are either current or voltage, as are Channels 5, 6, 7 and 8. Channels 1, 2, 3 and 5, 6,
7 are arranged as phase A, B and C respectively. Channels 4 and 8 are either another current or voltage.
Banks are ordered sequentially from the block of lower-numbered channels to the block of higher-numbered channels, and
from the CT/VT module with the lowest slot position letter to the module with the highest slot position letter, as follows:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
5
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
< bank 1 >
< bank 3 >
< bank 5 >
< bank 2 >
< bank 4 >
< bank 6 >
The UR platform allows for a maximum of three sets of three-phase voltages and six sets of three-phase currents. The
result of these restrictions leads to the maximum number of CT/VT modules in a chassis to three. The maximum number of
Sources is six. A summary of CT/VT module configurations is shown below.
ITEM
MAXIMUM NUMBER
CT/VT Module
3
CT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 ground channel)
6
VT Bank (3 phase channels, 1 auxiliary channel)
3
c) CT/VT INPUT CHANNEL CONFIGURATION
Upon relay startup, configuration settings for every bank of current or voltage input channels in the relay are automatically
generated from the order code. Within each bank, a channel identification label is automatically assigned to each bank of
channels in a given product. The ‘bank’ naming convention is based on the physical location of the channels, required by
the user to know how to connect the relay to external circuits. Bank identification consists of the letter designation of the slot
in which the CT/VT module is mounted as the first character, followed by numbers indicating the channel, either 1 or 5.
For three-phase channel sets, the number of the lowest numbered channel identifies the set. For example, F1 represents
the three-phase channel set of F1/F2/F3, where F is the slot letter and 1 is the first channel of the set of three channels.
Upon startup, the CPU configures the settings required to characterize the current and voltage inputs, and will display them
in the appropriate section in the sequence of the banks (as described above) as follows for a maximum configuration: F1,
F5, M1, M5, U1, and U5.
The above section explains how the input channels are identified and configured to the specific application instrument
transformers and the connections of these transformers. The specific parameters to be used by each measuring element
and comparator, and some actual values are controlled by selecting a specific source. The source is a group of current and
voltage input channels selected by the user to facilitate this selection. With this mechanism, a user does not have to make
multiple selections of voltage and current for those elements that need both parameters, such as a distance element or a
watt calculation. It also gathers associated parameters for display purposes.
The basic idea of arranging a source is to select a point on the power system where information is of interest. An application example of the grouping of parameters in a Source is a transformer winding, on which a three phase voltage is measured, and the sum of the currents from CTs on each of two breakers is required to measure the winding current flow.
5-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2PRODUCT SETUP
PATH: SETTINGS
5.2.1 PASSWORD SECURITY
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD SECURITY
ACCESS LEVEL:
Restricted
Range: Restricted, Command, Setting,
Factory Service (for factory use only)
CHANGE COMMAND
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
CHANGE SETTING
PASSWORD: No
Range: No, Yes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED COMMAND
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
MESSAGE
ENCRYPTED SETTING
PASSWORD: ----------
Range: 0 to 9999999999
Note: ---------- indicates no password
PASSWORD
SECURITY
Two levels of password security are provided: Command and Setting. Operations under password supervision are:
•
COMMAND:
operating the breakers via faceplate keypad, changing the state of virtual inputs, clearing the event
records, clearing the oscillography records, clearing fault reports, changing the date and time, clearing
the breaker arcing amps, clearing energy records, clearing the data logger, user-programmable pushbuttons
•
SETTING:
changing any setting, test mode operation
The Command and Setting passwords are defaulted to "Null" when the relay is shipped from the factory. When a password
is set to "Null", the password security feature is disabled.
Programming a password code is required to enable each access level. A password consists of 1 to 10 numerical characters. When a CHANGE ... PASSWORD setting is set to "Yes", the following message sequence is invoked:
1.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD: ____________
2.
VERIFY NEW PASSWORD: ____________
3.
NEW PASSWORD HAS BEEN STORED
To gain write access to a "Restricted" setting, set ACCESS LEVEL to "Setting" and then change the setting, or attempt to
change the setting and follow the prompt to enter the programmed password. If the password is correctly entered, access
will be allowed. If no keys are pressed for longer than 30 minutes or control power is cycled, accessibility will automatically
revert to the "Restricted" level.
If an entered password is lost (or forgotten), consult the factory with the corresponding ENCRYPTED PASSWORD.
The B30 provides a means to raise an alarm upon failed password entry. Should password verification fail while accessing
a password-protected level of the relay (either settings or commands), the UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS FlexLogic™ operand is asserted. The operand can be programmed to raise an alarm via contact outputs or communications. This feature
can be used to protect against both unauthorized and accidental access attempts.
CLEAR RECORDS
RESET UNAUTHORISED
The UNAUTHORISED ACCESS operand is reset with the COMMANDS
command. Therefore, to apply this feature with security, the command level should be password-protected.
ALARMS
The operand does not generate events or targets. If these are required, the operand can be assigned to a digital element
programmed with event logs and/or targets enabled.
If the SETTING and COMMAND passwords are identical, this one password allows access to both commands
and settings.
NOTE
NOTE
When enerVista UR Setup is used to access a particular level, the user will continue to have access to that
level as long as there are open windows in enerVista UR Setup. To re-establish the Password Security feature, all URPC windows must be closed for at least 30 minutes.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-7
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.2 DISPLAY PROPERTIES
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
FLASH MESSAGE
TIME: 1.0 s
Range: 0.5 to 10.0 s in steps of 0.1
DEFAULT MESSAGE
TIMEOUT: 300 s
Range: 10 to 900 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DEFAULT MESSAGE
INTENSITY: 25 %
Range: 25%, 50%, 75%, 100%
Visible only if a VFD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
FEATURE: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Visible only if an LCD is installed
MESSAGE
SCREEN SAVER
WAIT TIME: 30 min
Range: 1 to 65535 min. in steps of 1
Visible only if an LCD is installed
CURRENT CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 0.020 pu
Range: 0.002 to 0.020 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF
LEVEL: 1.0 V
Range: 0.1 to 1.0 V secondary in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
DISPLAY
PROPERTIES
Some relay messaging characteristics can be modified to suit different situations using the display properties settings.
•
FLASH MESSAGE TIME: Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for several
seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
•
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT: If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a
default message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on the screen long enough
during programming or reading of actual values.
•
DEFAULT MESSAGE INTENSITY: To extend phosphor life in the vacuum fluorescent display, the brightness can be
attenuated during default message display. During keypad interrogation, the display always operates at full brightness.
•
SCREEN SAVER FEATURE and SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME: These settings are only visible if the C60 has a liquid
crystal display (LCD) and control its backlighting. When the SCREEN SAVER FEATURE is “Enabled”, the LCD backlighting
is turned off after the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT followed by the SCREEN SAVER WAIT TIME, providing that no keys
have been pressed and no target messages are active. When a keypress occurs or a target becomes active, the LCD
backlighting is turned on.
•
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the current cut-off threshold. Very low currents (1 to 2% of the
rated value) are very susceptible to noise. Some customers prefer very low currents to display as zero, while others
prefer the current be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C60 applies a cutoff value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured currents. If the magnitude is below the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This applies to phase and ground current phasors as well as true RMS values and symmetrical components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those used by
communications protocols. Note that the cut-off level for the sensitive ground input is 10 times lower that the CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL setting value. Raw current samples available via oscillography are not subject to cut-off.
•
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: This setting modifies the voltage cut-off threshold. Very low secondary voltage measurements (at the fractional volt level) can be affected by noise. Some customers prefer these low voltages to be displayed
as zero, while others prefer the voltage to be displayed even when the value reflects noise rather than the actual signal. The C60 applies a cut-off value to the magnitudes and angles of the measured voltages. If the magnitude is below
the cut-off level, it is substituted with zero. This operation applies to phase and auxiliary voltages, and symmetrical
components. The cut-off operation applies to quantities used for metering, protection, and control, as well as those
used by communications protocols. Raw samples of the voltages available via oscillography are not subject cut-off.
This setting relates to the actual measured voltage at the VT secondary inputs. It can be converted to per-unit values
(pu) by dividing by the PHASE VT SECONDARY setting value. For example, a PHASE VT SECONDARY setting of “66.4 V”
and a VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL setting of “1.0 V” gives a cut-off value of 1.0 V / 66.4 V = 0.015 pu.
5
5-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
The CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are used to determine the metered power cut-off levels. The
power cut-off level is calculated as shown below. For Delta connections:
3 × CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary- (EQ 5.3)
3-phase power cut-off = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
For Wye connections:
× CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary- (EQ 5.4)
3-phase power cut-off = 3
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------VT secondary
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × VT primary × CT primary
per-phase power cut-off = ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- (EQ 5.5)
VT secondary
where VT primary = VT secondary × VT ratio and CT primary = CT secondary × CT ratio.
For example, given the following settings:
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL: “0.02 pu”
VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL: “1.0 V”
PHASE CT PRIMARY: “100 A”
PHASE VT SECONDARY: “66.4 V”
PHASE VT RATIO: “208.00 : 1"
PHASE VT CONNECTION: “Delta”.
We have:
CT primary = “100 A”, and
VT primary = PHASE VT SECONDARY x PHASE VT RATIO = 66.4 V x 208 = 13811.2 V
5
The power cut-off is therefore:
power cut-off = (CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL × VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL × CT primary × VT primary)/VT secondary
= ( 3 × 0.02 pu × 1.0 V × 100 A × 13811.2 V) / 66.4 V
= 720.5 watts
Any calculated power value below this cut-off will not be displayed. As well, the three-phase energy data will not accumulate if the total power from all three phases does not exceed the power cut-off.
NOTE
Lower the VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL and CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL with care as the relay accepts lower signals
as valid measurements. Unless dictated otherwise by a specific application, the default settings of “0.02
pu” for CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL and “1.0 V” for VOLTAGE CUT-OFF LEVEL are recommended.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-9
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.3 CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR DATA LOGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR ARC AMPS 2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR DEMAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CLEAR ENERGY:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
RESET UNAUTH ACCESS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
CLEAR DIR I/O STATS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand.
Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
CLEAR RELAY
RECORDS
5
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS
Selected records can be cleared from user-programmable conditions with FlexLogic™ operands. Assigning user-programmable pushbuttons to clear specific records are typical applications for these commands. Since C60 responds to rising
edges of the configured FlexLogic™ operands, they must be asserted for at least 50 ms to take effect.
Clearing records with user-programmable operands is not protected by the command password. However, user-programmable pushbuttons are protected by the command password. Thus, if they are used to clear records, the user-programmable pushbuttons can provide extra security if required.
For example, to assign User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to clear demand records, the following settings should be
applied.
1.
Assign the clear demand function to Pushbutton 1 by making the following change in the SETTINGS
CLEAR RELAY RECORDS menu:
CLEAR DEMAND:
2.
PRODUCT SETUP
“PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Set the properties for User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PRODUCT
SETUP
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.20 s”
5-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See below.
NETWORK
See page 5–12.
MODBUS PROTOCOL
See page 5–12.
DNP PROTOCOL
See page 5–12.
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
See page 5–15.
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
See page 5–15.
TFTP PROTOCOL
See page 5–15.
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
See page 5–16.
SNTP PROTOCOL
5
See page 5–17.
b) SERIAL PORTS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
SERIAL PORTS
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 PARITY:
None
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200. Only
active if CPU 9A is ordered.
Range: None, Odd, Even
Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM1 RESPONSE
MIN TIME:
0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
Only active if CPU Type 9A is ordered
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 BAUD
RATE: 19200
Range: 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 14400, 19200,
28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, 115200
RS485 COM2 PARITY:
None
Range: None, Odd, Even
MESSAGE
RS485 COM2 RESPONSE
MIN TIME:
0 ms
Range: 0 to 1000 ms in steps of 10
MESSAGE
SERIAL PORTS
RS485 COM1 BAUD
RATE: 19200
The C60 is equipped with up to 3 independent serial communication ports. The faceplate RS232 port is intended for local
use and is fixed at 19200 baud and no parity. The rear COM1 port type will depend on the CPU ordered: it may be either an
Ethernet or an RS485 port. The rear COM2 port is RS485. The RS485 ports have settings for baud rate and parity. It is
important that these parameters agree with the settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to
these ports. Any of these ports may be connected to a personal computer running EnerVista UR Setup. This software is
used for downloading or uploading setting files, viewing measured parameters, and upgrading the relay firmware to the latest version. A maximum of 32 relays can be daisy-chained and connected to a DCS, PLC or PC using the RS485 ports.
NOTE
For each RS485 port, the minimum time before the port will transmit after receiving data from a host can be
set. This feature allows operation with hosts which hold the RS485 transmitter active for some time after
each transmission.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-11
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
c) NETWORK
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK
IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
MESSAGE
SUBNET IP MASK:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
MESSAGE
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
MESSAGE
OSI NETWORK
ADDRESS (NSAP)
MESSAGE
ETHERNET OPERATION
MODE: Half-Duplex
NETWORK
Range: Press the MESSAGE
key to enter the OSI
NETWORK ADDRESS. Only active if CPU Type
9C or 9D is ordered.
Range: Half-Duplex, Full-Duplex
Only active if CPU Type 9C or 9D is ordered.
These messages appear only if the C60 is ordered with an Ethernet card.
The IP addresses are used with DNP/Network, Modbus/TCP, MMS/UCA2, IEC 60870-5-104, TFTP, and HTTP protocols.
The NSAP address is used with the MMS/UCA2 protocol over the OSI (CLNP/TP4) stack only. Each network protocol has
a setting for the TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER. These settings are used only in advanced network configurations and should normally be left at their default values, but may be changed if required (for example, to allow access to multiple URs behind a
router). By setting a different TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER for a given protocol on each UR, the router can map the URs to the
same external IP address. The client software (URPC, for example) must be configured to use the correct port number if
these settings are used.
5
When the NSAP address, any TCP/UDP Port Number, or any User Map setting (when used with DNP) is changed,
it will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (OFF/ON).
NOTE
Do not set more than one protocol to use the same TCP/UDP PORT NUMBER, as this will result in unreliable
operation of those protocols.
WARNING
d) MODBUS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
COMMUNICATIONS
MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE
ADDRESS: 254
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
MODBUS TCP PORT
NUMBER:
502
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
The serial communication ports utilize the Modbus protocol, unless configured for DNP operation (see the DNP Protocol
description below). This allows the EnerVista UR Setup software to be used. The UR operates as a Modbus slave device
only. When using Modbus protocol on the RS232 port, the C60 will respond regardless of the MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS programmed. For the RS485 ports each C60 must have a unique address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address
which all Modbus slave devices listen to. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the same
address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to the link should use the next higher
address starting at 1. Refer to Appendix B for more information on the Modbus protocol.
e) DNP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DNP PROTOCOL
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5-12
COMMUNICATIONS
DNP PROTOCOL
DNP PORT:
NONE
Range: NONE, COM1 - RS485, COM2 - RS485, FRONT
PANEL - RS232, NETWORK
DNP ADDRESS:
255
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
DNP NETWORK
CLIENT ADDRESSES
Range: Press the MESSAGE
key to enter the DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESSES
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
NUMBER: 20000
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
TIMEOUT: 5 s
Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
MAX RETRIES: 10
Range: 1 to 255 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEST ADDRESS: 1
Range: 0 to 65519 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
USER MAP FOR DNP
ANALOGS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF SOURCES
IN ANALOG LIST: 1
Range: 1 to 4 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
DNP POWER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER SCALE
FACTOR: 1
Range: 0.01. 0.1, 1, 10, 100, 1000
MESSAGE
DNP CURRENT DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP VOLTAGE DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP POWER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP ENERGY DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP OTHER DEFAULT
DEADBAND: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP TIME SYNC IIN
PERIOD: 1440 min
Range: 1 to 10080 min. in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT
SIZE: 240
Range: 30 to 2048 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
DNP BINARY INPUTS
USER MAP
The C60 supports the Distributed Network Protocol (DNP) version 3.0. The C60 can be used as a DNP slave device connected to a single DNP master (usually an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains one set of DNP data
change buffers and connection information, only one DNP master should actively communicate with the C60 at one time.
The DNP PORT setting selects the communications port assigned to the DNP protocol; only a single port can be assigned.
Once DNP is assigned to a serial port, the Modbus protocol is disabled on that port. Note that COM1 can be used only in
non-ethernet UR relays. When this setting is set to “Network”, the DNP protocol can be used over either TCP/IP or UDP/IP.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-13
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Refer to Appendix E for more information on the DNP protocol. The DNP ADDRESS setting is the DNP slave address. This
number identifies the C60 on a DNP communications link. Each DNP slave should be assigned a unique address. The DNP
NETWORK CLIENT ADDRESS setting can force the C60 to respond to a maximum of five specific DNP masters.
The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE FUNCTION should be “Disabled” for RS485 applications since there is no collision avoidance
mechanism. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE TIMEOUT sets the time the C60 waits for a DNP master to confirm an unsolicited
response. The DNP UNSOL RESPONSE MAX RETRIES setting determines the number of times the C60 retransmits an unsolicited response without receiving confirmation from the master; a value of “255” allows infinite re-tries. The DNP UNSOL
RESPONSE DEST ADDRESS is the DNP address to which all unsolicited responses are sent. The IP address to which unsolicited responses are sent is determined by the C60 from the current TCP connection or the most recent UDP message.
The USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting allows the large pre-defined Analog Inputs points list to be replaced by the much
smaller Modbus User Map. This can be useful for users wishing to read only selected Analog Input points from the C60.
See Appendix E for more information.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the Analog Inputs points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that
are configured. This setting is relevant only when the User Map is not used.
The DNP SCALE FACTOR settings are numbers used to scale Analog Input point values. These settings group the C60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the scale factor for all Analog
Input points of that type. For example, if the DNP VOLTAGE SCALE FACTOR setting is set to a value of 1000, all DNP Analog
Input points that are voltages will be returned with values 1000 times smaller (e.g. a value of 72000 V on the C60 will be
returned as 72). These settings are useful when Analog Input values must be adjusted to fit within certain ranges in DNP
masters. Note that a scale factor of 0.1 is equivalent to a multiplier of 10 (i.e. the value will be 10 times larger).
5
The DNP DEFAULT DEADBAND settings determine when to trigger unsolicited responses containing Analog Input data. These
settings group the C60 Analog Input data into types: current, voltage, power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the
default deadband value for all Analog Input points of that type. For example, to trigger unsolicited responses from the C60
when any current values change by 15 A, the DNP CURRENT DEFAULT DEADBAND setting should be set to “15”. Note that
these settings are the deadband default values. DNP Object 34 points can be used to change deadband values, from the
default, for each individual DNP Analog Input point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the C60, the default
deadbands will be in effect.
The DNP TIME SYNC IIN PERIOD setting determines how often the Need Time Internal Indication (IIN) bit is set by the C60.
Changing this time allows the DNP master to send time synchronization commands more or less often, as required.
The DNP MESSAGE FRAGMENT SIZE setting determines the size, in bytes, at which message fragmentation occurs. Large
fragment sizes allow for more efficient throughput; smaller fragment sizes cause more application layer confirmations to be
necessary which can provide for more robust data transfer over noisy communication channels.
The DNP BINARY INPUTS USER MAP setting allows for the creation of a custom DNP Binary Inputs points list. The default DNP
Binary Inputs list on the C60 contains 928 points representing various binary states (contact inputs and outputs, virtual
inputs and outputs, protection element states, etc.). If not all of these points are required in the DNP master, a custom
Binary Inputs points list can be created by selecting up to 58 blocks of 16 points. Each block represents 16 Binary Input
points. Block 1 represents Binary Input points 0 to 15, block 2 represents Binary Input points 16 to 31, block 3 represents
Binary Input points 32 to 47, etc. The minimum number of Binary Input points that can be selected is 16 (1 block). If all of
the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings are set to “Not Used”, the standard list of 928 points will be in effect. The C60 will form the
Binary Inputs points list from the BIN INPUT BLOCK X settings up to the first occurrence of a setting value of “Not Used”.
NOTE
5-14
When using the User Maps for DNP data points (Analog Inputs and/or Binary Inputs) for relays with ethernet installed, check the “DNP Points Lists” C60 web page to ensure the desired points lists are created.
This web page can be viewed using a web browser by entering the C60 IP address to access the C60 “Main
Menu”, then by selecting the “Device Information Menu” > “DNP Points Lists” menu item.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
f) UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE
TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1. See UserSt Bit Pairs in the
Remote Outputs section of this Chapter.
MESSAGE
UCA LOGICAL DEVICE:
UCADevice
Range: Up to 16 alphanumeric characters representing
the name of the UCA logical device.
UCA/MMS TCP PORT
NUMBER:
102
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GOOSE FUNCTION:
Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL
The C60 supports the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) protocol as specified by the Utility Communication
Architecture (UCA). UCA/MMS is supported over two protocol stacks: TCP/IP over ethernet and TP4/CLNP (OSI) over ethernet. The C60 operates as a UCA/MMS server. The Remote Inputs/Outputs section in this chapter describe the peer-topeer GOOSE message scheme.
The UCA LOGICAL DEVICE setting represents the MMS domain name (UCA logical device) where all UCA objects are
located. The GOOSE FUNCTION setting allows for the blocking of GOOSE messages from the C60. This can be used during
testing or to prevent the relay from sending GOOSE messages during normal operation. The GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS setting
selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide the state of the UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS data item. Refer to Appendix C:
UCA/MMS Communications for additional details on the C60 UCA/MMS support.
g) WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
WEB SERVER
HTTP PROTOCOL
COMMUNICATIONS
WEB SERVER HTTP PROTOCOL
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
HTTP TCP PORT
NUMBER:
80
The C60 contains an embedded web server and is capable of transferring web pages to a web browser such as Microsoft
Internet Explorer or Netscape Navigator. This feature is available only if the C60 has the ethernet option installed. The web
pages are organized as a series of menus that can be accessed starting at the C60 “Main Menu”. Web pages are available
showing DNP and IEC 60870-5-104 points lists, Modbus registers, Event Records, Fault Reports, etc. The web pages can
be accessed by connecting the UR and a computer to an ethernet network. The Main Menu will be displayed in the web
browser on the computer simply by entering the IP address of the C60 into the “Address” box on the web browser.
h) TFTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
TFTP PROTOCOL
TFTP MAIN UDP PORT
NUMBER:
69
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 1
NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TFTP DATA UDP PORT 2
NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TFTP PROTOCOL
The Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) can be used to transfer files from the UR over a network. The C60 operates as a
TFTP server. TFTP client software is available from various sources, including Microsoft Windows NT. The dir.txt file
obtained from the C60 contains a list and description of all available files (event records, oscillography, etc.).
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-15
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
i) IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
IEC TCP PORT
NUMBER: 2404
Range: 1 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC COMMON ADDRESS
OF ASDU:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC CYCLIC DATA
PERIOD:
60 s
Range: 1 to 65535 s in steps of 1
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF SOURCES
IN MMENC1 LIST: 1
Range: 1 to 4 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC VOLTAGE DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC POWER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC ENERGY DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC OTHER DEFAULT
THRESHOLD: 30000
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
IEC 60870-5-104
PROTOCOL
5
The C60 supports the IEC 60870-5-104 protocol. The C60 can be used as an IEC 60870-5-104 slave device connected to
a single master (usually either an RTU or a SCADA master station). Since the C60 maintains one set of IEC 60870-5-104
data change buffers, only one master should actively communicate with the C60 at one time. For situations where a second
master is active in a “hot standby” configuration, the UR supports a second IEC 60870-5-104 connection providing the
standby master sends only IEC 60870-5-104 Test Frame Activation messages for as long as the primary master is active.
The NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting allows the selection of the number of current/voltage source values that
are included in the M_ME_NC_1 (Measured value, short floating point) Analog points list. This allows the list to be customized to contain data for only the sources that are configured.
The IEC ------- DEFAULT THRESHOLD settings are the values used by the UR to determine when to trigger spontaneous
responses containing M_ME_NC_1 analog data. These settings group the UR analog data into types: current, voltage,
power, energy, and other. Each setting represents the default threshold value for all M_ME_NC_1 analog points of that
type. For example, in order to trigger spontaneous responses from the UR when any current values change by 15 A, the
IEC CURRENT DEFAULT THRESHOLD setting should be set to 15. Note that these settings are the default values of the deadbands. P_ME_NC_1 (Parameter of measured value, short floating point value) points can be used to change threshold values, from the default, for each individual M_ME_NC_1 analog point. Whenever power is removed and re-applied to the UR,
the default thresholds will be in effect.
The IEC 60870-5-104 and DNP protocols can not be used at the same time. When the IEC 60870-5-104 FUNCsetting is set to “Enabled”, the DNP protocol will not be operational. When this setting is changed it
will not become active until power to the relay has been cycled (Off/On).
TION
NOTE
5-16
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
j) SNTP PROTOCOL
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
SNTP PROTOCOL
SNTP FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
SNTP SERVER IP ADDR:
0.0.0.0
Range: Standard IP address format
MESSAGE
SNTP UDP PORT
NUMBER: 123
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SNTP PROTOCOL
The C60 supports the Simple Network Time Protocol specified in RFC-2030. With SNTP, the C60 can obtain clock time
over an Ethernet network. The C60 acts as an SNTP client to receive time values from an SNTP/NTP server, usually a dedicated product using a GPS receiver to provide an accurate time. Both unicast and broadcast SNTP are supported.
If SNTP functionality is enabled at the same time as IRIG-B, the IRIG-B signal provides the time value to the C60 clock for
as long as a valid signal is present. If the IRIG-B signal is removed, the time obtained from the SNTP server is used. If
either SNTP or IRIG-B is enabled, the C60 clock value cannot be changed using the front panel keypad.
To use SNTP in unicast mode, SNTP SERVER IP ADDR must be set to the SNTP/NTP server IP address. Once this address is
set and SNTP FUNCTION is “Enabled”, the C60 attempts to obtain time values from the SNTP/NTP server. Since many time
values are obtained and averaged, it generally takes three to four minutes until the C60 clock is closely synchronized with
the SNTP/NTP server. It may take up to two minutes for the C60 to signal an SNTP self-test error if the server is offline.
To use SNTP in broadcast mode, set the SNTP SERVER IP ADDR setting to “0.0.0.0” and SNTP FUNCTION to “Enabled”. The
C60 then listens to SNTP messages sent to the “all ones” broadcast address for the subnet. The C60 waits up to eighteen
minutes (>1024 seconds) without receiving an SNTP broadcast message before signaling an SNTP self-test error.
5
The UR does not support the multicast or anycast SNTP functionality.
5.2.5 MODBUS USER MAP
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
MODBUS USER MAP
MODBUS USER MAP
ADDRESS
VALUE:
1:
0
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
↓
MESSAGE
ADDRESS 256:
VALUE:
0
The Modbus User Map provides read-only access for up to 256 registers. To obtain a memory map value, enter the desired
address in the ADDRESS line (this value must be converted from hex to decimal format). The corresponding value is displayed in the VALUE line. A value of “0” in subsequent register ADDRESS lines automatically returns values for the previous
ADDRESS lines incremented by “1”. An address value of “0” in the initial register means “none” and values of “0” will be displayed for all registers. Different ADDRESS values can be entered as required in any of the register positions.
These settings can also be used with the DNP protocol. See the DNP Analog Input Points section in Appendix E for details.
NOTE
5.2.6 REAL TIME CLOCK
PATH: SETTINGS
REAL TIME
CLOCK
PRODUCT SETUP
REAL TIME CLOCK
IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE:
None
Range: None, DC Shift, Amplitude Modulated
The date and time for the relay clock can be synchronized to other relays using an IRIG-B signal. It has the same accuracy
as an electronic watch, approximately ±1 minute per month. An IRIG-B signal may be connected to the relay to synchronize
the clock to a known time base and to other relays. If an IRIG-B signal is used, only the current year needs to be entered.
See also the COMMANDS SET DATE AND TIME menu for manually setting the relay clock.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-17
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.7 FAULT REPORT
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
FAULT REPORT
MESSAGE
FAULT REPORT
FAULT REPORT
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
FAULT REPORT TRIG:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
The fault report stores data, in non-volatile memory, pertinent to an event when triggered. The captured data includes:
•
Name of the relay, programmed by the user
•
Date and time of trigger
•
Name of trigger (specific operand)
•
Active setting group
•
Pre-fault current and voltage phasors (one-quarter cycle before the trigger)
•
Fault current and voltage phasors (three-quarter cycle after the trigger)
•
Target Messages that are set at the time of triggering
•
Events (9 before trigger and 7 after trigger)
The captured data also includes the fault type and the distance to the fault location, as well as the reclose shot number
(when applicable) The Fault Locator does not report fault type or location if the source VTs are connected in the Delta configuration.
5
The trigger can be any FlexLogic™ operand, but in most applications it is expected to be the same operand, usually a virtual output, that is used to drive an output relay to trip a breaker. To prevent the overwriting of fault events, the disturbance
detector should not be used to trigger a fault report.
If a number of protection elements are ORed to create a fault report trigger, the first operation of any element causing the
OR gate output to become high triggers a fault report. However, If other elements operate during the fault and the first operated element has not been reset (the OR gate output is still high), the fault report is not triggered again. Considering the
reset time of protection elements, there is very little chance that fault report can be triggered twice in this manner. As the
fault report must capture a usable amount of pre and post-fault data, it can not be triggered faster than every 20 ms.
Each fault report is stored as a file; the relay capacity is ten files. An eleventh trigger overwrites the oldest file. The operand
selected as the fault report trigger automatically triggers an oscillography record which can also be triggered independently.
EnerVista UR Setup is required to view all captured data. The relay faceplate display can be used to view the date and time
of trigger, the fault type, the distance location of the fault, and the reclose shot number
The FAULT REPORT SOURCE setting selects the Source for input currents and voltages and disturbance detection. The FAULT
REPORT TRIG setting assigns the FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection element/elements requiring operational
fault location calculations. The distance to fault calculations are initiated by this signal.
See also SETTINGS SYSTEM SETUP
FAULT REPORTS menu.
5-18
LINE
menu for specifying line characteristics and the ACTUAL VALUES
C60 Breaker Management Relay
RECORDS
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.8 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
NUMBER OF RECORDS:
15
Range: 1 to 64 in steps of 1
TRIGGER MODE:
Automatic Overwrite
Range: Automatic Overwrite, Protected
TRIGGER POSITION:
50%
Range: 0 to 100 in steps of 1
TRIGGER SOURCE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
AC INPUT WAVEFORMS:
16 samples/cycle
Range: Off; 8, 16, 32, 64 samples/cycle
Range: 2 to 63 channels
DIGITAL CHANNELS
DIGITAL CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
↓
DIGITAL CHANNEL 63:
Off
5
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: 1 to 16 channels
ANALOG CHANNELS
ANALOG CHANNEL 1:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
↓
ANALOG CHANNEL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter
See Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
Oscillography records contain waveforms captured at the sampling rate as well as other relay data at the point of trigger.
Oscillography records are triggered by a programmable FlexLogic™ operand. Multiple oscillography records may be captured simultaneously.
The NUMBER OF RECORDS is selectable, but the number of cycles captured in a single record varies considerably based on
other factors such as sample rate and the number of operational CT/VT modules. There is a fixed amount of data storage
for oscillography; the more data captured, the less the number of cycles captured per record. See the ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
OSCILLOGRAPHY menu to view the number of cycles captured per record. The following table provides example configurations with corresponding cycles/record.
NOTE
As mentioned above, the cycles/record values shown in the table below are dependent on a number of factors, including the number of modules and which relay features are enabled. The cyles/record values below
are for illustration purposes only – the actual values displayed may differ significantly.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-19
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
Table 5–1: OSCILLOGRAPHY CYCLES/RECORD EXAMPLE
# RECORDS
# CT/VTS
SAMPLE
RATE
# DIGITALS
# ANALOGS
CYCLES/
RECORD
1
1
8
0
0
2049.0
1
1
16
16
0
922.0
8
1
16
16
0
276.0
8
1
16
16
4
263.0
8
2
16
16
4
93.5
8
2
16
64
16
93.5
8
2
32
64
16
57.6
8
2
64
64
16
32.3
32
2
64
64
16
9.5
A new record may automatically overwrite an older record if TRIGGER MODE is set to “Automatic Overwrite”.
The TRIGGER POSITION is programmable as a percent of the total buffer size (e.g. 10%, 50%, 75%, etc.). A trigger position
of 25% consists of 25% pre- and 75% post-trigger data.
The TRIGGER SOURCE is always captured in oscillography and may be any FlexLogic™ parameter (element state, contact
input, virtual output, etc.). The relay sampling rate is 64 samples per cycle.
The AC INPUT WAVEFORMS setting determines the sampling rate at which AC input signals (i.e. current and voltage) are
stored. Reducing the sampling rate allows longer records to be stored. This setting has no effect on the internal sampling
rate of the relay which is always 64 samples per cycle, i.e. it has no effect on the fundamental calculations of the device.
5
An ANALOG CHANNEL setting selects the metering actual value recorded in an oscillography trace. The length of each oscillography trace depends in part on the number of parameters selected here. Parameters set to ‘Off’ are ignored. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: (a) the type of relay, (b) the type and number of CT/VT hardware modules
installed, and (c) the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup, the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is presented in Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to expedite the selection of the
parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of parameters via the relay keypad/
display - entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding parameter to be displayed.
All eight CT/VT module channels are stored in the oscillography file. The CT/VT module channels are named as follows:
<slot_letter><terminal_number>—<I or V><phase A, B, or C, or 4th input>
The fourth current input in a bank is called IG, and the fourth voltage input in a bank is called VX. For example, F2-IB designates the IB signal on Terminal 2 of the CT/VT module in slot F. If there are no CT/VT modules and Analog Input modules,
no analog traces will appear in the file; only the digital traces will appear.
When the NUMBER OF RECORDS setting is altered, all oscillography records will be CLEARED.
WARNING
5-20
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.9 DATA LOGGER
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
Range: 1 sec; 1 min, 5 min, 10 min, 15 min, 20 min, 30
min, 60 min
DATA LOGGER RATE:
1 min
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL
Off
1:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL
Off
2:
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
MESSAGE
DATA LOGGER CHNL 16:
Off
Range: Off, any FlexAnalog parameter. See Appendix A:
FlexAnalog Parameters for complete list.
DATA LOGGER CONFIG:
0 CHNL x
0.0 DAYS
Range: Not applicable - shows computed data only
MESSAGE
↓
The data logger samples and records up to 16 analog parameters at a user-defined sampling rate. This recorded data may
be downloaded to the EnerVista UR Setup software and displayed with ‘parameters’ on the vertical axis and ‘time’ on the
horizontal axis. All data is stored in non-volatile memory, meaning that the information is retained when power to the relay is
lost.
For a fixed sampling rate, the data logger can be configured with a few channels over a long period or a larger number of
channels for a shorter period. The relay automatically partitions the available memory between the channels in use.
5
Changing any setting affecting Data Logger operation will clear any data that is currently in the log.
NOTE
•
DATA LOGGER RATE: This setting selects the time interval at which the actual value data will be recorded.
•
DATA LOGGER CHNL 1(16): This setting selects the metering actual value that is to be recorded in Channel 1(16) of
the data log. The parameters available in a given relay are dependent on: the type of relay, the type and number of CT/
VT hardware modules installed, and the type and number of Analog Input hardware modules installed. Upon startup,
the relay will automatically prepare the parameter list. A list of all possible analog metering actual value parameters is
shown in Appendix A: FlexAnalog Parameters. The parameter index number shown in any of the tables is used to
expedite the selection of the parameter on the relay display. It can be quite time-consuming to scan through the list of
parameters via the relay keypad/display – entering this number via the relay keypad will cause the corresponding
parameter to be displayed.
•
DATA LOGGER CONFIG: This display presents the total amount of time the Data Logger can record the channels not
selected to “Off” without over-writing old data.
5.2.10 DEMAND
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
CRNT DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,
Rolling Demand
MESSAGE
POWER DEMAND METHOD:
Thermal Exponential
Range: Thermal Exponential, Block Interval,
Rolling Demand
DEMAND INTERVAL:
15 MIN
Range: 5, 10, 15, 20, 30, 60 minutes
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DEMAND TRIGGER:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Note: for calculation using Method 2a
DEMAND
GE Multilin
DEMAND
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-21
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The relay measures current demand on each phase, and three-phase demand for real, reactive, and apparent power. Current and Power methods can be chosen separately for the convenience of the user. Settings are provided to allow the user
to emulate some common electrical utility demand measuring techniques, for statistical or control purposes. If the CRNT
DEMAND METHOD is set to "Block Interval" and the DEMAND TRIGGER is set to “Off”, Method 2 is used (see below). If
DEMAND TRIGGER is assigned to any other FlexLogic™ operand, Method 2a is used (see below).
The relay can be set to calculate demand by any of three methods as described below:
CALCULATION METHOD 1: THERMAL EXPONENTIAL
This method emulates the action of an analog peak recording thermal demand meter. The relay measures the quantity
(RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) on each phase every second, and assumes the circuit quantity remains at this value until updated by the next measurement. It calculates the 'thermal demand equivalent' based on the
following equation:
d(t) = D( 1 – e
where:
– kt
)
(EQ 5.6)
d = demand value after applying input quantity for time t (in minutes)
D = input quantity (constant)
k = 2.3 / thermal 90% response time.
The 90% thermal response time characteristic of 15 minutes is illustrated below. A setpoint establishes the time to reach
90% of a steady-state value, just as the response time of an analog instrument. A steady state value applied for twice the
response time will indicate 99% of the value.
Demand (%)
100
5
80
60
40
20
0
0
3
6
9
12
15
18
21
24
27
30
Time (min)
Figure 5–2: THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC
CALCULATION METHOD 2: BLOCK INTERVAL
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, starting daily at 00:00:00 (i.e. 12:00 am). The 1440 minutes per day is divided into
the number of blocks as set by the programmed time interval. Each new value of demand becomes available at the end of
each time interval.
CALCULATION METHOD 2a: BLOCK INTERVAL (with Start Demand Interval Logic Trigger)
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the interval between successive Start Demand Interval logic input pulses. Each new value of demand becomes available at
the end of each pulse. Assign a FlexLogic™ operand to the DEMAND TRIGGER setting to program the input for the new
demand interval pulses.
NOTE
If no trigger is assigned in the DEMAND TRIGGER setting and the CRNT DEMAND METHOD is "Block Interval", use calculating method #2. If a trigger is assigned, the maximum allowed time between 2 trigger signals is 60 minutes. If
no trigger signal appears within 60 minutes, demand calculations are performed and available and the algorithm
resets and starts the new cycle of calculations. The minimum required time for trigger contact closure is 20 μs.
CALCULATION METHOD 3: ROLLING DEMAND
This method calculates a linear average of the quantity (RMS current, real power, reactive power, or apparent power) over
the programmed demand time interval, in the same way as Block Interval. The value is updated every minute and indicates
the demand over the time interval just preceding the time of update.
5-22
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5.2.11 USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LEDS
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
LED TEST
See below
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 2
See page 5–25.
See page 5–25.
↓
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 48
b) LED TEST
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
LED TEST
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
LED TEST
LED TEST FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
LED TEST CONTROL:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
5
When enabled, the LED Test can be initiated from any digital input or user-programmable condition such as user-programmable pushbutton. The control operand is configured under the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The test covers all LEDs,
including the LEDs of the optional user-programmable pushbuttons.
The test consists of three stages.
Stage 1: All 62 LEDs on the relay are illuminated. This is a quick test to verify if any of the LEDs is “burned”. This stage
lasts as long as the control input is on, up to a maximum of 1 minute. After 1 minute, the test will end.
Stage 2: All the LEDs are turned off, and then one LED at a time turns on for 1 second, then back off. The test routine
starts at the top left panel, moving from the top to bottom of each LED column. This test checks for hardware failures
that lead to more than one LED being turned on from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
Stage 3: All the LEDs are turned on. One LED at a time turns off for 1 second, then back on. The test routine starts at
the top left panel moving from top to bottom of each column of the LEDs. This test checks for hardware failures that
lead to more than one LED being turned off from a single logic point. This stage can be interrupted at any time.
When testing is in progress, the LEDs are controlled by the test sequence, rather than the protection, control, and monitoring features. However, the LED control mechanism accepts all the changes to LED states generated by the relay and
stores the actual LED states (On or Off) in memory. When the test completes, the LEDs reflect the actual state resulting
from relay response during testing. The Reset pushbutton will not clear any targets when the LED Test is in progress.
A dedicated FlexLogic™ operand, LED TEST IN PROGRESS, is set for the duration of the test. When the test sequence is initiated, the LED Test Initiated event is stored in the Event Recorder.
The entire test procedure is user-controlled. In particular, Stage 1 can last as long as necessary, and Stages 2 and 3 can be
interrupted. The test responds to the position and rising edges of the control input defined by the LED TEST CONTROL setting. The control pulses must last at least 250 ms to take effect. The following diagram explains how the test is executed.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-23
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
READY TO TEST
rising edge of the
control input
Start the software image of
the LEDs
Reset the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
Restore the LED states
from the software image
Set the
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
operand
control input is on
STAGE 1
(all LEDs on)
time-out
(1 minute)
dropping edge of the
control input
Wait 1 second
STAGE 2
(one LED on at a time)
5
Wait 1 second
STAGE 3
(one LED off at a time)
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge of the
control input
rising edge
of the control
input
842011A1.CDR
Figure 5–3: LED TEST SEQUENCE
Application Example 1:
Assume one needs to check if any of the LEDs is “burned” through User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The following settings should be applied.
Configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-
PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
Configure the LED test to recognize User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following entries in the SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
LED TEST menu:
LED TEST FUNCTION: “Enabled”
LED TEST CONTROL: “PUSHBUTTON
1 ON”
The test will be initiated when the User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 is pressed. The pushbutton should remain pressed for
as long as the LEDs are being visually inspected. When finished, the pushbutton should be released. The relay will then
automatically start Stage 2. At this point forward, test may be aborted by pressing the pushbutton.
Application Example 2:
Assume one needs to check if any LEDs are “burned” as well as exercise one LED at a time to check for other failures. This
is to be performed via User-Programmable Pushbutton 1.
After applying the settings in Application Example 1, hold down the pushbutton as long as necessary to test all LEDs. Next,
release the pushbutton to automatically start Stage 2. Once Stage 2 has started, the pushbutton can be released. When
Stage 2 is completed, Stage 3 will automatically start. The test may be aborted at any time by pressing the pushbutton.
5-24
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
c) TRIP AND ALARM LEDS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
MESSAGE
TRIP & ALARM LEDS
TRIP LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
ALARM LED INPUT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
The Trip and Alarm LEDs are on LED Panel 1. Each indicator can be programmed to become illuminated when the
selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
d) USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
LED 1
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LED 1(48)
LED 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
LED 1 TYPE:
Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
There are 48 amber LEDs across the relay faceplate LED panels. Each of these indicators can be programmed to illuminate when the selected FlexLogic™ operand is in the Logic 1 state.
•
LEDs 1 through 24 inclusive are on LED Panel 2; LEDs 25 through 48 inclusive are on LED Panel 3.
Refer to the LED Indicators section in Chapter 4 for the locations of these indexed LEDs. This menu selects the operands
to control these LEDs. Support for applying user-customized labels to these LEDs is provided. If the LED X TYPE setting is
“Self-Reset” (default setting), the LED illumination will track the state of the selected LED operand. If the LED X TYPE setting
is ‘Latched’, the LED, once lit, remains so until reset by the faceplate RESET button, from a remote device via a communications channel, or from any programmed operand, even if the LED operand state de-asserts.
Table 5–2: RECOMMENDED SETTINGS FOR LED PANEL 2 LABELS
SETTING
PARAMETER
SETTING
PARAMETER
LED 1 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
LED 13 Operand
Off
LED 2 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 2
LED 14 Operand
BREAKER 2 OPEN
LED 3 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 3
LED 15 Operand
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
LED 4 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 4
LED 16 Operand
BREAKER 2 TROUBLE
LED 5 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 5
LED 17 Operand
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
LED 6 Operand
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
LED 18 Operand
SYNC 2 SYNC OP
LED 7 Operand
Off
LED 19 Operand
Off
LED 8 Operand
Off
LED 20 Operand
Off
LED 9 Operand
BREAKER 1 OPEN
LED 21 Operand
AR ENABLED
LED 10 Operand
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
LED 22 Operand
AR DISABLED
LED 11 Operand
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
LED 23 Operand
AR RIP
LED 12 Operand
Off
LED 24 Operand
AR LO
Refer to the Control of Setting Groups example in the Control Elements section of this chapter for group activation.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-25
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.12 USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DIRECT RING BREAK
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with Direct I/O Module.
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
MESSAGE
PRI. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
MESSAGE
SEC. ETHERNET FAIL
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type D.
BATTERY FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SNTP FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
Valid for units equipped with CPU Type C or D.
IRIG-B FAIL
FUNCTION: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled.
MESSAGE
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
SELF TESTS
5
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
All major self-test alarms are reported automatically with their corresponding FlexLogic™ operands, events, and targets.
Most of the Minor Alarms can be disabled if desired.
When in the “Disabled” mode, minor alarms will not assert a FlexLogic™ operand, write to the event recorder, display target
messages. Moreover, they will not trigger the ANY MINOR ALARM or ANY SELF-TEST messages. When in the “Enabled” mode,
minor alarms continue to function along with other major and minor alarms. Refer to the Relay Self-Tests section in Chapter
7 for additional information on major and minor self-test alarms.
5.2.13 CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1(7)
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
The three standard pushbuttons located on the top left panel of the faceplate are user-programmable and can be used for
various applications such as performing an LED test, switching setting groups, and invoking and scrolling though user-programmable displays, etc. Firmware revisions 3.2x and older use these three pushbuttons for manual breaker control. This
functionality has been retained – if the Breaker Control feature is configured to use the three pushbuttons, they cannot be
used as user-programmable control pushbuttons. The location of the control pushbuttons in shown below.
5-26
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
STATUS
EVENT CAUSE
IN SERVICE
VOLTAGE
TROUBLE
CURRENT
TEST MODE
FREQUENCY
TRIP
OTHER
ALARM
PHASE A
PICKUP
PHASE B
RESET
THREE
STANDARD
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 1
USER 2
PHASE C
NEUTRAL/GROUND
USER 3
USER 4
FOUR EXTRA
OPTIONAL
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
USER 5
USER 6
USER 7
842733A2.CDR
Figure 5–4: CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
The control pushbuttons are typically not used for critical operations. As such, they are not protected by the control password. However, by supervising their output operands, the user can dynamically enable or disable the control pushbuttons
for security reasons.
Each control pushbutton asserts its own FlexLogic™ operand, CONTROL PUSHBTN 1(7) ON. These operands should be
configured appropriately to perform the desired function. The operand remains asserted as long as the pushbutton is
pressed and resets when the pushbutton is released. A dropout delay of 100 ms is incorporated to ensure fast pushbutton
manipulation will be recognized by various features that may use control pushbuttons as inputs.
An event is logged in the Event Record (as per user setting) when a control pushbutton is pressed; no event is logged when
the pushbutton is released. The faceplate keys (including control keys) cannot be operated simultaneously – a given key
must be released before the next one can be pressed.
The control pushbuttons become user-programmable only if the Breaker Control feature is not configured for manual control via the User 1 through User 3 pushbuttons as shown below. If configured for manual control, the Breaker Control feature typically uses the larger, optional user-programmable pushbuttons, making the control pushbuttons available for other
user applications.
When applicable
SETTING
GE Multilin
{
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON
1 FUNCTION:
Enabled=1
SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 1/
BREAKER 1 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
Enabled=1
SYSTEM SETUP/
BREAKERS/BREAKER 2/
BREAKER 2 PUSHBUTTON
CONTROL:
AND
RUN
OFF
ON
TIMER
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
100 msec
CONTROL PUSHBTN 1 ON
842010A2.CDR
Enabled=1
Figure 5–5: CONTROL PUSHBUTTON LOGIC
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-27
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.14 USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT:
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT
TIME: 0.00 s
Range: 0 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
TARGETS: Disabled
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PUSHBUTTON 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
USER PUSHBUTTON 1(12)
The C60 has 12 optional user-programmable pushbuttons available, each configured via 12 identical menus. The pushbuttons provide an easy and error-free method of manually entering digital information (On, Off) into FlexLogic™ equations as
well as protection and control elements. Typical applications include breaker control, autorecloser blocking, ground protection blocking, and setting groups changes.
The user-configurable pushbuttons are shown below. They can be custom labeled with a factory-provided template, available online at http://www.GEindustrial.com/multilin.
1
USER LABEL
2
USER LABEL
3
USER LABEL
4
USER LABEL
5
USER LABEL
6
USER LABEL
7
USER LABEL
8
USER LABEL
9
USER LABEL
10
USER LABEL
11
USER LABEL
12
USER LABEL
Figure 5–6: USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
Each pushbutton asserts its own On and Off FlexLogic™ operands, respectively. FlexLogic™ operands should be used to
program desired pushbutton actions. The operand names are PUSHBUTTON 1 ON and PUSHBUTTON 1 OFF.
A pushbutton may be programmed to latch or self-reset. An indicating LED next to each pushbutton signals the present status of the corresponding "On" FlexLogic™ operand. When set to "Latched", the state of each pushbutton is stored in nonvolatile memory which is maintained during any supply power loss.
Pushbuttons states can be logged by the Event Recorder and displayed as target messages. User-defined messages can
also be associated with each pushbutton and displayed when the pushbutton is ON.
•
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: This setting selects the characteristic of the pushbutton. If set to “Disabled”, the pushbutton is deactivated and the corresponding FlexLogic™ operands (both “On” and “Off”) are de-asserted. If set to
“Self-reset”, the control logic of the pushbutton asserts the “On” corresponding FlexLogic™ operand as long as the
pushbutton is being pressed. As soon as the pushbutton is released, the FlexLogic™ operand is de-asserted. The
“Off” operand is asserted/de-asserted accordingly.
If set to “Latched”, the control logic alternates the state of the corresponding FlexLogic™ operand between “On” and
“Off” on each push of the button. When operating in “Latched” mode, FlexLogic™ operand states are stored in non-volatile memory. Should power be lost, the correct pushbutton state is retained upon subsequent power up of the relay.
5-28
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
•
PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: This setting specifies the top 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
intended to provide ID information of the pushbutton. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
how to enter alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
•
PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is in the “on” position. Refer to the User-Definable Displays section for instructions on
entering alphanumeric characters from the keypad.
•
PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: This setting specifies the bottom 20-character line of the user-programmable message and is
displayed when the pushbutton is activated from the On to the Off position and the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is
“Latched”. This message is not displayed when the PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION is “Self-reset” as the pushbutton operand
status is implied to be “Off” upon its release. All user text messaging durations for the pushbuttons are configured with
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting.
the PRODUCT SETUP
•
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: This setting specifies a drop-out time delay for a pushbutton in the self-reset mode. A
typical applications for this setting is providing a select-before-operate functionality. The selecting pushbutton should
have the drop-out time set to a desired value. The operating pushbutton should be logically ANDed with the selecting
pushbutton in FlexLogic™. The selecting pushbutton LED remains on for the duration of the drop-out time, signaling
the time window for the intended operation.
For example, consider a relay with the following settings: PUSHBTN 1 ID TEXT: “AUTORECLOSER”, PUSHBTN 1 ON TEXT:
“DISABLED - CALL 2199", and PUSHBTN 1 OFF TEXT: “ENABLED”. When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the “On” position, the following AUTOCLOSER DISABLED – Call 2199 message is displayed: When Pushbutton 1 changes its state to the
“Off” position, the message will change to AUTORECLOSER ENABLED.
NOTE
User-programmable pushbuttons require a type HP relay faceplate. If an HP-type faceplate was ordered separately, the relay order code must be changed to indicate the HP faceplate option. This can be done via EnerVista
UR Setup with the Maintenance > Enable Pushbutton command.
5.2.15 FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
FLEX STATE
PARAMETERS
MESSAGE
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
PARAMETER
Off
1:
Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
PARAMETER
Off
2:
Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
PARAMETER 256:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
↓
MESSAGE
This feature provides a mechanism where any of 256 selected FlexLogic™ operand states can be used for efficient monitoring. The feature allows user-customized access to the FlexLogic™ operand states in the relay. The state bits are packed
so that 16 states may be read out in a single Modbus register. The state bits can be configured so that all of the states
which are of interest to the user are available in a minimum number of Modbus registers.
The state bits may be read out in the "Flex States" register array beginning at Modbus address 900 hex. 16 states are
packed into each register, with the lowest-numbered state in the lowest-order bit. There are 16 registers in total to accommodate the 256 state bits.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-29
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.16 USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
INVOKE AND SCROLL:
Off
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 1
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
↓
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 16
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
This menu provides a mechanism for manually creating up to 16 user-defined information displays in a convenient viewing
sequence in the USER DISPLAYS menu (between the TARGETS and ACTUAL VALUES top-level menus). The sub-menus facilitate text entry and Modbus Register data pointer options for defining the User Display content.
Once programmed, the user-definable displays can be viewed in two ways.
5
•
KEYPAD: Use the Menu key to select the USER DISPLAYS menu item to access the first user-definable display (note
that only the programmed screens are displayed). The screens can be scrolled using the Up and Down keys. The display disappears after the default message time-out period specified by the PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting.
•
USER-PROGRAMMABLE CONTROL INPUT: The user-definable displays also respond to the INVOKE AND SCROLL
setting. Any FlexLogic™ operand (in particular, the user-programmable pushbutton operands), can be used to navigate the programmed displays.
On the rising edge of the configured operand (such as when the pushbutton is pressed), the displays are invoked by
showing the last user-definable display shown during the previous activity. From this moment onward, the operand
acts exactly as the Down key and allows scrolling through the configured displays. The last display wraps up to the first
one. The INVOKE AND SCROLL input and the Down keypad key operate concurrently.
When the default timer expires (set by the DEFAULT MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting), the relay will start to cycle through the
user displays. The next activity of the INVOKE AND SCROLL input stops the cycling at the currently displayed user display, not at the first user-defined display. The INVOKE AND SCROLL pulses must last for at least 250 ms to take effect.
b) USER DISPLAY 1(16)
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
USER DISPLAY 1(16)
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
DISP 1 ITEM 1
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
USER DISPLAY 1
MESSAGE
5-30
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
Any existing system display can be automatically copied into an available User Display by selecting the existing display and
pressing the
key. The display will then prompt ADD TO USER DISPLAY LIST?. After selecting “Yes”, a message indicates that the selected display has been added to the user display list. When this type of entry occurs, the sub-menus are
automatically configured with the proper content – this content may subsequently be edited.
This menu is used to enter user-defined text and/or user-selected Modbus-registered data fields into the particular User
Display. Each User Display consists of two 20-character lines (top and bottom). The Tilde (~) character is used to mark the
start of a data field - the length of the data field needs to be accounted for. Up to 5 separate data fields (ITEM 1(5)) can be
entered in a User Display - the nth Tilde (~) refers to the nth item.
A User Display may be entered from the faceplate keypad or the EnerVista UR Setup interface (preferred for convenience).
The following procedure shows how to enter text characters in the top and bottom lines from the faceplate keypad:
1.
Select the line to be edited.
2.
Press the
3.
Use either Value key to scroll through the characters. A space is selected like a character.
4.
Press the
5.
Repeat step 3 and continue entering characters until the desired text is displayed.
6.
The
7.
Press the
key to enter text edit mode.
key to advance the cursor to the next position.
key may be pressed at any time for context sensitive help information.
key to store the new settings.
To enter a numerical value for any of the 5 items (the decimal form of the selected Modbus address) from the faceplate keypad, use the number keypad. Use the value of ‘0’ for any items not being used. Use the
key at any selected system
display (Setting, Actual Value, or Command) which has a Modbus address, to view the hexadecimal form of the Modbus
address, then manually convert it to decimal form before entering it (EnerVista UR Setup usage conveniently facilitates this
conversion).
Use the
key to go to the User Displays menu to view the user-defined content. The current user displays will show
in sequence, changing every 4 seconds. While viewing a User Display, press the
key and then select the ‘Yes”
option to remove the display from the user display list. Use the
key again to exit the User Displays menu.
An example User Display setup and result is shown below:
DISP 1 TOP LINE:
Current X ~
A
Shows user-defined text with first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 BOTTOM LINE:
Current Y ~
A
Shows user-defined text with second Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 1:
6016
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus Register
Address, corresponding to first Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 2:
6357
Shows decimal form of user-selected Modbus
Register Address, corresponding to 2nd Tilde marker.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 3:
0
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 4:
0
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
MESSAGE
DISP 1 ITEM 5:
0
This item is not being used - there is no corresponding
Tilde marker in Top or Bottom lines.
USER DISPLAY 1
USER DISPLAYS
GE Multilin
→
Current X
Current Y
0.850 A
0.327 A
Shows the resultant display content.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-31
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.2.17 DIRECT I/O
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DIRECT OUTPPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
Range: 1 to 16
DIRECT I/O CH1 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CH2 RING
CONFIGURATION: Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O DATA
RATE: 64 kbps
Range: 64 kbps, 128 kbps
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O CHANNEL
CROSSOVER: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
DIRECT I/O
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
DIRECT I/O
CRC ALARM CH1
CRC ALARM CH2
See page 5–36.
See page 5–36.
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH1
See page 5–37.
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH2
See page 5–37.
Direct I/Os are intended for exchange of status information (inputs and outputs) between UR relays connected directly via
Type-7 UR digital communications cards. The mechanism is very similar to UCA GOOSE, except that communications
takes place over a non-switchable isolated network and is optimized for speed. On Type 7 cards that support two channels,
Direct Output messages are sent from both channels simultaneously. This effectively sends Direct Output messages both
ways around a ring configuration. On Type 7 cards that support one channel, Direct Output messages are sent only in one
direction. Messages will be resent (forwarded) when it is determined that the message did not originate at the receiver.
Direct Output message timing is similar to GOOSE message timing. Integrity messages (with no state changes) are sent at
least every 1000 ms. Messages with state changes are sent within the main pass scanning the inputs and asserting the
outputs unless the communication channel bandwidth has been exceeded. Two Self-Tests are performed and signaled by
the following FlexLogic™ operands:
1.
DIRECT RING BREAK (Direct I/O Ring Break). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that Direct Output messages sent
from a UR are not being received back by the UR.
2.
DIRECT DEVICE 1(16) OFF (Direct Device Offline). This FlexLogic™ operand indicates that Direct Output messages
from at least one Direct Device are not being received.
Direct I/O settings are similar to Remote I/O settings. The equivalent of the Remote Device name strings for Direct I/O, is
the Direct Output Device ID.
The DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID identifies this UR in all Direct Output messages. All UR IEDs in a ring should have unique
numbers assigned. The IED ID is used to identify the sender of the Direct I/O message.
If the Direct I/O scheme is configured to operate in a ring (DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"), all Direct Output messages should be received back. If not, the Direct I/O Ring Break Self Test is triggered. The self-test error is signaled by the
DIRECT RING BREAK FlexLogic™ operand.
Select the DIRECT I/O DATA RATE to match the data capabilities of the communications channel. Back-to-back connections of
the local relays configured with the 7A, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7H, 7I, 7J, 7K, 72 and 73 fiber optic communication cards may be set to
128 kbps. For local relays configured with all other communication cards (i.e. 7E, 7F, 7G, 7L, 7M, 7N, 7P, 7R, 7S, 7T, 7W,
74, 75, 76 and 77), the baud rate will be set to 64 kbps. All IEDs communicating over direct inputs/outputs must be set to
5-32
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
the same data rate. UR-series IEDs equipped with dual-channel communications cards apply the same data rate to both
channels. Delivery time for direct input/output messages is approximately 0.2 of a power system cycle at 128 kbps and 0.4
of a power system cycle at 64 kbps, per each ‘bridge’.
The DIRECT I/O CHANNEL CROSSOVER setting applies to C60s with dual-channel communication cards and allows crossing
over messages from Channel 1 to Channel 2. This places all UR IEDs into one Direct I/O network regardless of the physical
media of the two communication channels.
The following application examples illustrate the basic concepts for Direct I/O configuration. Please refer to the Inputs/Outputs section later in this chapter for information on configuring FlexLogic™ operands (flags, bits) to be exchanged.
Example 1: Extending the I/O Capabilities of a UR relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR IED, such as
the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via single-channel digital communication cards as shown in the figure below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
842711A1.CDR
5
Figure 5–7: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION: "Yes"
DIRECT I/O DATA RATE: "128 kbps"
The message delivery time is about 0.2 of power cycle in both ways (at 128 kbps); i.e., from Device 1 to Device 2, and from
Device 2 to Device 1. Different communications cards can be selected by the user for this back-to-back connection (fiber,
G.703, or RS422).
Example 2: Interlocking Busbar Protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme could be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3, and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown below.
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
BLOCK
UR IED 4
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–8: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME
For increased reliability, a dual-ring configuration (shown below) is recommended for this application.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-33
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
RX1
TX2
TX2
RX2
UR IED 2
TX1
TX1
UR IED 4
RX2
TX2
TX2
RX1
RX2
UR IED 3
RX1
TX1
842716A1.CDR
Figure 5–9: INTERLOCKING BUS PROTECTION SCHEME VIA DIRECT I/OS
In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “3”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
UR IED 4:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “4”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
Message delivery time is approximately 0.2 of power system cycle (at 128 kbps) times number of "bridges" between the origin and destination. Dual-ring configuration effectively reduces the maximum "communications distance" by a factor of two.
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both rings are healthy:
5
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle;
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
If one ring is broken (say TX2/RX2) the delivery times are as follows:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.4 of power system cycle;
IED 1 to IED 4: 0.6 of power system cycle; IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 4: 0.4 of power system cycle; IED 3 to IED 4: 0.2 of power system cycle
A coordinating timer for this bus protection scheme could be selected to cover the worst case scenario (0.4 of power system cycle). Upon detecting a broken ring, the coordination time should be adaptively increased to 0.6 of power system
cycle. The complete application requires addressing a number of issues such as failure of both the communications rings,
failure or out-of-service conditions of one of the relays, etc. Self-monitoring flags of the Direct I/O feature would be primarily
used to address these concerns.
Example 3: Pilot-Aided Schemes
Consider the three-terminal line protection application shown below:
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–10: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION
A permissive pilot-aided scheme could be implemented in a two-ring configuration as shown below (IEDs 1 and 2 constitute
a first ring, while IEDs 2 and 3 constitute a second ring):
5-34
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–11: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN LOOP CONFIGURATION
In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
"Yes"
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps):
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.5 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
In the above scheme, IEDs 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. IED 2 must be configured to forward the messages as
explained in the Inputs/Outputs section. A blocking pilot-aided scheme should be implemented with more security and, ideally, faster message delivery time. This could be accomplished using a dual-ring configuration as shown below.
TX2
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX2
TX2
TX1
TX1
RX1
UR IED 3
RX2
TX2
842715A1.CDR
Figure 5–12: DUAL-CHANNEL CLOSED LOOP (DUAL-RING) CONFIGURATION
In the above application, the following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “1”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
"Yes"
DIRECT OUTPUT DEVICE ID: “2”
DIRECT I/O RING CONFIGURATION:
“Yes”
In this configuration the following delivery times are expected (at 128 kbps) if both the rings are healthy:
IED 1 to IED 2: 0.2 of power system cycle; IED 1 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle;
IED 2 to IED 3: 0.2 of power system cycle
The two communications configurations could be applied to both permissive and blocking schemes. Speed, reliability and
cost should be taken into account when selecting the required architecture.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-35
5
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
5 SETTINGS
b) CRC ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DIRECT I/O
CRC ALARM CH1(2)
CRC ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
CRC ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
CRC ALARM CH1
The C60 checks integrity of the incoming Direct I/O messages using a 32-bit CRC. The CRC Alarm function is available for
monitoring the communication medium noise by tracking the rate of messages failing the CRC check. The monitoring function counts all incoming messages, including messages that failed the CRC check. A separate counter adds up messages
that failed the CRC check. When the failed CRC counter reaches the user-defined level specified by the CRC ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD setting within the user-defined message count CRC ALARM 1 CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 CRC ALARM FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions - if required - should be programmed accordingly.
5
The CRC Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis. The total number of Direct I/O messages that failed the CRC
DIRECT INPUTS
CRC FAIL COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
check is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
Message Count and Length of the Monitoring Window:
To monitor communications integrity, the relay sends 1 message per second (at 64 kbps) or 2 messages per second (128
kbps) even if there is no change in the Direct Outputs. For example, setting the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT to
“10000”, corresponds a time window of about 160 minutes at 64 kbps and 80 minutes at 128 kbps. If the messages are sent
faster as a result of Direct Outputs activity, the monitoring time interval will shorten. This should be taken into account when
determining the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT setting. For example, if the requirement is a maximum monitoring time
interval of 10 minutes at 64 kbps, then the CRC ALARM CH1 MESSAGE COUNT should be set to 10 × 60 × 1 = 600.
Correlation of Failed CRC and Bit Error Rate (BER):
The CRC check may fail if one or more bits in a packet are corrupted. Therefore, an exact correlation between the CRC fail
rate and the BER is not possible. Under certain assumptions an approximation can be made as follows. A Direct I/O packet
containing 20 bytes results in 160 bits of data being sent and therefore, a transmission of 63 packets is equivalent to 10,000
bits. A BER of 10–4 implies 1 bit error for every 10,000 bits sent/received. Assuming the best case of only 1 bit error in a
failed packet, having 1 failed packet for every 63 received is about equal to a BER of 10–4.
5-36
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.2 PRODUCT SETUP
c) UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
DIRECT I/O
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM CH1(2)
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
MESSAGE COUNT: 600
Range: 100 to 10000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
THRESHOLD: 10
Range: 1 to 1000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED
MESSAGES ALARM CH1
The C60 checks integrity of the Direct I/O communication ring by counting unreturned messages. In the ring configuration,
all messages originating at a given device should return within a pre-defined period of time. The Unreturned Messages
Alarm function is available for monitoring the integrity of the communication ring by tracking the rate of unreturned messages. This function counts all the outgoing messages and a separate counter adds the messages have failed to return.
When the unreturned messages counter reaches the user-definable level specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 THRESHOLD setting and within the user-defined message count UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 COUNT, the DIR IO CH1 UNRET ALM FlexLogic™ operand is set.
When the total message counter reaches the user-defined maximum specified by the UNRET MSGS ALARM CH1 MESSAGE
COUNT setting, both the counters reset and the monitoring process is restarted.
The operand shall be configured to drive an output contact, user-programmable LED, or selected communication-based
output. Latching and acknowledging conditions, if required, should be programmed accordingly.
The Unreturned Messages Alarm function is available on a per-channel basis and is active only in the ring configuration.
The total number of unreturned Direct I/O messages is available as the ACTUAL VALUES STATUS
DIRECT INPUTS
UNRETURNED MSG COUNT CH1(2) actual value.
5.2.18 INSTALLATION
PATH: SETTINGS
PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION
MESSAGE
INSTALLATION
RELAY SETTINGS:
Not Programmed
Range: Not Programmed, Programmed
RELAY NAME:
Relay-1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
To safeguard against the installation of a relay without any entered settings, the unit will not allow signaling of any output
relay until RELAY SETTINGS is set to "Programmed". This setting is defaulted to "Not Programmed" when at the factory. The
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED self-test error message is displayed until the relay is put into the "Programmed" state.
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will appear on generated reports. This name
is also used to identify specific devices which are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the Ethernet communications channel using the UCA2/MMS protocol.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-37
5
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.3SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.1 AC INPUTS
a) CURRENT BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
AC INPUTS
CURRENT BANK F1
CURRENT BANK F1(M5)
PHASE CT F1
PRIMARY:
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
1 A
PHASE CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
PRIMARY:
1 A
Range: 1 to 65000 A in steps of 1
MESSAGE
GROUND CT F1
SECONDARY: 1 A
Range: 1 A, 5 A
MESSAGE
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT characteristics.
NOTE
Four banks of phase/ground CTs can be set, where the current banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {1, 5}.
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
5
These settings are critical for all features that have settings dependent on current measurements. When the relay is
ordered, the CT module must be specified to include a standard or sensitive ground input. As the phase CTs are connected
in Wye (star), the calculated phasor sum of the three phase currents (IA + IB + IC = Neutral Current = 3Io) is used as the
input for the neutral overcurrent elements. In addition, a zero-sequence (core balance) CT which senses current in all of the
circuit primary conductors, or a CT in a neutral grounding conductor may also be used. For this configuration, the ground
CT primary rating must be entered. To detect low level ground fault currents, the sensitive ground input may be used. In this
case, the sensitive ground CT primary rating must be entered. Refer to Chapter 3 for more details on CT connections.
Enter the rated CT primary current values. For both 1000:5 and 1000:1 CTs, the entry would be 1000. For correct operation, the CT secondary rating must match the setting (which must also correspond to the specific CT connections used).
The following example illustrates how multiple CT inputs (current banks) are summed as one source current. Given If the
following current banks:
F1: CT bank with 500:1 ratio; F5: CT bank with 1000: ratio; M1: CT bank with 800:1 ratio
The following rule applies:
SRC 1 = F1 + F5 + M1
(EQ 5.7)
1 pu is the highest primary current. In this case, 1000 is entered and the secondary current from the 500:1 ratio CT will be
adjusted to that created by a 1000:1 CT before summation. If a protection element is set up to act on SRC 1 currents, then
a pickup level of 1 pu will operate on 1000 A primary.
The same rule applies for current sums from CTs with different secondary taps (5 A and 1 A).
5-38
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
b) VOLTAGE BANKS
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
AC INPUTS
VOLTAGE BANK F5(M5)
PHASE VT F5
CONNECTION: Wye
Range: Wye, Delta
PHASE VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
PHASE VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
CONNECTION: Vag
Range: Vn, Vag, Vbg, Vcg, Vab, Vbc, Vca
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
SECONDARY: 66.4 V
Range: 50.0 to 240.0 V in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY VT F5
RATIO: 1.00 :1
Range: 1.00 to 24000.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
VOLTAGE BANK F5
Because energy parameters are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing VT characteristics.
CAUTION
Two banks of phase/auxiliary VTs can be set, where voltage banks are denoted in the following format (X represents the
module slot position letter):
Xa, where X = {F, M} and a = {5}.
5
See the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details.
With VTs installed, the relay can perform voltage measurements as well as power calculations. Enter the PHASE VT F5 CONNECTION made to the system as “Wye” or “Delta”. An open-delta source VT connection would be entered as “Delta”. See
the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 3 for details.
The nominal PHASE VT F5 SECONDARY voltage setting is the voltage across the relay input terminals when nominal
voltage is applied to the VT primary.
NOTE
For example, on a system with a 13.8 kV nominal primary voltage and with a 14400:120 volt VT in a Delta connection, the secondary voltage would be 115, i.e. (13800 / 14400) × 120. For a Wye connection, the voltage value
entered must be the phase to neutral voltage which would be 115 / 3 = 66.4.
5.3.2 On a 14.4 kV system with a Delta connection and a VT primary to secondary turns ratio of 14400:120, the
voltage value entered would be 120, i.e. 14400 / 120.POWER SYSTEM
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY:
60 Hz
Range: 25 to 60 Hz in steps of 1
PHASE ROTATION:
ABC
Range: ABC, ACB
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY AND PHASE
REFERENCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
FREQUENCY TRACKING:
Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
POWER SYSTEM
The power system NOMINAL FREQUENCY value is used as a default to set the digital sampling rate if the system frequency
cannot be measured from available signals. This may happen if the signals are not present or are heavily distorted. Before
reverting to the nominal frequency, the frequency tracking algorithm holds the last valid frequency measurement for a safe
period of time while waiting for the signals to reappear or for the distortions to decay.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-39
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
The phase sequence of the power system is required to properly calculate sequence components and power parameters.
The PHASE ROTATION setting matches the power system phase sequence. Note that this setting informs the relay of the
actual system phase sequence, either ABC or ACB. CT and VT inputs on the relay, labeled as A, B, and C, must be connected to system phases A, B, and C for correct operation.
The FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting determines which signal source is used (and hence which AC signal) for
phase angle reference. The AC signal used is prioritized based on the AC inputs that are configured for the signal source:
phase voltages takes precedence, followed by auxiliary voltage, then phase currents, and finally ground current.
For three phase selection, phase A is used for angle referencing ( V ANGLE REF = V A ), while Clarke transformation of the
phase signals is used for frequency metering and tracking ( V FREQUENCY = ( 2V A – V B – V C ) ⁄ 3 ) for better performance during fault, open pole, and VT and CT fail conditions.
The phase reference and frequency tracking AC signals are selected based upon the Source configuration, regardless of
whether or not a particular signal is actually applied to the relay.
Phase angle of the reference signal will always display zero degrees and all other phase angles will be relative to this signal. If the pre-selected reference signal is not measurable at a given time, the phase angles are not referenced.
The phase angle referencing is done via a phase locked loop, which can synchronize independent UR-series relays if they
have the same AC signal reference. These results in very precise correlation of time tagging in the event recorder between
different UR relays provided the relays have an IRIG-B connection.
should only be set to "Disabled" in very unusual circumstances; consult the factory for special variable-frequency applications.
FREQUENCY TRACKING
NOTE
5.3.3 SIGNAL SOURCES
5
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
SIGNAL SOURCES
SOURCE 1(4)
SOURCE 1 NAME:
SRC 1
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 5 CTs. Only Phase CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 GROUND CT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, F1+F5,... up to a combination of
any 5 CTs. Only Ground CT inputs are displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 PHASE VT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
Only phase voltage inputs will be displayed.
MESSAGE
SOURCE 1 AUX VT:
None
Range: None, F1, F5, M1, M5
Only auxiliary voltage inputs will be displayed.
SOURCE 1
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text can be replaced by with a user-defined name appropriate for
the associated source.
“F” and “M” represent the module slot position. The number directly following these letters represents either the first bank of
four channels (1, 2, 3, 4) called “1” or the second bank of four channels (5, 6, 7, 8) called “5” in a particular CT/VT module.
Refer to the Introduction to AC Sources section at the beginning of this chapter for additional details on this concept.
It is possible to select the sum of up to five (5) CTs. The first channel displayed is the CT to which all others will be referred.
For example, the selection “F1+F5” indicates the sum of each phase from channels “F1” and “F5”, scaled to whichever CT
has the higher ratio. Selecting “None” hides the associated actual values.
The approach used to configure the AC Sources consists of several steps; first step is to specify the information about each
CT and VT input. For CT inputs, this is the nominal primary and secondary current. For VTs, this is the connection type,
ratio and nominal secondary voltage. Once the inputs have been specified, the configuration for each Source is entered,
including specifying which CTs will be summed together.
5-40
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
User Selection of AC Parameters for Comparator Elements:
CT/VT modules automatically calculate all current and voltage parameters from the available inputs. Users must select the
specific input parameters to be measured by every element in the relevant settings menu. The internal design of the element specifies which type of parameter to use and provides a setting for Source selection. In elements where the parameter may be either fundamental or RMS magnitude, such as phase time overcurrent, two settings are provided. One setting
specifies the Source, the second setting selects between fundamental phasor and RMS.
AC Input Actual Values:
The calculated parameters associated with the configured voltage and current inputs are displayed in the current and voltage sections of Actual Values. Only the phasor quantities associated with the actual AC physical input channels will be displayed here. All parameters contained within a configured Source are displayed in the Sources section of Actual Values.
Disturbance Detectors (Internal):
The 50DD element is a sensitive current disturbance detector that detects any disturbance on the protected system. 50DD
is intended for use in conjunction with measuring elements, blocking of current based elements (to prevent maloperation as
a result of the wrong settings), and starting oscillography data capture. A disturbance detector is provided for each Source.
The 50DD function responds to the changes in magnitude of the sequence currents. The disturbance detector scheme
logic is as follows:
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 1
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
SRC 1 50DD OP
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
5
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 2
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SRC 2 50DD OP
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SETTING
ACTUAL
SOURCE 6
CURRENT PHASOR
PRODUCT SETUP/DISPLAY
PROPERTIES/CURRENT
CUT-OFF LEVEL
I_1
I_1 - I_1’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_2
I_2 - I_2’ >2*CUT-OFF
I_0
I_0 - I_0’ >2*CUT-OFF
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Where I’ is 2 cycles old
SRC 6 50DD OP
827092A3.CDR
Figure 5–13: DISTURBANCE DETECTOR LOGIC DIAGRAM
The disturbance detector responds to the change in currents of twice the current cut-off level. The default cut-off threshold
is 0.02 pu; thus by default the disturbance detector responds to a change of 0.04 pu. The metering sensitivity setting (PRODUCT SETUP
DISPLAY PROPERTIES
CURRENT CUT-OFF LEVEL) controls the sensitivity of the disturbance detector
accordingly.
Example Use of Sources:
An example of the use of Sources, with a relay with two CT/VT modules, is shown in the diagram below. A relay could have
the following hardware configuration:
INCREASING SLOT POSITION LETTER -->
CT/VT MODULE 1
CT/VT MODULE 2
CT/VT MODULE 3
CTs
VTs
not applicable
This configuration could be used on a two winding transformer, with one winding connected into a breaker-and-a-half system. The following figure shows the arrangement of Sources used to provide the functions required in this application, and
the CT/VT inputs that are used to provide the data.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-41
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
F1
DSP Bank
F5
Source 1
Source 2
Amps
Amps
51BF-1
51BF-2
Source 3
U1
Volts Amps
A
W
Var
87T
A
W
Var
51P
V
V
Volts Amps
M1
Source 4
M1
UR Relay
M5
Figure 5–14: EXAMPLE USE OF SOURCES
5.3.4 LINE
PATH: SETTINGS
5
SYSTEM SETUP
LINE
LINE
Range: 0.01 to 250.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE
MAGNITUDE:
3.00 Ω
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
POS SEQ IMPEDANCE
ANGLE: 75°
MESSAGE
ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE
MAGNITUDE:
9.00 Ω
ZERO SEQ IMPEDANCE
ANGLE: 75°
Range: 25 to 90° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
LINE LENGTH UNITS:
km
Range: km, miles
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
LINE LENGTH (km
100.0
Range: 0.01 to 650.00 Ω in steps of 0.01
):
Range: 0.0 to 2000.0 in steps of 0.1
These settings specify the characteristics of the line. The line impedance value should be entered as secondary ohms.
This data is used for fault location calculations. See the SETTINGS
the Source and Trigger for fault calculations.
5-42
PRODUCT SETUP
C60 Breaker Management Relay
FAULT REPORT
menu for assigning
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5.3.5 BREAKERS
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
BREAKERS
BREAKER 1(2)
BREAKER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
BREAKER1 PUSH BUTTON
CONTROL: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 NAME:
Bkr 1
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 φA/3-POLE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 φB:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 φC:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 EXT ALARM:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 ALARM
DELAY:
0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1
TIME:
0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 1 000 000.000 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1 OUT OF SV:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
UCA XCBR1 PwrSupSt0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
UCA XCBR1 PresSt:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
UCA XCBR1 TrpCoil:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1
BREAKER 2
UCA XCBR SBO TIMER
5
As for Breaker 1 above
BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT:
30 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
A description of the operation of the breaker control and status monitoring features is provided in Chapter 4. Only information concerning programming of the associated settings is covered here. These features are provided for two breakers; a
user may use only those portions of the design relevant to a single breaker, which must be Breaker No. 1.
•
BREAKER 1(2) FUNCTION: Set to "Enable" to allow the operation of any breaker control feature.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-43
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5
5 SETTINGS
•
BREAKER1(2) PUSH BUTTON CONTROL: Set to "Enable" to allow faceplate push button operations.
•
BREAKER 1(2) NAME: Assign a user-defined name (up to 6 characters) to the breaker. This name will be used in
flash messages related to Breaker No. 1.
•
BREAKER 1(2) MODE: Selects "3-pole" mode, where all breaker poles are operated simultaneously, or "1-pole" mode
where all breaker poles are operated either independently or simultaneously.
•
BREAKER 1(2) OPEN: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to open
Breaker No. 1.
•
BREAKER 1(2) CLOSE: Selects an operand that creates a programmable signal to operate an output relay to close
Breaker No. 1.
•
BREAKER 1(2) ΦA/3-POLE: Selects an operand, usually a contact input connected to a breaker auxiliary position
tracking mechanism. This input can be either a 52/a or 52/b contact, or a combination the 52/a and 52/b contacts, that
must be programmed to create a logic 0 when the breaker is open. If BREAKER 1 MODE is selected as "3-Pole", this setting selects a single input as the operand used to track the breaker open or closed position. If the mode is selected as
"1-Pole", the input mentioned above is used to track phase A and settings BREAKER 1 ΦB and BREAKER 1 ΦC select
operands to track phases B and C, respectively.
•
BREAKER 1(2) ΦB: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase B as above for phase A.
•
BREAKER 1(2) ΦC: If the mode is selected as 3-pole, this setting has no function. If the mode is selected as 1-pole,
this input is used to track phase C as above for phase A.
•
BREAKER 1(2) EXT ALARM: Selects an operand, usually an external contact input, connected to a breaker alarm
reporting contact.
•
BREAKER 1(2) ALARM DELAY: Sets the delay interval during which a disagreement of status among the three pole
position tracking operands will not declare a pole disagreement, to allow for non-simultaneous operation of the poles.
•
MANUAL CLOSE RECAL1 TIME: Sets the interval required to maintain setting changes in effect after an operator has
initiated a manual close command to operate a circuit breaker.
•
BREAKER 1(2) OUT OF SV: Selects an operand indicating that Breaker No. 1 is out-of-service.
•
UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt0: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PwrSupSt bit 0
data item.
•
UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) PresSt data item.
•
UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to provide a value for the UCA XCBR1(2) TrpCoil data item.
•
BKR XCBR SBO TIMEOUT: The Select-Before-Operate timer specifies an interval from the receipt of the UCA
Breaker Control Select signal until the automatic de-selection of the breaker, so that the breaker does not remain
selected indefinitely. This setting applies only to UCA SBO operation.
5-44
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5
Figure 5–15: DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-45
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
5.3.6 FLEXCURVES™
a) SETTINGS
PATH: SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
FLEXCURVE A
FLEXCURVES
FLEXCURVE A(D)
FLEXCURVE A TIME AT
0.00 xPKP:
0 ms
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
FlexCurves™ A through D have settings for entering times to Reset/Operate at the following pickup levels: 0.00 to 0.98 /
1.03 to 20.00. This data is converted into 2 continuous curves by linear interpolation between data points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the Reset/Operate time (using the
VALUE
keys) for each selected pickup point (using the
MESSAGE
keys) for the desired protection curve (A, B, C, or D).
Table 5–3: FLEXCURVE™ TABLE
RESET
5
TIME
MS
RESET
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
TIME
MS
OPERATE
0.00
0.68
1.03
2.9
4.9
10.5
0.05
0.70
1.05
3.0
5.0
11.0
0.10
0.72
1.1
3.1
5.1
11.5
0.15
0.74
1.2
3.2
5.2
12.0
0.20
0.76
1.3
3.3
5.3
12.5
0.25
0.78
1.4
3.4
5.4
13.0
0.30
0.80
1.5
3.5
5.5
13.5
0.35
0.82
1.6
3.6
5.6
14.0
0.40
0.84
1.7
3.7
5.7
14.5
0.45
0.86
1.8
3.8
5.8
15.0
0.48
0.88
1.9
3.9
5.9
15.5
0.50
0.90
2.0
4.0
6.0
16.0
0.52
0.91
2.1
4.1
6.5
16.5
0.54
0.92
2.2
4.2
7.0
17.0
0.56
0.93
2.3
4.3
7.5
17.5
0.58
0.94
2.4
4.4
8.0
18.0
0.60
0.95
2.5
4.5
8.5
18.5
0.62
0.96
2.6
4.6
9.0
19.0
0.64
0.97
2.7
4.7
9.5
19.5
0.66
0.98
2.8
4.8
10.0
20.0
NOTE
5-46
TIME
MS
The relay using a given FlexCurve™ applies linear approximation for times between the user-entered
points. Special care must be applied when setting the two points that are close to the multiple of pickup of
1, i.e. 0.98 pu and 1.03 pu. It is recommended to set the two times to a similar value; otherwise, the linear
approximation may result in undesired behavior for the operating quantity that is close to 1.00 pu.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
b) FLEXCURVE™ CONFIGURATION WITH ENERVISTA UR SETUP
EnerVista UR Setup allows for easy configuration and management of FlexCurves™ and their associated data points. Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Alternately, curve data can be imported from a specified file (.csv format) by
selecting the Import Data From EnerVista UR Setup setting.
Curves and data can be exported, viewed, and cleared by clicking the appropriate buttons. FlexCurves™ are customized
by editing the operating time (ms) values at pre-defined per-unit current multiples. Note that the pickup multiples start at
zero (implying the "reset time"), operating time below pickup, and operating time above pickup.
c) RECLOSER CURVE EDITING
Recloser Curve selection is special in that recloser curves can be shaped into a composite curve with a minimum response
time and a fixed time above a specified pickup multiples. There are 41 recloser curve types supported. These definite operating times are useful to coordinate operating times, typically at higher currents and where upstream and downstream protective devices have different operating characteristics. The Recloser Curve configuration window shown below appears
when the Initialize From EnerVista UR Setup setting is set to “Recloser Curve” and the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked.
Multiplier: Scales (multiplies) the curve operating times
Addr: Adds the time specified in this field (in ms) to each
curve operating time value.
Minimum Response Time (MRT): If enabled, the MRT setting
defines the shortest operating time even if the curve suggests
a shorter time at higher current multiples. A composite operating
characteristic is effectively defined. For current multiples lower
than the intersection point, the curve dictates the operating time;
otherwise, the MRT does. An information message appears
when attempting to apply an MRT shorter than the minimum
curve time.
High Current Time: Allows the user to set a pickup multiple
from which point onwards the operating time is fixed. This is
normally only required at higher current levels. The HCT Ratio
defines the high current pickup multiple; the HCT defines the
operating time.
842721A1.CDR
Figure 5–16: RECLOSER CURVE INITIALIZATION
Multiplier and Adder settings only affect the curve portion of the characteristic and not the MRT and HCT settings.
The HCT settings override the MRT settings for multiples of pickup greater than the HCT Ratio.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-47
5
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
d) EXAMPLE
A composite curve can be created from the GE_111 standard with MRT = 200 ms and HCT initially disabled and then
enabled at 8 times pickup with an operating time of 30 ms. At approximately 4 times pickup, the curve operating time is
equal to the MRT and from then onwards the operating time remains at 200 ms (see below).
842719A1.CDR
Figure 5–17: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT DISABLED
With the HCT feature enabled, the operating time reduces to 30 ms for pickup multiples exceeding 8 times pickup.
5
842720A1.CDR
Figure 5–18: COMPOSITE RECLOSER CURVE WITH HCT ENABLED
Configuring a composite curve with an increase in operating time at increased pickup multiples is not allowed. If this
is attempted, the EnerVista UR Setup software generates an error message and discards the proposed changes.
NOTE
e) STANDARD RECLOSER CURVES
The standard Recloser curves available for the C60 are displayed in the following graphs.
5-48
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
2
1
GE106
TIME (sec)
0.5
0.2
GE103
GE104
0.1
GE105
0.05
GE102
GE101
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
5
842723A1.CDR
Figure 5–19: RECLOSER CURVES GE101 TO GE106
50
GE142
20
10
5
TIME (sec)
GE138
2
GE120
1
GE113
0.5
0.2
0.1
0.05
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842725A1.CDR
Figure 5–20: RECLOSER CURVES GE113, GE120, GE138 AND GE142
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-49
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
50
20
TIME (sec)
10
GE201
5
GE151
2
GE140
GE134
1
GE137
0.5
1
5
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842730A1.CDR
Figure 5–21: RECLOSER CURVES GE134, GE137, GE140, GE151 AND GE201
50
GE152
TIME (sec)
20
GE141
10
GE131
5
GE200
2
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842728A1.CDR
Figure 5–22: RECLOSER CURVES GE131, GE141, GE152, AND GE200
5-50
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
50
20
GE164
10
TIME (sec)
5
2
GE162
1
0.5
GE133
0.2
GE165
0.1
0.05
GE161
GE163
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842729A1.CDR
5
Figure 5–23: RECLOSER CURVES GE133, GE161, GE162, GE163, GE164 AND GE165
20
GE132
10
5
TIME (sec)
2
1
0.5
GE139
0.2
GE136
0.1
GE116
0.05
GE117
GE118
0.02
0.01
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842726A1.CDR
Figure 5–24: RECLOSER CURVES GE116, GE117, GE118, GE132, GE136, AND GE139
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-51
5.3 SYSTEM SETUP
5 SETTINGS
20
10
5
GE122
2
TIME (sec)
1
0.5
GE114
0.2
0.1
GE111
GE121
0.05
GE107
GE115
GE112
0.02
0.01
1
5
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842724A1.CDR
Figure 5–25: RECLOSER CURVES GE107, GE111, GE112, GE114, GE115, GE121, AND GE122
50
20
GE202
TIME (sec)
10
5
2
GE135
GE119
1
0.5
0.2
1
1.2
1.5
2
2.5 3
4
5
6 7 8 9 10 12
CURRENT (multiple of pickup)
15
20
842727A1.CDR
Figure 5–26: RECLOSER CURVES GE119, GE135, AND GE202
5-52
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.1 INTRODUCTION TO FLEXLOGIC™
To provide maximum flexibility to the user, the arrangement of internal digital logic combines fixed and user-programmed
parameters. Logic upon which individual features are designed is fixed, and all other logic, from digital input signals through
elements or combinations of elements to digital outputs, is variable. The user has complete control of all variable logic
through FlexLogic™. In general, the system receives analog and digital inputs which it uses to produce analog and digital
outputs. The major sub-systems of a generic UR relay involved in this process are shown below.
5
Figure 5–27: UR ARCHITECTURE OVERVIEW
The states of all digital signals used in the UR are represented by flags (or FlexLogic™ operands, which are described later
in this section). A digital "1" is represented by a 'set' flag. Any external contact change-of-state can be used to block an element from operating, as an input to a control feature in a FlexLogic™ equation, or to operate a contact output. The state of
the contact input can be displayed locally or viewed remotely via the communications facilities provided. If a simple scheme
where a contact input is used to block an element is desired, this selection is made when programming the element. This
capability also applies to the other features that set flags: elements, virtual inputs, remote inputs, schemes, and human
operators.
If more complex logic than presented above is required, it is implemented via FlexLogic™. For example, if it is desired to
have the closed state of contact input H7a and the operated state of the phase undervoltage element block the operation of
the phase time overcurrent element, the two control input states are programmed in a FlexLogic™ equation. This equation
ANDs the two control inputs to produce a ‘virtual output’ which is then selected when programming the phase time overcurrent to be used as a blocking input. Virtual outputs can only be created by FlexLogic™ equations.
Traditionally, protective relay logic has been relatively limited. Any unusual applications involving interlocks, blocking, or
supervisory functions had to be hard-wired using contact inputs and outputs. FlexLogic™ minimizes the requirement for
auxiliary components and wiring while making more complex schemes possible.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-53
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
The logic that determines the interaction of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs is field programmable through the use
of logic equations that are sequentially processed. The use of virtual inputs and outputs in addition to hardware is available
internally and on the communication ports for other relays to use (distributed FlexLogic™).
FlexLogic™ allows users to customize the relay through a series of equations that consist of operators and operands. The
operands are the states of inputs, elements, schemes and outputs. The operators are logic gates, timers and latches (with
set and reset inputs). A system of sequential operations allows any combination of specified operands to be assigned as
inputs to specified operators to create an output. The final output of an equation is a numbered register called a virtual output. Virtual outputs can be used as an input operand in any equation, including the equation that generates the output, as a
seal-in or other type of feedback.
A FlexLogic™ equation consists of parameters that are either operands or operators. Operands have a logic state of 1 or 0.
Operators provide a defined function, such as an AND gate or a Timer. Each equation defines the combinations of parameters to be used to set a Virtual Output flag. Evaluation of an equation results in either a 1 (=ON, i.e. flag set) or 0 (=OFF, i.e.
flag not set). Each equation is evaluated at least 4 times every power system cycle.
Some types of operands are present in the relay in multiple instances; e.g. contact and remote inputs. These types of operands are grouped together (for presentation purposes only) on the faceplate display. The characteristics of the different
types of operands are listed in the table below.
Table 5–4: UR FLEXLOGIC™ OPERAND TYPES
5
OPERAND TYPE
STATE
EXAMPLE FORMAT
CHARACTERISTICS
[INPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...]
Contact Input
On
Cont Ip On
Voltage is presently applied to the input (external contact
closed).
Off
Cont Ip Off
Voltage is presently not applied to the input (external
contact open).
Contact Output
(type Form-A contact
only)
Voltage On
Cont Op 1 VOn
Voltage exists across the contact.
Voltage Off
Cont Op 1 VOff
Voltage does not exists across the contact.
Current On
Cont Op 1 IOn
Current is flowing through the contact.
Current is not flowing through the contact.
Current Off
Cont Op 1 IOff
Direct Input
On
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
The direct input is presently in the ON state.
Element
(Analog)
Pickup
PHASE TOC1 PKP
The tested parameter is presently above the pickup setting
of an element which responds to rising values or below the
pickup setting of an element which responds to falling
values.
Dropout
PHASE TOC1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate
PHASE TOC1 OP
The tested parameter has been above/below the pickup
setting of the element for the programmed delay time, or
has been at logic 1 and is now at logic 0 but the reset timer
has not finished timing.
Block
PH DIR1 BLK
The output of the comparator is set to the block function.
Pickup
Dig Element 1 PKP
The input operand is at logic 1.
Dropout
Dig Element 1 DPO
This operand is the logical inverse of the above PKP
operand.
Operate
Dig Element 1 OP
The input operand has been at logic 1 for the programmed
pickup delay time, or has been at logic 1 for this period and
is now at logic 0 but the reset timer has not finished timing.
Higher than
Counter 1 HI
The number of pulses counted is above the set number.
Equal to
Counter 1 EQL
The number of pulses counted is equal to the set number.
Lower than
Counter 1 LO
The number of pulses counted is below the set number.
On
On
Logic 1
Off
Off
Logic 0
Remote Input
On
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
The remote input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Input
On
Virt Ip 1 On
The virtual input is presently in the ON state.
Virtual Output
On
Virt Op 1 On
The virtual output is presently in the set state (i.e.
evaluation of the equation which produces this virtual
output results in a "1").
Element
(Digital)
Element
(Digital Counter)
Fixed
5-54
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
The operands available for this relay are listed alphabetically by types in the following table.
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 1 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
CONTROL
PUSHBUTTONS
CONTROL PUSHBTN n ON
Control Pushbutton n (n = 1 to 7) is being pressed.
DIRECT DEVICES
DIRECT DEVICE 1 On
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16 On
DIRECT DEVICE 1 Off
↓
DIRECT DEVICE 16 Off
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
DIRECT I/O
CHANNEL
MONITORING
DIR IO CH1(2) CRC ALARM
The rate of Direct Input messages received on Channel 1(2) and failing the
CRC exceeded the user-specified level.
The rate of Direct Input messages failing the CRC exceeded the userspecified level on Channel 1 or 2.
The rate of returned Direct I/O messages on Channel 1(2) exceeded the
user-specified level (ring configurations only).
The rate of returned Direct I/O messages exceeded the user-specified level
on Channel 1 or 2 (ring configurations only).
DIR IO CRC ALARM
DIR IO CH1(2) UNRET ALM
DIR IO UNRET ALM
ELEMENT:
Autoreclose
(1P/3P)
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
AR RIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR 3-P/1 RIP
AR 3-P/2 RIP
AR LO
AR BKR1 BLK
AR BKR2 BLK
AR CLOSE BKR1
AR CLOSE BKR2
AR FORCE 3-P TRIP
AR SHOT CNT > 0
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
AR RESET
Autoreclosure is enabled and ready to perform
Autoreclosure is disabled
Autoreclosure is in "Reclose in Progress" state
A single-pole reclosure is in progress
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 1
A three-pole reclosure is in progress, via DEAD TIME 2
Autoreclosure is in lockout state
Reclosure of Breaker 1 is blocked
Reclosure of Breaker 2 is blocked
Reclose Breaker 1 signal
Reclose Breaker 2 signal
Force any trip to a three-phase trip
The first "CLOSE BKR X" signal has been issued
The Zone 1 Distance function must be set to the extended overreach value
The incomplete sequence timer timed out
AR has been reset either manually or by the reset timer
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary OV
AUX OV1 PKP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 OP
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT:
Auxiliary UV
AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
AUX UV1 OP
Auxiliary Undervoltage element has picked up
Auxiliary Undervoltage element has dropped out
Auxiliary Undervoltage element has operated
ELEMENT:
Breaker Arcing
BKR ARC 1 OP
BKR ARC 2 OP
Breaker Arcing 1 is operated
Breaker Arcing 2 is operated
ELEMENT
Breaker Failure
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIP
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase A (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase B (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker Failure 1 re-trip phase C (only for 1-pole schemes)
Breaker Failure 1 re-trip 3-phase
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 is operated
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 is operated
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 is operated
Breaker Failure 1 trip is operated
BKR FAIL 2
Same set of operands as shown for BKR FAIL 1
ELEMENT:
Breaker Control
BREAKER 1 OFF CMD
BREAKER 1 ON CMD
BREAKER 1 φA CLSD
BREAKER 1 φB CLSD
BREAKER 1 φC CLSD
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
BREAKER 1 OPEN
BREAKER 1 DISCREP
BREAKER 1 TROUBLE
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
BREAKER 1 TRIP A
BREAKER 1 TRIP B
BREAKER 1 TRIP C
BREAKER 1 ANY P OPEN
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
BREAKER 1 OOS
Breaker 1 OFF command
Breaker 1 ON command
Breaker 1 phase A is closed
Breaker 1 phase B is closed
Breaker 1 phase C is closed
Breaker 1 is closed
Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 has discrepancy
Breaker 1 trouble alarm
Breaker 1 manual close
Breaker 1 trip phase A command
Breaker 1 trip phase B command
Breaker 1 trip phase C command
At least one pole of Breaker 1 is open
Only one pole of Breaker 1 is open
Breaker 1 is out of service
BREAKER 2
Same set of operands as shown for BREAKER 1
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-55
5
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 2 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Digital Counter
Counter 1 HI
Counter 1 EQL
Counter 1 LO
↓
Counter 8 HI
Counter 8 EQL
Counter 8 LO
Digital Counter 1 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital Counter 1 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Digital Counter 1 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
↓
Digital Counter 8 output is ‘more than’ comparison value
Digital Counter 8 output is ‘equal to’ comparison value
Digital Counter 8 output is ‘less than’ comparison value
ELEMENT:
Digital Element
Dig Element 1 PKP
Dig Element 1 OP
Dig Element 1 DPO
↓
Dig Element 16 PKP
Dig Element 16 OP
Dig Element 16 DPO
Digital Element 1 is picked up
Digital Element 1 is operated
Digital Element 1 is dropped out
↓
Digital Element 16 is picked up
Digital Element 16 is operated
Digital Element 16 is dropped out
ELEMENT:
Sensitive Directional
Power
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
DIR POWER 1 PKP
DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 OP
Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up
Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has picked up
Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out
Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has dropped out
Stage 1 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated
Stage 2 of the Directional Power element 1 has operated
The Directional Power element has picked up
The Directional Power element has dropped out
The Directional Power element has operated
DIR POWER 2
Same set of operands as DIR POWER 1
ELEMENT:
FlexElements™
FxE 1 PKP
FxE 1 OP
FxE 1 DPO
↓
FxE 8 PKP
FxE 8 OP
FxE 8 DPO
FlexElement™ 1 has picked up
FlexElement™ 1 has operated
FlexElement™ 1 has dropped out
↓
FlexElement™ 8 has picked up
FlexElement™ 8 has operated
FlexElement™ 8 has dropped out
ELEMENT:
Ground IOC
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOC1 OP
GROUND IOC1 DPO
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND IOC 1
ELEMENT:
Ground TOC
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 OP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
GROUND TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for GROUND TOC1
ELEMENT
Non-Volatile
Latches
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
↓
LATCH 16 ON
LATCH 16 OFF
Non-Volatile Latch 1 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-Voltage Latch 1 is OFF (Logic = 0)
↓
Non-Volatile Latch 16 is ON (Logic = 1)
Non-Voltage Latch 16 is OFF (Logic = 0)
ELEMENT:
Neutral IOC
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL IOC1
ELEMENT:
Neutral OV
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
Neutral Overvoltage element has picked up
Neutral Overvoltage element has dropped out
Neutral Overvoltage element has operated
ELEMENT:
Neutral TOC
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has picked up
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has operated
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 has dropped out
NEUTRAL TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for NEUTRAL TOC1
5
5-56
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 3 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Phase IOC
PHASE IOC1 PKP
PHASE IOC1 OP
PHASE IOC1 DPO
PHASE IOC1 PKP A
PHASE IOC1 PKP B
PHASE IOC1 PKP C
PHASE IOC1 OP A
PHASE IOC1 OP B
PHASE IOC1 OP C
PHASE IOC1 DPO A
PHASE IOC1 DPO B
PHASE IOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has operated
At least one phase of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has picked up
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has operated
Phase A of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase B of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
Phase C of PHASE IOC1 has dropped out
PHASE IOC2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE IOC1
PHASE TOC1 PKP
PHASE TOC1 OP
PHASE TOC1 DPO
PHASE TOC1 PKP A
PHASE TOC1 PKP B
PHASE TOC1 PKP C
PHASE TOC1 OP A
PHASE TOC1 OP B
PHASE TOC1 OP C
PHASE TOC1 DPO A
PHASE TOC1 DPO B
PHASE TOC1 DPO C
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has operated
At least one phase of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has picked up
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has operated
Phase A of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase B of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
Phase C of PHASE TOC1 has dropped out
PHASE TOC2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE TOC1
PHASE UV1 PKP
PHASE UV1 OP
PHASE UV1 DPO
PHASE UV1 PKP A
PHASE UV1 PKP B
PHASE UV1 PKP C
PHASE UV1 OP A
PHASE UV1 OP B
PHASE UV1 OP C
PHASE UV1 DPO A
PHASE UV1 DPO B
PHASE UV1 DPO C
At least one phase of UV1 has picked up
At least one phase of UV1 has operated
At least one phase of UV1 has dropped out
Phase A of UV1 has picked up
Phase B of UV1 has picked up
Phase C of UV1 has picked up
Phase A of UV1 has operated
Phase B of UV1 has operated
Phase C of UV1 has operated
Phase A of UV1 has dropped out
Phase B of UV1 has dropped out
Phase C of UV1 has dropped out
PHASE UV2
Same set of operands as shown for PHASE UV1
SELECTOR 1 POS Y
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
Selector Switch 1 is in Position Y (mutually exclusive operands).
First bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Second bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Third bit of the 3-bit word encoding position of Selector 1.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the stepping up control
input but not acknowledged.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected with the 3-bit control input but
not acknowledged.
Position of Selector 1 has been pre-selected but not acknowledged.
Position of Selector Switch 1 is undetermined or restored from memory when
the relay powers up and synchronizes to the 3-bit input.
ELEMENT:
Phase TOC
ELEMENT:
Phase UV
ELEMENT:
Selector Switch
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 2
Same set of operands as shown above for SELECTOR 1
ELEMENT:
Setting Group
SETTING GROUP ACT 1
↓
SETTING GROUP ACT 6
Setting Group 1 is active
↓
Setting Group 6 is active
ELEMENT:
Disturbance
Detector
SRCx 50DD OP
Source x Disturbance Detector is operated
ELEMENT:
VTFF
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL OP
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL DPO
SRCx VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has operated
Source x VT Fuse Failure detector has dropped out
Source x has lost voltage signals (V2 above 25% or V1 below 70%
of nominal)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5
5-57
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 4 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
ELEMENT:
Synchrocheck
SYNC 1 DEAD S OP
SYNC 1 DEAD S DPO
SYNC 1 SYNC OP
SYNC 1 SYNC DPO
SYNC 1 CLS OP
SYNC 1 CLS DPO
SYNC 1 V1 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V1 BELOW MAX
SYNC 1 V2 ABOVE MIN
SYNC 1 V2 BELOW MAX
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has operated
Synchrocheck 1 dead source has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has operated
Synchrocheck 1 in synchronization has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 close has operated
Synchrocheck 1 close has dropped out
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V1 is below the maximum dead voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is above the minimum live voltage
Synchrocheck 1 V2 is below the maximum dead voltage
SYNC 2
Same set of operands as shown for SYNC 1
FIXED OPERANDS
Off
Logic = 0. Does nothing and may be used as a delimiter in an equation list;
used as ‘Disable’ by other features.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Inputs
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
↓
Cont Ip 1
Cont Ip 2
↓
On
5
Logic = 1. Can be used as a test setting.
On
On
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
Off
Off
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Outputs,
Current
(from detector on
Form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
↓
IOn
IOn
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
↓
IOff
IOff
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Contact Outputs,
Voltage
(from detector on
Form-A output only)
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
↓
VOn
VOn
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
Cont Op 1
Cont Op 2
↓
VOff
VOff
(will not appear unless ordered)
(will not appear unless ordered)
↓
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Direct Inputs
DIRECT INPUT 1 On
↓
DIRECT INPUT 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Remote Inputs
REMOTE INPUT 1 On
↓
REMOTE INPUT 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual Inputs
Virt Ip 1 On
↓
Virt Ip 32 On
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
INPUTS/OUTPUTS:
Virtual Outputs
Virt Op 1 On
↓
Virt Op 64 On
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
LED TEST
LED TEST IN PROGRESS
An LED test has been initiated and has not finished.
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1 On
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 On
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
REMOTE DEVICE 1 Off
↓
REMOTE DEVICE 16 Off
Flag is set, logic=1
↓
Flag is set, logic=1
RESET OP
RESET OP (COMMS)
RESET OP (OPERAND)
Reset command is operated (set by all 3 operands below)
Communications source of the reset command
RESETTING menu) source
Operand (assigned in the INPUTS/OUTPUTS
of the reset command
Reset key (pushbutton) source of the reset command
RESETTING
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON)
5-58
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
Table 5–5: C60 FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS (Sheet 5 of 5)
OPERAND TYPE
OPERAND SYNTAX
OPERAND DESCRIPTION
SELFDIAGNOSTICS
ANY MAJOR ERROR
ANY MINOR ERROR
ANY SELF-TEST
BATTERY FAIL
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
DIRECT RING BREAK
DSP ERROR
EEPROM DATA ERROR
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
IRIG-B FAILURE
LATCHING OUT ERROR
LOW ON MEMORY
NO DSP INTERRUPTS
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
PROGRAM MEMORY
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
SNTP FAILURE
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
WATCHDOG ERROR
Any of the major self-test errors generated (major error)
Any of the minor self-test errors generated (minor error)
Any self-test errors generated (generic, any error)
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
See description in Chapter 7: Commands and Targets.
UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS ALARM
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
Asserted when a password entry fails while accessing a password-protected
level of the relay.
USERPROGRAMMABLE
PUSHBUTTONS
PUSHBUTTON x ON
PUSHBUTTON x OFF
Pushbutton Number x is in the ’On’ position
Pushbutton Number x is in the ’Off’ position
Some operands can be re-named by the user. These are the names of the breakers in the breaker control feature, the ID
(identification) of contact inputs, the ID of virtual inputs, and the ID of virtual outputs. If the user changes the default name/
ID of any of these operands, the assigned name will appear in the relay list of operands. The default names are shown in
the FlexLogic™ Operands table above.
The characteristics of the logic gates are tabulated below, and the operators available in FlexLogic™ are listed in the FlexLogic™ Operators table.
Table 5–6: FLEXLOGIC™ GATE CHARACTERISTICS
GATES
NUMBER OF INPUTS
NOT
1
OUTPUT IS ‘1’ (= ON) IF...
input is ‘0’
OR
2 to 16
any input is ‘1’
AND
2 to 16
all inputs are ‘1’
all inputs are ‘0’
NOR
2 to 16
NAND
2 to 16
any input is ‘0’
XOR
2
only one input is ‘1’
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-59
5
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
Table 5–7: FLEXLOGIC™ OPERATORS
TYPE
SYNTAX
DESCRIPTION
Editor
INSERT
Insert a parameter in an equation list.
DELETE
Delete a parameter from an equation list.
End
END
The first END encountered signifies the last entry in
the list of processed FlexLogic™ parameters.
One Shot
POSITIVE ONE SHOT One shot that responds to a positive going edge.
Logic
Gate
NEGATIVE ONE
SHOT
One shot that responds to a negative going edge.
DUAL ONE SHOT
One shot that responds to both the positive and
negative going edges.
NOTES
A ‘one shot’ refers to a single input gate
that generates a pulse in response to an
edge on the input. The output from a ‘one
shot’ is True (positive) for only one pass
through the FlexLogic™ equation. There is
a maximum of 32 ‘one shots’.
NOT
Logical Not
Operates on the previous parameter.
OR(2)
↓
OR(16)
2 input OR gate
↓
16 input OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
AND(2)
↓
AND(16)
2 input AND gate
↓
16 input AND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NOR(2)
↓
NOR(16)
2 input NOR gate
↓
16 input NOR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
NAND(2)
↓
NAND(16)
2 input NAND gate
↓
16 input NAND gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
↓
Operates on the 16 previous parameters.
XOR(2)
2 input Exclusive OR gate
Operates on the 2 previous parameters.
LATCH (S,R)
Latch (Set, Reset) - reset-dominant
The parameter preceding LATCH(S,R) is
the Reset input. The parameter preceding
the Reset input is the Set input.
Timer
TIMER 1
↓
TIMER 32
Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 1 settings.
↓
Timer set with FlexLogic™ Timer 32 settings.
The timer is started by the preceding
parameter. The output of the timer is
TIMER #.
Assign
Virtual
Output
= Virt Op 1
↓
= Virt Op 64
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual
Output 1.
↓
Assigns previous FlexLogic™ parameter to Virtual
Output 64.
The virtual output is set by the preceding
parameter
5
5.4.2 FLEXLOGIC™ RULES
When forming a FlexLogic™ equation, the sequence in the linear array of parameters must follow these general rules:
1.
Operands must precede the operator which uses the operands as inputs.
2.
Operators have only one output. The output of an operator must be used to create a virtual output if it is to be used as
an input to two or more operators.
3.
Assigning the output of an operator to a Virtual Output terminates the equation.
4.
A timer operator (e.g. "TIMER 1") or virtual output assignment (e.g. " = Virt Op 1") may only be used once. If this rule is
broken, a syntax error will be declared.
5.4.3 FLEXLOGIC™ EVALUATION
Each equation is evaluated in the order in which the parameters have been entered.
CAUTION
FlexLogic™ provides latches which by definition have a memory action, remaining in the set state after the
set input has been asserted. However, they are volatile; i.e. they reset on the re-application of control
power.
When making changes to settings, all FlexLogic™ equations are re-compiled whenever any new setting
value is entered, so all latches are automatically reset. If it is necessary to re-initialize FlexLogic™ during
testing, for example, it is suggested to power the unit down and then back up.
5-60
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5.4.4 FLEXLOGIC™ EXAMPLE
This section provides an example of implementing logic for a typical application. The sequence of the steps is quite important as it should minimize the work necessary to develop the relay settings. Note that the example presented in the figure
below is intended to demonstrate the procedure, not to solve a specific application situation.
In the example below, it is assumed that logic has already been programmed to produce Virtual Outputs 1 and 2, and is
only a part of the full set of equations used. When using FlexLogic™, it is important to make a note of each Virtual Output
used – a Virtual Output designation (1 to 64) can only be properly assigned once.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
Time Delay
on Dropout
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
Operate Output
Relay H1
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
Timer 1
Time Delay
on Pickup
AND
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827025A2.vsd
Figure 5–28: EXAMPLE LOGIC SCHEME
1.
Inspect the example logic diagram to determine if the required logic can be implemented with the FlexLogic™ operators. If this is not possible, the logic must be altered until this condition is satisfied. Once this is done, count the inputs
to each gate to verify that the number of inputs does not exceed the FlexLogic™ limits, which is unlikely but possible. If
the number of inputs is too high, subdivide the inputs into multiple gates to produce an equivalent. For example, if 25
inputs to an AND gate are required, connect Inputs 1 through 16 to AND(16), 17 through 25 to AND(9), and the outputs
from these two gates to AND(2).
Inspect each operator between the initial operands and final virtual outputs to determine if the output from the operator
is used as an input to more than one following operator. If so, the operator output must be assigned as a Virtual Output.
For the example shown above, the output of the AND gate is used as an input to both OR#1 and Timer 1, and must
therefore be made a Virtual Output and assigned the next available number (i.e. Virtual Output 3). The final output
must also be assigned to a Virtual Output as Virtual Output 4, which will be programmed in the contact output section
to operate relay H1 (i.e. Output Contact H1).
Therefore, the required logic can be implemented with two FlexLogic™ equations with outputs of Virtual Output 3 and
Virtual Output 4 as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
(200 ms)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
Timer 1
AND
Time Delay
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
827026A2.VSD
Figure 5–29: LOGIC EXAMPLE WITH VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-61
5
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
2.
5 SETTINGS
Prepare a logic diagram for the equation to produce Virtual Output 3, as this output will be used as an operand in the
Virtual Output 4 equation (create the equation for every output that will be used as an operand first, so that when these
operands are required they will already have been evaluated and assigned to a specific Virtual Output). The logic for
Virtual Output 3 is shown below with the final output assigned.
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
State=Operated
AND(2)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827027A2.VSD
Figure 5–30: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
3.
Prepare a logic diagram for Virtual Output 4, replacing the logic ahead of Virtual Output 3 with a symbol identified as
Virtual Output 3, as shown below.
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
State=ON
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 2
State=ON
Set
LATCH
OR #1
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
State=ON
Reset
Timer 2
XOR
OR #2
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
State=Pickup
Time Delay
on Dropout
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
(200 ms)
Timer 1
5
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
State=ON
Time Delay
on Pickup
(800 ms)
CONTACT INPUT H1c
State=Closed
827028A2.VSD
Figure 5–31: LOGIC FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
4.
Program the FlexLogic™ equation for Virtual Output 3 by translating the logic into available FlexLogic™ parameters.
The equation is formed one parameter at a time until the required logic is complete. It is generally easier to start at the
output end of the equation and work back towards the input, as shown in the following steps. It is also recommended to
list operator inputs from bottom to top. For demonstration, the final output will be arbitrarily identified as parameter 99,
and each preceding parameter decremented by one in turn. Until accustomed to using FlexLogic™, it is suggested that
a worksheet with a series of cells marked with the arbitrary parameter numbers be prepared, as shown below.
01
02
03
04
05
.....
97
98
99
827029A1.VSD
Figure 5–32: FLEXLOGIC™ WORKSHEET
5.
Following the procedure outlined, start with parameter 99, as follows:
99: The final output of the equation is Virtual Output 3, which is created by the operator "= Virt Op n". This parameter
is therefore "= Virt Op 3."
5-62
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
98: The gate preceding the output is an AND, which in this case requires two inputs. The operator for this gate is a 2input AND so the parameter is “AND(2)”. Note that FlexLogic™ rules require that the number of inputs to most
types of operators must be specified to identify the operands for the gate. As the 2-input AND will operate on the
two operands preceding it, these inputs must be specified, starting with the lower.
97: This lower input to the AND gate must be passed through an inverter (the NOT operator) so the next parameter is
“NOT”. The NOT operator acts upon the operand immediately preceding it, so specify the inverter input next.
96: The input to the NOT gate is to be contact input H1c. The ON state of a contact input can be programmed to be
set when the contact is either open or closed. Assume for this example the state is to be ON for a closed contact.
The operand is therefore “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The last step in the procedure is to specify the upper input to the AND gate, the operated state of digital element 2.
This operand is "DIG ELEM 2 OP".
Writing the parameters in numerical order can now form the equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3:
[95]
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
= Virt Op 3
It is now possible to check that this selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 3 diagram as a check.
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
NOT
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
AND (2)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 3
AND
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 3
5
827030A2.VSD
Figure 5–33: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3
6.
Repeating the process described for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 3, select the FlexLogic™ parameters for Virtual Output 4.
99: The final output of the equation is VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 which is parameter “= Virt Op 4".
98: The operator preceding the output is Timer 2, which is operand “TIMER 2". Note that the settings required for the
timer are established in the timer programming section.
97: The operator preceding Timer 2 is OR #2, a 3-input OR, which is parameter “OR(3)”.
96: The lowest input to OR #2 is operand “Cont Ip H1c On”.
95: The center input to OR #2 is operand “TIMER 1".
94: The input to Timer 1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
93: The upper input to OR #2 is operand “LATCH (S,R)”.
92: There are two inputs to a latch, and the input immediately preceding the latch reset is OR #1, a 4-input OR, which
is parameter “OR(4)”.
91: The lowest input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 3 On".
90: The input just above the lowest input to OR #1 is operand “XOR(2)”.
89: The lower input to the XOR is operand “DIG ELEM 1 PKP”.
88: The upper input to the XOR is operand “Virt Ip 1 On".
87: The input just below the upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 2 On".
86: The upper input to OR #1 is operand “Virt Op 1 On".
85: The last parameter is used to set the latch, and is operand “Virt Op 4 On".
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-63
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
The equation for VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4 is:
[85]
[86]
[87]
[88]
[89]
[90]
[91]
[92]
[93]
[94]
[95]
[96]
[97]
[98]
[99]
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
It is now possible to check that the selection of parameters will produce the required logic by converting the set of parameters into a logic diagram. The result of this process is shown below, which is compared to the Logic for Virtual Output 4 diagram as a check.
85
86
87
5
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 4 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 2 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Ip 1 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
XOR
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (4)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
LATCH (S,R)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Virt Op 3 On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 1
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
Cont Ip H1c On
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
OR (3)
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
TIMER 2
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY n:
=Virt Op 4
Set
LATCH
XOR
OR
Reset
OR
T2
VIRTUAL
OUTPUT 4
T1
827031A2.VSD
Figure 5–34: FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION FOR VIRTUAL OUTPUT 4
7.
Now write the complete FlexLogic™ expression required to implement the logic, making an effort to assemble the
equation in an order where Virtual Outputs that will be used as inputs to operators are created before needed. In cases
where a lot of processing is required to perform logic, this may be difficult to achieve, but in most cases will not cause
problems as all logic is calculated at least 4 times per power frequency cycle. The possibility of a problem caused by
sequential processing emphasizes the necessity to test the performance of FlexLogic™ before it is placed in service.
In the following equation, Virtual Output 3 is used as an input to both Latch 1 and Timer 1 as arranged in the order
shown below:
DIG ELEM 2 OP
Cont Ip H1c On
NOT
AND(2)
5-64
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
= Virt Op 3
Virt Op 4 On
Virt Op 1 On
Virt Op 2 On
Virt Ip 1 On
DIG ELEM 1 PKP
XOR(2)
Virt Op 3 On
OR(4)
LATCH (S,R)
Virt Op 3 On
TIMER 1
Cont Ip H1c On
OR(3)
TIMER 2
= Virt Op 4
END
In the expression above, the Virtual Output 4 input to the 4-input OR is listed before it is created. This is typical of a
form of feedback, in this case, used to create a seal-in effect with the latch, and is correct.
8.
The logic should always be tested after it is loaded into the relay, in the same fashion as has been used in the past.
Testing can be simplified by placing an "END" operator within the overall set of FlexLogic™ equations. The equations
will then only be evaluated up to the first "END" operator.
The "On" and "Off" operands can be placed in an equation to establish a known set of conditions for test purposes, and
the "INSERT" and "DELETE" commands can be used to modify equations.
5.4.5 FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR
PATH: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC
EQUATION EDITOR
FLEXLOGIC EQUATION EDITOR
1:
Range: FlexLogic™ parameters
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY 512:
END
Range: FlexLogic™ parameters
FLEXLOGIC ENTRY
END
↓
MESSAGE
There are 512 FlexLogic™ entries available, numbered from 1 to 512, with default ‘END’ entry settings. If a "Disabled" Element is selected as a FlexLogic™ entry, the associated state flag will never be set to ‘1’. The ‘+/–‘ key may be used when
editing FlexLogic™ equations from the keypad to quickly scan through the major parameter types.
5.4.6 FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS
PATH: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
FLEXLOGIC TIMERS
FLEXLOGIC TIMER 1(32)
TIMER 1
TYPE: millisecond
Range: millisecond, second, minute
TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
TIMER 1 DROPOUT
DELAY:
0
Range: 0 to 60000 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FLEXLOGIC
TIMER 1
There are 32 identical FlexLogic™ timers available. These timers can be used as operators for FlexLogic™ equations.
•
TIMER 1 TYPE: This setting is used to select the time measuring unit.
•
TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set this function to "0".
•
TIMER 1 DROPOUT DELAY: Sets the time delay to dropout. If a dropout delay is not required, set this function to "0".
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-65
5
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
5.4.7 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: SETTING
FLEXLOGIC
FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
FLEXELEMENT 1 NAME:
FxE1
Range: up to 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN
Off
Range: Off, any analog actual value parameter
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE: Signed
Range: Signed, Absolute
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE: Level
Range: Level, Delta
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION: Over
Range: Over, Under
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: –90.000 to 90.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
HYSTERESIS: 3.0%
Range: 0.1 to 50.0% in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt
UNIT: milliseconds
Range: milliseconds, seconds, minutes
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
20
Range: 20 to 86400 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1 RST
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
BLOCK: Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
FLEXELEMENT 1
5
FLEXELEMENTS
A FlexElement™ is a universal comparator that can be used to monitor any analog actual value calculated by the relay or a
net difference of any two analog actual values of the same type. The effective operating signal could be treated as a signed
number or its absolute value could be used as per user's choice.
The element can be programmed to respond either to a signal level or to a rate-of-change (delta) over a pre-defined period
of time. The output operand is asserted when the operating signal is higher than a threshold or lower than a threshold as
per user's choice.
5-66
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
SETTING
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1
FUNCTION:
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
MODE:
Enabled = 1
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP
MODE:
Disabled = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1
DIRECTION:
SETTING
FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP:
FLEXELEMENT 1 BLK:
AND
Off = 0
FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT
HYSTERESIS:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT:
SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 dt:
FLEXELEMENT 1
PICKUP DELAY:
RUN
FLEXELEMENT 1
RESET DELAY:
FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN:
Actual Value
FLEXELEMENT 1 -IN:
Actual Value
tPKP
+
-
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
FxE 1 OP
tRST
FxE 1 DPO
FxE 1 PKP
ACTUAL VALUE
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842004A2.CDR
Figure 5–35: FLEXELEMENT™ SCHEME LOGIC
The FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN setting specifies the first (non-inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN setting specifies the second (inverted) input to the FlexElement™. Zero is assumed as the input if
this setting is set to “Off”. For proper operation of the element at least one input must be selected. Otherwise, the element
will not assert its output operands. This input should be used to invert the signal if needed for convenience, or to make the
element respond to a differential signal such as for a top-bottom oil temperature differential alarm. The element will not
operate if the two input signals are of different types, for example if one tries to use active power and phase angle to build
the effective operating signal.
The element responds directly to the differential signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting is set to “Signed”. The element responds to the absolute value of the differential signal if this setting is set to “Absolute”. Sample applications for the
“Absolute” setting include monitoring the angular difference between two phasors with a symmetrical limit angle in both
directions; monitoring power regardless of its direction, or monitoring a trend regardless of whether the signal increases of
decreases.
The element responds directly to its operating signal – as defined by the FLEXELEMENT 1 +IN, FLEXELEMENT 1 –IN and FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE settings – if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Level”. The element responds to the
rate of change of its operating signal if the FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE setting is set to “Delta”. In this case the FLEXELEMENT 1 dt UNIT and FLEXELEMENT 1 dt settings specify how the rate of change is derived.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION setting enables the relay to respond to either high or low values of the operating signal. The
following figure explains the application of the FLEXELEMENT 1 DIRECTION, FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP and FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS settings.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-67
5
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over
PICKUP
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under
PICKUP
HYSTERESIS = % of PICKUP
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842705A1.CDR
Figure 5–36: FLEXELEMENT™ DIRECTION, PICKUP, AND HYSTERESIS
In conjunction with the FLEXELEMENT 1 INPUT MODE setting the element could be programmed to provide two extra characteristics as shown in the figure below.
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
5
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Over;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Signed;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP
FLEXELEMENT
DIRECTION = Under;
FLEXELEMENT COMP
MODE = Absolute;
FlexElement 1 OpSig
842706A1.CDR
Figure 5–37: FLEXELEMENT™ INPUT MODE SETTING
5-68
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting specifies the operating threshold for the effective operating signal of the element. If set
to “Over”, the element picks up when the operating signal exceeds the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value. If set to “Under”, the
element picks up when the operating signal falls below the FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP value.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting controls the element dropout. It should be noticed that both the operating signal
and the pickup threshold can be negative facilitating applications such as reverse power alarm protection. The FlexElement™ can be programmed to work with all analog actual values measured by the relay. The FLEXELEMENT 1 PICKUP setting is entered in pu values using the following definitions of the base units:
Table 5–8: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
dcmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100°C
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY
(Positive and Negative Watthours,
Positive and Negative Varhours)
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
5
The FLEXELEMENT 1 HYSTERESIS setting defines the pickup–dropout relation of the element by specifying the width of the
hysteresis loop as a percentage of the pickup value as shown in the FlexElement™ Direction, Pickup, and Hysteresis diagram.
The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT UNIT setting specifies the time unit for the setting FLEXELEMENT 1 dt. This setting is applicable only if
FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”. The FLEXELEMENT 1 DT setting specifies duration of the time interval for the
rate of change mode of operation. This setting is applicable only if FLEXELEMENT 1 COMP MODE is set to “Delta”.
This FLEXELEMENT 1 PKP DELAY setting specifies the pickup delay of the element. The FLEXELEMENT 1 RST DELAY setting
specifies the reset delay of the element.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-69
5.4 FLEXLOGIC™
5 SETTINGS
5.4.8 NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
PATH: SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
LATCH 1(16)
LATCH 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
LATCH 1 TYPE:
Reset Dominant
Range: Reset Dominant, Set Dominant
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 SET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
LATCH 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
LATCH 1
The non-volatile latches provide a permanent logical flag that is stored safely and will not reset upon reboot after the relay
is powered down. Typical applications include sustaining operator commands or permanently block relay functions, such as
Autorecloser, until a deliberate HMI action resets the latch. The settings, logic, and element operation are described below:
5
•
LATCH 1 TYPE: This setting characterizes Latch 1 to be Set- or Reset-dominant.
•
LATCH 1 SET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operands 'sets' Latch 1.
•
LATCH 1 RESET: If asserted, the specified FlexLogic™ operand 'resets' Latch 1.
SETTING
LATCH N
TYPE
LATCH N
SET
LATCH N
RESET
LATCH N
ON
LATCH N
OFF
Reset
Dominant
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Set
Dominant
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
LATCH 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Previous
State
Enabled=1
ON
ON
OFF
ON
SETTING
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
LATCH 1 SET:
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
Off=0
ON
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Previous
State
Previous
State
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
SETTING
LATCH 1 TYPE:
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SET
LATCH 1 ON
LATCH 1 OFF
SETTING
LATCH 1 SET:
Off=0
RESET
842005A1.CDR
Figure 5–38: NON-VOLATILE LATCH OPERATION TABLE (N=1 to 16) AND LOGIC
5-70
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.1 OVERVIEW
Each protection element can be assigned up to six different sets of settings according to Setting Group designations 1 to 6.
The performance of these elements is defined by the active Setting Group at a given time. Multiple setting groups allow the
user to conveniently change protection settings for different operating situations (e.g. altered power system configuration,
season of the year). The active setting group can be preset or selected via the SETTING GROUPS menu (see the Control Elements section later in this chapter). See also the Introduction to Elements section at the beginning of this chapter.
5.5.2 SETTING GROUP
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
BREAKER FAILURE
PHASE CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
GROUND CURRENT
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
SENSITIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER
See page 5-72.
See page 5-81.
See page 5-90.
See page 5-93.
See page 5-96.
5
See page 5-101.
Each of the six Setting Group menus is identical. SETTING GROUP 1 (the default active group) automatically becomes active
if no other group is active (see the Control Elements section for additional details).
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-71
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5.5.3 BREAKER FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
5-72
BREAKER FAILURE
BREAKER FAILURE 1(2)
BF1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
BF1 MODE:
3-Pole
Range: 3-Pole, 1-Pole
MESSAGE
BF1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BF1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 N AMP SUPV
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 1:
Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 2:
Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 USE TIMER 3:
Yes
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP HISET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 N AMP HISET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BREAKER FAILURE 1
5
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
BF1 N AMP LOSET
PICKUP: 1.050 pu
Range: 0.001 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 LOSET TIME
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BF1 TARGET
Self-Reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
BF1 EVENTS
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 PH B INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 PH C INITIATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 φB
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS1 φC
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 φB
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
MESSAGE
BF1 BKR POS2 φC
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Valid only for 1-Pole breaker failure schemes.
There are 2 identical Breaker Failure menus available, numbered 1 and 2.
In general, a breaker failure scheme determines that a breaker signaled to trip has not cleared a fault within a definite time,
so further tripping action must be performed. Tripping from the breaker failure scheme should trip all breakers, both local
and remote, that can supply current to the faulted zone. Usually operation of a breaker failure element will cause clearing of
a larger section of the power system than the initial trip. Because breaker failure can result in tripping a large number of
breakers and this affects system safety and stability, a very high level of security is required.
Two schemes are provided: one for three-pole tripping only (identified by the name "3BF") and one for three pole plus single-pole operation (identified by the name "1BF"). The philosophy used in these schemes is identical. The operation of a
breaker failure element includes three stages: initiation, determination of a breaker failure condition, and output.
INITIATION STAGE:
A FlexLogic™ operand representing the protection trip signal initially sent to the breaker must be selected to initiate the
scheme. The initiating signal should be sealed-in if primary fault detection can reset before the breaker failure timers have
finished timing. The seal-in is supervised by current level, so it is reset when the fault is cleared. If desired, an incomplete
sequence seal-in reset can be implemented by using the initiating operand to also initiate a FlexLogic™ timer, set longer
than any breaker failure timer, whose output operand is selected to block the breaker failure scheme.
Schemes can be initiated either directly or with current level supervision. It is particularly important in any application to
decide if a current-supervised initiate is to be used. The use of a current-supervised initiate results in the breaker failure element not being initiated for a breaker that has very little or no current flowing through it, which may be the case for transformer faults. For those situations where it is required to maintain breaker fail coverage for fault levels below the BF1 PH
AMP SUPV PICKUP or the BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP setting, a current supervised initiate should not be used. This feature
should be utilized for those situations where coordinating margins may be reduced when high speed reclosing is used.
Thus, if this choice is made, fault levels must always be above the supervision pickup levels for dependable operation of
the breaker fail scheme. This can also occur in breaker-and-a-half or ring bus configurations where the first breaker closes
into a fault; the protection trips and attempts to initiate breaker failure for the second breaker, which is in the process of
closing, but does not yet have current flowing through it.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-73
5
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
When the scheme is initiated, it immediately sends a trip signal to the breaker initially signaled to trip (this feature is usually
described as Re-Trip). This reduces the possibility of widespread tripping that results from a declaration of a failed breaker.
DETERMINATION OF A BREAKER FAILURE CONDITION:
The schemes determine a breaker failure condition via three ‘paths’. Each of these paths is equipped with a time delay,
after which a failed breaker is declared and trip signals are sent to all breakers required to clear the zone. The delayed
paths are associated with Breaker Failure Timers 1, 2, and 3, which are intended to have delays increasing with increasing
timer numbers. These delayed paths are individually enabled to allow for maximum flexibility.
Timer 1 logic (Early Path) is supervised by a fast-operating breaker auxiliary contact. If the breaker is still closed (as indicated by the auxiliary contact) and fault current is detected after the delay interval, an output is issued. Operation of the
breaker auxiliary switch indicates that the breaker has mechanically operated. The continued presence of current indicates
that the breaker has failed to interrupt the circuit.
Timer 2 logic (Main Path) is not supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact. If fault current is detected after the delay interval,
an output is issued. This path is intended to detect a breaker that opens mechanically but fails to interrupt fault current; the
logic therefore does not use a breaker auxiliary contact.
The Timer 1 and 2 paths provide two levels of current supervision, Hi-set and Lo-set, that allow the supervision level to
change from a current which flows before a breaker inserts an opening resistor into the faulted circuit to a lower level after
resistor insertion. The Hi-set detector is enabled after timeout of Timer 1 or 2, along with a timer that will enable the Lo-set
detector after its delay interval. The delay interval between Hi-set and Lo-set is the expected breaker opening time. Both
current detectors provide a fast operating time for currents at small multiples of the pickup value. The overcurrent detectors
are required to operate after the breaker failure delay interval to eliminate the need for very fast resetting overcurrent detectors.
5
Timer 3 logic (Slow Path) is supervised by a breaker auxiliary contact and a control switch contact used to indicate that the
breaker is in/out of service, disabling this path when the breaker is out of service for maintenance. There is no current level
check in this logic as it is intended to detect low magnitude faults and it is therefore the slowest to operate.
OUTPUT:
The outputs from the schemes are:
•
FlexLogic™ operands that report on the operation of portions of the scheme
•
FlexLogic™ operand used to re-trip the protected breaker
•
FlexLogic™ operands that initiate tripping required to clear the faulted zone. The trip output can be sealed-in for an
adjustable period.
•
Target message indicating a failed breaker has been declared
•
Illumination of the faceplate Trip LED (and the Phase A, B or C LED, if applicable)
MAIN PATH SEQUENCE:
ACTUAL CURRENT MAGNITUDE
FAILED INTERRUPTION
0
AMP
CALCULATED CURRENT MAGNITUDE
CORRECT INTERRUPTION
Rampdown
0
PROTECTION OPERATION
(ASSUMED 1.5 cycles)
BREAKER INTERRUPTING TIME
(ASSUMED 3 cycles)
MARGIN
(Assumed 2 Cycles)
BACKUP BREAKER OPERATING TIME
(Assumed 3 Cycles)
BREAKER FAILURE TIMER No. 2 (±1/8 cycle)
INITIATE (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE CURRENT DETECTOR PICKUP (1/8 cycle)
BREAKER FAILURE OUTPUT RELAY PICKUP (1/4 cycle)
FAULT
OCCURS
0
cycles
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
827083A6.CDR
Figure 5–39: BREAKER FAILURE MAIN PATH SEQUENCE
5-74
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTINGS:
•
BF1 MODE: This setting is used to select the breaker failure operating mode: single or three pole.
•
BF1 USE AMP SUPV: If set to "Yes", the element will only be initiated if current flowing through the breaker is above
the supervision pickup level.
•
BF1 USE SEAL-IN: If set to "Yes", the element will only be sealed-in if current flowing through the breaker is above the
supervision pickup level.
•
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that will initiate 3-pole tripping of the breaker.
•
BF1 PH AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the phase current initiation and seal-in supervision level.
Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. It can be set as low as
necessary (lower than breaker resistor current or lower than load current) - Hiset and Loset current supervision will
guarantee correct operation.
•
BF1 N AMP SUPV PICKUP: This setting is used to set the neutral current initiate and seal-in supervision level. Generally this setting should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker. Neutral current supervision is
used only in the three phase scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid only for three-pole tripping
schemes.
•
BF1 USE TIMER 1: If set to "Yes", the Early Path is operational.
•
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 1 is set to the shortest time required for breaker auxiliary contact Status-1 to
open, from the time the initial trip signal is applied to the breaker trip circuit, plus a safety margin.
•
BF1 USE TIMER 2: If set to "Yes", the Main Path is operational.
•
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 2 is set to the expected opening time of the breaker, plus a safety margin. This
safety margin was historically intended to allow for measuring and timing errors in the breaker failure scheme equipment. In microprocessor relays this time is not significant. In C60 relays, which use a Fourier transform, the calculated
current magnitude will ramp-down to zero one power frequency cycle after the current is interrupted, and this lag
should be included in the overall margin duration, as it occurs after current interruption. The Breaker Failure Main Path
Sequence diagram below shows a margin of two cycles; this interval is considered the minimum appropriate for most
applications.
Note that in bulk oil circuit breakers, the interrupting time for currents less than 25% of the interrupting rating can be
significantly longer than the normal interrupting time.
•
BF1 USE TIMER 3: If set to "Yes", the Slow Path is operational.
•
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP DELAY: Timer 3 is set to the same interval as Timer 2, plus an increased safety margin.
Because this path is intended to operate only for low level faults, the delay can be in the order of 300 to 500 ms.
•
•
BF1 BKR POS1 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker early-type
auxiliary switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This is normally a non-multiplied Form-A contact. The contact
may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time.
BF1 BKR POS2 φA/3P: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact (52/a). When using 1-Pole breaker failure scheme, this operand represents the protected breaker auxiliary switch contact on pole A. This may be a multiplied contact.
•
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON: This setting is used to select the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the breaker In-Service/Out-of-Service switch set to the Out-of-Service position.
•
BF1 PH AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
•
BF1 N AMP HISET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, before a breaker opening resistor is inserted.
Neutral current supervision is used only in the three pole scheme to provide increased sensitivity. This setting is valid
only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
•
BF1 PH AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the phase current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current).
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-75
5
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
•
BF1 N AMP LOSET PICKUP: This setting sets the neutral current output supervision level. Generally this setting
should detect the lowest expected fault current on the protected breaker, after a breaker opening resistor is inserted
(approximately 90% of the resistor current). This setting is valid only for 3-pole breaker failure schemes.
•
BF1 LOSET TIME DELAY: Sets the pickup delay for current detection after opening resistor insertion.
•
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT DELAY: This setting is used to set the period of time for which the trip output is sealed-in. This
timer must be coordinated with the automatic reclosing scheme of the failed breaker, to which the breaker failure element sends a cancel reclosure signal. Reclosure of a remote breaker can also be prevented by holding a Transfer Trip
signal on longer than the "reclaim" time.
•
BF1 PH A INITIATE / BF1 PH B INITIATE / BF 1 PH C INITIATE: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to initiate phase A, B, or C single-pole tripping of the breaker and the phase A, B, or C portion of the scheme, accordingly.
This setting is only valid for 1-pole breaker failure schemes.
•
•
•
5
5 SETTINGS
BF1 BKR POS1 φB / BF1 BKR POS 1 φC: These settings select the FlexLogic™ operand to represents the protected
breaker early-type auxiliary switch contact on poles B or C, accordingly. This contact is normally a non-multiplied FormA contact. The contact may even be adjusted to have the shortest possible operating time. This setting is valid only for
1-pole breaker failure schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 φB: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type auxiliary
switch contact on pole B (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. This setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure
schemes.
BF1 BKR POS2 φC: This setting selects the FlexLogic™ operand that represents the protected breaker normal-type
auxiliary switch contact on pole C (52/a). This may be a multiplied contact. For single-pole operation, the scheme has
the same overall general concept except that it provides re-tripping of each single pole of the protected breaker. The
approach shown in the following single pole tripping diagram uses the initiating information to determine which pole is
supposed to trip. The logic is segregated on a per-pole basis. The overcurrent detectors have ganged settings. This
setting is valid only for 1-pole breaker failure schemes.
Upon operation of the breaker failure element for a single pole trip command, a 3-pole trip command should be given
via output operand "BF1 TRIP OP".
5-76
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
In D60 Only
From Trip Output
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
TRIP PHASE C
TRIP PHASE B
TRIP 3-POLE
TRIP PHASE A
SETTING
BF1 FUNCTION:
Enable=1
Disable=0
SETTING
AND
BF1 BLOCK :
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 PH A INITIATE:
OR
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 3-POLE INITIATE :
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPA
OR
OR
AND
Off=0
Initiated Ph A
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
SETTING
BF1 USE SEAL-IN:
YES=1
SETTING
5
AND
NO=0
SEAL-IN PATH
AND
OR
BF1 USE AMP SUPV:
YES=1
OR
NO=0
OR
SETTING
BF1 PH B INITIATE :
OR
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPB
OR
AND
Off=0
SEAL-IN PATH
AND
Initiated Ph B
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
OR
SETTING
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BF1 PH C INITIATE :
OR
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 SOURCE :
BF1 PH AMP SUPV
PICKUP :
IB
IC
BKR FAIL 1 RETRIPC
AND
SETTING
IA
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(Initiated)
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
SEAL-IN PATH
RUN
IA
RUN
IB
PICKUP
RUN
IC
PICKUP
AND
Initiated Ph C
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
PICKUP
OR
}
TO SHEET 2 OF 2
(827070.CDR)
827069A5.CDR
Figure 5–40: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-77
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(Initiated)
SETTING
SETTING
BF1 TIMER 1 PICKUP
DELAY:
BF1 USE TIMER 1:
AND
YES=1
5 SETTINGS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR FAIL 1 T1 OP
0
NO=0
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1
A/3P:
Off=0
AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
Initiated Ph A
OR
SETTING
SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 2:
BF1 TIMER 2 PICKUP
DELAY:
NO=0
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
AND
YES=1
BKR FAIL 1 T2 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1
B:
Off=0
AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
Initiated Ph B
5
OR
AND
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS1
C:
Off=0
AND
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
Initiated Ph C
OR
AND
SETTING
BF1 PH AMP HISET
PICKUP:
FROM SHEET 1 OF 2
(827069.CDR)
IA
IB
IC
RUN
IA
RUN
IB
PICKUP
RUN
IC
PICKUP
PICKUP
SETTING
SETTING
BF1 USE TIMER 3:
BF1 LOSET TIME
DELAY:
YES=1
0
NO=0
OR
0
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2
0
A/3P:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 TIMER 3 PICKUP
DELAY:
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2
SETTING
B:
AND
BF1 TRIP DROPOUT
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
BKR FAIL 1 TRIP OP
SETTING
BF1 PH AMP LOSET
PICKUP :
RUN
IA
RUN
IB
PICKUP
RUN
IC
PICKUP
PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
Off=0
BKR FAIL 1 T3 OP
SETTING
BF1 BKR POS2
C:
Off=0
SETTING
BF1 BREAKER TEST ON:
Off=0
827070A4.CDR
Figure 5–41: BREAKER FAILURE 1-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-78
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5
Figure 5–42: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [INITIATE] (Sheet 1 of 2)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-79
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5
Figure 5–43: BREAKER FAILURE 3-POLE [TIMERS] (Sheet 2 of 2)
5-80
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.4 PHASE CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
PHASE CURRENT
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
PHASE CURRENT
PHASE TOC1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 5–87.
PHASE TOC2
PHASE TOC3
PHASE TOC4
PHASE TOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
PHASE TOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
PHASE IOC1
See page 5–89.
PHASE IOC2
5
PHASE IOC3
PHASE IOC4
PHASE IOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
PHASE IOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
PHASE IOC7
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
PHASE IOC8
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
The C60 contains protection elements for phase time overcurrent (ANSI device 51P) and phase instantaneous overcurrent
(ANSI device 50P). A maximum of six Phase TOC and eight Phase IOC elements are available, dependent on the CT/VT
modules ordered with the relay. See the following table for details
CT/VT MODULES
SLOT F
SLOT M
NUMBER OF ELEMENTS
PHASE TOC
PHASE IOC
8A/8B
8A/8B
4
4
8A/8B
8C/8D
6
6
8C/8D
8A/8B
6
6
8C/8D
8C/8D
6
8
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-81
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
b) INVERSE TOC CURVE CHARACTERISTICS
The inverse time overcurrent curves used by the TOC (time overcurrent) Current Elements are the IEEE, IEC, GE Type
IAC, and I2t standard curve shapes. This allows for simplified coordination with downstream devices. If however, none of
these curve shapes is adequate, FlexCurves™ may be used to customize the inverse time curve characteristics. The Definite Time curve is also an option that may be appropriate if only simple protection is required.
Table 5–9: OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES
IEEE
IEC
GE TYPE IAC
OTHER
IEEE Extremely Inv.
IEC Curve A (BS142)
IAC Extremely Inv.
I2t
IEEE Very Inverse
IEC Curve B (BS142)
IAC Very Inverse
FlexCurves™ A, B, C, and D
IEEE Moderately Inv.
IEC Curve C (BS142)
IAC Inverse
Recloser Curves
IEC Short Inverse
IAC Short Inverse
Definite Time
A time dial multiplier setting allows selection of a multiple of the base curve shape (where the time dial multiplier = 1) with
the curve shape (CURVE) setting. Unlike the electromechanical time dial equivalent, operate times are directly proportional
to the time multiplier (TD MULTIPLIER) setting value. For example, all times for a multiplier of 10 are 10 times the multiplier 1
or base curve values. Setting the multiplier to zero results in an instantaneous response to all current levels above pickup.
5
Time overcurrent time calculations are made with an internal “energy capacity” memory variable. When this variable indicates that the energy capacity has reached 100%, a time overcurrent element will operate. If less than 100% energy capacity is accumulated in this variable and the current falls below the dropout threshold of 97 to 98% of the pickup value, the
variable must be reduced. Two methods of this resetting operation are available: “Instantaneous” and “Timed”. The Instantaneous selection is intended for applications with other relays, such as most static relays, which set the energy capacity
directly to zero when the current falls below the reset threshold. The Timed selection can be used where the relay must
coordinate with electromechanical relays.
5-82
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
IEEE CURVES:
The IEEE time overcurrent curve shapes conform to industry standards and the IEEE C37.112-1996 curve classifications
for extremely, very, and moderately inverse. The IEEE curves are derived from the formulae:
A
tr
---------------------------------- + B
--------------------------------2
I -⎞ p
T = TDM × ⎛ --------------,
T
TDM
=
×
I
RESET
1 – ⎛ ----------------⎞
⎝ I pickup⎠ – 1
⎝ I pickup⎠
where:
(EQ 5.8)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
A, B, p = constants, TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET is “Timed”),
tr = characteristic constant
Table 5–10: IEEE INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IEEE CURVE SHAPE
A
B
P
TR
IEEE Extremely Inverse
28.2
0.1217
2.0000
29.1
IEEE Very Inverse
19.61
0.491
2.0000
21.6
IEEE Moderately Inverse
0.0515
0.1140
0.02000
4.85
Table 5–11: IEEE CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IEEE EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5
11.341
4.761
1.823
1.001
0.648
0.464
0.355
0.285
0.237
0.203
1.0
22.682
9.522
3.647
2.002
1.297
0.927
0.709
0.569
0.474
0.407
2.0
45.363
19.043
7.293
4.003
2.593
1.855
1.418
1.139
0.948
0.813
4.0
90.727
38.087
14.587
8.007
5.187
3.710
2.837
2.277
1.897
1.626
6.0
136.090
57.130
21.880
12.010
7.780
5.564
4.255
3.416
2.845
2.439
8.0
181.454
76.174
29.174
16.014
10.374
7.419
5.674
4.555
3.794
3.252
10.0
226.817
95.217
36.467
20.017
12.967
9.274
7.092
5.693
4.742
4.065
IEEE VERY INVERSE
0.5
8.090
3.514
1.471
0.899
0.654
0.526
0.450
0.401
0.368
0.345
1.0
16.179
7.028
2.942
1.798
1.308
1.051
0.900
0.802
0.736
0.689
2.0
32.358
14.055
5.885
3.597
2.616
2.103
1.799
1.605
1.472
1.378
4.0
64.716
28.111
11.769
7.193
5.232
4.205
3.598
3.209
2.945
2.756
6.0
97.074
42.166
17.654
10.790
7.849
6.308
5.397
4.814
4.417
4.134
8.0
129.432
56.221
23.538
14.387
10.465
8.410
7.196
6.418
5.889
5.513
10.0
161.790
70.277
29.423
17.983
13.081
10.513
8.995
8.023
7.361
6.891
IEEE MODERATELY INVERSE
0.5
3.220
1.902
1.216
0.973
0.844
0.763
0.706
0.663
0.630
0.603
1.0
6.439
3.803
2.432
1.946
1.688
1.526
1.412
1.327
1.260
1.207
2.0
12.878
7.606
4.864
3.892
3.377
3.051
2.823
2.653
2.521
2.414
4.0
25.756
15.213
9.729
7.783
6.753
6.102
5.647
5.307
5.041
4.827
6.0
38.634
22.819
14.593
11.675
10.130
9.153
8.470
7.960
7.562
7.241
8.0
51.512
30.426
19.458
15.567
13.507
12.204
11.294
10.614
10.083
9.654
10.0
64.390
38.032
24.322
19.458
16.883
15.255
14.117
13.267
12.604
12.068
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-83
5
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
IEC CURVES
For European applications, the relay offers three standard curves defined in IEC 255-4 and British standard BS142. These
are defined as IEC Curve A, IEC Curve B, and IEC Curve C. The formulae for these curves are:
K
tr
---------------------------------------------------------------------------2
T = TDM × ( I ⁄ I pickup ) E – 1 , T RESET = TDM × 1 – ( I ⁄ I
pickup )
where:
(EQ 5.9)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = input current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting, K, E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–12: IEC (BS) INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IEC (BS) CURVE SHAPE
IEC Curve A (BS142)
K
E
TR
0.140
0.020
9.7
IEC Curve B (BS142)
13.500
1.000
43.2
IEC Curve C (BS142)
80.000
2.000
58.2
IEC Short Inverse
0.050
0.040
0.500
Table 5–13: IEC CURVE TRIP TIMES (IN SECONDS)
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.05
0.860
0.501
0.315
0.249
0.214
0.192
0.176
0.165
0.156
0.149
0.10
1.719
1.003
0.630
0.498
0.428
0.384
0.353
0.330
0.312
0.297
0.20
3.439
2.006
1.260
0.996
0.856
0.767
0.706
0.659
0.623
0.594
0.40
6.878
4.012
2.521
1.992
1.712
1.535
1.411
1.319
1.247
1.188
0.60
10.317
6.017
3.781
2.988
2.568
2.302
2.117
1.978
1.870
1.782
0.80
13.755
8.023
5.042
3.984
3.424
3.070
2.822
2.637
2.493
2.376
1.00
17.194
10.029
6.302
4.980
4.280
3.837
3.528
3.297
3.116
2.971
0.05
1.350
0.675
0.338
0.225
0.169
0.135
0.113
0.096
0.084
0.075
0.10
2.700
1.350
0.675
0.450
0.338
0.270
0.225
0.193
0.169
0.150
0.20
5.400
2.700
1.350
0.900
0.675
0.540
0.450
0.386
0.338
0.300
0.40
10.800
5.400
2.700
1.800
1.350
1.080
0.900
0.771
0.675
0.600
0.60
16.200
8.100
4.050
2.700
2.025
1.620
1.350
1.157
1.013
0.900
0.80
21.600
10.800
5.400
3.600
2.700
2.160
1.800
1.543
1.350
1.200
1.00
27.000
13.500
6.750
4.500
3.375
2.700
2.250
1.929
1.688
1.500
0.05
3.200
1.333
0.500
0.267
0.167
0.114
0.083
0.063
0.050
0.040
0.10
6.400
2.667
1.000
0.533
0.333
0.229
0.167
0.127
0.100
0.081
0.20
12.800
5.333
2.000
1.067
0.667
0.457
0.333
0.254
0.200
0.162
0.40
25.600
10.667
4.000
2.133
1.333
0.914
0.667
0.508
0.400
0.323
0.60
38.400
16.000
6.000
3.200
2.000
1.371
1.000
0.762
0.600
0.485
0.80
51.200
21.333
8.000
4.267
2.667
1.829
1.333
1.016
0.800
0.646
1.00
64.000
26.667
10.000
5.333
3.333
2.286
1.667
1.270
1.000
0.808
0.026
IEC CURVE A
5
IEC CURVE B
IEC CURVE C
IEC SHORT TIME
0.05
0.153
0.089
0.056
0.044
0.038
0.034
0.031
0.029
0.027
0.10
0.306
0.178
0.111
0.088
0.075
0.067
0.062
0.058
0.054
0.052
0.20
0.612
0.356
0.223
0.175
0.150
0.135
0.124
0.115
0.109
0.104
0.40
1.223
0.711
0.445
0.351
0.301
0.269
0.247
0.231
0.218
0.207
0.60
1.835
1.067
0.668
0.526
0.451
0.404
0.371
0.346
0.327
0.311
0.80
2.446
1.423
0.890
0.702
0.602
0.538
0.494
0.461
0.435
0.415
1.00
3.058
1.778
1.113
0.877
0.752
0.673
0.618
0.576
0.544
0.518
5-84
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
IAC CURVES:
The curves for the General Electric type IAC relay family are derived from the formulae:
D
E
B
⎛
⎞
tr
T = TDM × ⎜ A + ------------------------------ + -------------------------------------2- + -------------------------------------3-⎟ , T RESET = TDM × ------------------------------(
⁄
)
–
C
I
I
2
I
I
I
I
(
(
⁄
)
–
C
)
(
(
⁄
)
–
C
)
⎝
⎠
pkp
pkp
pkp
1 – ( I ⁄ I pkp )
where:
(EQ 5.10)
T = operate time (in seconds), TDM = Multiplier setting, I = Input current, Ipkp = Pickup Current setting, A to E =
constants, tr = characteristic constant, and TRESET = reset time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100%
and RESET is “Timed”)
Table 5–14: GE TYPE IAC INVERSE TIME CURVE CONSTANTS
IAC CURVE SHAPE
A
B
C
D
E
TR
IAC Extreme Inverse
0.0040
0.6379
IAC Very Inverse
0.0900
0.7955
0.6200
1.7872
0.2461
6.008
0.1000
–1.2885
7.9586
IAC Inverse
0.2078
4.678
0.8630
0.8000
–0.4180
0.1947
0.990
IAC Short Inverse
0.0428
0.0609
0.6200
–0.0010
0.0221
0.222
Table 5–15: IAC CURVE TRIP TIMES
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
IAC EXTREMELY INVERSE
0.5
1.699
0.749
0.303
0.178
0.123
0.093
0.074
0.062
0.053
0.046
1.0
3.398
1.498
0.606
0.356
0.246
0.186
0.149
0.124
0.106
0.093
2.0
6.796
2.997
1.212
0.711
0.491
0.372
0.298
0.248
0.212
0.185
4.0
13.591
5.993
2.423
1.422
0.983
0.744
0.595
0.495
0.424
0.370
6.0
20.387
8.990
3.635
2.133
1.474
1.115
0.893
0.743
0.636
0.556
8.0
27.183
11.987
4.846
2.844
1.966
1.487
1.191
0.991
0.848
0.741
10.0
33.979
14.983
6.058
3.555
2.457
1.859
1.488
1.239
1.060
0.926
5
IAC VERY INVERSE
0.5
1.451
0.656
0.269
0.172
0.133
0.113
0.101
0.093
0.087
0.083
1.0
2.901
1.312
0.537
0.343
0.266
0.227
0.202
0.186
0.174
0.165
2.0
5.802
2.624
1.075
0.687
0.533
0.453
0.405
0.372
0.349
0.331
4.0
11.605
5.248
2.150
1.374
1.065
0.906
0.810
0.745
0.698
0.662
6.0
17.407
7.872
3.225
2.061
1.598
1.359
1.215
1.117
1.046
0.992
8.0
23.209
10.497
4.299
2.747
2.131
1.813
1.620
1.490
1.395
1.323
10.0
29.012
13.121
5.374
3.434
2.663
2.266
2.025
1.862
1.744
1.654
0.5
0.578
0.375
0.266
0.221
0.196
0.180
0.168
0.160
0.154
0.148
1.0
1.155
0.749
0.532
0.443
0.392
0.360
0.337
0.320
0.307
0.297
2.0
2.310
1.499
1.064
0.885
0.784
0.719
0.674
0.640
0.614
0.594
4.0
4.621
2.997
2.128
1.770
1.569
1.439
1.348
1.280
1.229
1.188
6.0
6.931
4.496
3.192
2.656
2.353
2.158
2.022
1.921
1.843
1.781
8.0
9.242
5.995
4.256
3.541
3.138
2.878
2.695
2.561
2.457
2.375
10.0
11.552
7.494
5.320
4.426
3.922
3.597
3.369
3.201
3.072
2.969
0.025
IAC INVERSE
IAC SHORT INVERSE
0.5
0.072
0.047
0.035
0.031
0.028
0.027
0.026
0.026
0.025
1.0
0.143
0.095
0.070
0.061
0.057
0.054
0.052
0.051
0.050
0.049
2.0
0.286
0.190
0.140
0.123
0.114
0.108
0.105
0.102
0.100
0.099
4.0
0.573
0.379
0.279
0.245
0.228
0.217
0.210
0.204
0.200
0.197
6.0
0.859
0.569
0.419
0.368
0.341
0.325
0.314
0.307
0.301
0.296
8.0
1.145
0.759
0.559
0.490
0.455
0.434
0.419
0.409
0.401
0.394
10.0
1.431
0.948
0.699
0.613
0.569
0.542
0.524
0.511
0.501
0.493
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-85
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
I2t CURVES:
The curves for the I2t are derived from the formulae:
100
100
----------------------------------------------------I ⎞ 2 , T RESET = TDM × ⎛ I ⎞ –2
T = TDM × ⎛ -----------------------------⎝ I pickup ⎠
⎝ I pickup ⎠
where:
(EQ 5.11)
T = Operate Time (sec.); TDM = Multiplier Setting; I = Input Current; Ipickup = Pickup Current Setting;
TRESET = Reset Time in sec. (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
Table 5–16: I2T CURVE TRIP TIMES
MULTIPLIER
(TDM)
CURRENT ( I / Ipickup)
1.5
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
9.0
10.0
0.01
0.44
0.25
0.11
0.06
0.04
0.03
0.02
0.02
0.01
0.01
0.10
4.44
2.50
1.11
0.63
0.40
0.28
0.20
0.16
0.12
0.10
1.00
44.44
25.00
11.11
6.25
4.00
2.78
2.04
1.56
1.23
1.00
10.00
444.44
250.00
111.11
62.50
40.00
27.78
20.41
15.63
12.35
10.00
100.00
4444.4
2500.0
1111.1
625.00
400.00
277.78
204.08
156.25
123.46
100.00
600.00
26666.7
15000.0
6666.7
3750.0
2400.0
1666.7
1224.5
937.50
740.74
600.00
FLEXCURVES™:
5
The custom FlexCurves™ are described in detail in the FlexCurves™ section of this chapter. The curve shapes for the
FlexCurves™ are derived from the formulae:
I
T = TDM × FlexCurve Time at ⎛⎝ ----------------⎞⎠
I pickup
I
when ⎛⎝ ----------------⎞⎠ ≥ 1.00
I pickup
I
T RESET = TDM × FlexCurve Time at ⎛⎝ ----------------⎞⎠
I pickup
where:
I
when ⎛⎝ ----------------⎞⎠ ≤ 0.98
I pickup
(EQ 5.12)
(EQ 5.13)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
DEFINITE TIME CURVE:
The Definite Time curve shape operates as soon as the pickup level is exceeded for a specified period of time. The base
definite time curve delay is in seconds. The curve multiplier of 0.00 to 600.00 makes this delay adjustable from instantaneous to 600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms.
where:
T = TDM in seconds, when I > I pickup
(EQ 5.14)
T RESET = TDM in seconds
(EQ 5.15)
T = Operate Time (sec.), TDM = Multiplier setting
I = Input Current, Ipickup = Pickup Current setting
TRESET = Reset Time in seconds (assuming energy capacity is 100% and RESET: Timed)
RECLOSER CURVES:
The C60 uses the FlexCurve™ feature to facilitate programming of 41 recloser curves. Please refer to the FlexCurve™
section in this chapter for additional details.
5-86
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
c) PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51P)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
PHASE CURRENT
PHASE TOC1(6)
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
PHASE TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 VOLTAGE
RESTRAINT: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK B:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PHASE TOC1
1.00
5
The phase time overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or
be used as a simple Definite Time element. The phase current input quantities may be programmed as fundamental phasor
magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Curves Characteristic sub-section earlier for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time
accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
The PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting can be dynamically reduced by a voltage restraint feature (when enabled). This is accomplished via the multipliers (Mvr) corresponding to the phase-phase voltages of the voltage restraint characteristic curve (see
the figure below); the pickup level is calculated as ‘Mvr’ times the PHASE TOC1 PICKUP setting. If the voltage restraint feature
is disabled, the pickup level always remains at the setting value.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-87
Multiplier for Pickup Current
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.7
0.6
0.5
0.4
0.3
0.2
0.1
0
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
0.9
1.0
Phase-Phase Voltage ÷ VT Nominal Phase-phase Voltage
818784A4.CDR
Figure 5–44: PHASE TOC VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-A :
Off=0
5
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off=0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
INPUT:
PHASE TOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off=0
PHASE TOC1
PICKUP:
SETTING
PHASE TOC1
CURVE:
PHASE TOC1
SOURCE:
PHASE TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
IA
PHASE TOC1
RESET:
IB
IC
AND
Seq=ABC Seq=ACB
VAB
VBC
VCA
VAC
VBA
VCB
RUN
MULTIPLY INPUTS
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase A
RUN
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase B
Set
Calculate Multiplier
Set
Calculate Multiplier
Set
Calculate Multiplier
Set Pickup
Multiplier-Phase C
RUN
IA
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
PHASE TOC1 A PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 A DPO
t
AND
RUN
IB
PHASE TOC1 A OP
PHASE TOC1 B PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 B DPO
t
AND
RUN
IC
PHASE TOC1 B OP
PHASE TOC1 C PKP
PICKUP
PHASE TOC1 C DPO
t
PHASE TOC1 C OP
SETTING
OR
PHASE TOC1 VOLT
RESTRAINT:
PHASE TOC1 PKP
OR
PHASE TOC1 OP
Enabled
AND
PHASE TOC1 DPO
827072A4.CDR
Figure 5–45: PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-88
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
d) PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50P)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
PHASE CURRENT
PHASE IOC 1(8)
PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
PHASE IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK A:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK B:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1 BLOCK C:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PHASE IOC1
5
The phase instantaneous overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time element. The input current is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
AND
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
IA
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
SOURCE:
IA
IB
IC
AND
RUN
AND
RUN
IB
PICKUP
SETTINGS
PHASE IOC1
PICKUPDELAY:
PHASE IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
PHASE IOC1 A PKP
PHASE IOC1 A DPO
tPKP
PHASE IOC1 B PKP
tRST
PICKUP
PHASE IOC1 B DPO
tPKP
tRST
PHASE IOC1 C PKP
tPKP
IC
PICKUP
PHASE IOC1 C DPO
tRST
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-A:
Off = 0
PHASE IOC1 A OP
PHASE IOC1 B OP
PHASE IOC1 C OP
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-B:
Off = 0
OR
PHASE IOC1 PKP
OR
PHASE IOC1 OP
AND
SETTING
PHASE IOC1
BLOCK-C:
Off = 0
PHASE IOC1 DPO
827033A6.VSD
Figure 5–46: PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-89
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5.5.5 NEUTRAL CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL TOC1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 5–91.
NEUTRAL TOC2
NEUTRAL TOC3
NEUTRAL TOC4
NEUTRAL TOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
NEUTRAL TOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
NEUTRAL IOC1
See page 5–92.
NEUTRAL IOC2
NEUTRAL IOC3
NEUTRAL IOC4
NEUTRAL IOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
NEUTRAL IOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
NEUTRAL IOC7
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
NEUTRAL IOC8
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
The C60 contains protection elements for neutral time overcurrent (ANSI device 51N) and neutral instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI device 50N). A maximum of six Neutral TOC elements and eight Neutral IOC elements are available, dependent
on the CT/VT modules ordered with the relay. See the following table for details.
CT/VT MODULES
SLOT F
5-90
SLOT M
NUMBER OF ELEMENTS
NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL IOC
8A/8B
8A/8B
4
4
8A/8B
8C/8D
6
6
8C/8D
8A/8B
6
6
8C/8D
8C/8D
6
8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
b) NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51N)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL TOC1(6)
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEUTRAL TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: See OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES table
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL TOC1
1.00
5
The Neutral Time Overcurrent element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current
or be used as a simple Definite Time element. The neutral current input value is a quantity calculated as 3Io from the phase
currents and may be programmed as fundamental phasor magnitude or total waveform RMS magnitude as required by the
application.
Two methods of resetting operation are available: “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to the Inverse TOC Curve Characteristics section for details on curve setup, trip times and reset operation). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator
will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and
the element is blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
SOURCE:
IN
AND
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL TOC1
INPUT:
NEUTRAL TOC1
PICKUP:
NEUTRAL TOC1
CURVE:
NEUTRAL TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
NEUTRAL TOC 1
RESET:
IN ≥ PICKUP
RUN
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL TOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL TOC1 DPO
NEUTRAL TOC1 OP
I
SETTING
NEUTRAL TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827034A3.VSD
Figure 5–47: NEUTRAL TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-91
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
c) NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50N)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
NEUTRAL CURRENT
NEUTRAL IOC1(8)
NEUTRAL IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEUTRAL IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP:
1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL IOC1
5
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
The Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent element may be used as an instantaneous function with no intentional delay or as a
Definite Time function. The element essentially responds to the magnitude of a neutral current fundamental frequency phasor calculated from the phase currents. A “positive-sequence restraint” is applied for better performance. A small portion
(6.25%) of the positive-sequence current magnitude is subtracted from the zero-sequence current magnitude when forming
the operating quantity of the element as follows:
I op = 3 × ( I_0 – K ⋅ I_1 ) where K = 1 ⁄ 16
(EQ 5.16)
The positive-sequence restraint allows for more sensitive settings by counterbalancing spurious zero-sequence currents
resulting from:
•
•
•
system unbalances under heavy load conditions
transformation errors of current transformers (CTs) during double-line and three-phase faults
switch-off transients during double-line and three-phase faults
The positive-sequence restraint must be considered when testing for pickup accuracy and response time (multiple of
pickup). The operating quantity depends on how test currents are injected into the relay (single-phase injection:
I op = 0.9375 ⋅ I injected ; three-phase pure zero-sequence injection: I op = 3 × I injected ).
SETTING
SETTINGS
NEUTRAL IOC1 FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
NEUTRAL IOC1
PICKUP DELAY :
SETTING
Enabled=1
NEUTRAL IOC1 PICKUP:
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 BLOCK:
AND
RUN
3( I_0 - K I_1 ) PICKUP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
NEUTRAL IOC1
RESET DELAY :
tPKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 PKP
NEUTRAL IOC1 DPO
tRST
NEUTRAL IOC1 OP
Off=0
SETTING
NEUTRAL IOC1 SOURCE:
827035A4.CDR
I_0
Figure 5–48: NEUTRAL IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-92
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.6 GROUND CURRENT
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
GROUND CURRENT
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
GROUND CURRENT
GROUND TOC1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
See page 5–94.
GROUND TOC2
GROUND TOC3
GROUND TOC4
GROUND TOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
GROUND TOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
GROUND IOC1
See page 5–92.
GROUND IOC2
5
GROUND IOC3
GROUND IOC4
GROUND IOC5
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
GROUND IOC6
Note:
Seen only if slot F or slot M has an 8C or 8D CT
module installed.
GROUND IOC7
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
GROUND IOC8
Note:
Seen only if slot F and slot M have 8C or 8D CT
modules installed.
The C60 contains protection elements for ground time overcurrent (ANSI device 51G) and ground instantaneous overcurrent (ANSI device 50G). A maximum of six Ground TOC and eight Ground IOC elements are available, dependent on the
CT/VT modules ordered with the relay. See the following table for details.
CT/VT MODULES
SLOT F
SLOT M
NUMBER OF ELEMENTS
GROUND TOC
GROUND IOC
8A/8B
8A/8B
4
4
8A/8B
8C/8D
6
6
8C/8D
8A/8B
6
6
8C/8D
8C/8D
6
8
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-93
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
b) GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT (ANSI 51G)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
GROUND CURRENT
GROUND TOC1(6)
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
GROUND TOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
INPUT: Phasor
Range: Phasor, RMS
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
CURVE: IEEE Mod Inv
Range: see the Overcurrent Curve Types table
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
RESET: Instantaneous
Range: Instantaneous, Timed
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
GROUND TOC1
5
1.00
This element can provide a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied current or be used as a simple
Definite Time element. The ground current input value is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor or RMS magnitude. Two methods of resetting operation are available; “Timed” and “Instantaneous” (refer to
the Inverse TOC Characteristics section for details). When the element is blocked, the time accumulator will reset according to the reset characteristic. For example, if the element reset characteristic is set to “Instantaneous” and the element is
blocked, the time accumulator will be cleared immediately.
NOTE
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTINGS
GROUND TOC1
INPUT:
GROUND TOC1
PICKUP:
GROUND TOC1
CURVE:
GROUND TOC1
TD MULTIPLIER:
GROUND TOC 1
RESET:
RUN
IG ≥ PICKUP
t
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND TOC1 PKP
GROUND TOC1 DPO
GROUND TOC1 OP
I
SETTING
GROUND TOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827036A3.VSD
Figure 5–49: GROUND TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-94
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
c) GROUND INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT (ANSI 50G)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
GROUND CURRENT
GROUND IOC1(8)
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
GROUND IOC1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 30.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
0.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
GROUND IOC1
The Ground IOC element may be used as an instantaneous element with no intentional delay or as a Definite Time element. The ground current input is the quantity measured by the ground input CT and is the fundamental phasor magnitude.
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
SOURCE:
IG
AND
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
PICKUP:
RUN
IG ≥ PICKUP
SETTINGS
GROUND IOC1 PICKUP
DELAY:
GROUND IOC1 RESET
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
GROUND IOC1 PKP
GROUND IOIC DPO
GROUND IOC1 OP
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
GROUND IOC1
BLOCK:
Off = 0
827037A4.VSD
Figure 5–50: GROUND IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC
NOTE
These elements measure the current that is connected to the ground channel of a CT/VT module. This channel
may be equipped with a standard or sensitive input. The conversion range of a standard channel is from 0.02 to 46
times the CT rating. The conversion range of a sensitive channel is from 0.002 to 4.6 times the CT rating.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-95
5
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5.5.7 VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE1
See page 5–97.
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE2
See page 5–97.
NEUTRAL OV1
See page 5–98.
AUXILIARY UV1
See page 5–99.
AUXILIARY OV1
See page 5–100.
These protection elements can be used for a variety of applications such as:
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a drop in voltage increases the drawn
current which may cause dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified voltage setting for a specified time delay.
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be generated to transfer a load from its
normal source to a standby or emergency power source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have a Definite Time delay characteristic. The Definite Time curve operates when the voltage drops below the pickup level for a specified period of time. The time delay is adjustable from 0 to
600.00 seconds in steps of 10 ms. The undervoltage elements can also be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setting defines the family of curves shown below.
D
T = --------------------------------V ⎞
⎛ 1 – -----------------⎝
V pickup⎠
where:
2.0 1.0
18.0
16.0
T = Operating Time
D = Undervoltage Delay Setting
(D = 0.00 operates instantaneously)
V = Secondary Voltage applied to the relay
Vpickup = Pickup Level
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the
UNDERVOLTAGE DELAY setting.
NOTE
D=5.0
20.0
Time (seconds)
5
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning of external devices by operating an
output relay when the voltage falls below the specified voltage setting. The undervoltage feature may also be used to block
the functioning of other elements through the block feature of those elements.
14.0
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0
10
20 30
40
50
60
70
80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
Figure 5–51: INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE CURVES
5-96
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
b) PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27P)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1(2)
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
PHASE UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground
Range: Phase to Ground, Phase to Phase
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
PICKUP: 1.000 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
CURVE: Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 MINIMUM
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
PHASE UV1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
PHASE
UNDERVOLTAGE1
5
This element may be used to give a desired time-delay operating characteristic versus the applied fundamental voltage
(phase-to-ground or phase-to-phase for Wye VT connection, or phase-to-phase for Delta VT connection) or as a Definite
Time element. The element resets instantaneously if the applied voltage exceeds the dropout voltage. The delay setting
selects the minimum operating time of the phase undervoltage. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage
below which the element is blocked (a setting of “0” will allow a dead source to be considered a fault condition).
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1
FUNCTION:
PHASE UV1
PICKUP:
Disabled = 0
PHASE UV1
CURVE:
Enabled = 1
SETTING
AND
PHASE UV1
BLOCK:
AND
PHASE UV1
DELAY:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
RUN VAG or VAB < PICKUP
PHASE UV1 A PKP
PHASE UV1 A DPO
t
PHASE UV1 A OP
Off = 0
SETTING
SETTING
PHASE UV1 SOURCE:
Source VT = Delta
VAB
VBC
VCA
Source VT = Wye
SETTING
PHASE UV1 MODE:
Phase to Ground Phase to Phase
VAG
VAB
VBG
VBC
VCG
VCA
}
AND
PHASE UV1
MINIMUM VOLTAGE:
V
RUN VBG or VBC< PICKUP
PHASE UV1 B PKP
PHASE UV1 B DPO
t
VAG or VAB < Minimum
VBG or VBC < Minimum
VCG or VCA < Minimum
PHASE UV1 B OP
AND
V
RUN VCG or VCA < PICKUP
PHASE UV1 C PKP
t
PHASE UV1 C DPO
PHASE UV1 C OP
V
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
PHASE UV1 PKP
OR
PHASE UV1 OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
PHASE UV1 DPO
827039AB.CDR
Figure 5–52: PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-97
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
c) NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59N)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
NEUTRAL OV1
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
Range: 0.000 to 1.250 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET:
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
NEUTRAL OV1
5
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
The Neutral Overvoltage element can be used to detect asymmetrical system voltage condition due to a ground fault or to
the loss of one or two phases of the source. The element responds to the system neutral voltage (3V_0), calculated from
SYSTEM
the phase voltages. The nominal secondary voltage of the phase voltage channels entered under SETTINGS
SETUP
AC INPUTS
VOLTAGE BANK
PHASE VT SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
VT errors and normal voltage unbalance must be considered when setting this element. This function requires the VTs to
be Wye connected.
SETTING
NEUTRAL OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP:
SETTING
RUN
NEUTRAL OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
NEUTRAL OV1 BLOCK:
NEUTRAL OV1 RESET
DELAY :
Off=0
SETTING
3V_0 < Pickup
tPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tRST
NEUTRAL OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
NEUTRAL OV1 OP
NEUTRAL OV1 DPO
NEUTRAL OV1 PKP
ZERO SEQ VOLT (V_0)
827848A1.CDR
Figure 5–53: NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC
5-98
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
d) AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE (ANSI 27X)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
AUXILIARY UV1
AUX UV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
AUX UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
0.700 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 CURVE:
Definite Time
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 DELAY:
1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 MINIMUM:
VOLTAGE: 0.100 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
AUX UV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY UV1
This element is intended for monitoring undervoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. The AUX UV1 PICKUP selects the
voltage level at which the time undervoltage element starts timing. The nominal secondary voltage of the auxiliary voltage
SYSTEM SETUP
AC INPUTS
VOLTAGE BANK X5
AUXILIARY VT X5 SECONDARY
channel entered under SETTINGS
is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
The AUX UV1 DELAY setting selects the minimum operating time of the auxiliary undervoltage element. Both AUX UV1 PICKUP
and AUX UV1 DELAY settings establish the operating curve of the undervoltage element. The auxiliary undervoltage element
can be programmed to use either Definite Time Delay or Inverse Time Delay characteristics. The operating characteristics
and equations for both Definite and Inverse Time Delay are as for the Phase Undervoltage element.
The element resets instantaneously. The minimum voltage setting selects the operating voltage below which the element is
blocked.
SETTING
AUX UV1
FUNCTION:
SETTING
Disabled=0
AUX UV1 PICKUP:
Enabled=1
AUX UV1 CURVE:
SETTING
AUX UV1 DELAY:
AUX UV1 BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
AUX UV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
AUX VOLT Vx
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Vx < Pickup
RUN
AUX UV1 PKP
AUX UV1 DPO
SETTING
AUX UV1 MINIMUM
VOLTAGE:
AUX UV1 OP
t
Vx < Minimum
V
827849A2.CDR
Figure 5–54: AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-99
5
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
e) AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE (ANSI 59X)
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS
AUXILIARY OV1
AUX OV1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
0.300 pu
Range: 0.000 to 3.000 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY: 1.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
AUX OV1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
AUXILIARY OV1
5
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
This element is intended for monitoring overvoltage conditions of the auxiliary voltage. A typical application for this element
is monitoring the zero-sequence voltage (3V_0) supplied from an open-corner-delta VT connection. The nominal secondary
VOLTAGE BANK X5
AUXILIARY VT
voltage of the auxiliary voltage channel entered under SYSTEM SETUP AC INPUTS
X5 SECONDARY is the p.u. base used when setting the pickup level.
SETTING
AUX OV1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
SETTING
Enabled=1
SETTING
AND
AUX OV1 PICKUP:
SETTING
RUN
AUX OV1 PICKUP
DELAY :
AUX OV1 BLOCK:
AUX OV1 RESET
DELAY :
Off=0
SETTING
Vx < Pickup
tPKP
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
tRST
AUX OV1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
AUX OV1 OP
AUX OV1 DPO
AUX OV1 PKP
AUXILIARY VOLT (Vx)
827836A2.CDR
Figure 5–55: AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE SCHEME LOGIC
5-100
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5.5.8 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: SETTINGS
GROUPED ELEMENTS
SETTING GROUP 1(6)
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL...
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1(2)
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
DIR POWER 1
SOURCE: SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1
RCA: 0°
Range: 0 to 359° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION: 0.00°
Range: 0 to 0.95° in steps of 0.05
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 STG1
SMIN: 0.100 pu
Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 STG1
DELAY: 0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 STG2
SMIN: 0.100 pu
Range: –1.200 to 1.200 pu in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY: 20.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 600.00 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1 BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1
TARGET: Self-Reset
Range: Self-Reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
DIR POWER 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
DIRECTIONAL
POWER 1
5
The Directional Power element responds to three-phase active power and is designed for reverse power and low forward
power applications for synchronous machines or interconnections involving co-generation. The relay measures the threephase power from either full set of wye-connected VTs or full-set of delta-connected VTs. In the latter case, the two-wattmeter method is used. Refer to the UR Metering Conventions section in Chapter 6 for conventions regarding the active and
reactive powers used by the Directional Power element.
The element has an adjustable characteristic angle and minimum operating power as shown in the Directional Power Characteristic diagram. The element responds to the following condition:
P cos θ + Q sin θ > SMIN
where:
(EQ 5.17)
P and Q are active and reactive powers as measured per the UR convention,
θ is a sum of the element characteristic (DIR POWER 1 RCA) and calibration (DIR POWER 1 CALIBRATION) angles, and
SMIN is the minimum operating power
The operating quantity is available for display as under ACTUAL VALUES METERING
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
1(2). The element has two independent (as to the pickup and delay settings) stages for alarm and trip, respectively.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-101
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
Di
re
ct
io
n
Q
OPERATE
RCA+
CALIBRATION
SMIN
P
+
RESTRAIN
-
Figure 5–56: DIRECTIONAL POWER CHARACTERISTIC
By making the characteristic angle adjustable and providing for both negative and positive values of the minimum operating
power a variety of operating characteristics can be achieved as presented in the figure below. For example, Figure (a)
below shows settings for reverse power application, while Figure (b) shows settings for low forward power application.
(a)
(b)
Q
Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RESTRAIN
5
P
OPERATE
P
RCA = 180o
SMIN > 0
(c)
RCA = 180o
SMIN < 0
(d)
Q
Q
OPERATE
OPERATE
P
RESTRAIN
P
RESTRAIN
RCA = 0o
SMIN < 0
(e)
Q
RCA = 0o
SMIN > 0
(f)
OPERATE
Q
RESTRAIN
OPERATE
RESTRAIN
P
RCA = 90o
SMIN > 0
P
RCA = 270o
SMIN < 0
842702A1.CDR
Figure 5–57: DIRECTIONAL POWER ELEMENT SAMPLE APPLICATIONS
5-102
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
•
5.5 GROUPED ELEMENTS
DIR POWER 1(2) RCA: Specifies the relay characteristic angle (RCA) for the directional power function. Application of
this setting is threefold:
1.
It allows the element to respond to active or reactive power in any direction (active overpower, active underpower,
etc.)
2.
Together with a precise calibration angle, it allows compensation for any CT and VT angular errors to permit more
sensitive settings.
3.
It allows for required direction in situations when the voltage signal is taken from behind a delta-wye connected
power transformer and the phase angle compensation is required.
For example, the active overpower characteristic is achieved by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “0°”, reactive overpower
by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “90°”, active underpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “180°”, and reactive underpower by setting DIR POWER 1(2) RCA to “270°”.
•
DIR POWER 1(2) CALIBRATION: This setting allows the RCA to change in small steps of 0.05°. This may be useful
when a small difference in VT and CT angular errors is to be compensated to permit more sensitive settings. This setting virtually enables calibration of the Directional Power function in terms of the angular error of applied VTs and CTs.
The element responds to the sum of the DIR POWER X RCA and DIR POWER X CALIBRATION settings.
•
DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 SMIN: This setting specifies the minimum power as defined along the RCA angle for the
stage 1 of the element. The positive values imply a shift towards the operate region along the RCA line. The negative
values imply a shift towards the restrain region along the RCA line. Refer to the Directional Power Sample Applications
figure for an illustration. Together with the RCA, this setting enables a wide range of operating characteristics. This setting applies to three-phase power and is entered in pu. The base quantity is 3 × VT pu base × CT pu base.
For example, a setting of 2% for a 200 MW machine, is 0.02 × 200 MW = 4 MW. If 7.967 kV is a primary VT voltage
and 10 kA is a primary CT current, the source pu quantity is 239 MVA, and thus, SMIN should be set at 4 MW /
239 MVA = 0.0167 pu ≈ 0.017 pu. If the reverse power application is considered, RCA = 180° and SMIN = 0.017 pu.
The element drops out if the magnitude of the positive-sequence current becomes virtually zero, that is, it drops below
the cutoff level.
•
DIR POWER 1(2) STG1 DELAY: This setting specifies a time delay for the Stage 1 of the element. For reverse power
or low forward power applications for a synchronous machine, Stage 1 is typically applied for alarming and Stage 2 for
tripping.
SETTING
DIR POWER 1
FUNCTION:
Enabled = 1
SETTINGS
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 SOURCE:
DIR POWER 1 STG1
DELAY:
DIR POWER 1
CALIBRATION:
tPKP
DIR POWER 1 STG1
SMIN:
100ms
DIR POWER 1 STG2
SMIN:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG1 DPO
RUN
DIR POWER 1 DPO
DIR POWER 1 STG1 PKP
3Φ Active Power (P)
3Φ Reactive Power (Q)
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIR POWER 1 STG1 OP
DIRECTIONAL POWER
CHARACTERISTICS
DIR POWER 1 STG2 PKP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 DPO
DIR POWER 1 PKP
OR
Off
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 RCA:
OR
DIR POWER 1 BLK:
AND
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 OP
DIR POWER 1 STG2 OP
SETTING
DIR POWER 1 STG2
DELAY:
tPKP
100ms
842003A2.CDR
Figure 5–58: DIRECTIONAL POWER SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-103
5
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5.6CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.1 OVERVIEW
Control elements are generally used for control rather than protection. See the Introduction to Elements section at the
beginning of this chapter for further information.
5.6.2 SETTING GROUPS
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SETTINGS GROUPS
SETTING GROUPS
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
SETTING GROUPS BLK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUPS
↓
5
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SETTING GROUP
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
The Setting Groups menu controls the activation/deactivation of up to six possible groups of settings in the GROUPED ELEsettings menu. The faceplate ‘Settings in Use’ LEDs indicate which active group (with a non-flashing energized
LED) is in service.
MENTS
The SETTING GROUPS BLK setting prevents the active setting group from changing when the FlexLogic™ parameter is set to
"On". This can be useful in applications where it is undesirable to change the settings under certain conditions, such as the
breaker being open.
Each GROUP n ACTIVATE ON setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which, when set, will make the particular setting group
active for use by any grouped element. A priority scheme ensures that only one group is active at a given time – the highest-numbered group which is activated by its GROUP n ACTIVATE ON parameter takes priority over the lower-numbered
groups. There is no “activate on” setting for Group 1 (the default active group), because Group 1 automatically becomes
active if no other group is active.
The relay can be set up via a FlexLogic™ equation to receive requests to activate or de-activate a particular non-default
settings group. The following FlexLogic™ equation (see the figure below) illustrates requests via remote communications
(e.g. VIRTUAL INPUT 1) or from a local contact input (e.g. H7a) to initiate the use of a particular settings group, and requests
from several overcurrent pickup measuring elements to inhibit the use of the particular settings group. The assigned VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 operand is used to control the “On” state of a particular settings group.
Figure 5–59: EXAMPLE FLEXLOGIC™ CONTROL OF A SETTINGS GROUP
5-104
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.3 SELECTOR SWITCH
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SELECTOR SWITCH
SELECTOR SWITCH 1(2)
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
SELECTOR 1 FULL
RANGE: 7
Range: 1 to 7 in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
5.0 s
Range: 3.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT
MODE: Time-out
Range: Time-out, Acknowledge
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP
MODE: Restore
Range: Restore, Synchronize, Synch/Restore
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 TARGETS:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
5
The Selector Switch element is intended to replace a mechanical selector switch. Typical applications include setting group
control or control of multiple logic sub-circuits in user-programmable logic.
The element provides for two control inputs. The step-up control allows stepping through selector position one step at a
time with each pulse of the control input, such as a user-programmable pushbutton. The 3-bit control input allows setting
the selector to the position defined by a 3-bit word.
The element allows pre-selecting a new position without applying it. The pre-selected position gets applied either after timeout or upon acknowledgement via separate inputs (user setting). The selector position is stored in non-volatile memory.
Upon power-up, either the previous position is restored or the relay synchronizes to the current 3-bit word (user setting).
Basic alarm functionality alerts the user under abnormal conditions; e.g. the 3-bit control input being out of range.
•
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE: This setting defines the upper position of the selector. When stepping up through available positions of the selector, the upper position wraps up to the lower position (Position 1). When using a direct 3-bit
control word for programming the selector to a desired position, the change would take place only if the control word is
within the range of 1 to the SELECTOR FULL RANGE. If the control word is outside the range, an alarm is established by
setting the SELECTOR ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
•
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: This setting defines the time-out period for the selector. This value is used by the relay in
the following two ways. When the SELECTOR STEP-UP MODE is “Time-out”, the setting specifies the required period of
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-105
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
inactivity of the control input after which the pre-selected position is automatically applied. When the SELECTOR STEPis “Acknowledge”, the setting specifies the period of time for the acknowledging input to appear. The timer is
re-started by any activity of the control input. The acknowledging input must come before the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT
timer expires; otherwise, the change will not take place and an alarm will be set.
UP MODE
5
•
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: This setting specifies a control input for the selector switch. The switch is shifted to a new
position at each rising edge of this signal. The position changes incrementally, wrapping up from the last (SELECTOR 1
FULL RANGE) to the first (Position 1). Consecutive pulses of this control operand must not occur faster than every
50 ms. After each rising edge of the assigned operand, the time-out timer is restarted and the SELECTOR SWITCH 1:
POS Z CHNG INITIATED target message is displayed, where Z the pre-selected position. The message is displayed for
the time specified by the FLASH MESSAGE TIME setting. The pre-selected position is applied after the selector times out
(“Time-out” mode), or when the acknowledging signal appears before the element times out (“Acknowledge” mode).
When the new position is applied, the relay displays the SELECTOR SWITCH 1: POSITION Z IN USE message. Typically,
a user-programmable pushbutton is configured as the stepping up control input.
•
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the
selector will change its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and
does not require any explicit confirmation of the intent to change the selector's position. When set to “Acknowledge”,
the selector will change its position only after the intent is confirmed through a separate acknowledging signal. If the
acknowledging signal does not appear within a pre-defined period of time, the selector does not accept the change
and an alarm is established by setting the SELECTOR STP ALARM output FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
•
SELECTOR 1 ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the stepping up control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned operand. This setting is active only under “Acknowledge” mode of
operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT setting after the
last activity of the control input. A user-programmable pushbutton is typically configured as the acknowledging input.
•
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0, A1, and A2: These settings specify a 3-bit control input of the selector. The 3-bit control word
pre-selects the position using the following encoding convention:
A2
A1
A0
POSITION
0
0
0
rest
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
2
0
1
1
3
1
0
0
4
1
0
1
5
1
1
0
6
1
1
1
7
The “rest” position (0, 0, 0) does not generate an action and is intended for situations when the device generating the
3-bit control word is having a problem. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Time-out”, the pre-selected position is applied
in SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT seconds after the last activity of the 3-bit input. When SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE is “Acknowledge”, the pre-selected position is applied on the rising edge of the SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK acknowledging input.
The stepping up control input (SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP) and the 3-bit control inputs (SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0 through A2) lockout mutually: once the stepping up sequence is initiated, the 3-bit control input is inactive; once the 3-bit control
sequence is initiated, the stepping up input is inactive.
•
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: This setting defines the selector mode of operation. When set to “Time-out”, the selector
changes its position after a pre-defined period of inactivity at the control input. The change is automatic and does not
require explicit confirmation to change the selector position. When set to “Acknowledge”, the selector changes its position only after confirmation via a separate acknowledging signal. If the acknowledging signal does not appear within a
pre-defined period of time, the selector rejects the change and an alarm established by invoking the SELECTOR BIT
ALARM FlexLogic™ operand for 3 seconds.
•
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: This setting specifies an acknowledging input for the 3-bit control input. The pre-selected
position is applied on the rising edge of the assigned FlexLogic™ operand. This setting is active only under the
“Acknowledge” mode of operation. The acknowledging signal must appear within the time defined by the SELECTOR
TIME-OUT setting after the last activity of the 3-bit control inputs. Note that the stepping up control input and 3-bit control
input have independent acknowledging signals (SELECTOR 1 ACK and SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK, accordingly).
5-106
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
•
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: This setting specifies the element behavior on power up of the relay.
When set to “Restore”, the last position of the selector (stored in the non-volatile memory) is restored after powering up
the relay. If the position restored from memory is out of range, position 0 (no output operand selected) is applied and
an alarm is set (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
When set to “Synchronize” selector switch acts as follows. For two power cycles, the selector applies position 0 to the
switch and activates SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM. After two power cycles expire, the selector synchronizes to the position
dictated by the 3-bit control input. This operation does not wait for time-out or the acknowledging input. When the synchronization attempt is unsuccessful (i.e., the 3-bit input is not available (0,0,0) or out of range) then the selector switch
output is set to position 0 (no output operand selected) and an alarm is established (SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM).
The operation of “Synch/Restore” mode is similar to the “Synchronize” mode. The only difference is that after an
unsuccessful synchronization attempt, the switch will attempt to restore the position stored in the relay memory. The
“Synch/Restore” mode is useful for applications where the selector switch is employed to change the setting group in
redundant (two relay) protection schemes.
•
SELECTOR 1 EVENTS: If enabled, the following events are logged:
EVENT NAME
DESCRIPTION
SELECTOR 1 POS Z
Selector 1 changed its position to Z.
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the stepping up control input has not been
confirmed before the time out.
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
The selector position pre-selected via the 3-bit control input has not been confirmed
before the time out.
5
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-107
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
The following figures illustrate the operation of the Selector Switch. In these diagrams, “T” represents a time-out setting.
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with a
pushbutton
changed to 7 with
a 3-bit input
STEP-UP
T
T
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
T
T
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
5
POS 6
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842737A1.CDR
Figure 5–60: TIME-OUT MODE
5-108
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
pre-existing
position 2
changed to 4 with
a pushbutton
changed to 1 with
a 3-bit input
changed to 2 with
a pushbutton
STEP-UP
ACK
3BIT A0
3BIT A1
3BIT A2
3BIT ACK
POS 1
POS 2
POS 3
POS 4
POS 5
POS 6
5
POS 7
BIT 0
BIT 1
BIT 2
STP ALARM
BIT ALARM
ALARM
842736A1.CDR
Figure 5–61: ACKNOWLEDGE MODE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-109
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
Application Example
Consider an application where the selector switch is used to control Setting Groups 1 through 4 in the relay. The setting
groups are to be controlled from both User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 and from an external device via Contact Inputs 1
through 3. The active setting group shall be available as an encoded 3-bit word to the external device and SCADA via output contacts 1 through 3. The pre-selected setting group shall be applied automatically after 5 seconds of inactivity of the
control inputs. When the relay powers up, it should synchronize the setting group to the 3-bit control input.
Make the following changes to Setting Group Control in the SETTINGS
SETTING GROUPS FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SETTING GROUPS BLK: “Off”
GROUP 2 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS
GROUP 3 ACTIVATE ON: “SELECTOR 1 POS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
GROUP 4 ACTIVATE ON:
GROUP 5 ACTIVATE ON:
GROUP 6 ACTIVATE ON:
2"
3"
SETTING GROUPS
menu:
“SELECTOR 1 POS 4"
“Off”
“Off”
Make the following changes to Selector Switch element in the SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SELECTOR SWITCH
menu to assign control to User Programmable Pushbutton 1 and Contact Inputs 1 through 3:
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION: “Enabled”
SELECTOR 1 FULL-RANGE: “4”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT: “5.0 s”
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP: “PUSHBUTTON 1
SELECTOR 1 ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0: “CONT IP 1 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1: “CONT IP 2 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2: “CONT IP 3 ON”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE: “Time-out”
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK: “Off”
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE: “Synchronize”
ON”
Now, assign the contact output operation (assume the H6E module) to the Selector Switch element by making the following
changes in the SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS menu:
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 0"
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 1"
“SELECTOR 1 BIT 2"
Finally, assign configure User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 menu:
SETUP
PRODUCT
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBUTTON 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.10 s”
The logic for the selector switch is shown below:
SETTINGS
SELECTOR 1 FULL RANGE:
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP MODE:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT MODE:
SETTINGS
ACTUAL VALUE
SELECTOR 1 TIME-OUT:
SELECTOR 1 FUNCTION:
SELECTOR 1 POWER-UP MODE:
Enabled = 1
RUN
SELECTOR 1 POSITION
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 STEP-UP:
Off
step up
Off
SELECTOR 1 POS 1
2
1
SELECTOR 1 ACK:
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A1:
Off
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A2:
Off
SELECTOR 1 POS 3
4
SELECTOR 1 3BIT A0:
Off
SELECTOR 1 POS 2
3
acknowledge
3-bit control in
SELECTOR 1 POS 4
SELECTOR 1 POS 5
on
7
5
SELECTOR 1 POS 6
6
SELECTOR 1 POS 7
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SELECTOR 1 3BIT ACK:
Off
3-bit
acknowledge
SELECTOR 1 STP ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT ALARM
3-bit position out
OR
5
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H2 OPERATE:
OUTPUT H3 OPERATE:
SELECTOR 1 ALARM
SELECTOR 1 PWR ALARM
SELECTOR 1 BIT 0
SELECTOR 1 BIT 1
SELECTOR 1 BIT 2
842012A1.CDR
Figure 5–62: SELECTOR SWITCH LOGIC
5-110
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.4 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
SYNCHK1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE:
SRC 1
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE:
SRC 2
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
DIFF: 10000 V
Range: 0 to 100000 V in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
DIFF: 30°
Range: 0 to 100° in steps of 1
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
DIFF: 1.00 Hz
Range: 0.00 to 2.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
HYSTERESIS: 0.06 Hz
Range: 0.00 to 0.10 Hz in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE
SELECT: LV1 and DV2
Range: None, LV1 and DV2, DV1 and LV2, DV1 or DV2,
DV1 Xor DV2, DV1 and DV2
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT: 0.30 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
MIN VOLT: 0.70 pu
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 pu in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 TARGET:
Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
SYNCHK1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
SYNCHROCHECK 1
The are two identical synchrocheck elements available, numbered 1 and 2.
The synchronism check function is intended for supervising the paralleling of two parts of a system which are to be joined
by the closure of a circuit breaker. The synchrocheck elements are typically used at locations where the two parts of the
system are interconnected through at least one other point in the system.
Synchrocheck verifies that the voltages (V1 and V2) on the two sides of the supervised circuit breaker are within set limits
of magnitude, angle and frequency differences. The time that the two voltages remain within the admissible angle difference is determined by the setting of the phase angle difference ΔΦ and the frequency difference ΔF (slip frequency). It can
be defined as the time it would take the voltage phasor V1 or V2 to traverse an angle equal to 2 × ΔΦ at a frequency equal
to the frequency difference ΔF. This time can be calculated by:
1
T = ------------------------------360°
------------------ × ΔF
2 × ΔΦ
(EQ 5.18)
where: ΔΦ = phase angle difference in degrees; ΔF = frequency difference in Hz.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-111
5
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
As an example; for the default values (ΔΦ = 30°, ΔF = 0.1 Hz), the time while the angle between the two voltages will be
less than the set value is:
1
1
T = ------------------------------- = ------------------------------------------ = 1.66 sec.
360°
360°
------------------ × ΔF
------------------- × 0.1 Hz
2 × ΔΦ
2 × 30°
(EQ 5.19)
If one or both sources are de-energized, the synchrocheck programming can allow for closing of the circuit breaker using
undervoltage control to by-pass the synchrocheck measurements (Dead Source function).
•
SYNCHK1 V1 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V1 (see NOTES below).
•
SYNCHK1 V2 SOURCE: This setting selects the source for voltage V2, which must not be the same as used for the
V1 (see NOTES below).
•
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT DIFF: This setting selects the maximum primary voltage difference in ‘kV’ between the two
sources. A primary voltage magnitude difference between the two input voltages below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
•
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE DIFF: This setting selects the maximum angular difference in degrees between the two
sources. An angular difference between the two input voltage phasors below this value is within the permissible limit
for synchronism.
•
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ DIFF: This setting selects the maximum frequency difference in ‘Hz’ between the two sources.
A frequency difference between the two input voltage systems below this value is within the permissible limit for synchronism.
•
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS: This setting specifies the required hysteresis for the maximum frequency difference condition. The condition becomes satisfied when the frequency difference becomes lower than SYNCHK1 MAX
FREQ DIFF. Once the Synchrocheck element has operated, the frequency difference must increase above the SYNCHK1
MAX FREQ DIFF + SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ HYSTERESIS sum to drop out (assuming the other two conditions, voltage and
angle, remain satisfied).
•
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE SELECT: This setting selects the combination of dead and live sources that will by-pass
synchronism check function and permit the breaker to be closed when one or both of the two voltages (V1 or/and V2)
are below the maximum voltage threshold. A dead or live source is declared by monitoring the voltage level. Six
options are available:
5
None:
LV1 and DV2:
DV1 and LV2:
DV1 or DV2:
DV1 Xor DV2:
DV1 and DV2:
Dead Source function is disabled
Live V1 and Dead V2
Dead V1 and Live V2
Dead V1 or Dead V2
Dead V1 exclusive-or Dead V2 (one source is Dead and the other is Live)
Dead V1 and Dead V2
•
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V1 in 1 ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
•
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2 MAX VOLT: This setting establishes a maximum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Below this
magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Dead” or de-energized.
•
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V1 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V1 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.
•
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2 MIN VOLT: This setting establishes a minimum voltage magnitude for V2 in ‘pu’. Above this magnitude, the V2 voltage input used for synchrocheck will be considered “Live” or energized.
5-112
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
Notes on the Synchrocheck Function:
1.
The selected Sources for synchrocheck inputs V1 and V2 (which must not be the same Source) may include both a
three-phase and an auxiliary voltage. The relay will automatically select the specific voltages to be used by the synchrocheck element in accordance with the following table.
NO.
V1 OR V2
(SOURCE Y)
V2 OR V1
(SOURCE Z)
AUTO-SELECTED
COMBINATION
AUTO-SELECTED VOLTAGE
SOURCE Y
SOURCE Z
1
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
2
Phase VTs and
Auxiliary VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
3
Phase VT
Phase VT
Phase
Phase
VAB
4
Phase VT and
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT
Phase
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for Source z)
5
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary VT
Auxiliary
Auxiliary
V auxiliary
(as set for selected sources)
The voltages V1 and V2 will be matched automatically so that the corresponding voltages from the two Sources will be
used to measure conditions. A phase to phase voltage will be used if available in both sources; if one or both of the
Sources have only an auxiliary voltage, this voltage will be used. For example, if an auxiliary voltage is programmed to
VAG, the synchrocheck element will automatically select VAG from the other Source. If the comparison is required on a
specific voltage, the user can externally connect that specific voltage to auxiliary voltage terminals and then use this
"Auxiliary Voltage" to check the synchronism conditions.
If using a single CT/VT module with both phase voltages and an auxiliary voltage, ensure that only the auxiliary voltage
is programmed in one of the Sources to be used for synchrocheck.
Exception: Synchronism cannot be checked between Delta connected phase VTs and a Wye connected auxiliary voltage.
NOTE
2.
The relay measures frequency and Volts/Hz from an input on a given Source with priorities as established by the configuration of input channels to the Source. The relay will use the phase channel of a three-phase set of voltages if programmed as part of that Source. The relay will use the auxiliary voltage channel only if that channel is programmed as
part of the Source and a three-phase set is not.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-113
5
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNCHK1 FUNCTION:
SYNC1 V2 ABOVE MIN
SYNC1 V1 ABOVE MIN
Enable=1
SYNC1 V1 BELOW MAX
Disable=0
SYNC1 V2 BELOW MAX
SETTING
AND
SYNCHK1 BLOCK:
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
Off=0
SYNCHK1 DEAD SOURCE
SELECT:
SYNC1 DEAD S OP
SYNC1 DEAD S DPO
None
AND
LV1 and DV2
AND
DV1 and LV2
AND
DV1 or DV2
AND
DV1 Xor DV2
OR
AND
DV1 and DV2
AND
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V1
MAX VOLT:
V1
Max
XOR
SETTING
SYNCHK1 DEAD V2
MAX VOLT:
V2
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
OR
Max
OR
SYNC1 CLS OP
SYNC1 CLS DPO
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V1
MIN VOLT:
V1
AND
Min
SETTING
SYNCHK1 LIVE V2
MIN VOLT:
5
V2
AND
Min
SETTING
SETTING
CALCULATE
SYNCHK1 V1 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
Magnitude V1
SRC 1
Frequency F1
Angle
1
Calculate
I V1-V2 I=
SYNCHK1 MAX VOLT
DIFF:
V
V
SETTING
SYNC1:
SYNCHK1 MAX ANGLE
DIFF:
V
Calculate
I 1- 2 I=
SETTING
CALCULATE
SYNCHK1 V2 SIGNAL
SOURCE:
Magnitude V2
SRC 2
Frequency F2
Angle
2
Calculate
I F1-F2 I=
Max
ACTUAL VALUE
AND
Max
ACTUAL VALUE
SETTING
SYNC1:
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
DIFF:
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
SYNCHK1 MAX FREQ
HYSTERESIS:
SYNC1 SYNC DPO
F
F
IN SYNCH 1
SYNC1 SYNC OP
Max
ACTUAL VALUE
SYNC1:
F
827076AA.CDR
Figure 5–63: SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC
5-114
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.5 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
AUTORECLOSE
AR FUNCTION:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
AR MODE:
1 & 3 Pole
Range: 1 & 3 Pole, 1 Pole, 3 Pole-A, 3 Pole-B
MESSAGE
AR MAX NUMBER OF
SHOTS: 2
Range: 1, 2
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK BKR1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1:
0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR BKR MAN CLOSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN
CLS: 10.00 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR 1P INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR 3P INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR 3P TD INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BKR ONE POLE OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:
0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:
1.20 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR DEAD TIME 1
EXTENSION: 0.50 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR RESET TIME:
60.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR BKR CLOSED:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AUTORECLOSE
GE Multilin
AUTORECLOSE
5
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-115
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
AR PAUSE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
TIME: 5.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR BLOCK BKR2:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2:
0.10 s
Range: 0.00 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
No
Range: Yes, No
MESSAGE
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
Continue
Range: Continue, Lockout
MESSAGE
AR 1-P DEAD TIME:
1.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR BKR SEQUENCE:
1-2
Range: 1, 2, 1&2, 1–2, 2–1
MESSAGE
AR TRANSFER TIME:
4.00 s
Range: 0 to 655.35 s in steps of 0.01
MESSAGE
AR EVENT:
Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
5
The autoreclose scheme is intended for use on transmission lines with circuit breakers operated in both the single pole and
three pole modes, in one or two breaker arrangements. The autoreclose scheme provides four programs with different
operating cycles, depending on the fault type. Each of the four programs can be set to trigger up to two reclosing attempts.
The second attempt always performs three pole reclosing and has an independent dead time delay.
When used in two breaker applications, the reclosing sequence is selectable. The reclose signal can be sent to one
selected breaker only, to both breakers simultaneously or to both breakers in sequence (one breaker first and then, after a
delay to check that the reclose was successful, to the second breaker). When reclosing in sequence, the first breaker
should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time according to the fault type and reclose mode; the second breaker
should follow the successful reclosure of the first breaker. When reclosing simultaneously, for the first shot both breakers
should reclose with either the 1-Pole or 3-Pole dead time, according to the fault type and the reclose mode.
The signal used to initiate the autoreclose scheme is the trip output from protection. This signal can be single pole tripping
for single phase faults and three phase tripping for multiphase faults. The autoreclose scheme has five operating states,
defined below.
STATE
CHARACTERISTICS
Enabled
Scheme is permitted to operate
Disabled
Scheme is not permitted to operate
Reset
Scheme is permitted to operate and shot count is reset to 0
Reclose In Progress
Scheme has been initiated but the reclose cycle is not finished (successful or not)
Lockout
Scheme is not permitted to operate until reset received
AR PROGRAMS:
The autorecloser provides four programs that can cause one or two reclose attempts (shots). The second reclose will
always be three pole. If the maximum number of shots selected is "1" (only one reclose attempt) and the fault is persistent,
after the first reclose the scheme will go to Lockout upon another Initiate signal.
5-116
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
For the 3-pole reclose programs (modes 3 and 4), an AR FORCE 3-P FlexLogic™ operand is set. This operand can be used
in connection with the tripping logic to cause a three-pole trip for single-phase faults.
Table 5–17: AUTORECLOSE PROGRAMS
MODE
AR MODE
FIRST SHOT
SECOND SHOT
SINGLE-PHASE
FAULT
MULTI-PHASE
FAULT
SINGLE-PHASE
FAULT
MULTI-PHASE FAULT
1
1 & 3 POLE
1 POLE
3 POLE
3 POLE or Lockout
3 POLE or Lockout
2
1 POLE
1 POLE
LO
3 POLE or Lockout
3 POLE or Lockout
3
3 POLE-A
3 POLE
LO
3 POLE or Lockout
Lockout
4
3 POLE-B
3 POLE
3 POLE
3 POLE or Lockout
3 POLE or Lockout
•
Mode 1, 1 & 3 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer for the first shot if the autoreclose is single-phase initiated, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase initiated, and the AR 3-P
DEAD TIME 2 timer if the autoreclose is three-phase time delay initiated. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is
always three-phase and the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 timer is started.
•
Mode 2, 1 Pole: When in this mode the autorecloser starts the AR 1-P DEAD TIME for the first shot if the fault is single
phase. If the fault is three-phase or a three-pole trip on the breaker occurred during the single-pole initiation, the
scheme goes to lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-pole and starts AR
3-P DEAD TIME 2.
•
Mode 3, 3 Pole-A: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated only for single phase faults, although the trip is three
pole. The autorecloser uses the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 for the first shot if the fault is single phase. If the fault is multi phase
the scheme will go to Lockout without reclosing. If two shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and
starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
•
Mode 4, 3 Pole-B: When in this mode the autorecloser is initiated for any type of fault and starts the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1
for the first shot. If the initiating signal is AR 3P TD INIT the scheme starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 for the first shot. If two
shots are enabled, the second shot is always three-phase and starts AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
BASIC RECLOSING OPERATION:
Reclosing operation is determined primarily by the AR MODE and AR BKR SEQUENCE settings. The reclosing sequences are
started by the initiate inputs. A reclose initiate signal will send the scheme into the Reclose In Progress (RIP) state, asserting the "AR RIP" operand. The scheme is latched into the RIP state and resets only when an "AR CLS BKR 1" (autoreclose
breaker 1) or "AR CLS BKR 2" (autoreclose breaker 2) operand is generated or the scheme goes to the Lockout state.
The dead time for the initial reclose operation will be determined by either the AR 1-P DEAD TIME, AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1, or AR
3-P DEAD TIME 2 setting, depending on the fault type and the mode selected. After the dead time interval the scheme will
assert the "AR CLOSE BKR 1" or "AR CLOSE BKR 2" operands, as determined by the sequence selected. These operands are latched until the breaker closes or the scheme goes to Reset or Lockout.
There are three initiate programs: single pole initiate, three pole initiate and three pole, time delay initiate. Any of these
reclose initiate signals will start the reclose cycle and set the "Reclose in progress" (AR RIP) operand. The reclose in progress operand is sealed-in until the Lockout or Reset signal appears.
The three-pole initiate and three-pole time delay initiate signals are latched until the "Close Bkr1 or Bkr2" or Lockout or
Reset signal appears.
AR PAUSE:
The pause input offers the possibility of freezing the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This may be done
when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. The pause signal blocks all three dead timers. When the “pause” signal
disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed by initiating the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2.
This feature can be also used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a reclose is not desirable until the
transformer is removed from the line. In this case, the reclose scheme is “paused” until the transformer is disconnected.
The AR PAUSE input will force a three-pole trip through the 3-P DEADTIME 2 path.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-117
5
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
EVOLVING FAULTS:
1.25 cycles after the single pole dead time has been initiated, the AR FORCE 3P TRIP operand is set and it will be reset only
when the scheme is reset or goes to Lockout. This will ensure that when a fault on one phase evolves to include another
phase during the single pole dead time of the auto-recloser the scheme will force a 3 pole trip and reclose.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR ONE BREAKER:
•
Permanent Fault: Consider Mode 1, which calls for 1-Pole or 3-Pole Time Delay 1 for the first reclosure and 3-Pole
Time Delay 2 for the second reclosure, and assume a permanent fault on the line. Also assume the scheme is in the
Reset state. For the first single-phase fault the AR 1-P DEAD TIME timer will be started, while for the first multi-phase fault
the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1 timer will be started. If the AR 3P TD INIT signal is high, the AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2 will be started for
the first shot.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “1”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. Because the shot counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the Lockout state.
If AR MAX NO OF SHOTS is set to “2”, upon the first reclose the shot counter is set to 1. Upon reclosing, the fault is again
detected by protection and reclose is initiated. The breaker is tripped three-pole through the AR SHOT COUNT >0 operand that will set the AR FORCE 3P operand. After the second reclose the shot counter is set to 2. Upon reclosing, the
fault is again detected by protection, the breaker is tripped three-pole, and reclose is initiated again. Because the shot
counter has reached the maximum number of shots permitted the scheme is sent to the lockout state.
•
5
Transient Fault: When a reclose output signal is sent to close the breaker the reset timer is started. If the reclosure
sequence is successful (there is no initiating signal and the breaker is closed) the reset timer will time out returning the
scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to "0" making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
RECLOSING SCHEME OPERATION FOR TWO BREAKERS:
•
Permanent Fault: The general method of operation is the same as that outlined for the one breaker applications
except for the following description, which assumes AR BKR SEQUENCE is “1-2” (reclose Breaker 1 before Breaker 2)
The signal output from the dead time timers passes through the breaker selection logic to initiate reclosing of Breaker
1. The Close Breaker 1 signal will initiate the Transfer Timer. After the reclose of the first breaker the fault is again
detected by the protection, the breaker is tripped three pole and the autoreclose scheme is initiated. The Initiate signal
will stop the transfer timer. After the 3-P dead time times out the Close Breaker 1 signal will close first breaker again
and will start the transfer timer. Since the fault is permanent the protection will trip again initiating the autoreclose
scheme that will be sent to Lockout by the SHOT COUNT = MAX signal.
•
Transient Fault: When the first reclose output signal is sent to close Breaker 1, the reset timer is started. The close
Breaker 1 signal initiates the transfer timer that times out and sends the close signal to the second breaker. If the reclosure sequence is successful (both breakers closed and there is no initiating signal) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to the reset state with the shot counter set to 0. The scheme will be ready for a new reclose cycle.
AR BKR1(2) RECLS FAIL:
If the selected sequence is “1–2” or “2–1” and after the first or second reclose attempt the breaker fails to close, there are
two options. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL OPTION is set to “Lockout”, the scheme will go to lockout state. If the AR BKR 1(2) FAIL
OPTION is set to “Continue”, the reclose process will continue with Breaker 2. At the same time the shot counter will be
decreased (since the closing process was not completed).
SCHEME RESET AFTER RECLOSURE:
When a reclose output signal is sent to close either breaker 1 or 2 the reset timer is started. If the reclosure sequence is
successful (there is no initiating signal and the breakers are closed) the reset timer will time out, returning the scheme to
the reset state, with the shot counter set to 0, making it ready for a new reclose cycle.
In two breaker schemes, if one breaker is in the Out of Service state and the other is closed at the end of the reset time, the
scheme will also reset. If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the Out of Service state, is open
the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
The reset timer is stopped if the reclosure sequence is not successful: an initiating signal present or the scheme is in Lockout state. The reset timer is also stopped if the breaker is manually closed or the scheme is otherwise reset from lockout.
5-118
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
LOCKOUT:
When a reclose sequence is started by an initiate signal the scheme moves into the Reclose In Progress state and starts
the Incomplete Sequence Timer. The setting of this timer determines the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose
shot. If a close breaker 1 or 2 signal is not present before this time expires, the scheme goes to "Lockout".
There are four other conditions that can take the scheme to the Lockout state, as shown below:
•
Receipt of "Block" input while in the Reclose in Progress state
•
The reclosing program logic: when a 3P Initiate is present and the autoreclose mode is either 1 Pole or 3Pole-A (3 pole
autoreclose for single pole faults only)
•
Initiation of the scheme when the count is at the maximum allowed
•
If at the end of the reset time at least one breaker, which is not in the Out of Service state, is open the scheme will be
sent to Lockout. The scheme will be also sent to Lockout if one breaker fails to reclose and the setting AR BKR FAIL
OPTION is set to "Lockout".
Once the Lockout state is set it will be latched until one or more of the following occurs:
•
•
The scheme is intentionally reset from Lockout, employing the Reset setting of the Autorecloser;
The Breaker(s) is(are) manually closed from panel switch, SCADA or other remote control through the AR BRK MAN
setting;
CLOSE
•
10 second after breaker control detects that breaker(s) were closed.
BREAKER OPEN BEFORE FAULT:
A logic circuit is provided that inhibits the Close Breaker 1(2) output if a reclose initiate (RIP) indicator is not present within
30 ms of the “Breaker any phase open” input. This feature is intended to prevent reclosing if one of the breakers was open
in advance of a reclose initiate input to the recloser. This logic circuit resets when the breaker is closed.
TRANSFER RECLOSE WHEN BREAKER IS BLOCKED:
1.
When the reclosing sequence 1-2 is selected and Breaker 1 is blocked (AR BKR1 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 2 if AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No”, the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
2.
When the reclosing sequence 2-1 is selected and Breaker 2 is blocked (AR BKR2 BLK operand is set) the reclose signal
can be transferred direct to the Breaker 1 if AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1 is set to “Yes”. If set to “No” the scheme will be sent to
Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
FORCE 3-POLE TRIPPING:
The reclosing scheme contains logic that is used to signal trip logic that three-pole tripping is required for certain conditions.
This signal is activated by any of the following:
•
Autoreclose scheme is paused after it was initiated.
•
Autoreclose scheme is in the Lockout state.
•
Autoreclose mode is programmed for three-pole operation
•
The shot counter is not at 0, i.e. the scheme is not in the reset state. This ensures a second trip will be three-pole when
reclosing onto a permanent single phase fault.
•
1.25 cycles after the single-pole reclose is initiated by the AR 1P INIT signal.
ZONE 1 EXTENT:
The Zone 1 extension philosophy here is to apply an overreaching zone permanently as long as the relay is ready to
reclose, and reduce the reach when reclosing. Another Zone 1 extension approach is to operate normally from an underreaching zone, and use an overreaching distance zone when reclosing the line with the other line end open. This philosophy could be programmed via the Line Pickup scheme.
The “Extended Zone 1" is 0 when the AR is in LO or Disabled and 1 when the AR is in Reset.
1.
When "Extended Zone 1" is 0, the distance functions shall be set to normal underreach Zone 1 setting.
2.
When "Extended Zone 1" is 1, the distance functions may be set to Extended Zone 1 Reach, which is an overreaching
setting.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-119
5
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
3.
5 SETTINGS
During a reclose cycle, "Extended Zone 1" goes to 0 as soon as the first CLOSE BREAKER signal is issued (AR SHOT
COUNT > 0) and remains 0 until the recloser goes back to Reset.
USE OF SETTINGS:
5
•
AR MODE: This setting selects the AR operating mode, which functions in conjunction with signals received at the initiation inputs as described previously.
•
AR MAX NUMBER OF SHOTS: This setting specifies the number of reclosures that can be attempted before reclosure goes to Lockout when the fault is permanent.
•
AR BLOCK BKR1: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 1. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
•
AR CLOSE TIME BKR1:This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 1 from the moment the “Close” command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
•
AR BKR MAN CLOSE: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that represents manual close command to a
breaker associated with the autoreclose scheme
•
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN CLS: The autoreclose scheme can be disabled for a programmable time delay after an
associated circuit breaker is manually commanded to close, preventing reclosing onto an existing fault such as
grounds on the line. This delay must be longer than the slowest expected trip from any protection not blocked after
manual closing. If the autoreclose scheme is not initiated after a manual close and this time expires the autoreclose
scheme is set to the Reset state.
•
AR 1P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate single Pole autoreclosure.
•
AR 3P INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, first timer
(AR 3P DEAD TIME 1) that can be used for a high-speed autoreclosure.
•
AR 3P TD INIT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that is intended to initiate three Pole autoreclosure, second
timer (AR 3P DEAD TIME 2) that can be used for a time-delay autoreclosure.
•
AR MULTI-P FAULT: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand that indicates a multi-phase fault. The operand value
should be zero for single-phase to ground faults.
•
BKR ONE POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened
correctly following a single phase to ground fault and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the single pole dead
time (for 1-2 reclose sequence for example, Breaker 1 should trip single pole and Breaker 2 should trip 3 pole).
The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status.
•
BKR 3 POLE OPEN: This setting selects a FlexLogic™ operand which indicates that the breaker(s) has opened three
pole and the autoreclose scheme can start timing the three pole dead time. The scheme has a pre-wired input that indicates breaker(s) status.
•
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1: This is the dead time following the first three pole trip. This intentional delay can be used for a
high-speed three-pole autoreclose. However, it should be set longer than the estimated de-ionizing time following the
three-pole trip.
•
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2: This is the dead time following the second three-pole trip or initiated by the AR 3P TD INIT input.
This intentional delay is typically used for a time delayed three-pole autoreclose (as opposed to high speed three-pole
autoreclose).
•
AR EXTEND DEAD T 1: This setting selects an operand that will adapt the duration of the dead time for the first shot
to the possibility of non-simultaneous tripping at the two line ends. Typically this is the operand set when the communication channel is out of service
•
AR DEAD TIME 1 EXTENSION: This timer is used to set the length of the dead time 1 extension for possible nonsimultaneous tripping of the two ends of the line.
•
AR RESET: This setting selects the operand that forces the autoreclose scheme from any state to Reset. Typically this
is a manual reset from lockout, local or remote.
•
AR RESET TIME: A reset timer output resets the recloser following a successful reclosure sequence. The setting is
based on the breaker time which is the minimum time required between successive reclose sequences.
5-120
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
•
AR BKR CLOSED: This setting selects an operand that indicates that the breaker(s) are closed at the end of the reset
time and the scheme can reset.
•
AR BLOCK: This setting selects the operand that blocks the Autoreclose scheme (it can be a sum of conditions such
as: Time Delayed Tripping, Breaker Failure, Bus Differential Protection, etc.). If the block signal is present before
autoreclose scheme initiation the AR DISABLED FlexLogic™ operand will be set. If the block signal occurs when the
scheme is in the RIP state the scheme will be sent to Lockout.
•
AR PAUSE: The pause input offers the ability to freeze the autoreclose cycle until the pause signal disappears. This
may be done when a trip occurs and simultaneously or previously, some conditions are detected such as out-of step or
loss of guard frequency, or a remote transfer trip signal is received. When the "pause" signal disappears the autoreclose cycle is resumed. This feature can also be used when a transformer is tapped from the protected line and a
reclose is not desirable until the it is disconnected from the line. In this situation, the reclose scheme is "paused" until
the transformer is disconnected.
•
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ TIME: This timer is used to set the maximum time interval allowed for a single reclose shot. It
is started whenever a reclosure is initiated and is active until the CLOSE BKR1 or CLOSE BKR2 signal is sent. If all conditions allowing a breaker closure are not satisfied when this time expires, the scheme goes to “Lockout”. The minimum permissible setting is established by the “3-P Dead Time 2” timer setting. Settings beyond this will determine the
“wait” time for the breaker to open so that the reclose cycle can continue and/or for the AR PAUSE signal to reset and
allow the reclose cycle to continue and/or for the AR BKR1(2) BLK signal to disappear and allow the AR CLOSE BKR1(2)
signal to be sent.
•
AR BLOCK BKR2: This input selects an operand that will block the reclose command for Breaker 2. This condition
can be for example: breaker low air pressure, reclose in progress on another line (for the central breaker in a breaker
and a half arrangement), or a sum of conditions combined in FlexLogic™.
•
AR CLOSE TIME BKR2: This setting represents the closing time for the Breaker 2 from the moment the “Close” command is sent to the moment the contacts are closed.
•
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 1-2
and Breaker 1 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 2 without waiting the transfer time. When set to “No” the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR1 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
•
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 2-1
and Breaker 2 is blocked. When set to “Yes” the closing command will be transferred direct to Breaker 1 without waiting the transfer time. When set to “No”, the closing command will be blocked by the AR BKR2 BLK signal and the
scheme will be sent to Lockout by the incomplete sequence timer.
•
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 12 and Breaker 1 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 2
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 2.
•
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION: This setting establishes how the scheme performs when the breaker closing sequence is 21 and Breaker 2 has failed to close. When set to “Continue” the closing command will be transferred to Breaker 1
which will continue the reclosing cycle until successful (the scheme will reset) or unsuccessful (the scheme will go to
Lockout). When set to “Lockout” the scheme will go to lockout without attempting to reclose Breaker 1.
•
AR 1-P DEAD TIME: Set this intentional delay longer than the estimated de-ionizing time after the first single-pole trip.
•
AR BREAKER SEQUENCE: This setting selects the breakers reclose sequence: Select “1” for reclose breaker 1 only,
“2” for reclose breaker 2 only, “1&2” for reclose both breakers simultaneously, “1-2” for reclose breakers sequentially;
Breaker 1 first, and “2-1” for reclose breakers sequentially; Breaker 2 first.
•
AR TRANSFER TIME: The transfer time is used only for breaker closing sequence 1-2 or 2-1, when the two breakers
are reclosed sequentially. The transfer timer is initiated by a close signal to the first breaker. The transfer timer transfers the reclose signal from the breaker selected to close first to the second breaker. The time delay setting is based on
the maximum time interval between the autoreclose signal and the protection trip contact closure assuming a permanent fault (unsuccessful reclose). Therefore, the minimum setting is equal to the maximum breaker closing time plus
the maximum line protection operating time plus a suitable margin. This setting will prevent the autoreclose scheme
from transferring the close signal to the second breaker unless a successful reclose of the first breaker occurs.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-121
5
5-122
D60 Relay Only From Trip Output
From sheet 3
SETTING
C60 Breaker Management Relay
OR
OR
OR
OR
BKR CLOSED
Off = 0
AR RESET:
SETTING
Off = 0
AR MULTI-P FAULT:
SETTING
10s
PHASE SELECT MULTI-P
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0
D60 Relay Only From Phase Selector
1 & 3 Pole
3 Pole - A
3 Pole -B
1 Pole
AR M0DE:
SETTING
SHOT COUNT = MAX
Off = 0
AR PAUSE
SETTING
AR SHOT COUNT>0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET
CLOSE BKR1 OR BKR2
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
Off = 0
BKR 3 POLE OPEN:
SETTING
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
Off = 0
BKR ONE POLE OPEN:
SETTING
Off = 0
AR 3P TD INIT:
SETTING
TRIP AR INIT 3-POLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
AR 3P INIT:
SETTING
TRIP 1-POLE
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off = 0
AR 1P INIT:
SETTING
(From sheet 3)
BKR MANUAL CLOSE:
AND
0
OR
OR
AND
0
5ms
OR
OR
OR
AR BLK TIME UPON MAN
CLS :
Off = 0
OR
OR
SETTING
AND
AR BKR MAN CLOSE:
SETTING
Off = 0
AR BLOCK:
SETTING
LINE PICKUP OP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
D60, L90 Relay Only
Disable=0
Enable=1
AR FUNCTION:
LO
OR
OR
AND
AR DISABLED
Evolving fault
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
AR ENABLED
AR DISABLED
OR
OR
S
AND
AND
AND
R
OR
R
S
R
S
Latch
Latch
AR ZONE 1 EXTENT
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
OR
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
Latch
5
From Sheet 2
OR
AND
AND
Latch
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ.
TIMER:
AND
0
AND
AND
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 2:
SETTING
AR 3-P/2 RIP
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
(from sheet 2)
SETTING
AND
0
0
0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR 3-P DEAD TIME 1:
SETTING
AR 3-P/1 RIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR 1-P DEAD TIME:
SETTING
AR 1-P RIP
0
1.25 cycle
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
R
S
OR
OR
0
RESET (to sheet 2)
AR LO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR DEAD TIME 1
EXTENSION:
SETTING
Off = 0
AR EXTEND DEAD TIME
1:
SETTING
OR
AR INITIATE
AND
CLOSE (to page 2)
827089AH.CDR
OR
(Evolving fault)
To: AR FORCE 3P TRIP
(To page 2, Reset AR TRANSFER TIMER)
NOTE
From Sheet 3
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
For correct operation of the autoreclose scheme, the Breaker Control feature must be enabled and configured properly. When the breaker reclose sequence is “1-2” or “2-1” the breaker that will reclose second in
sequence (Breaker 2 for sequence 1-2 and Breaker 1 for sequence 2-1) must be configured to trip threepole for any type of fault.
Figure 5–64: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3)
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
FROM
SHEET 1
C60 Breaker Management Relay
(From Sheet 1)
RESET
Off=0
AR BKR CLOSED:
SETTING
BREAKER 2 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0
AR BLOCK BKR 2:
SETTING
BREAKER 2 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Continue=0
AR BKR2 FAIL OPTION:
SETTING
No = 0
AR TRANSFER 2 TO 1:
SETTING
CLOSE
AR LO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR INITIATE
AR RIP
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2-1
1-2
1&2
2
1
AR BKR SEQUENCE:
SETTING
Continue=0
AR BKR1 FAIL OPTION:
SETTING
No = 0
AR TRANSFER 1 TO 2:
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
Off=0
AR BLOCK BKR 1:
SETTING
BREAKER 1 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
To sheet 3
AND
OR
OR
AND
AND
30ms
OR
OR
30ms
0
0
OR
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
R
S
Latch
TO
SHEET 3
TO
SHEET 3
BKR CLOSED (from page 3)
BKR 2 MNL OPEN
OR
AR BKR 1 BLK
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR 1 MNL OPEN
AND
AND
AND
LO
LO
AND
OR
OR
AR BKR 2 BLK
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
0ms
AR TRANSFER TIME:
SETTING
AND
AND
AND
AR RESET TIME:
SETTING
AND
AND
AND
AND
0
OR
OR
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
LO
LO
OR
AND
Increm Shot
Counter
Reset Count
Decrem Shot
Counter
Sh=2
OR
Sh=0
Sh=Max
Sh=1
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AR RESET
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
From bkr control
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
OR
AR MAX NO OF SHOTS:
SETTING
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
From bkr control
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
S
R
S
R
Latch
OR
AR SHOT COUNT: 0 (1,2)
ACTUAL VALUES
Latch
AR CLOSE BKR 1
AR CLOSE BKR 2
2ms
TO
SHEET 1
827090AA.CDR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
RESET
BKR FAIL TO RECLS
(To LO)
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 2:
SETTING
AND
CLOSE BKR 1 OR BKR 2
SHOT COUNT=MAX
AR SHOT CNT>0
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
2ms
AR CLOSE TIME BKR 1:
SETTING
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5
Figure 5–65: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 3)
5-123
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
From sheet 2
From
Breaker Control
Scheme
From sheet 2
5
From
Breaker Control
Scheme
}
}
}
}
5 SETTINGS
BKR 1 MNL OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OR
BREAKER 1 OOS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OOS
BKR 2 MNL OPEN
OR
1
2
1&2
1-2
2-1
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 MNL CLS
OR
BKR MANUAL CLOSE
(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR CLOSED
(To sheet 1 and 2)
OR
BKR 3 POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
BKR ONE POLE OPEN
(To sheet 1)
OR
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 MNL CLS
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AND
OR
AND
AND
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 OPEN
AND
AND
OR
OR
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 1 ONE P OPEN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BREAKER 2 ONE P OPEN
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
827833A9.CDR
Figure 5–66: SINGLE-POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 3 of 3)
5-124
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
AR INCOMPLETE SEQ. TIME
AR TRANSFER TIME
AR CLOSE BKR2
BREAKER 2 CLOSED
AR 3P/2 RIP
AR 3P INIT
BREAKER 1 CLOSED
AR SHOT COUNT > 0
AR RESET TIME
AR CLOSE BKR1
CLOSE
AR FORCE 3P TRIP
AR 1-P RIP
AR RIP
AR 1P INIT
PREFAULT
F
A
U
L
T
T
R
I
P
1.25 cycle
1-P DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T TRIP BKR
T PROT
1ST SHOT
T PROT
T TRIP BKR
T CLOSE BKR1
3-P/2 DEAD TIME
T PROT RESET
T CLOSE BKR1
TRANSFER TIME
2ND SHOT
RESET TIME
T CLOSE BKR2
R
E
S
E
T
842703A4.CDR
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5
Figure 5–67: EXAMPLE RECLOSING SEQUENCE
5-125
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
5.6.6 DIGITAL ELEMENTS
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1(16)
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Dig Element 1
Range: 16 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
Off
1 INPUT:
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 PICKUP
0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 RESET
0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 999999.999 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
Off
1 BLOCK:
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
5
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
There are 16 identical Digital Elements available, numbered 1 to 16. A Digital Element can monitor any FlexLogic™ operand and present a target message and/or enable events recording depending on the output operand state. The digital element settings include a ‘name’ which will be referenced in any target message, a blocking input from any selected
FlexLogic™ operand, and a timer for pickup and reset delays for the output operand.
•
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 INPUT: Selects a FlexLogic™ operand to be monitored by the Digital Element.
•
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 PICKUP DELAY: Sets the time delay to pickup. If a pickup delay is not required, set to "0".
•
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1 RESET DELAY: Sets the time delay to reset. If a reset delay is not required, set to “0”.
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
INPUT:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
NAME:
RUN
INPUT = 1
SETTINGS
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
PICKUP DELAY:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
RESET DELAY:
tPKP
tRST
SETTING
DIGITAL ELEMENT 01
BLOCK:
Off = 0
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
DIG ELEM 01 DPO
DIG ELEM 01 PKP
DIG ELEM 01 OP
827042A1.VSD
Figure 5–68: DIGITAL ELEMENT SCHEME LOGIC
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS:
Some versions of the digital input modules include an active Voltage Monitor circuit connected across Form-A contacts.
The Voltage Monitor circuit limits the trickle current through the output circuit (see Technical Specifications for Form-A).
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above a threshold (see Technical Specifications for Form-A), the FlexLogic™ operand "Cont Op # VOn" will be set. (# represents the output contact number). If the output circuit has a high
resistance or the DC current is interrupted, the trickle current will drop below the threshold and the FlexLogic™ operand
"Cont Op # VOff" will be set. Consequently, the state of these operands can be used as indicators of the integrity of the circuits in which Form-A contacts are inserted.
5-126
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
EXAMPLE 1: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
In many applications it is desired to monitor the breaker trip circuit integrity so problems can be detected before a trip operation is required. The circuit is considered to be healthy when the Voltage Monitor connected across the trip output contact
detects a low level of current, well below the operating current of the breaker trip coil. If the circuit presents a high resistance, the trickle current will fall below the monitor threshold and an alarm would be declared.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact which is open when the
breaker is open (see diagram below). To prevent unwanted alarms in this situation, the trip circuit monitoring logic must
include the breaker position.
DC+
UR Relay - Form-A
H1a
I
I = Current Monitor
H1b
V = Voltage Monitor
V
H1c
52a
Trip
Coil
827073A1.vsd
5
DC–
Figure 5–69: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 1
Assume the output contact H1 is a trip contact. Using the contact output settings, this output will be given an ID name, e.g.
“Cont Op 1". Assume a 52a breaker auxiliary contact is connected to contact input H7a to monitor breaker status. Using the
contact input settings, this input will be given an ID name, e.g. “Cont Ip 1" and will be set “ON” when the breaker is closed.
Using Digital Element 1 to monitor the breaker trip circuit, the settings will be:
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Bkr Trip Cct Out
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Cont Op 1 VOff
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 PICKUP
0.200 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 RESET
0.100 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 BLOCK:
Cont Ip 1 Off
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT
EVENTS: Enabled
1
The PICKUP DELAY setting should be greater than the operating time of the breaker to avoid nuisance
alarms.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-127
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
EXAMPLE 2: BREAKER TRIP CIRCUIT INTEGRITY MONITORING
If it is required to monitor the trip circuit continuously, independent of the breaker position (open or closed), a method to
maintain the monitoring current flow through the trip circuit when the breaker is open must be provided (as shown in the figure below). This can be achieved by connecting a suitable resistor (see figure below) across the auxiliary contact in the trip
circuit. In this case, it is not required to supervise the monitoring circuit with the breaker position – the BLOCK setting is
selected to “Off”. In this case, the settings will be:
DIGITAL ELEMENT
5
1
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
FUNCTION: Enabled
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 NAME:
Bkr Trip Cct Out
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM 1 INPUT:
Cont Op 1 VOff
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 PICKUP
0.200 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
DELAY:
1 RESET
0.100 s
MESSAGE
DIG ELEM
Off
1 BLOCK:
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
TARGET: Self-reset
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT
EVENTS: Enabled
1
DC+
Table 5–18: VALUES OF RESISTOR ‘R’
UR Relay - Form-A
H1a
I
I = Current Monitor
H1b
V = Voltage Monitor
V
H1c
52a
R
By-pass
Resistor
POWER
SUPPLY (V DC)
RESISTANCE
(OHMS)
POWER
(WATTS)
24
1000
2
30
5000
2
48
10000
2
110
25000
5
125
25000
5
250
50000
5
Trip
Coil
827074A1.vsd
DC–
Figure 5–70: TRIP CIRCUIT EXAMPLE 2
5-128
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.7 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
COUNTER 1(8)
COUNTER 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
COUNTER 1 NAME:
Counter 1
Range: 12 alphanumeric characters
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
0
Range: –2,147,483,648 to +2,147,483,647
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CNT1 SET TO PRESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
COUNTER 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
5
There are 8 identical digital counters, numbered from 1 to 8. A digital counter counts the number of state transitions from
Logic 0 to Logic 1. The counter is used to count operations such as the pickups of an element, the changes of state of an
external contact (e.g. breaker auxiliary switch), or pulses from a watt-hour meter.
•
COUNTER 1 UNITS: Assigns a label to identify the unit of measure pertaining to the digital transitions to be counted.
The units label will appear in the corresponding Actual Values status.
•
COUNTER 1 PRESET: Sets the count to a required preset value before counting operations begin, as in the case
where a substitute relay is to be installed in place of an in-service relay, or while the counter is running.
•
COUNTER 1 COMPARE: Sets the value to which the accumulated count value is compared. Three FlexLogic™ output
operands are provided to indicate if the present value is ‘more than (HI)’, ‘equal to (EQL)’, or ‘less than (LO)’ the set
value.
•
COUNTER 1 UP: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for incrementing the counter. If an enabled UP input is received
when the accumulated value is at the limit of +2,147,483,647 counts, the counter will rollover to –2,147,483,648.
•
COUNTER 1 DOWN: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for decrementing the counter. If an enabled DOWN input is
received when the accumulated value is at the limit of –2,147,483,648 counts, the counter will rollover to
+2,147,483,647.
•
COUNTER 1 BLOCK: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for blocking the counting operation. All counter operands are
blocked.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-129
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
•
5 SETTINGS
CNT1 SET TO PRESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand used to set the count to the preset value. The counter will
be set to the preset value in the following situations:
1.
2.
When the counter is enabled and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value 1 (when the counter is enabled
and CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand is 0, the counter will be set to 0).
When the counter is running and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand changes the state from 0 to 1 (CNT1 SET TO
changing from 1 to 0 while the counter is running has no effect on the count).
PRESET
3.
When a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the value
1 (when a reset or reset/freeze command is sent to the counter and the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand has the
value 0, the counter will be set to 0).
•
COUNTER 1 RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for setting the count to either “0” or the preset value depending
on the state of the CNT1 SET TO PRESET operand.
•
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/RESET: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and resetting the count to “0”.
•
COUNTER 1 FREEZE/COUNT: Selects the FlexLogic™ operand for capturing (freezing) the accumulated count value
into a separate register with the date and time of the operation, and continuing counting. The present accumulated
value and captured frozen value with the associated date/time stamp are available as actual values. If control power is
interrupted, the accumulated and frozen values are saved into non-volatile memory during the power down operation.
SETTING
COUNTER 1 FUNCTION:
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
5
SETTING
SETTINGS
COUNTER 1 NAME:
COUNTER 1 UNITS:
COUNTER 1 PRESET:
RUN
AND
COUNTER 1 UP:
Off = 0
SETTING
COUNTER 1 COMPARE:
SETTING
CALCULATE
VALUE
COUNTER 1 DOWN:
Off = 0
Count more than Comp.
Count equal to Comp.
Count less than Comp.
FLEXLOGIC
OPERANDS
COUNTER 1 HI
COUNTER 1 EQL
COUNTER 1 LO
SETTING
COUNTER 1 BLOCK:
Off = 0
SET TO PRESET VALUE
SET TO ZERO
SETTING
CNT 1 SET TO PRESET:
Off = 0
AND
SETTING
AND
ACTUAL VALUES
COUNTER 1 RESET:
Off = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
COUNTER 1 ACCUM:
COUNTER 1 FROZEN:
OR
STORE DATE & TIME
Date & Time
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/RESET:
Off = 0
OR
827065A1.VSD
SETTING
COUNT1 FREEZE/COUNT:
Off = 0
Figure 5–71: DIGITAL COUNTER SCHEME LOGIC
5-130
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5.6.8 MONITORING ELEMENTS
a) MAIN MENU
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
MONITORING
ELEMENTS
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MONITORING ELEMENTS
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
See below.
BREAKER 2
ARCING CURRENT
See below.
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
VT FUSE FAILURE 2
VT FUSE FAILURE 3
VT FUSE FAILURE 4
See page 5–133.
See page 5–133.
See page 5–133.
See page 5–133.
b) BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
MONITORING ELEMENTS
BREAKER 1(2) ARCING CURRENT
BKR 1 ARC AMP
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Range: SRC 1, SRC 2, SRC 3, SRC 4
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP
SOURCE: SRC 1
BKR 1 ARC AMP INIT:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP
DELAY: 0.000 s
Range: 0.000 to 65.535 s in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP LIMIT:
1000 kA2-cyc
Range: 0 to 50000 kA2-cycle in steps of 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP BLOCK:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP
TARGET: Self-reset
Range: Self-reset, Latched, Disabled
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARC AMP
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
BREAKER 1
ARCING CURRENT
5
There are 2 identical Breaker Arcing Current features available for Breakers 1 and 2. This element calculates an estimate
of the per-phase wear on the breaker contacts by measuring and integrating the current squared passing through the
breaker contacts as an arc. These per-phase values are added to accumulated totals for each phase and compared to a
programmed threshold value. When the threshold is exceeded in any phase, the relay can set an output operand to “1”.
The accumulated value for each phase can be displayed as an actual value.
The operation of the scheme is shown in the following logic diagram. The same output operand that is selected to operate
the output relay used to trip the breaker, indicating a tripping sequence has begun, is used to initiate this feature. A time
delay is introduced between initiation and the starting of integration to prevent integration of current flow through the
breaker before the contacts have parted. This interval includes the operating time of the output relay, any other auxiliary
relays and the breaker mechanism. For maximum measurement accuracy, the interval between change-of-state of the
operand (from 0 to 1) and contact separation should be measured for the specific installation. Integration of the measured
current continues for 100 ms, which is expected to include the total arcing period.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-131
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
5 SETTINGS
•
BKR 1(2) ARC AMP INIT: Selects the same output operand that is selected to operate the output relay used to trip the
breaker.
•
BKR 1(2) ARC AMP DELAY: This setting is used to program the delay interval between the time the tripping sequence
is initiated and the time the breaker contacts are expected to part, starting the integration of the measured current.
•
BKR 1(2) ARC AMP LIMIT: Selects the threshold value above which the output operand is set.
Breaker
Contacts
Part
Initiate
Arc
Extinguished
Total Area =
Breaker
Arcing
Current
(kA·cycle)
Programmable
Start Delay
100 ms
Start
Integration
Stop
Integration
Figure 5–72: ARCING CURRENT MEASUREMENT
5
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP FUNCTION:
AND
SETTING
Disabled=0
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP DELAY:
Enabled=1
OR
100 ms
0
0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP INIT:
Off=0
AND
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP BLOCK:
Off=0
SETTING
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP SOURCE:
IA
IB
IC
COMMAND
RUN
SETTING
Add to
Accumulator
Integrate
IA -Cycle
Integrate
IB -Cycle
Integrate
IC -Cycle
2
2
2
Select
Highest
Value
BREAKER 1 ARCING
AMP LIMIT:
2
KA * Cycle Limit
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
BKR1 ARC OP
Set All To Zero
ACTUAL VALUE
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS:
BKR 1 ARCING AMP A
NO=0
BKR 1 ARCING AMP B
YES=1
BKR 1 ARCING AMP C
827071A2.CDR
Figure 5–73: BREAKER ARCING CURRENT SCHEME LOGIC
5-132
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.6 CONTROL ELEMENTS
c) VT FUSE FAILURE
PATH: SETTINGS
CONTROL ELEMENTS
VT FUSE FAILURE 1
MONITORING ELEMENTS
VT FUSE FAILURE
FUNCTION: Disabled
VT FUSE FAILURE 1(4)
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Every signal source includes a fuse failure scheme.
The VT fuse failure detector can be used to raise an alarm and/or block elements that may operate incorrectly for a full or
partial loss of AC potential caused by one or more blown fuses. Some elements that might be blocked (via the BLOCK
input) are distance, voltage restrained overcurrent, and directional current.
There are two classes of fuse failure that may occur:
Class A: Loss of one or two phases.
Class B: Loss of all three phases.
Different means of detection are required for each class. An indication of Class A failures is a significant level of negative
sequence voltage, whereas an indication of Class B failures is when positive sequence current is present and there is an
insignificant amount of positive sequence voltage. These noted indications of fuse failure could also be present when faults
are present on the system, so a means of detecting faults and inhibiting fuse failure declarations during these events is provided. Once the fuse failure condition is declared, it will be sealed-in until the cause that generated it disappears.
An additional condition is introduced to inhibit a fuse failure declaration when the monitored circuit is de-energized; positive
sequence voltage and current are both below threshold levels.
The VT FUSE FAILURE FUNCTION setting enables/disables the fuse failure feature for each source.
AND
SET
LATCH
AND
SETTING
5
Reset-dominant
OR
FAULT
RESET
VT FUSE FAILURE
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
SOURCE 1
AND
COMPARATORS
RUN
V_2 > 0.25 p.u.
V_2
RUN
OR
V_1 < 0.05 p.u.
V_1
RUN
OR
AND
I_1 > 0.075 p.u.
I_1
FUSE
FAIL
SET
RUN
V_1 < 0.7 p.u.
RUN
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
2 CYCLES
AND
20 CYCLES
I_1 < 0.05 p.u.
FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS
LATCH
SRC1 50DD OP
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL OP
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL DPO
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
OPEN POLE OP
D60 only
AND
OR
AND
RESET
Reset-dominant
FLEXLOGIC OPERAND
AND
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL VOL LOSS
827093AG.CDR
Figure 5–74: VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-133
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.7INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
5.7.1 CONTACT INPUTS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT H5a
CONTACT INPUT H5a ID:
Cont Ip 1
Range: up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a
DEBNCE TIME: 2.0 ms
Range: 0.0 to 16.0 ms in steps of 0.5
MESSAGE
CONTACT INPUT H5a
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
↓
CONTACT INPUT xxx
CONTACT INPUT
THRESHOLDS
5
Ips H5a,H5c,H6a,H6c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
Ips H7a,H7c,H8a,H8c
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
MESSAGE
↓
MESSAGE
Ips xxx,xxx,xxx,xxx
THRESHOLD: 33 Vdc
Range: 17, 33, 84, 166 Vdc
The contact inputs menu contains configuration settings for each contact input as well as voltage thresholds for each group
of four contact inputs. Upon startup, the relay processor determines (from an assessment of the installed modules) which
contact inputs are available and then display settings for only those inputs.
An alphanumeric ID may be assigned to a contact input for diagnostic, setting, and event recording purposes. The CONTACT IP X On” (Logic 1) FlexLogic™ operand corresponds to contact input “X” being closed, while CONTACT IP X Off corresponds to contact input “X” being open. The CONTACT INPUT DEBNCE TIME defines the time required for the contact to
overcome ‘contact bouncing’ conditions. As this time differs for different contact types and manufacturers, set it as a maximum contact debounce time (per manufacturer specifications) plus some margin to ensure proper operation. If CONTACT
INPUT EVENTS is set to “Enabled”, every change in the contact input state will trigger an event.
A raw status is scanned for all Contact Inputs synchronously at the constant rate of 0.5 ms as shown in the figure below.
The DC input voltage is compared to a user-settable threshold. A new contact input state must be maintained for a usersettable debounce time in order for the C60 to validate the new contact state. In the figure below, the debounce time is set
at 2.5 ms; thus the 6th sample in a row validates the change of state (mark no. 1 in the diagram). Once validated (debounced), the contact input asserts a corresponding FlexLogic™ operand and logs an event as per user setting.
A time stamp of the first sample in the sequence that validates the new state is used when logging the change of the contact input into the Event Recorder (mark no. 2 in the diagram).
Protection and control elements, as well as FlexLogic™ equations and timers, are executed eight times in a power system
cycle. The protection pass duration is controlled by the frequency tracking mechanism. The FlexLogic™ operand reflecting
the debounced state of the contact is updated at the protection pass following the validation (marks no. 3 and 4 on the figure below). The update is performed at the beginning of the protection pass so all protection and control functions, as well
as FlexLogic™ equations, are fed with the updated states of the contact inputs.
5-134
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
The FlexLogic™ operand response time to the contact input change is equal to the debounce time setting plus up to one
protection pass (variable and depending on system frequency if frequency tracking enabled). If the change of state occurs
just after a protection pass, the recognition is delayed until the subsequent protection pass; that is, by the entire duration of
the protection pass. If the change occurs just prior to a protection pass, the state is recognized immediately. Statistically a
delay of half the protection pass is expected. Owing to the 0.5 ms scan rate, the time resolution for the input contact is
below 1msec.
For example, 8 protection passes per cycle on a 60 Hz system correspond to a protection pass every 2.1 ms. With a contact debounce time setting of 3.0 ms, the FlexLogic™ operand-assert time limits are: 3.0 + 0.0 = 3.0 ms and 3.0 + 2.1 = 5.1
ms. These time limits depend on how soon the protection pass runs after the debouncing time.
Regardless of the contact debounce time setting, the contact input event is time-stamped with a 1 μs accuracy using the
time of the first scan corresponding to the new state (mark no. 2 below). Therefore, the time stamp reflects a change in the
DC voltage across the contact input terminals that was not accidental as it was subsequently validated using the debounce
timer. Keep in mind that the associated FlexLogic™ operand is asserted/de-asserted later, after validating the change.
INPUT
VOLTAGE
The debounce algorithm is symmetrical: the same procedure and debounce time are used to filter the LOW-HIGH (marks
no.1, 2, 3, and 4 in the figure below) and HIGH-LOW (marks no. 5, 6, 7, and 8 below) transitions.
USER-PROGRAMMABLE THRESHOLD
2
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to
the new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
1
6
3
TM
At this time, the
new (HIGH)
contact state is
validated
The FlexLogic
operand is going to
be asserted at this
protection pass
5
Time stamp of the first
scan corresponding to the
new validated state is
logged in the SOE record
5
At this time, the new
(LOW) contact state is
validated
RAW CONTACT
STATE
7
The FlexLogicTM
operand is going to be
de-asserted at this
protection pass
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
FLEXLOGICTM
OPERAND
4
SCAN TIME
(0.5 msec)
DEBOUNCE TIME
(user setting)
The FlexLogicTM operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
The FlexLogicTM operand
changes reflecting the
validated contact state
8
PROTECTION PASS
(8 times a cycle controlled by the
frequency tracking mechanism)
842709A1.cdr
Figure 5–75: INPUT CONTACT DEBOUNCING MECHANISM AND TIME-STAMPING SAMPLE TIMING
Contact inputs are isolated in groups of four to allow connection of wet contacts from different voltage sources for each
group. The CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLDS determine the minimum voltage required to detect a closed contact input. This
value should be selected according to the following criteria: 17 for 24 V sources, 33 for 48 V sources, 84 for 110 to 125 V
sources and 166 for 250 V sources.
For example, to use contact input H5a as a status input from the breaker 52b contact to seal-in the trip relay and record it in
the Event Records menu, make the following settings changes:
CONTACT INPUT H5A ID: "Breaker Closed
CONTACT INPUT H5A EVENTS: "Enabled"
(52b)"
Note that the 52b contact is closed when the breaker is open and open when the breaker is closed.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-135
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.7.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUT
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
VIRTUAL INPUT
Virt Ip 1
1 ID:
Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT
TYPE: Latched
1
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
1
2
As above for Virtual Input 1
↓
VIRTUAL INPUT
↓
32
UCA SBO TIMER
5
Range: Disabled, Enabled
As above for Virtual Input 1
UCA SBO TIMEOUT:
30 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input signals from the keypad (COMMANDS
menu) and communications protocols. All virtual input operands are defaulted to OFF = 0 unless the appropriate input signal is received. Virtual input states are preserved through a control power loss.
If the VIRTUAL INPUT x FUNCTION is to "Disabled", the input will be forced to 'OFF' (Logic 0) regardless of any attempt to alter
the input. If set to "Enabled", the input operates as shown on the logic diagram and generates output FlexLogic™ operands
in response to received input signals and the applied settings.
There are two types of operation: Self-Reset and Latched. If VIRTUAL INPUT x TYPE is "Self-Reset", when the input signal
transits from OFF = 0 to ON = 1, the output operand will be set to ON = 1 for only one evaluation of the FlexLogic™ equations and then return to OFF = 0. If set to "Latched", the virtual input sets the state of the output operand to the same state
as the most recent received input, ON =1 or OFF = 0.
NOTE
The "Self-Reset" operating mode generates the output operand for a single evaluation of the FlexLogic™
equations. If the operand is to be used anywhere other than internally in a FlexLogic™ equation, it will
likely have to be lengthened in time. A FlexLogic™ timer with a delayed reset can perform this function.
The Select-Before-Operate timer sets the interval from the receipt of an Operate signal to the automatic de-selection of the
virtual input, so that an input does not remain selected indefinitely (used only with the UCA Select-Before-Operate feature).
SETTING
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
FUNCTION:
Disabled=0
Enabled=1
S
AND
Latch
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1”
SETTING
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0”
SETTING
AND
R
OR
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
TYPE:
Latched
VIRTUAL INPUT 1 ID:
(Flexlogic Operand)
Virt Ip 1
AND
Self - Reset
827080A2.CDR
Figure 5–76: VIRTUAL INPUTS SCHEME LOGIC
5-136
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7.3 CONTACT OUTPUTS
a) DIGITAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID
Cont Op 1
Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
EVENTS: Enabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTACT OUTPUT H1
Upon startup of the relay, the main processor will determine from an assessment of the modules installed in the chassis
which contact outputs are available and present the settings for only these outputs.
An ID may be assigned to each contact output. The signal that can OPERATE a contact output may be any FlexLogic™
operand (virtual output, element state, contact input, or virtual input). An additional FlexLogic™ operand may be used to
SEAL-IN the relay. Any change of state of a contact output can be logged as an Event if programmed to do so.
EXAMPLE:
The trip circuit current is monitored by providing a current threshold detector in series with some Form-A contacts (see the
Trip Circuit Example in the Digital Elements section). The monitor will set a flag (see the Specifications for Form-A). The
name of the FlexLogic™ operand set by the monitor, consists of the output relay designation, followed by the name of the
flag; e.g. ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ or ‘Cont Op 1 IOff’.
In most breaker control circuits, the trip coil is connected in series with a breaker auxiliary contact used to interrupt current
flow after the breaker has tripped, to prevent damage to the less robust initiating contact. This can be done by monitoring
an auxiliary contact on the breaker which opens when the breaker has tripped, but this scheme is subject to incorrect operation caused by differences in timing between breaker auxiliary contact change-of-state and interruption of current in the
trip circuit. The most dependable protection of the initiating contact is provided by directly measuring current in the tripping
circuit, and using this parameter to control resetting of the initiating relay. This scheme is often called "trip seal-in".
This can be realized in the UR using the ‘Cont Op 1 IOn’ FlexLogic™ operand to seal-in the Contact Output as follows:
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 ID: “Cont Op 1"
OUTPUT H1 OPERATE: any suitable FlexLogic™
OUTPUT H1 SEAL-IN: “Cont Op 1 IOn”
CONTACT OUTPUT H1 EVENTS: “Enabled”
operand
b) LATCHING OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a
OUTPUT H1a ID
L-Cont Op 1
Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a RESET:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a TYPE:
Operate-dominant
Range: Operate-dominant, Reset-dominant
MESSAGE
OUTPUT H1a EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
CONTACT
OUTPUT H1a
GE Multilin
CONTACT OUTPUTS
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-137
5
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The C60 latching output contacts are mechanically bi-stable and controlled by two separate (open and close) coils. As such
they retain their position even if the relay is not powered up. The relay recognizes all latching output contact cards and populates the setting menu accordingly. On power up, the relay reads positions of the latching contacts from the hardware
before executing any other functions of the relay (such as protection and control features or FlexLogic™).
The latching output modules, either as a part of the relay or as individual modules, are shipped from the factory with all
latching contacts opened. It is highly recommended to double-check the programming and positions of the latching contacts when replacing a module.
Since the relay asserts the output contact and reads back its position, it is possible to incorporate self-monitoring capabilities for the latching outputs. If any latching outputs exhibits a discrepancy, the LATCHING OUTPUT ERROR self-test error is
declared. The error is signaled by the LATCHING OUT ERROR FlexLogic™ operand, event, and target message.
•
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘close coil’ of the contact. The
relay will seal-in this input to safely close the contact. Once the contact is closed and the RESET input is logic 0 (off),
any activity of the OPERATE input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and
RESET inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
•
OUTPUT H1a RESET: This setting specifies a FlexLogic™ operand to operate the ‘trip coil’ of the contact. The relay
will seal-in this input to safely open the contact. Once the contact is opened and the OPERATE input is logic 0 (off), any
activity of the RESET input, such as subsequent chattering, will not have any effect. With both the OPERATE and RESET
inputs active (logic 1), the response of the latching contact is specified by the OUTPUT H1A TYPE setting.
•
OUTPUT H1a TYPE: This setting specifies the contact response under conflicting control inputs; that is, when both the
OPERATE and RESET signals are applied. With both control inputs applied simultaneously, the contact will close if set to
“Operate-dominant” and will open if set to “Reset-dominant”.
Application Example 1:
5
A latching output contact H1a is to be controlled from two user-programmable pushbuttons (buttons number 1 and 2). The
following settings should be applied.
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
PUTS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUT-
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “PUSHBUTTON 2 ON”
Program the pushbuttons by making the following changes in the PRODUCT SETUP
USER PUSHBUTTON 1 and USER PUSHBUTTON 2 menus:
TONS
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 1 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUT-
PUSHBUTTON 2 FUNCTION: “Self-reset”
PUSHBTN 2 DROP-OUT TIME: “0.00 s”
Application Example 2:
A relay, having two latching contacts H1a and H1c, is to be programmed. The H1a contact is to be a Type-a contact, while
the H1c contact is to be a Type-b contact (Type-a means closed after exercising the operate input; Type-b means closed
after exercising the reset input). The relay is to be controlled from virtual outputs: VO1 to operate and VO2 to reset.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
PUTS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
CONTACT OUT-
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO1”
Since the two physical contacts in this example are mechanically separated and have individual control inputs, they will not
operate at exactly the same time. A discrepancy in the range of a fraction of a maximum operating time may occur. Therefore, a pair of contacts programmed to be a multi-contact relay will not guarantee any specific sequence of operation (such
as make before break). If required, the sequence of operation must be programmed explicitly by delaying some of the control inputs as shown in the next application example.
Application Example 3:
A make before break functionality must be added to the preceding example. An overlap of 20 ms is required to implement
this functionality as described below:
5-138
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
Both timers (Timer 1 and Timer 2) should be set to 20 ms pickup and 0 ms dropout.
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a and CONTACT OUTPUT H1c menus (assuming an H4L module):
CONTACT OUT-
PUTS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO4”
OUTPUT H1c OPERATE: “VO2”
OUTPUT H1c RESET: “VO3”
Application Example 4:
A latching contact H1a is to be controlled from a single virtual output VO1. The contact should stay closed as long as VO1
is high, and should stay opened when VO1 is low. Program the relay as follows.
Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
5
Program the Latching Outputs by making the following changes in the SETTINGS
CONTACT OUTPUT H1a menu (assuming an H4L module):
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUT-
PUTS
OUTPUT H1a OPERATE: “VO1”
OUTPUT H1a RESET: “VO2”
5.7.4 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
1
MESSAGE
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1(64)
VIRTUAL OUTPUT
Virt Op 1
1 ID
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Up to 12 alphanumeric characters
Range: Disabled, Enabled
There are 64 virtual outputs that may be assigned via FlexLogic™. If not assigned, the output will be forced to ‘OFF’ (Logic
0). An ID may be assigned to each virtual output. Virtual outputs are resolved in each pass through the evaluation of the
FlexLogic™ equations. Any change of state of a virtual output can be logged as an event if programmed to do so.
For example, if Virtual Output 1 is the trip signal from FlexLogic™ and the trip relay is used to signal events, the settings
would be programmed as follows:
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 ID: "Trip"
VIRTUAL OUTPUT 1 EVENTS: "Disabled"
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-139
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.7.5 REMOTE DEVICES
a) REMOTE I/O OVERVIEW
Remote inputs and outputs, which are a means of exchanging information regarding the state of digital points between
remote devices, are provided in accordance with the Electric Power Research Institute’s (EPRI) UCA2 “Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (GOOSE)” specifications.
NOTE
The UCA2 specification requires that communications between devices be implemented on Ethernet communications facilities. For UR relays, Ethernet communications is provided only on the type 9C and 9D versions of the CPU module.
The sharing of digital point state information between GOOSE equipped relays is essentially an extension to FlexLogic™ to
allow distributed FlexLogic™ by making operands available to/from devices on a common communications network. In
addition to digital point states, GOOSE messages identify the originator of the message and provide other information
required by the communication specification. All devices listen to network messages and capture data from only those messages that have originated in selected devices.
GOOSE messages are designed to be short, high priority and with a high level of reliability. The GOOSE message structure
contains space for 128 bit pairs representing digital point state information. The UCA specification provides 32 “DNA” bit
pairs, which are status bits representing pre-defined events. All remaining bit pairs are “UserSt” bit pairs, which are status
bits representing user-definable events. The UR implementation provides 32 of the 96 available UserSt bit pairs.
The UCA2 specification includes features that are used to cope with the loss of communication between transmitting and
receiving devices. Each transmitting device will send a GOOSE message upon a successful power-up, when the state of
any included point changes, or after a specified interval (the “default update” time) if a change-of-state has not occurred.
The transmitting device also sends a “hold time” which is set to three times the programmed default time, which is required
by the receiving device.
5
Receiving devices are constantly monitoring the communications network for messages they require, as recognized by the
identification of the originating device carried in the message. Messages received from remote devices include the message “hold” time for the device. The receiving relay sets a timer assigned to the originating device to the “hold” time interval,
and if it has not received another message from this device at time-out, the remote device is declared to be non-communicating, so it will use the programmed default state for all points from that specific remote device. This mechanism allows a
receiving device to fail to detect a single transmission from a remote device which is sending messages at the slowest possible rate, as set by its “default update” timer, without reverting to use of the programmed default states. If a message is
received from a remote device before the “hold” time expires, all points for that device are updated to the states contained
in the message and the hold timer is restarted. The status of a remote device, where ‘Offline’ indicates ‘non-communicating’, can be displayed.
The GOOSE facility provides for 32 remote inputs and 64 remote outputs.
b) LOCAL DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR TRANSMITTING GOOSE MESSAGES
In a UR relay, the device ID that identifies the originator of the message is programmed in the SETTINGS
INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME setting.
PRODUCT SETUP
c) REMOTE DEVICES: ID OF DEVICE FOR RECEIVING GOOSE MESSAGES
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE DEVICE
1
REMOTE DEVICES
REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
REMOTE DEVICE 1 ID:
Remote Device 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
Sixteen Remote Devices, numbered from 1 to 16, can be selected for setting purposes. A receiving relay must be programmed to capture messages from only those originating remote devices of interest. This setting is used to select specific
remote devices by entering (bottom row) the exact identification (ID) assigned to those devices.
5-140
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5.7.6 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT 1(32)
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE:
Remote Device 1
Range: 1 to 16 inclusive
REMOTE IN 1 BIT
PAIR: None
Range: None, DNA-1 to DNA-32, UserSt-1 to UserSt-32
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT
STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
REMOTE IN 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
MESSAGE
REMOTE INPUT 1
Remote Inputs which create FlexLogic™ operands at the receiving relay, are extracted from GOOSE messages originating
in remote devices. The relay provides 32 remote inputs, each of which can be selected from a list consisting of 64 selections: DNA-1 through DNA-32 and UserSt-1 through UserSt-32. The function of DNA inputs is defined in the UCA2 specifications and is presented in the UCA2 DNA Assignments table in the Remote Outputs section. The function of UserSt inputs
is defined by the user selection of the FlexLogic™ operand whose state is represented in the GOOSE message. A user
must program a DNA point from the appropriate FlexLogic™ operand.
Remote Input 1 must be programmed to replicate the logic state of a specific signal from a specific remote device for local
use. This programming is performed via the three settings shown above.
selects the number (1 to 16) of the remote device which originates the required signal, as previously
assigned to the remote device via the setting REMOTE DEVICE NN ID (see the Remote Devices section). REMOTE IN 1 BIT PAIR
selects the specific bits of the GOOSE message required.
REMOTE IN 1 DEVICE
The REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE setting selects the logic state for this point if the local relay has just completed startup or
the remote device sending the point is declared to be non-communicating. The following choices are available:
•
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
•
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
•
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 1.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
•
Setting REMOTE IN 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest state is
not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to Logic 0.
When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
For additional information on the GOOSE specification, refer to the Remote Devices section in this chapter
and to Appendix C: UCA/MMS Communications.
NOTE
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-141
5
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
5.7.7 REMOTE OUTPUTS
a) DNA BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
REMOTE OUTPUTS DNA BIT PAIRS
REMOTE OUPUTS DNA- 1(32) BIT PAIR
DNA- 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ Operand
DNA- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Remote Outputs (1 to 32) are FlexLogic™ operands inserted into GOOSE messages that are transmitted to remote
devices on a LAN. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The above operand setting represents a specific DNA function (as shown in the following table) to be transmitted.
Table 5–19: UCA DNA2 ASSIGNMENTS
DNA
5
DEFINITION
INTENDED FUNCTION
LOGIC 0
LOGIC 1
Close
1
OperDev
Trip
2
Lock Out
LockoutOff
LockoutOn
3
Initiate Reclosing
Initiate remote reclose sequence
InitRecloseOff
InitRecloseOn
4
Block Reclosing
Prevent/cancel remote reclose sequence
BlockOff
BlockOn
5
Breaker Failure Initiate
Initiate remote breaker failure scheme
BFIOff
BFIOn
6
Send Transfer Trip
Initiate remote trip operation
TxXfrTripOff
TxXfrTripOn
7
Receive Transfer Trip
Report receipt of remote transfer trip command
RxXfrTripOff
RxXfrTripOn
8
Send Perm
Report permissive affirmative
TxPermOff
TxPermOn
9
Receive Perm
Report receipt of permissive affirmative
RxPermOff
RxPermOn
10
Stop Perm
Override permissive affirmative
StopPermOff
StopPermOn
11
Send Block
Report block affirmative
TxBlockOff
TxBlockOn
12
Receive Block
Report receipt of block affirmative
RxBlockOff
RxBlockOn
13
Stop Block
Override block affirmative
StopBlockOff
StopBlockOn
14
BkrDS
Report breaker disconnect 3-phase state
Open
Closed
15
BkrPhsADS
Report breaker disconnect phase A state
Open
Closed
16
BkrPhsBDS
Report breaker disconnect phase B state
Open
Closed
17
BkrPhsCDS
Report breaker disconnect phase C state
Open
Closed
18
DiscSwDS
Open
Closed
19
Interlock DS
DSLockOff
DSLockOn
20
LineEndOpen
Report line open at local end
Open
Closed
21
Status
Report operating status of local GOOSE device
Offline
Available
22
Event
EventOff
EventOn
23
Fault Present
FaultOff
FaultOn
24
Sustained Arc
Report sustained arc
SustArcOff
SustArcOn
25
Downed Conductor
Report downed conductor
DownedOff
DownedOn
26
Sync Closing
SyncClsOff
SyncClsOn
27
Mode
Normal
Test
28→32
Reserved
Report mode status of local GOOSE device
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5-142
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
b) USERST BIT PAIRS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
UserSt- 1 BIT PAIR
MESSAGE
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt BIT PAIRS
REMOTE OUTPUTS UserSt- 1(32) BIT PAIR
UserSt- 1 OPERAND:
Off
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
UserSt- 1 EVENTS:
Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Remote Outputs 1 to 32 originate as GOOSE messages to be transmitted to remote devices. Each digital point in the message must be programmed to carry the state of a specific FlexLogic™ operand. The setting above is used to select the
operand which represents a specific UserSt function (as selected by the user) to be transmitted.
The following setting represents the time between sending GOOSE messages when there has been no change of state of
COMMUNICATIONS
UCA/MMS PROTOCOL setany selected digital point. This setting is located in the PRODUCT SETUP
tings menu.
DEFAULT GOOSE UPDATE
TIME: 60 s
Range: 1 to 60 s in steps of 1
For more information on GOOSE specifications, see the Remote I/O Overview in the Remote Devices section.
NOTE
5.7.8 RESETTING
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
RESETTING
RESETTING
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
RESET OPERAND:
Off
5
Some events can be programmed to latch the faceplate LED event indicators and the target message on the display. Once
set, the latching mechanism will hold all of the latched indicators or messages in the set state after the initiating condition
has cleared until a RESET command is received to return these latches (not including FlexLogic™ latches) to the reset
state. The RESET command can be sent from the faceplate Reset button, a remote device via a communications channel,
or any programmed operand.
When the RESET command is received by the relay, two FlexLogic™ operands are created. These operands, which are
stored as events, reset the latches if the initiating condition has cleared. The three sources of RESET commands each create the RESET OP FlexLogic™ operand. Each individual source of a RESET command also creates its individual operand
RESET OP (PUSHBUTTON), RESET OP (COMMS) or RESET OP (OPERAND) to identify the source of the command. The setting
shown above selects the operand that will create the RESET OP (OPERAND) operand.
5.7.9 DIRECT INPUTS/OUTPUTS
a) DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
DIRECT INPUT
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUT 1(32)
1
Range: 1 to 16
DIRECT INPUT 1
BIT NUMBER: 1
Range: 1 to 32
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
DEFAULT STATE: Off
Range: On, Off, Latest/On, Latest/Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
Range: Enabled, Disabled
MESSAGE
1
DIRECT INPUT
DEVICE ID: 1
These settings specify how the Direct Input information is processed. The DIRECT INPUT DEVICE ID represents the source of
this Direct Input. The specified Direct Input is driven by the device identified here.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-143
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
The DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER is the bit number to extract the state for this Direct Input. Direct Input x is driven by the bit
identified here as DIRECT INPUT 1 BIT NUMBER. This corresponds to the Direct Output Number of the sending device.
The DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE represents the state of the Direct Input when the associated Direct Device is offline. The
following choices are available:
•
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “On” value defaults the input to Logic 1.
•
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Off” value defaults the input to Logic 0.
•
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/On” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 1. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
•
Setting DIRECT INPUT 1 DEFAULT STATE to “Latest/Off” freezes the input in case of lost communications. If the latest
state is not known, such as after relay power-up but before the first communication exchange, the input will default to
Logic 0. When communication resumes, the input becomes fully operational.
b) DIRECT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
INPUTS/OUTPUTS
DIRECT OUTPUT
1
DIRECT OUTPUTS
DIRECT OUT
Off
MESSAGE
DIRECT OUTPUT 1(32)
1 OPERAND:
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
Range: Enabled, Disabled
DIRECT OUTPUT 1
EVENTS: Disabled
The DIR OUT 1 OPERAND is the FlexLogic™ operand that determines the state of this Direct Output.
5
c) APPLICATION EXAMPLES
The examples introduced in the Product Setup section for Direct I/Os are continued below to illustrate usage of the Direct
Inputs and Outputs.
Example 1: Extending I/O Capabilities of a C60 relay
Consider an application that requires additional quantities of digital inputs and/or output contacts and/or lines of programmable logic that exceed the capabilities of a single UR-series chassis. The problem is solved by adding an extra UR-series
IED, such as the C30, to satisfy the additional I/Os and programmable logic requirements. The two IEDs are connected via
single-channel digital communication cards as shown below.
TX1
UR IED 1
RX1
TX1
UR IED 2
RX1
Figure 5–77: INPUT/OUTPUT EXTENSION VIA DIRECT I/OS
Assume Contact Input 1 from UR IED 2 is to be used by UR IED 1. The following settings should be applied (Direct Input 5
and bit number 12 are used, as an example):
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID = “2”
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER = “12”
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 12 OPERAND
= “Cont Ip 1 On”
The Cont Ip 1 On operand of UR IED 2 is now available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 5 ON.
Example 2: Interlocking Busbar Protection
A simple interlocking busbar protection scheme can be accomplished by sending a blocking signal from downstream
devices, say 2, 3 and 4, to the upstream device that monitors a single incomer of the busbar, as shown in the figure below.
5-144
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
BLOCK
UR IED 4
UR IED 3
842712A1.CDR
Figure 5–78: SAMPLE INTERLOCKING BUSBAR PROTECTION SCHEME
Assume that Phase IOC1 is used by Devices 2, 3, and 4 to block Device 1. If not blocked, Device 1 would trip the bus upon
detecting a fault and applying a short coordination time delay.
The following settings should be applied (assume Bit 3 is used by all 3 devices to sent the blocking signal and Direct Inputs
7, 8, and 9 are used by the receiving device to monitor the three blocking signals):
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 3:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 4:
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "PHASE IOC1 OP"
UR IED 1:
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 7 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 7 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 8 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEVICE ID: "4"
DIRECT INPUT 9 BIT NUMBER: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 9 DEFAULT STATE: select
"On" for security, select "Off" for dependability
5
Now the three blocking signals are available in UR IED 1 as DIRECT INPUT 7 ON, DIRECT INPUT 8 ON, and DIRECT INPUT 9
ON. Upon losing communications or a device, the scheme is inclined to block (if any default state is set to “On”), or to trip
the bus on any overcurrent condition (all default states set to “Off”).
Example 2: Pilot-aided schemes
Consider a three-terminal line protection application shown in the figure below.
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
UR IED 3
842713A1.CDR
Figure 5–79: THREE-TERMINAL LINE APPLICATION
Assume the Hybrid Permissive Overreaching Transfer Trip (Hybrid POTT) scheme is applied using the architecture shown
below. The scheme output operand HYB POTT TX1 is used to key the permission.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-145
5.7 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
5 SETTINGS
TX1
RX1
UR IED 1
RX2
UR IED 2
RX1
TX1
TX2
RX1
UR IED 3
TX1
842714A1.CDR
Figure 5–80: SINGLE-CHANNEL OPEN-LOOP CONFIGURATION
In the above architecture, Devices 1 and 3 do not communicate directly. Therefore, Device 2 must act as a ‘bridge’. The following settings should be applied:
UR IED 1:
UR IED 3:
5
UR IED 2:
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "4" (effectively, this is a message from
IED 3)
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2" (this is a message from IED 2)
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "3" (effectively, this is a message from
IED 1)
DIRECT INPUT 5 DEVICE ID: "1"
DIRECT INPUT 5 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT INPUT 6 DEVICE ID: "3"
DIRECT INPUT 6 BIT NUMBER: "2"
DIRECT OUT 2 OPERAND: "HYB POTT TX1"
DIRECT OUT 3 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 5"
DIRECT OUT 4 OPERAND: "DIRECT INPUT 6"
(forward a message from 1 to 3)
(forward a message from 3 to 1)
Signal flow between the three IEDs is shown in the figure below:
UR IED 1
UR IED 2
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 4 = DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 3 = DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
UR IED 3
DIRECT INPUT 5
DIRECT INPUT 6
DIRECT OUT 2 = HYB POTT TX1
842717A1.CDR
Figure 5–81: SIGNAL FLOW FOR DIRECT I/O EXAMPLE 3
In three-terminal applications, both the remote terminals must grant permission to trip. Therefore, at each terminal, Direct
Inputs 5 and 6 should be ANDed in FlexLogic™ and the resulting operand configured as the permission to trip (HYB POTT
RX1 setting).
5-146
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5.8TRANSDUCER I/O
PATH: SETTINGS
5.8.1 DCMA INPUTS
TRANSDUCER I/O
DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUT H1
↓
↓
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT U8
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external transducers and convert these signals into a digital format for use as required. The relay will accept inputs in the range of –1 to +20 mA DC, suitable for use with most common
transducer output ranges; all inputs are assumed to be linear over the complete range. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3.
Before the dcmA input signal can be used, the value of the signal measured by the relay must be converted to the range
and quantity of the external transducer primary input parameter, such as DC voltage or temperature. The relay simplifies
this process by internally scaling the output from the external transducer and displaying the actual primary parameter.
dcmA input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels
with the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
a type 5F transducer module installed in slot M.
DCMA INPUT M1
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
DCMA INPUT M1 ID:
DCMA Ip 1
Range: up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT M1
UNITS: μA
Range: 6 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT M1
RANGE: 0 to -1 mA
Range: 0 to –1 mA, 0 to +1 mA, –1 to +1 mA, 0 to 5 mA,
0 to 10mA, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA
DCMA INPUT M1 MIN
VALUE:
0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT M1 MAX
VALUE:
0.000
Range: –9999.999 to +9999.999 in steps of 0.001
MESSAGE
DCMA INPUT M1
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If “Disabled”, no actual values are created for the channel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to each channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual value, along with the
programmed units associated with the parameter measured by the transducer, such as Volt, °C, MegaWatts, etc. This ID is
also used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. The
DCMA INPUT XX RANGE setting specifies the mA DC range of the transducer connected to the input channel.
The DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE and DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE settings are used to program the span of the transducer in
primary units. For example, a temperature transducer might have a span from 0 to 250°C; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX
MIN VALUE value is “0” and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX VALUE value is “250”. Another example would be a Watt transducer with
a span from –20 to +180 MW; in this case the DCMA INPUT XX MIN VALUE value would be “–20” and the DCMA INPUT XX MAX
VALUE value “180”. Intermediate values between the min and max values are scaled linearly.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-147
5
5.8 TRANSDUCER I/O
5 SETTINGS
5.8.2 RTD INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUT H1
↓
↓
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT U8
Hardware and software is provided to receive signals from external Resistance Temperature Detectors and convert these
signals into a digital format for use as required. These channels are intended to be connected to any of the RTD types in
common use. Specific hardware details are contained in Chapter 3.
RTD input channels are arranged in a manner similar to CT and VT channels. The user configures individual channels with
the settings shown here.
The channels are arranged in sub-modules of two channels, numbered from 1 through 8 from top to bottom. On power-up,
the relay will automatically generate configuration settings for every channel, based on the order code, in the same general
manner that is used for CTs and VTs. Each channel is assigned a slot letter followed by the row number, 1 through 8 inclusive, which is used as the channel number. The relay generates an actual value for each available input channel.
Settings are automatically generated for every channel available in the specific relay as shown below for the first channel of
a type 5C transducer module installed in slot M.
5
RTD INPUT M5
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
RTD INPUT M5 ID:
RTD Ip 1
Range: Up to 20 alphanumeric characters
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
RTD INPUT M5 TYPE:
100Ω Nickel
RTD INPUT M5
Range: 100Ω Nickel, 10Ω Copper, 100Ω Platinum,
120Ω Nickel
The function of the channel may be either “Enabled” or “Disabled.” If Disabled, there will not be an actual value created for
the channel. An alphanumeric “ID” is assigned to the channel; this ID will be included in the channel actual values. It is also
used to reference the channel as the input parameter to features designed to measure this type of parameter. Selecting the
type of RTD connected to the channel configures the channel.
Actions based on RTD overtemperature, such as trips or alarms, are done in conjunction with the FlexElements™ feature.
In FlexElements™, the operate level is scaled to a base of 100°C. For example, a trip level of 150°C is achieved by setting
the operate level at 1.5 pu. FlexElement™ operands are available to FlexLogic™ for further interlocking or to operate an
output contact directly.
5-148
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
5 SETTINGS
5.9 TESTING
5.9TESTING
PATH: SETTINGS
5.9.1 TEST MODE
TESTING
SETTINGS
TESTING
MESSAGE
TEST MODE
TEST MODE
FUNCTION: Disabled
Range: Disabled, Enabled
TEST MODE INITIATE:
On
Range: FlexLogic™ operand
The relay provides test settings to verify that functionality using simulated conditions for contact inputs and outputs. The
Test Mode is indicated on the relay faceplate by a flashing Test Mode LED indicator.
To initiate the Test mode, the TEST MODE FUNCTION setting must be “Enabled” and the TEST MODE INITIATE setting must be
set to Logic 1. In particular:
•
To initiate Test Mode through relay settings, set TEST MODE INITIATE to “On”. The Test Mode starts when the TEST MODE
FUNCTION setting is changed from “Disabled” to “Enabled”.
•
To initiate Test Mode through a user-programmable condition, such as FlexLogic™ operand (pushbutton, digital input,
communication-based input, or a combination of these), set TEST MODE FUNCTION to “Enabled” and set TEST MODE INITIATE to the desired operand. The Test Mode starts when the selected operand assumes a Logic 1 state.
When in Test Mode, the C60 remains fully operational, allowing for various testing procedures. In particular, the protection
and control elements, FlexLogic™, and communication-based inputs and outputs function normally.
The only difference between the normal operation and the Test Mode is the behavior of the input and output contacts. The
former can be forced to report as open or closed or remain fully operational; the latter can be forced to open, close, freeze,
or remain fully operational. The response of the digital input and output contacts to the Test Mode is programmed individually for each input and output using the Force Contact Inputs and Force Contact Outputs test functions described in the following sections.
5.9.2 FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
TESTING
FORCE CONTACT
INPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
FORCE Cont Ip 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
FORCE Cont Ip 2
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
↓
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Ip xx
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Open, Closed
The relay digital inputs (contact inputs) could be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode in the following ways:
•
If set to “Disabled”, the input remains fully operational. It is controlled by the voltage across its input terminals and can
be turned on and off by external circuitry. This value should be selected if a given input must be operational during the
test. This includes, for example, an input initiating the test, or being a part of a user pre-programmed test sequence.
•
If set to “Open”, the input is forced to report as opened (Logic 0) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
•
If set to “Closed”, the input is forced to report as closed (Logic 1) for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of
the voltage across the input terminals.
The Force Contact Inputs feature provides a method of performing checks on the function of all contact inputs. Once
enabled, the relay is placed into Test Mode, allowing this feature to override the normal function of contact inputs. The Test
Mode LED will be On, indicating that the relay is in Test Mode. The state of each contact input may be programmed as “Disabled”, “Open”, or “Closed”. All contact input operations return to normal when all settings for this feature are disabled.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
5-149
5
5.9 TESTING
5 SETTINGS
5.9.3 FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: SETTINGS
TESTING
FORCE CONTACT
OUTPUTS
MESSAGE
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS
FORCE Cont Op 1
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
FORCE Cont Op 2
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
↓
MESSAGE
FORCE Cont Op xx
:Disabled
Range: Disabled, Energized, De-energized, Freeze
The relay contact outputs can be pre-programmed to respond to the Test Mode.
If set to “Disabled”, the contact output remains fully operational. If operates when its control operand is Logic 1 and will
resets when its control operand is Logic 0. If set to “Energize”, the output will close and remain closed for the entire duration
of the Test Mode, regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “De-energize”,
the output will open and remain opened for the entire duration of the Test Mode regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact. If set to “Freeze”, the output retains its position from before entering the Test Mode,
regardless of the status of the operand configured to control the output contact.
These settings are applied two ways. First, external circuits may be tested by energizing or de-energizing contacts. Second, by controlling the output contact state, relay logic may be tested and undesirable effects on external circuits avoided.
Example 1: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1
5
The Test Mode should be initiated from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1. The pushbutton will be programmed as
“Latched” (pushbutton pressed to initiate the test, and pressed again to terminate the test). During the test, Digital Input 1
should remain operational, Digital Inputs 2 and 3 should open, and Digital Input 4 should close. Also, Contact Output 1
should freeze, Contact Output 2 should open, Contact Output 3 should close, and Contact Output 4 should remain fully
operational. The required settings are shown below.
To enable User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS
TEST MODE menu:
TESTING
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
“Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “PUSHBUTTON 1 ON”
Make the following changes to configure the Contact I/Os. In the SETTINGS
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS menus, set:
TESTING
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS
and
FORCE Cont Ip 1: “Disabled”, FORCE Cont Ip 2: “Open”, FORCE Cont Ip 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Ip 4: “Closed”
FORCE Cont Op 1: “Freeze”, FORCE Cont Op 2: “De-energized”, FORCE Cont Op 3: “Open”, and FORCE Cont Op 4: “Disabled”
Example 2: Initiating a Test from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or through Remote Input 1
The Test should be initiated locally from User-Programmable Pushbutton 1 or remotely through Remote Input 1. Both the
pushbutton and the remote input will be programmed as “Latched”. The required settings are shown below.
Write the following FlexLogic™ equation (EnerVista UR Setup example shown):
USER-PROGRAMMABLE
Set the User Programmable Pushbutton as latching by changing SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
USER PUSHBUTTON 1
PUSHBUTTON 1 FUNCTION to “Latched”. To enable either Pushbutton 1 or Remote
Input 1 to initiate the Test mode, make the following changes in the SETTINGS
TESTING
TEST MODE menu:
PUSHBUTTONS
TEST MODE FUNCTION:
5-150
“Enabled” and TEST MODE INITIATE: “VO1”
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.1 OVERVIEW
6 ACTUAL VALUES 6.1OVERVIEW
ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
6.1.1 ACTUAL VALUES MAIN MENU
CONTACT INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
AUTORECLOSE
See page 6-3.
See page 6-3.
See page 6-4.
See page 6-4.
See page 6-4.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
See page 6-4.
REMOTE DEVICES
STATISTICS
See page 6-5.
DIGITAL COUNTERS
SELECTOR SWITCHES
FLEX STATES
ETHERNET
DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT DEVICES
STATUS
ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
See page 6-3.
SOURCE SRC 1
See page 6-5.
See page 6-5.
See page 6-5.
6
See page 6-6.
See page 6-6.
See page 6-7.
See page 6-11.
SOURCE SRC 2
SOURCE SRC 3
SOURCE SRC 4
SYNCHROCHECK
TRACKING FREQUENCY
FLEXELEMENTS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
See page 6-14.
See page 6-15.
See page 6-15.
6-1
6.1 OVERVIEW
ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
SENSITIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER
See page 6-15.
TRANSDUCER I/O
DCMA INPUTS
See page 6-16.
TRANSDUCER I/O
RTD INPUTS
See page 6-16.
FAULT REPORTS
EVENT RECORDS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
DATA LOGGER
MAINTENANCE
ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFO
MODEL INFORMATION
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
See page 6-17.
See page 6-19.
See page 6-19.
See page 6-19.
See page 6-20.
See page 6-21.
See page 6-21.
6
6-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2STATUS
For status reporting, ‘On’ represents Logic 1 and ‘Off’ represents Logic 0.
NOTE
6.2.1 CONTACT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
Cont Ip 1
Off
↓
↓
MESSAGE
Cont Ip xx
Off
The present status of the contact inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
input. For example, ‘Cont Ip 1’ refers to the contact input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the contact input.
6.2.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Virt Ip 1
Off
↓
↓
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32
Off
The present status of the 32 virtual inputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
input. For example, ‘Virt Ip 1’ refers to the virtual input in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the display indicates the logic state of the virtual input.
6.2.3 REMOTE INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
1
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT 32
STATUS: Off
Range: On, Off
REMOTE INPUT
STATUS: Off
↓
↓
MESSAGE
The present state of the 32 remote inputs is shown here.
The state displayed will be that of the remote point unless the remote device has been established to be “Offline” in which
case the value shown is the programmed default state for the remote input.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-3
6
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.4 CONTACT OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
CONTACT OUTPUTS
Cont Op 1
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Cont Op xx
Off
The present state of the contact outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the contact
output. For example, ‘Cont Op 1’ refers to the contact output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of
the display indicates the logic state of the contact output.
For Form-A outputs, the state of the voltage(V) and/or current(I) detectors will show as: Off, VOff, IOff, On,
VOn, and/or IOn. For Form-C outputs, the state will show as Off or On.
NOTE
6.2.5 VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
Virt Op 1
Off
↓
MESSAGE
Virt Op 64
Off
The present state of up to 64 virtual outputs is shown here. The first line of a message display indicates the ID of the virtual
output. For example, ‘Virt Op 1’ refers to the virtual output in terms of the default name-array index. The second line of the
display indicates the logic state of the virtual output, as calculated by the FlexLogic™ equation for that output.
6
6.2.6 AUTORECLOSE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE
AUTORECLOSE
SHOT COUNT:
Range: 0, 1, 2
0
The automatic reclosure shot count is shown here.
6.2.7 REMOTE DEVICES
a) STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
REMOTE DEVICES
STATUS
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICES STATUS
All REMOTE DEVICES
ONLINE: No
Range: Yes, No
REMOTE DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
↓
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
Range: Online, Offline
The present state of up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here. The ALL REMOTE DEVICES ONLINE message indicates whether or not all programmed Remote Devices are online. If the corresponding state is "No", then at least one
required Remote Device is not online.
6-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
b) STATISTICS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
REMOTE DEVICE
STATUS
1
MESSAGE
REMOTE DEVICES STATISTICS
REMOTE DEVICE
StNum:
1
REMOTE DEVICE
SqNum:
1
REMOTE DEVICE 1(16)
0
0
Statistical data (2 types) for up to 16 programmed Remote Devices is shown here.
The StNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented whenever a change of state of at
least one DNA or UserSt bit occurs. The SqNum number is obtained from the indicated Remote Device and is incremented
whenever a GOOSE message is sent. This number will rollover to zero when a count of 4,294,967,295 is incremented.
6.2.8 DIGITAL COUNTERS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
DIGITAL COUNTERS
Counter 1
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
DIGITAL COUNTERS
DIGITAL COUNTERS Counter 1(8)
Counter 1
ACCUM:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
0
Counter 1
FROZEN:
YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
Counter 1
MICROS:
0
The present status of the 8 digital counters is shown here. The status of each counter, with the user-defined counter name,
includes the accumulated and frozen counts (the count units label will also appear). Also included, is the date/time stamp
for the frozen count. The Counter n MICROS value refers to the microsecond portion of the time stamp.
6.2.9 SELECTOR SWITCHES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
SELECTOR SWITCHES
MESSAGE
SELECTOR SWITCHES
SELECTOR SWITCH 1
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
SELECTOR SWITCH 2
POSITION: 0/7
Range: Current Position / 7
The display shows both the current position and the full range. The current position only (an integer from 0 through 7) is the
actual value.
6.2.10 FLEX STATES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
FLEX STATES
FLEX STATES
PARAM
Off
1: Off
Range: Off, On
↓
MESSAGE
PARAM 256: Off
Off
Range: Off, On
There are 256 FlexState bits available. The second line value indicates the state of the given FlexState bit.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-5
6
6.2 STATUS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2.11 ETHERNET
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
ETHERNET
MESSAGE
ETHERNET
ETHERNET PRI LINK
STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
ETHERNET SEC LINK
STATUS: OK
Range: Fail, OK
6.2.12 DIRECT INPUTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
DIRECT INPUTS
DIRECT INPUTS
AVG MSG RETURN
TIME CH1: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH1: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT
CH1: 0
MESSAGE
AVG MSG RETURN
TIME CH2: 0 ms
MESSAGE
UNRETURNED MSG
COUNT CH2: 0
MESSAGE
CRC FAIL COUNT
CH2: 0
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 1:
On
6
↓
MESSAGE
DIRECT INPUT 3296:
On
The AVERAGE MSG RETURN TIME is the time taken for Direct Output messages to return to the sender in a Direct I/O ring
configuration (this value is not applicable for non-ring configurations). This is a rolling average calculated for the last 10
messages. There are two return times for dual-channel communications modules.
The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the Direct Output messages that do not
make the trip around the communications ring. The CRC FAIL COUNT values (one per communications channel) count the
Direct Output messages that have been received but fail the CRC check. High values for either of these counts may indicate on a problem with wiring, the communication channel, or the relay(s). The UNRETURNED MSG COUNT and CRC FAIL
COUNT values can be cleared using the CLEAR DIRECT I/O COUNTERS command.
The DIRECT INPUT x values represent the state of the x-th Direct Input.
6-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.2 STATUS
6.2.13 DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES
STATUS
DIRECT DEVICES STATUS
DIRECT DEVICE 1
STATUS: Offline
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 2
STATUS: Offline
↓
MESSAGE
DIRECT DEVICE 16
STATUS: Offline
These actual values represent the state of direct devices 1 through 16.
6
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-7
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3METERING
6.3.1 METERING CONVENTIONS
a) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING POWER AND ENERGY
The following figure illustrates the conventions established for use in UR-series relays.
PER IEEE CONVENTIONS
Generator
PARAMETERS AS SEEN
BY THE UR RELAY
G
Voltage
+Q
VCG
IC
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
PF = Lag
VARS = Positive
IA
PF = Lag
-P
VAG
Current
IB
+P
IA
PF = Lag
PF = Lead
UR RELAY
VBG
M
LOAD
Inductive
Resistive
-Q
-
1
S=VI
Generator
G
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
WATTS = Positive
PF = Lead
-P
VAG
+P
IA
Current
PF = Lag
IB
UR RELAY
-Q
S=VI
-
Resistive
Inductive
Resistive
M
LOAD
PF = Lead
VBG
LOAD
6
PF = Lag
IA
IC
VARS = Negative
2
+Q
VCG
Voltage
PF = Lead
IB
IA
WATTS = Negative
VAG
VARS = Negative
PF = Lag
-P
PF = Lag
+P
IA
PF = Lag
IC
Current
PF = Lead
VBG
-Q
UR RELAY
G
-
Generator
S=VI
3
Resistive
LOAD
+Q
VCG
Voltage
IB
PF = Lead
WATTS = Negative
VARS = Positive
-P
VAG
PF = Lead
IA
G
+P
IC
PF = Lag
Current
VBG
UR RELAY
PF = Lag
IA
-Q
827239AC.CDR
-
Generator
PF = Lead
4
S=VI
Figure 6–1: FLOW DIRECTION OF SIGNED VALUES FOR WATTS AND VARS
6-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
b) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING PHASE ANGLES
All phasors calculated by UR-series relays and used for protection, control and metering functions are rotating phasors that
maintain the correct phase angle relationships with each other at all times.
For display and oscillography purposes, all phasor angles in a given relay are referred to an AC input channel pre-selected
by the SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
POWER SYSTEM
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE setting. This setting
defines a particular Source to be used as the reference.
The relay will first determine if any “Phase VT” bank is indicated in the Source. If it is, voltage channel VA of that bank is
used as the angle reference. Otherwise, the relay determines if any “Aux VT” bank is indicated; if it is, the auxiliary voltage
channel of that bank is used as the angle reference. If neither of the two conditions is satisfied, then two more steps of this
hierarchical procedure to determine the reference signal include “Phase CT” bank and “Ground CT” bank.
If the AC signal pre-selected by the relay upon configuration is not measurable, the phase angles are not referenced. The
phase angles are assigned as positive in the leading direction, and are presented as negative in the lagging direction, to
more closely align with power system metering conventions. This is illustrated below.
-270o
-225o
-315o
positive
angle
direction
-180o
UR phase angle
reference
-135o
0o
-45o
-90o
6
827845A1.CDR
Figure 6–2: UR PHASE ANGLE MEASUREMENT CONVENTION
c) UR CONVENTION FOR MEASURING SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
The UR-series of relays calculate voltage symmetrical components for the power system phase A line-to-neutral voltage,
and symmetrical components of the currents for the power system phase A current. Owing to the above definition, phase
angle relations between the symmetrical currents and voltages stay the same irrespective of the connection of instrument
transformers. This is important for setting directional protection elements that use symmetrical voltages.
For display and oscillography purposes the phase angles of symmetrical components are referenced to a common reference as described in the previous sub-section.
WYE-Connected Instrument Transformers:
•
ABC phase rotation:
•
ACB phase rotation:
1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
1
V_0 = --- ( V AG + V BG + V CG )
3
1
2
V_1 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + a V BG + aV CG )
3
1
2
V_2 = --- ( V AG + aV BG + a V CG )
3
The above equations apply to currents as well.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-9
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
DELTA-Connected Instrument Transformers:
•
ABC phase rotation:
•
ACB phase rotation:
V_0 = N/A
1 ∠30°
2
V_1 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
1 ∠– 30 °
2
V_2 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
V_0 = N/A
1 ∠– 30 °
2
V_1 = -------------------- ( V AB + aV BC + a V CA )
3 3
1
∠
30°
2
V_2 = ----------------- ( V AB + a V BC + aV CA )
3 3
The zero-sequence voltage is not measurable under the Delta connection of instrument transformers and is defaulted to
zero. The table below shows an example of symmetrical components calculations for the ABC phase rotation.
Table 6–1: SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS CALCULATION EXAMPLE
SYSTEM VOLTAGES, SEC. V *
UR INPUTS, SEC. V
F5AC
F6AC
F7AC
V0
V1
V2
85.4
∠–241°
WYE
13.9
∠0°
76.2
∠–125°
79.7
∠–250°
19.5
∠–192°
56.5
∠–7°
23.3
∠–187°
85.4
∠–288°
DELTA
84.9
∠0°
138.3
∠–144°
85.4
∠–288°
N/A
56.5
∠–54°
23.3
∠–234°
VBG
VCG
VAB
VBC
VCA
13.9
∠0°
76.2
∠–125°
79.7
∠–250°
84.9
∠–313°
138.3
∠–97°
84.9
∠0°
138.3
∠–144°
UNKNOWN (only V1 and V2
can be determined)
*
VT
CONN.
VAG
SYMM. COMP, SEC. V
The power system voltages are phase-referenced – for simplicity – to VAG and VAB, respectively. This, however, is a
relative matter. It is important to remember that the UR displays are always referenced as specified under SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
POWER SYSTEM
FREQUENCY AND PHASE REFERENCE.
The example above is illustrated in the following figure.
A
UR phase angle
reference
6
SYMMETRICAL
COMPONENTS
UR phase angle
reference
SYSTEM VOLTAGES
WYE VTs
1
C
B
2
0
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
A
DELTA VTs
1
U
re R ph
fe a
re se
nc a
e ng
le
C
B
2
827844A1.CDR
Figure 6–3: MEASUREMENT CONVENTION FOR SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS
6-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
6.3.2 SOURCES
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
SOURCE SRC 1
Because energy values are accumulated, these values should be recorded and then reset immediately
prior to changing CT or VT characteristics.
NOTE
PHASE CURRENT
SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ia: 0.000
b: 0.000 c: 0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ia:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ib:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Ic:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS In:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ia:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ib:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ic:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR In:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ I0:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ I1:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ I2:
0.000 A
0.0°
GROUND CURRENT
SRC 1
SRC 1 RMS Ig:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Ig:
0.000 A
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Igd:
0.000 A
0.0°
PHASE VOLTAGE
SRC 1
GE Multilin
6
SRC 1 RMS Vag:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vbg:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vcg:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vag:
0.000 V
0.0°
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-11
6.3 METERING
6
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbg:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vcg:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vab:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vbc:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 RMS Vca:
0.000 V
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vab:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vbc:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 PHASOR Vca:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 ZERO SEQ V0:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS SEQ V1:
0.000 V
0.0°
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG SEQ V2:
0.000 V
0.0°
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE
SRC 1
MESSAGE
POWER
SRC 1
6-12
SRC 1 RMS Vx:
0.000 V
SRC 1 PHASOR Vx:
0.000 V
0.0°
SRC 1 REAL POWER
3φ: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER
φa: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER
φb: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REAL POWER
φc: 0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
3φ: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
φa: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
φb: 0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 REACTIVE PWR
φc: 0.000 var
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
3φ: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
φa: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
φb: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 APPARENT PWR
φc: 0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1
3φ:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
φa:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
φb:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
MESSAGE
SRC 1
φc:
POWER FACTOR
1.000
ENERGY
SRC 1
SRC 1 POS WATTHOUR:
0.000 Wh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG WATTHOUR:
0.000 Wh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 POS VARHOUR:
0.000 varh
MESSAGE
SRC 1 NEG VARHOUR:
0.000 varh
DEMAND
SRC 1
GE Multilin
6.3 METERING
6
SRC 1 DMD IA:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IA MAX:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IA DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB MAX:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IB DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC MAX:
0.000 A
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD IC DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-13
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W:
0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W MAX:
0.000 W
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD W DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR:
0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR MAX:
0.000 var
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VAR DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA:
0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA MAX:
0.000 VA
MESSAGE
SRC 1 DMD VA DATE:
2001/07/31 16:30:07
FREQUENCY
SRC 1
SRC 1 FREQUENCY:
0.00 Hz
Four identical Source menus are available. The "SRC 1" text will be replaced by whatever name was programmed by the
user for the associated source (see SETTINGS
SYSTEM SETUP
SIGNAL SOURCES).
6
The relay measures (absolute values only) SOURCE DEMAND on each phase and average three phase demand for real,
reactive, and apparent power. These parameters can be monitored to reduce supplier demand penalties or for statistical
metering purposes. Demand calculations are based on the measurement type selected in the SETTINGS PRODUCT SETUP
DEMAND menu. For each quantity, the relay displays the demand over the most recent demand time interval, the maximum demand since the last maximum demand reset, and the time and date stamp of this maximum demand value. Maximum demand quantities can be reset to zero with the CLEAR RECORDS
CLEAR DEMAND RECORDS command.
is measured via software-implemented zero-crossing detection of an AC signal. The signal is either a
Clarke transformation of three-phase voltages or currents, auxiliary voltage, or ground current as per source configuration
POWER SYSTEM settings). The signal used for frequency estimation is low-pass filtered. The
(see the SYSTEM SETUP
final frequency measurement is passed through a validation filter that eliminates false readings due to signal distortions and
transients.
SOURCE FREQUENCY
6.3.3 SYNCHROCHECK
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
SYNCHROCHECK 1
SYNCHROCHECK
SYNCHROCHECK 1(2)
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
VOLT: 0.000 V
MESSAGE
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
PHASE:
0.0°
MESSAGE
SYNCHROCHECK 1 DELTA
FREQ:
0.00 Hz
The Actual Values menu for Synchrocheck 2 is identical to that of Synchrocheck 1. If a Synchrocheck function setting is set
to "Disabled", the corresponding actual values menu item will not be displayed.
6-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3 METERING
6.3.4 TRACKING FREQUENCY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY
TRACKING FREQUENCY:
60.00 Hz
The tracking frequency is displayed here. The frequency is tracked based on configuration of the reference source. The
TRACKING FREQUENCY is based upon positive sequence current phasors from all line terminals and is synchronously
adjusted at all terminals. If currents are below 0.125 pu, then the NOMINAL FREQUENCY is used.
6.3.5 FLEXELEMENTS™
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
FLEXELEMENT 1
FLEXELEMENTS
FLEXELEMENT 1(8)
FLEXELEMENT 1
OpSig: 0.000 pu
The operating signals for the FlexElements are displayed in pu values using the following definitions of the base units.
Table 6–2: FLEXELEMENT™ BASE UNITS
BREAKER ARCING AMPS
(Brk X Arc Amp A, B, and C)
BASE = 2000 kA2 × cycle
dcmA
BASE = maximum value of the DCMA INPUT MAX setting for the two transducers configured
under the +IN and –IN inputs.
FREQUENCY
fBASE = 1 Hz
PHASE ANGLE
ϕBASE = 360 degrees (see the UR angle referencing convention)
POWER FACTOR
PFBASE = 1.00
RTDs
BASE = 100°C
SENSITIVE DIR POWER
(Sns Dir Power)
PBASE = maximum value of 3 × VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs of the sources
configured for the Sensitive Power Directional element(s).
SOURCE CURRENT
IBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE ENERGY
(SRC X Positive and Negative
Watthours); (SRC X Positive and
Negative Varhours)
EBASE = 10000 MWh or MVAh, respectively
SOURCE POWER
PBASE = maximum value of VBASE × IBASE for the +IN and –IN inputs
SOURCE VOLTAGE
VBASE = maximum nominal primary RMS value of the +IN and –IN inputs
SYNCHROCHECK
(Max Delta Volts)
VBASE = maximum primary RMS value of all the sources related to the +IN and –IN inputs
6
6.3.6 SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
SENSITIVE
DIRECTIONAL POWER
MESSAGE
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
DIRECTIONAL POWER 1
3Φ: 0.000 W
DIRECTIONAL POWER 2
3Φ: 0.000 W
The effective operating quantities of the Sensitive Directional Power elements are displayed here. The display may be useful to calibrate the feature by compensating the angular errors of the CTs and VTs with the use of the RCA and CALIBRATION settings.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-15
6.3 METERING
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.3.7 TRANSDUCER I/O
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
METERING
DCMA INPUT xx
TRANSDUCER I/O DCMA INPUTS
DCMA INPUT xx
DCMA INPUT xx
0.000 mA
Actual values for each dcmA input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel “ID”
and the bottom line as the value followed by the programmed units.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RTD INPUT xx
METERING
TRANSDUCER I/O RTD INPUTS
RTD INPUT xx
RTD INPUT xx
-50 °C
Actual values for each RTD input channel that is Enabled are displayed with the top line as the programmed Channel “ID”
and the bottom line as the value.
6
6-16
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS
6.4RECORDS
6.4.1 FAULT REPORTS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
FAULT REPORTS
NO FAULTS TO REPORT
or
FAULT REPORT #
FAULT #
2000/08/11
Range: YYYY/MM/DD
DATE:
FAULT #
TIME:
00:00:00.000000
Range: HH:MM:SS.ssssss
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
FAULT #
ABG
TYPE:
Range: where applicable; not seen if the source VTs
are in the "Delta" configuration
MESSAGE
FAULT #
00.0 km
LOCATION
Range: where applicable; not seen if the source VTs
are in the "Delta" configuration
FAULT #
SHOT: 0
RECLOSE
Range: where applicable
MESSAGE
The latest 10 fault reports can be stored. The most recent fault location calculation (when applicable) is displayed in this
menu, along with the date and time stamp of the event which triggered the calculation. See the SETTINGS
PRODUCT
SETUP
FAULT REPORT menu for assigning the Source and Trigger for fault calculations. Refer to the COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing fault reports.
Fault Type determination is required for calculation of Fault Location – the algorithm uses the angle between the negative
and positive sequence components of the relay currents. To improve accuracy and speed of operation, the fault components of the currents are used, i.e., the pre-fault phasors are subtracted from the measured current phasors. In addition to
the angle relationships, certain extra checks are performed on magnitudes of the negative and zero sequence currents.
The single-ended fault location method assumes that the fault components of the currents supplied from the local (A) and
remote (B) systems are in phase. The figure below shows an equivalent system for fault location.
Local
Bus
ZA
EA
IA
distance to fault
mZ
(1 – m)Z
VF
VA
Remote
Bus
RF
IB
ZB
VB
EB
Figure 6–4: EQUIVALENT SYSTEM FOR FAULT LOCATION
The following equations hold true for this equivalent system.
VA = m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA + RF ⋅ ( IA + IB )
where:
(EQ 6.1)
m = sought pu distance to fault, Z = positive sequence impedance of the line.
The currents from the local and remote systems can be parted between their fault (F) and pre-fault load (pre) components:
I A = I AF + I Apre
(EQ 6.2)
I B = I BF – I Apre
(EQ 6.3)
and neglecting shunt parameters of the line:
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-17
6
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
Inserting Equations 6.2 and 6.3 into Equation 6.1 and solving for the fault resistance yields:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
R F = ----------------------------------I BF⎞
I AF ⋅ ⎛ 1 + ------⎝
I ⎠
(EQ 6.4)
AF
Assuming the fault components of the currents, IAF and IBF are in phase, and observing that the fault resistance, as impedance, does not have any imaginary part gives:
VA – m ⋅ Z ⋅ IA
Im ⎛⎝ -----------------------------------⎞⎠ = 0
I AF
(EQ 6.5)
where: Im() represents the imaginary part of a complex number. Equation 6.5 solved for the unknown m creates the following fault location algorithm:
Im ( V A ⋅ I AF∗ )
m = --------------------------------------Im ( Z ⋅ I A ⋅ I AF∗ )
(EQ 6.6)
I AF = I A – I Apre
(EQ 6.7)
where: * denotes the complex conjugate and
Depending on the fault type, appropriate voltage and current signals are selected from the phase quantities before applying
Equations 6.6 and 6.7 (the superscripts denote phases, the subscripts denote stations):
6
A
I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
A
B
I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
C
I A = I A + K 0 ⋅ I 0A
•
For AG faults: V A = V A ,
•
For BG faults: V A = V A ,
•
For CG faults: V A = V A ,
•
For AB and ABG faults: V A = V A – V A ,
•
For BC and BCG faults: V A = V A – V A ,
•
For CA and CAG faults: V A = V A – V A , I A = I A – I A
where K0 is the zero sequence compensation factor (for the first six equations above)
•
For ABC faults, all three AB, BC, and CA loops are analyzed and the final result is selected based upon consistency of
the results
B
BC
A
B
B
C
C
A
A
B
B
C
C
A
IA = IA – IA
IA = IA – IA
The element calculates the distance to the fault (with m in miles or kilometers) and the phases involved in the fault.
SETTING
FAULT REPORT
TRIG:
Off=0
SETTING
AND
FAULT REPORT
SOURCE:
SRC X 50DD OP
IA
IB
IC
3I_0
RUN
ACTUAL VALUES
0
FAULT REPORT #
1 SEC
DATE
FAULT
LOCATOR
TIME
FAULT TYPE
FAULT LOCATION
FAULT# RECLOSE SHOT
VA
VB
VC
SHOT # FROM
AUTO RECLOSURE
827094A1.CDR
Figure 6–5: FAULT LOCATOR SCHEME
NOTE
6-18
Since the Fault Locator algorithm is based on the single-end measurement method, in 3-terminal configuration the estimation of fault location may not be correct at all 3 terminals especially if fault occurs behind
the line's tap respective to the given relay.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4 RECORDS
6.4.2 EVENT RECORDS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT RECORDS
EVENT: XXXX
RESET OP(PUSHBUTTON)
↓
MESSAGE
EVENT: 3
POWER ON
EVENT 3
DATE: 2000/07/14
MESSAGE
EVENT: 2
POWER OFF
EVENT 3
TIME: 14:53:00.03405
MESSAGE
EVENT: 1
EVENTS CLEARED
Date and Time Stamps
The Event Records menu shows the contextual data associated with up to the last 1024 events, listed in chronological
order from most recent to oldest. If all 1024 event records have been filled, the oldest record will be removed as a new
record is added. Each event record shows the event identifier/sequence number, cause, and date/time stamp associated
with the event trigger. Refer to the COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing event records.
6.4.3 OSCILLOGRAPHY
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
OSCILLOGRAPHY
OSCILLOGRAPHY
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
MESSAGE
NUMBER OF TRIGGERS:
0
MESSAGE
AVAILABLE RECORDS:
0
MESSAGE
CYCLES PER RECORD:
0.0
MESSAGE
LAST CLEARED DATE:
2000/07/14 15:40:16
Range: No, Yes
6
This menu allows the user to view the number of triggers involved and number of oscillography traces available. The
‘cycles per record’ value is calculated to account for the fixed amount of data storage for oscillography. See the Oscillography section of Chapter 5 for further details.
A trigger can be forced here at any time by setting "Yes" to the FORCE TRIGGER? command. Refer to the COMMANDS
menu for clearing the oscillography records.
CLEAR RECORDS
6.4.4 DATA LOGGER
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
DATA LOGGER
DATA LOGGER
OLDEST SAMPLE TIME:
2000/01/14 13:45:51
MESSAGE
NEWEST SAMPLE TIME:
2000/01/14 15:21:19
The OLDEST SAMPLE TIME is the time at which the oldest available samples were taken. It will be static until the log gets full,
at which time it will start counting at the defined sampling rate. The NEWEST SAMPLE TIME is the time the most recent samples were taken. It counts up at the defined sampling rate. If Data Logger channels are defined, then both values are static.
Refer to the COMMANDS
GE Multilin
CLEAR RECORDS
menu for clearing data logger records.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-19
6.4 RECORDS
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.4.5 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
RECORDS
MAINTENANCE
BREAKER 1(2)
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φA:
0.00 kA2-cyc
BREAKER 1
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φB:
0.00 kA2-cyc
MESSAGE
BKR 1 ARCING AMP φC:
0.00 kA2-cyc
There is an identical Actual Value menu for each of the 2 Breakers. The BKR 1 ARCING AMP values are in units of kA2CLEAR RECORDS menu for clearing breaker arcing current records.
cycles. Refer to the COMMANDS
6
6-20
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6.5PRODUCT INFORMATION
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFO
MODEL INFORMATION
6.5.1 MODEL INFORMATION
MODEL INFORMATION
ORDER CODE LINE 1:
C60-A00-HCH-F8A-H6A
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
MESSAGE
Example code shown
ORDER CODE LINE 2:
ORDER CODE LINE 3:
ORDER CODE LINE 4:
SERIAL NUMBER:
MESSAGE
ETHERNET MAC ADDRESS
000000000000
MESSAGE
MANUFACTURING DATE:
0
MESSAGE
OPERATING TIME:
0:00:00
Range: YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS
The product order code, serial number, Ethernet MAC address, date/time of manufacture, and operating time are shown
here.
6.5.2 FIRMWARE REVISIONS
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES
PRODUCT INFO
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
C60 Breaker Relay
REVISION:
3.40
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the application firmware.
MESSAGE
MODIFICATION FILE
NUMBER:
0
Range: 0 to 65535 (ID of the MOD FILE)
Value is 0 for each standard firmware release.
MESSAGE
BOOT PROGRAM
REVISION:
1.13
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of the boot program firmware.
MESSAGE
FRONT PANEL PROGRAM
REVISION:
0.08
Range: 0.00 to 655.35
Revision number of faceplate program firmware.
MESSAGE
COMPILE DATE:
2003/11/20 04:55:16
Range: Any valid date and time.
Date and time when product firmware was built.
MESSAGE
BOOT DATE:
2003/11/20 16:41:32
Range: Any valid date and time.
Date and time when the boot program was built.
FIRMWARE REVISIONS
6
The shown data is illustrative only. A modification file number of 0 indicates that, currently, no modifications have been
installed.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
6-21
6.5 PRODUCT INFORMATION
6 ACTUAL VALUES
6
6-22
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS 7.1COMMANDS
7.1.1 COMMANDS MENU
COMMANDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
MESSAGE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
The Commands menu contains relay directives intended for operations personnel. All commands can be protected from
unauthorized access via the Command Password; see the Password Security section of Chapter 5. The following flash
message appears after successfully command entry:
COMMAND
EXECUTED
7.1.2 VIRTUAL INPUTS
PATH: COMMANDS
COMMANDS VIRTUAL INPUTS
COMMANDS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Range: Off, On
Virt Ip 1
Off
↓
↓
MESSAGE
Virt Ip 32
Off
Range: Off, On
7
The states of up to 32 virtual inputs are changed here. The first line of the display indicates the ID of the virtual input. The
second line indicates the current or selected status of the virtual input. This status will be a logical state ‘Off’ (0) or ‘On’ (1).
7.1.3 CLEAR RECORDS
PATH: COMMANDS
COMMANDS CLEAR RECORDS
COMMANDS
CLEAR RECORDS
GE Multilin
CLEAR FAULT REPORTS?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DATA LOGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR BREAKER 1
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
C60 Breaker Management Relay
7-1
7.1 COMMANDS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
CLEAR BREAKER 2
ARCING AMPS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DEMAND
RECORDS?: No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR ENERGY?
No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR UNAUTHORIZED
ACCESS? No
Range: No, Yes
CLEAR DIRECT I/O
COUNTERS? No
Range: No, Yes
Valid only for units with Direct I/O module.
CLEAR ALL RELAY
RECORDS? No
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for clearing historical data such as the Event Records. Data is cleared by changing a command setting to “Yes” and pressing the
key. After clearing data, the command setting automatically reverts to “No”.
7.1.4 SET DATE AND TIME
PATH: COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
COMMANDS
SET DATE AND TIME
SET DATE AND TIME:
2000/01/14 13:47:03
(YYYY/MM/DD HH:MM:SS)
The date and time can be entered here via the faceplate keypad only if the IRIG-B or SNTP signal is not in use. The time
setting is based on the 24-hour clock. The complete date, as a minimum, must be entered to allow execution of this command. The new time will take effect at the moment the
key is clicked.
7.1.5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
PATH: COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
COMMANDS
RELAY MAINTENANCE
7
PERFORM LAMPTEST?
No
Range: No, Yes
UPDATE ORDER CODE?
No
Range: No, Yes
This menu contains commands for relay maintenance purposes. Commands are activated by changing a command setting
to “Yes” and pressing the
key. The command setting will then automatically revert to “No”.
The PERFORM LAMPTEST command turns on all faceplate LEDs and display pixels for a short duration. The UPDATE
ORDER CODE command causes the relay to scan the backplane for the hardware modules and update the order code to
match. If an update occurs, the following message is shown.
UPDATING...
PLEASE WAIT
There is no impact if there have been no changes to the hardware modules. When an update does not occur, the ORDER
CODE NOT UPDATED message will be shown.
7-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
7.2 TARGETS
7.2TARGETS
7.2.1 TARGETS MENU
TARGETS
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT
LATCHED
1:
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.
MESSAGE
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16:
LATCHED
Displayed only if targets for this element are active.
Example shown.
↓
↓
MESSAGE
The status of any active targets will be displayed in the Targets menu. If no targets are active, the display will read No
Active Targets:
7.2.2 TARGET MESSAGES
When there are no active targets, the first target to become active will cause the display to immediately default to that message. If there are active targets and the user is navigating through other messages, and when the default message timer
times out (i.e. the keypad has not been used for a determined period of time), the display will again default back to the target message.
The range of variables for the target messages is described below. Phase information will be included if applicable. If a target message status changes, the status with the highest priority will be displayed.
Table 7–1: TARGET MESSAGE PRIORITY STATUS
PRIORITY
ACTIVE STATUS
DESCRIPTION
OP
element operated and still picked up
2
PKP
element picked up and timed out
3
LATCHED
element had operated but has dropped out
1
If a self test error is detected, a message appears indicating the cause of the error. For example UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
indicates that the minimal relay settings have not been programmed.
7.2.3 RELAY SELF-TESTS
The relay performs a number of self-test diagnostic checks to ensure device integrity. The two types of self-tests (major and
minor) are listed in the tables below. When either type of self-test error occurs, the Trouble LED Indicator will turn on and a
target message displayed. All errors record an event in the event recorder. Latched errors can be cleared by pressing the
RESET key, providing the condition is no longer present.
Major self-test errors also result in the following:
•
the critical fail relay on the power supply module is de-energized
•
all other output relays are de-energized and are prevented from further operation
•
the faceplate In Service LED indicator is turned off
•
a RELAY OUT OF SERVICE event is recorded
Most of the minor self-test errors can be disabled. Refer to the settings in the User-Programmable Self-Tests section in
Chapter 5 for additional details.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
7-3
7
7.2 TARGETS
7 COMMANDS AND TARGETS
Table 7–2: MAJOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
SELF-TEST ERROR
MESSAGE
LATCHED
TARGET
MESSAGE?
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM
HOW OFTEN THE
TEST IS PERFORMED
WHAT TO DO
DSP ERRORS:
Yes
A/D Calibration, A/D
Interrupt, A/D Reset, Inter
DSP Rx, Sample Int, Rx
Interrupt, Tx Interrupt, Rx
Sample Index, Invalid
Settings, Rx Checksum
CT/VT module with digital signal
processor may have a problem.
Every 1/8th of a cycle.
Cycle the control power (if the problem
recurs, contact the factory).
DSP ERROR:
INVALID REVISION
Yes
One or more DSP modules in a
multiple DSP unit has Rev. C
hardware
Rev. C DSP needs to be replaced
with a Rev. D DSP.
Contact the factory
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
with 2nd-line detail
message
No
Configuration of modules does not On power up; thereafter, the
match the order code stored in the backplane is checked for missing
CPU.
cards every 5 seconds.
Check all modules against the order
code, ensure they are inserted
properly, and cycle control power (if
problem persists, contact factory).
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
with 2nd-line detail
message
No
FlexLogic™ equations do not
compile properly.
Event driven; whenever FlexLogic™ equations are modified.
Finish all equation editing and use self
test to debug any errors.
LATCHING OUTPUT
ERROR
No
Discrepancy in the position of a
latching contact between relay
firmware and hardware has been
detected.
Every 1/8th of a cycle.
Latching output module failed. Replace
the Module.
PROGRAM MEMORY
Test Failed
Yes
Error was found while checking
Flash memory.
Once flash is uploaded with new
firmware.
Contact the factory.
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
No
Settings indicate the unit is not
calibrated.
On power up.
Contact the factory.
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED No
PRODUCT SETUP
On power up and whenever the
INSTALLATION setting indicates RELAY PROGRAMMED setting is
relay is not in a programmed state. altered.
Program all settings (especially those
under PRODUCT SETUP
INSTALLATION).
Table 7–3: MINOR SELF-TEST ERROR MESSAGES
7
SELF-TEST ERROR
MESSAGE
LATCHED
TARGET
MESSAGE
DESCRIPTION OF PROBLEM
HOW OFTEN THE
TEST IS PERFORMED
WHAT TO DO
BATTERY FAIL
Yes
Battery is not functioning.
Monitored every 5 seconds. Reported Replace the battery located in the
after 1 minute if problem persists.
power supply module (1H or 1L).
DIRECT RING BREAK
No
Direct I/O settings configured for
a ring, but the connection is not in
a ring.
Every second.
Check Direct I/O configuration and/or
wiring.
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
No
Direct Device is configured but not Every second.
connected
Check Direct I/O configuration and/or
wiring.
EEPROM DATA
ERROR
Yes
The non-volatile memory has
been corrupted.
On power up only.
Contact the factory.
IRIG-B FAILURE
No
Bad IRIG-B input signal.
Monitored whenever an IRIG-B signal Ensure IRIG-B cable is connected,
is received.
check cable functionality (i.e. look for
physical damage or perform continuity
test), ensure IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check input signal level
(it may be less than specification). If
none of these apply, contact the factory.
LATCHING OUT
ERROR
Yes
Latching output failure.
Event driven.
Contact the factory.
LOW ON MEMORY
Yes
Memory is close to 100% capacity Monitored every 5 seconds.
Contact the factory.
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
Yes
Primary Ethernet connection
failed
Monitored every 2 seconds
Check connections.
PROTOTYPE
FIRMWARE
Yes
A prototype version of the
firmware is loaded.
On power up only.
Contact the factory.
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
No
One or more GOOSE devices are Event driven. Occurs when a device
Check GOOSE setup
not responding
programmed to receive GOOSE
messages stops receiving. Every 1 to
60 s., depending on GOOSE packets.
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
Yes
Sec. Ethernet connection failed
Monitored every 2 seconds
Check connections.
SNTP FAILURE
No
SNTP server not responding.
10 to 60 seconds.
Check SNTP configuration and/or
network connections.
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
Yes
Abnormal restart from modules
Event driven.
being removed/inserted when
powered-up, abnormal DC supply,
or internal relay failure.
Contact the factory.
WATCHDOG ERROR
No
Some tasks are behind schedule
Contact the factory.
7-4
Event driven.
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
Appendices
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LIST
APPENDIX A FlexAnalog ParametersA.1PARAMETER
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 1 of 8)
ADDR
DATA ITEM
LIST
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 2 of 8)
ADDR
5760
Sensitive Directional Power 1 Actual
6278
SRC 3 Neutral Current RMS
5761
Sensitive Directional Power 2 Actual
6280
SRC 3 Phase A Current Magnitude
6144
SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS
6282
SRC 3 Phase A Current Angle
6146
SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS
6283
SRC 3 Phase B Current Magnitude
6148
SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS
6285
SRC 3 Phase B Current Angle
6150
SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS
6286
SRC 3 Phase C Current Magnitude
6152
SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
6288
SRC 3 Phase C Current Angle
6154
SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle
6289
SRC 3 Neutral Current Magnitude
6155
SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
6291
SRC 3 Neutral Current Angle
6157
SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle
6292
SRC 3 Ground Current RMS
6158
SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
6294
SRC 3 Ground Current Magnitude
6160
SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
6296
SRC 3 Ground Current Angle
6161
SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
6297
SRC 3 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
6163
SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
6299
SRC 3 Zero Sequence Current Angle
6164
SRC 1 Ground Current RMS
6300
SRC 3 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
6166
SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude
6302
SRC 3 Positive Sequence Current Angle
6168
SRC 1 Ground Current Angle
6303
SRC 3 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
6169
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
6305
SRC 3 Negative Sequence Current Angle
6171
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
6306
SRC 3 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
6172
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
6308
SRC 3 Differential Ground Current Angle
6174
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
6336
SRC 4 Phase A Current RMS
6175
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
6338
SRC 4 Phase B Current RMS
6177
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
6340
SRC 4 Phase C Current RMS
6178
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
6342
SRC 4 Neutral Current RMS
6180
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
6344
SRC 4 Phase A Current Magnitude
6208
SRC 2 Phase A Current RMS
6346
SRC 4 Phase A Current Angle
6210
SRC 2 Phase B Current RMS
6347
SRC 4 Phase B Current Magnitude
6212
SRC 2 Phase C Current RMS
6349
SRC 4 Phase B Current Angle
6214
SRC 2 Neutral Current RMS
6350
SRC 4 Phase C Current Magnitude
6216
SRC 2 Phase A Current Magnitude
6352
SRC 4 Phase C Current Angle
6218
SRC 2 Phase A Current Angle
6353
SRC 4 Neutral Current Magnitude
6219
SRC 2 Phase B Current Magnitude
6355
SRC 4 Neutral Current Angle
6221
SRC 2 Phase B Current Angle
6356
SRC 4 Ground Current RMS
6222
SRC 2 Phase C Current Magnitude
6358
SRC 4 Ground Current Magnitude
6224
SRC 2 Phase C Current Angle
6360
SRC 4 Ground Current Angle
6225
SRC 2 Neutral Current Magnitude
6361
SRC 4 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
6227
SRC 2 Neutral Current Angle
6363
SRC 4 Zero Sequence Current Angle
6228
SRC 2 Ground Current RMS
6364
SRC 4 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
6230
SRC 2 Ground Current Magnitude
6366
SRC 4 Positive Sequence Current Angle
6232
SRC 2 Ground Current Angle
6367
SRC 4 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
6233
SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
6369
SRC 4 Negative Sequence Current Angle
6235
SRC 2 Zero Sequence Current Angle
6370
SRC 4 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
6236
SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
6372
SRC 4 Differential Ground Current Angle
6238
SRC 2 Positive Sequence Current Angle
6656
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
6239
SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
6658
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
6241
SRC 2 Negative Sequence Current Angle
6660
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
6242
SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
6662
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
6244
SRC 2 Differential Ground Current Angle
6664
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
6272
SRC 3 Phase A Current RMS
6665
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
6274
SRC 3 Phase B Current RMS
6667
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
6276
SRC 3 Phase C Current RMS
6668
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
GE Multilin
A
DATA ITEM
C60 Breaker Management Relay
A-1
A.1 PARAMETER LIST
APPENDIX A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 3 of 8)
A
ADDR
DATA ITEM
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 4 of 8)
ADDR
DATA ITEM
6670
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
6795
SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Angle
6671
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS
6796
SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
6673
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS
6798
SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage Angle
6675
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
6799
SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage RMS
6677
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
6801
SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage RMS
6679
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle
6803
SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage RMS
6680
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
6805
SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
6682
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle
6807
SRC 3 Phase AB Voltage Angle
6683
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
6808
SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
6685
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle
6810
SRC 3 Phase BC Voltage Angle
6686
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
6811
SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
6688
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
6813
SRC 3 Phase CA Voltage Angle
6690
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
6814
SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
6691
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6816
SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
6693
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
6818
SRC 3 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
6694
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6819
SRC 3 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6696
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
6821
SRC 3 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
6697
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6822
SRC 3 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6699
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
6824
SRC 3 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
6720
SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage RMS
6825
SRC 3 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6722
SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage RMS
6827
SRC 3 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
6724
SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage RMS
6848
SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage RMS
6726
SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
6850
SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage RMS
6728
SRC 2 Phase AG Voltage Angle
6852
SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage RMS
6729
SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
6854
SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
6731
SRC 2 Phase BG Voltage Angle
6856
SRC 4 Phase AG Voltage Angle
6732
SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
6857
SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
6734
SRC 2 Phase CG Voltage Angle
6859
SRC 4 Phase BG Voltage Angle
6735
SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage RMS
6860
SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
6737
SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage RMS
6862
SRC 4 Phase CG Voltage Angle
6739
SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage RMS
6863
SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage RMS
6741
SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
6865
SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage RMS
6743
SRC 2 Phase AB Voltage Angle
6867
SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage RMS
6744
SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
6869
SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
6746
SRC 2 Phase BC Voltage Angle
6871
SRC 4 Phase AB Voltage Angle
6747
SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
6872
SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
6749
SRC 2 Phase CA Voltage Angle
6874
SRC 4 Phase BC Voltage Angle
6750
SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
6875
SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
6752
SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
6877
SRC 4 Phase CA Voltage Angle
6754
SRC 2 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
6878
SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
6755
SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6880
SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
6757
SRC 2 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
6882
SRC 4 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
6758
SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6883
SRC 4 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6760
SRC 2 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
6885
SRC 4 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
6761
SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6886
SRC 4 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6763
SRC 2 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
6888
SRC 4 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
6784
SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage RMS
6889
SRC 4 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
6786
SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage RMS
6891
SRC 4 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
6788
SRC 3 Phase CG Voltage RMS
7168
SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power
6790
SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
7170
SRC 1 Phase A Real Power
6792
SRC 3 Phase AG Voltage Angle
7172
SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
6793
SRC 3 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
7174
SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
A-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX A
A.1 PARAMETER LIST
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 5 of 8)
ADDR
DATA ITEM
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 6 of 8)
ADDR
SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
7280
SRC 4 Three Phase Apparent Power
7178
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
7282
SRC 4 Phase A Apparent Power
7180
SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
7284
SRC 4 Phase B Apparent Power
7182
SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
7286
SRC 4 Phase C Apparent Power
7184
SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
7288
SRC 4 Three Phase Power Factor
7186
SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
7289
SRC 4 Phase A Power Factor
7188
SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
7290
SRC 4 Phase B Power Factor
7190
SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
7291
SRC 4 Phase C Power Factor
7192
SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
7552
SRC 1 Frequency
7193
SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
7553
SRC 2 Frequency
7194
SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
7554
SRC 3 Frequency
7195
SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
7555
SRC 4 Frequency
7200
SRC 2 Three Phase Real Power
7680
SRC 1 Demand Ia
7202
SRC 2 Phase A Real Power
7682
SRC 1 Demand Ib
7204
SRC 2 Phase B Real Power
7684
SRC 1 Demand Ic
7206
SRC 2 Phase C Real Power
7686
SRC 1 Demand Watt
7208
SRC 2 Three Phase Reactive Power
7688
SRC 1 Demand Var
7210
SRC 2 Phase A Reactive Power
7690
SRC 1 Demand Va
7212
SRC 2 Phase B Reactive Power
7696
SRC 2 Demand Ia
7214
SRC 2 Phase C Reactive Power
7698
SRC 2 Demand Ib
7216
SRC 2 Three Phase Apparent Power
7700
SRC 2 Demand Ic
7218
SRC 2 Phase A Apparent Power
7702
SRC 2 Demand Watt
7220
SRC 2 Phase B Apparent Power
7704
SRC 2 Demand Var
7222
SRC 2 Phase C Apparent Power
7706
SRC 2 Demand Va
7224
SRC 2 Three Phase Power Factor
7712
SRC 3 Demand Ia
7225
SRC 2 Phase A Power Factor
7714
SRC 3 Demand Ib
7226
SRC 2 Phase B Power Factor
7716
SRC 3 Demand Ic
7227
SRC 2 Phase C Power Factor
7718
SRC 3 Demand Watt
7232
SRC 3 Three Phase Real Power
7720
SRC 3 Demand Var
7234
SRC 3 Phase A Real Power
7722
SRC 3 Demand Va
7236
SRC 3 Phase B Real Power
7728
SRC 4 Demand Ia
7238
SRC 3 Phase C Real Power
7730
SRC 4 Demand Ib
7240
SRC 3 Three Phase Reactive Power
7732
SRC 4 Demand Ic
7242
SRC 3 Phase A Reactive Power
7734
SRC 4 Demand Watt
7244
SRC 3 Phase B Reactive Power
7736
SRC 4 Demand Var
7246
SRC 3 Phase C Reactive Power
7738
SRC 4 Demand Va
7248
SRC 3 Three Phase Apparent Power
9040
Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude
7250
SRC 3 Phase A Apparent Power
9042
Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude
7252
SRC 3 Phase B Apparent Power
9044
Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude
7254
SRC 3 Phase C Apparent Power
9046
Prefault Zero Sequence Current
7256
SRC 3 Three Phase Power Factor
9048
Prefault Positive Sequence Current
7257
SRC 3 Phase A Power Factor
9050
Prefault Negative Sequence Current
7258
SRC 3 Phase B Power Factor
9052
Prefault Phase A Voltage
7259
SRC 3 Phase C Power Factor
9054
Prefault Phase B Voltage
7264
SRC 4 Three Phase Real Power
9056
Prefault Phase C Voltage
7266
SRC 4 Phase A Real Power
9058
Last Fault Location
7268
SRC 4 Phase B Real Power
9216
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
7270
SRC 4 Phase C Real Power
9218
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
7272
SRC 4 Three Phase Reactive Power
9219
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
7274
SRC 4 Phase A Reactive Power
9220
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
7276
SRC 4 Phase B Reactive Power
9222
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency
7278
SRC 4 Phase C Reactive Power
9223
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
GE Multilin
A
DATA ITEM
7176
C60 Breaker Management Relay
A-3
A.1 PARAMETER LIST
APPENDIX A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 7 of 8)
A
Table A–1: FLEXANALOG PARAMETERS (Sheet 8 of 8)
ADDR
DATA ITEM
ADDR
DATA ITEM
13504
DCMA Inputs 1 Value
13580
RTD Inputs 29 Value
13505
DCMA Inputs 2 Value
13581
RTD Inputs 30 Value
13506
DCMA Inputs 3 Value
13582
RTD Inputs 31 Value
13507
DCMA Inputs 4 Value
13583
RTD Inputs 32 Value
13508
DCMA Inputs 5 Value
13584
RTD Inputs 33 Value
13509
DCMA Inputs 6 Value
13585
RTD Inputs 34 Value
13510
DCMA Inputs 7 Value
13586
RTD Inputs 35 Value
13511
DCMA Inputs 8 Value
13587
RTD Inputs 36 Value
13512
DCMA Inputs 9 Value
13588
RTD Inputs 37 Value
13513
DCMA Inputs 10 Value
13589
RTD Inputs 38 Value
13514
DCMA Inputs 11 Value
13590
RTD Inputs 39 Value
13515
DCMA Inputs 12 Value
13591
RTD Inputs 40 Value
13516
DCMA Inputs 13 Value
13592
RTD Inputs 41 Value
13517
DCMA Inputs 14 Value
13593
RTD Inputs 42 Value
13518
DCMA Inputs 15 Value
13594
RTD Inputs 43 Value
13519
DCMA Inputs 16 Value
13595
RTD Inputs 44 Value
13520
DCMA Inputs 17 Value
13596
RTD Inputs 45 Value
13521
DCMA Inputs 18 Value
13597
RTD Inputs 46 Value
13522
DCMA Inputs 19 Value
13598
RTD Inputs 47 Value
13523
DCMA Inputs 20 Value
13599
RTD Inputs 48 Value
13524
DCMA Inputs 21 Value
13600
Ohm Inputs 1 Value
13525
DCMA Inputs 22 Value
13601
Ohm Inputs 2 Value
13526
DCMA Inputs 23 Value
32768
Tracking Frequency
13527
DCMA Inputs 24 Value
39425
FlexElement 1 Actual
13552
RTD Inputs 1 Value
39426
FlexElement 2 Actual
13553
RTD Inputs 2 Value
39427
FlexElement 3 Actual
13554
RTD Inputs 3 Value
39428
FlexElement 4 Actual
13555
RTD Inputs 4 Value
39429
FlexElement 5 Actual
13556
RTD Inputs 5 Value
39430
FlexElement 6 Actual
13557
RTD Inputs 6 Value
39431
FlexElement 7 Actual
13558
RTD Inputs 7 Value
39432
FlexElement 8 Actual
13559
RTD Inputs 8 Value
40971
Current Setting Group
13560
RTD Inputs 9 Value
13561
RTD Inputs 10 Value
13562
RTD Inputs 11 Value
13563
RTD Inputs 12 Value
13564
RTD Inputs 13 Value
13565
RTD Inputs 14 Value
13566
RTD Inputs 15 Value
13567
RTD Inputs 16 Value
13568
RTD Inputs 17 Value
13569
RTD Inputs 18 Value
13570
RTD Inputs 19 Value
13571
RTD Inputs 20 Value
13572
RTD Inputs 21 Value
13573
RTD Inputs 22 Value
13574
RTD Inputs 23 Value
13575
RTD Inputs 24 Value
13576
RTD Inputs 25 Value
13577
RTD Inputs 26 Value
13578
RTD Inputs 27 Value
13579
RTD Inputs 28 Value
A-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATIONSB.1MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B.1.1 INTRODUCTION
The UR series relays support a number of communications protocols to allow connection to equipment such as personal
computers, RTUs, SCADA masters, and programmable logic controllers. The Modicon Modbus RTU protocol is the most
basic protocol supported by the UR. Modbus is available via RS232 or RS485 serial links or via ethernet (using the Modbus/TCP specification). The following description is intended primarily for users who wish to develop their own master communication drivers and applies to the serial Modbus RTU protocol. Note that:
•
The UR always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never initiates communications; it only listens and responds to
requests issued by a master computer.
•
For Modbus®, a subset of the Remote Terminal Unit (RTU) protocol format is supported that allows extensive monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register commands.
B.1.2 PHYSICAL LAYER
The Modbus® RTU protocol is hardware-independent so that the physical layer can be any of a variety of standard hardware configurations including RS232 and RS485. The relay includes a faceplate (front panel) RS232 port and two rear terminal communications ports that may be configured as RS485, fiber optic, 10BaseT, or 10BaseF. Data flow is half-duplex in
all configurations. See Chapter 3 for details on wiring.
Each data byte is transmitted in an asynchronous format consisting of 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 stop bit, and possibly 1 parity
bit. This produces a 10 or 11 bit data frame. This can be important for transmission through modems at high bit rates (11 bit
data frames are not supported by many modems at baud rates greater than 300).
The baud rate and parity are independently programmable for each communications port. Baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400,
4800, 9600, 14400, 19200, 28800, 33600, 38400, 57600, or 115200 bps are available. Even, odd, and no parity are available. Refer to the Communications section of Chapter 5 for further details.
The master device in any system must know the address of the slave device with which it is to communicate. The relay will
not act on a request from a master if the address in the request does not match the relay’s slave address (unless the
address is the broadcast address – see below).
A single setting selects the slave address used for all ports, with the exception that for the faceplate port, the relay will
accept any address when the Modbus® RTU protocol is used.
B.1.3 DATA LINK LAYER
Communications takes place in packets which are groups of asynchronously framed byte data. The master transmits a
packet to the slave and the slave responds with a packet. The end of a packet is marked by ‘dead-time’ on the communications line. The following describes general format for both transmit and receive packets. For exact details on packet formatting, refer to subsequent sections describing each function code.
Table B–1: MODBUS PACKET FORMAT
•
DESCRIPTION
SIZE
SLAVE ADDRESS
1 byte
FUNCTION CODE
1 byte
DATA
N bytes
CRC
2 bytes
DEAD TIME
3.5 bytes transmission time
SLAVE ADDRESS: This is the address of the slave device that is intended to receive the packet sent by the master
and to perform the desired action. Each slave device on a communications bus must have a unique address to prevent
bus contention. All of the relay’s ports have the same address which is programmable from 1 to 254; see Chapter 5 for
details. Only the addressed slave will respond to a packet that starts with its address. Note that the faceplate port is an
exception to this rule; it will act on a message containing any slave address.
A master transmit packet with slave address 0 indicates a broadcast command. All slaves on the communication link
take action based on the packet, but none respond to the master. Broadcast mode is only recognized when associated
with Function Code 05h. For any other function code, a packet with broadcast mode slave address 0 will be ignored.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-1
B
B.1 MODBUS RTU PROTOCOL
B
APPENDIX B
•
FUNCTION CODE: This is one of the supported functions codes of the unit which tells the slave what action to perform. See the Supported Function Codes section for complete details. An exception response from the slave is indicated by setting the high order bit of the function code in the response packet. See the Exception Responses section
for further details.
•
DATA: This will be a variable number of bytes depending on the function code. This may include actual values, settings, or addresses sent by the master to the slave or by the slave to the master.
•
CRC: This is a two byte error checking code. The RTU version of Modbus® includes a 16-bit cyclic redundancy check
(CRC-16) with every packet which is an industry standard method used for error detection. If a Modbus slave device
receives a packet in which an error is indicated by the CRC, the slave device will not act upon or respond to the packet
thus preventing any erroneous operations. See the CRC-16 Algorithm section for details on calculating the CRC.
•
DEAD TIME: A packet is terminated when no data is received for a period of 3.5 byte transmission times (about 15 ms
at 2400 bps, 2 ms at 19200 bps, and 300 µs at 115200 bps). Consequently, the transmitting device must not allow gaps
between bytes longer than this interval. Once the dead time has expired without a new byte transmission, all slaves
start listening for a new packet from the master except for the addressed slave.
B.1.4 CRC-16 ALGORITHM
The CRC-16 algorithm essentially treats the entire data stream (data bits only; start, stop and parity ignored) as one continuous binary number. This number is first shifted left 16 bits and then divided by a characteristic polynomial
(11000000000000101B). The 16 bit remainder of the division is appended to the end of the packet, MSByte first. The
resulting packet including CRC, when divided by the same polynomial at the receiver will give a zero remainder if no transmission errors have occurred. This algorithm requires the characteristic polynomial to be reverse bit ordered. The most significant bit of the characteristic polynomial is dropped, since it does not affect the value of the remainder.
A C programming language implementation of the CRC algorithm will be provided upon request.
Table B–2: CRC-16 ALGORITHM
SYMBOLS:
ALGORITHM:
B-2
-->
data transfer
A
16 bit working register
Alow
low order byte of A
Ahigh
high order byte of A
CRC
16 bit CRC-16 result
i,j
loop counters
(+)
logical EXCLUSIVE-OR operator
N
total number of data bytes
Di
i-th data byte (i = 0 to N-1)
G
16 bit characteristic polynomial = 1010000000000001 (binary) with MSbit dropped and bit order reversed
shr (x)
right shift operator (th LSbit of x is shifted into a carry flag, a '0' is shifted into the MSbit of x, all other bits
are shifted right one location)
1.
FFFF (hex) --> A
2.
0 --> i
3.
0 --> j
4.
Di (+) Alow --> Alow
5.
j + 1 --> j
6.
shr (A)
7.
Is there a carry?
No: go to 8; Yes: G (+) A --> A and continue.
8.
Is j = 8?
No: go to 5; Yes: continue
9.
i + 1 --> i
10.
Is i = N?
11.
A --> CRC
No: go to 3; Yes: continue
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2FUNCTION CODES
B.2.1 SUPPORTED FUNCTION CODES
Modbus® officially defines function codes from 1 to 127 though only a small subset is generally needed. The relay supports
some of these functions, as summarized in the following table. Subsequent sections describe each function code in detail.
FUNCTION CODE
MODBUS DEFINITION
GE MULTILIN DEFINITION
Read Holding Registers
Read Actual Values or Settings
4
Read Holding Registers
Read Actual Values or Settings
5
Force Single Coil
Execute Operation
06
6
Preset Single Register
Store Single Setting
10
16
Preset Multiple Registers
Store Multiple Settings
HEX
DEC
03
3
04
05
B
B.2.2 READ ACTUAL VALUES OR SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 03/04H)
This function code allows the master to read one or more consecutive data registers (actual values or settings) from a relay.
Data registers are always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted with high order byte first. The maximum number of registers
that can be read in a single packet is 125. See the Modbus Memory Map table for exact details on the data registers.
Since some PLC implementations of Modbus® only support one of function codes 03h and 04h, the relay interpretation
allows either function code to be used for reading one or more consecutive data registers. The data starting address will
determine the type of data being read. Function codes 03h and 04h are therefore identical.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting 3
register values starting at address 4050h from slave device 11h (17 decimal); the slave device responds with the values 40,
300, and 0 from registers 4050h, 4051h, and 4052h, respectively.
Table B–3: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXAMPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
04
FUNCTION CODE
04
06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high
40
BYTE COUNT
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low
50
DATA #1 - high
00
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - high
00
DATA #1 - low
28
NUMBER OF REGISTERS - low
03
DATA #2 - high
01
2C
CRC - low
A7
DATA #2 - low
CRC - high
4A
DATA #3 - high
00
DATA #3 - low
00
CRC - low
0D
CRC - high
60
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-3
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
APPENDIX B
B.2.3 EXECUTE OPERATION (FUNCTION CODE 05H)
This function code allows the master to perform various operations in the relay. Available operations are shown in the Summary of Operation Codes table below.
B
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device requesting the
slave device 11H (17 dec) to perform a reset. The high and low Code Value bytes always have the values “FF” and “00”
respectively and are a remnant of the original Modbus® definition of this function code.
Table B–4: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
FUNCTION CODE
05
FUNCTION CODE
05
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - high
00
OPERATION CODE - low
01
OPERATION CODE - low
01
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - high
FF
CODE VALUE - low
00
CODE VALUE - low
00
CRC - low
DF
CRC - low
DF
CRC - high
6A
CRC - high
6A
Table B–5: SUMMARY OF OPERATION CODES FOR FUNCTION 05H
OPERATION
CODE (HEX)
DEFINITION
DESCRIPTION
0000
NO OPERATION
Does not do anything.
0001
RESET
Performs the same function as the faceplate RESET key.
0005
CLEAR EVENT RECORDS
Performs the same function as the faceplate CLEAR EVENT RECORDS menu
0006
CLEAR OSCILLOGRAPHY
Clears all oscillography records.
1000 to 101F
VIRTUAL IN 1-32 ON/OFF
Sets the states of Virtual Inputs 1 to 32 either “ON” or “OFF”.
command.
B.2.4 STORE SINGLE SETTING (FUNCTION CODE 06H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a single setting register in an relay. Setting registers are
always 16 bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The following table shows the format of the master and
slave packets. The example shows a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h to slave device
11h (17 dec).
Table B–6: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXAMPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
06
FUNCTION CODE
06
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - high
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low
51
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - low
51
DATA - high
00
DATA - high
00
DATA - low
C8
DATA - low
C8
CRC - low
CE
CRC - low
CE
CRC - high
DD
CRC - high
DD
B-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.2 FUNCTION CODES
B.2.5 STORE MULTIPLE SETTINGS (FUNCTION CODE 10H)
This function code allows the master to modify the contents of a one or more consecutive setting registers in a relay. Setting
registers are 16-bit (two byte) values transmitted high order byte first. The maximum number of setting registers that can be
stored in a single packet is 60. The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows
a master device storing the value 200 at memory map address 4051h, and the value 1 at memory map address 4052h to
slave device 11h (17 decimal).
B
Table B–7: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
EXMAPLE (HEX)
11
FUNCTION CODE
10
FUNCTION CODE
10
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - hi
40
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
DATA STARTING ADDRESS - lo
51
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - hi
00
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
NUMBER OF SETTINGS - lo
02
BYTE COUNT
04
CRC - lo
07
DATA #1 - high order byte
00
CRC - hi
64
DATA #1 - low order byte
C8
DATA #2 - high order byte
00
DATA #2 - low order byte
01
CRC - low order byte
12
CRC - high order byte
62
B.2.6 EXCEPTION RESPONSES
Programming or operation errors usually happen because of illegal data in a packet. These errors result in an exception
response from the slave. The slave detecting one of these errors sends a response packet to the master with the high order
bit of the function code set to 1.
The following table shows the format of the master and slave packets. The example shows a master device sending the
unsupported function code 39h to slave device 11.
Table B–8: MASTER AND SLAVE DEVICE PACKET TRANSMISSION EXAMPLE
MASTER TRANSMISSION
SLAVE RESPONSE
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
PACKET FORMAT
EXAMPLE (HEX)
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
SLAVE ADDRESS
11
B9
FUNCTION CODE
39
FUNCTION CODE
CRC - low order byte
CD
ERROR CODE
01
CRC - high order byte
F2
CRC - low order byte
93
CRC - high order byte
95
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-5
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
APPENDIX B
B.3FILE TRANSFERS
B.3.1 OBTAINING RELAY FILES VIA MODBUS
a) DESCRIPTION
B
The UR relay has a generic file transfer facility, meaning that you use the same method to obtain all of the different types of
files from the unit. The Modbus registers that implement file transfer are found in the "Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)"
and "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" modules, starting at address 3100 in the Modbus Memory Map. To read a file from
the UR relay, use the following steps:
1.
Write the filename to the "Name of file to read" register using a write multiple registers command. If the name is shorter
than 80 characters, you may write only enough registers to include all the text of the filename. Filenames are not case
sensitive.
2.
Repeatedly read all the registers in "Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)" using a read multiple registers command. It is
not necessary to read the entire data block, since the UR relay will remember which was the last register you read. The
"position" register is initially zero and thereafter indicates how many bytes (2 times the number of registers) you have
read so far. The "size of..." register indicates the number of bytes of data remaining to read, to a maximum of 244.
3.
Keep reading until the "size of..." register is smaller than the number of bytes you are transferring. This condition indicates end of file. Discard any bytes you have read beyond the indicated block size.
4.
If you need to re-try a block, read only the "size of.." and "block of data", without reading the position. The file pointer is
only incremented when you read the position register, so the same data block will be returned as was read in the previous operation. On the next read, check to see if the position is where you expect it to be, and discard the previous
block if it is not (this condition would indicate that the UR relay did not process your original read request).
The UR relay retains connection-specific file transfer information, so files may be read simultaneously on multiple Modbus
connections.
b) OTHER PROTOCOLS
All the files available via Modbus may also be retrieved using the standard file transfer mechanisms in other protocols (for
example, TFTP or MMS).
c) COMTRADE, OSCILLOGRAPHY, AND DATA LOGGER FILES
Oscillography and data logger files are formatted using the COMTRADE file format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7c (02 September 1997). The files may be obtained in either text or binary COMTRADE format.
d) READING OSCILLOGRAPHY FILES
Familiarity with the oscillography feature is required to understand the following description. Refer to the Oscillography section in Chapter 5 for additional details.
The Oscillography Number of Triggers register is incremented by one every time a new oscillography file is triggered (captured) and cleared to zero when oscillography data is cleared. When a new trigger occurs, the associated oscillography file
is assigned a file identifier number equal to the incremented value of this register; the newest file number is equal to the
Oscillography_Number_of_Triggers register. This register can be used to determine if any new data has been captured by
periodically reading it to see if the value has changed; if the number has increased then new data is available.
The Oscillography Number of Records register specifies the maximum number of files (and the number of cycles of data
per file) that can be stored in memory of the relay. The Oscillography Available Records register specifies the actual number of files that are stored and still available to be read out of the relay.
Writing “Yes” (i.e. the value 1) to the Oscillography Clear Data register clears oscillography data files, clears both the Oscillography Number of Triggers and Oscillography Available Records registers to zero, and sets the Oscillography Last
Cleared Date to the present date and time.
To read binary COMTRADE oscillography files, read the following filenames:
OSCnnnn.CFG and OSCnnn.DAT
Replace “nnn” with the desired oscillography trigger number. For ASCII format, use the following file names
OSCAnnnn.CFG and OSCAnnn.DAT
B-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.3 FILE TRANSFERS
e) READING DATA LOGGER FILES
Familiarity with the data logger feature is required to understand this description. Refer to the Data Logger section of Chapter 5 for details. To read the entire data logger in binary COMTRADE format, read the following files.
datalog.cfg and datalog.dat
To read the entire data logger in ASCII COMTRADE format, read the following files.
dataloga.cfg and dataloga.dat
To limit the range of records to be returned in the COMTRADE files, append the following to the filename before writing it:
•
To read from a specific time to the end of the log: <space> startTime
•
To read a specific range of records: <space> startTime <space> endTime
•
Replace <startTime> and <endTime> with Julian dates (seconds since Jan. 1 1970) as numeric text.
f) READING EVENT RECORDER FILES
To read the entire event recorder contents in ASCII format (the only available format), use the following filename:
EVT.TXT
To read from a specific record to the end of the log, use the following filename:
EVTnnn.TXT (replace nnn with the desired starting record number)
To read from a specific record to another specific record, use the following filename:
EVT.TXT xxxxx yyyyy (replace xxxxx with the starting record number and yyyyy with the ending record number)
B.3.2 MODBUS PASSWORD OPERATION
The COMMAND password is set up at memory location 4000. Storing a value of “0” removes COMMAND password protection. When reading the password setting, the encrypted value (zero if no password is set) is returned. COMMAND security
is required to change the COMMAND password. Similarly, the SETTING password is set up at memory location 4002.
PRODUCT SETUP
PASSWORD SECURITY
These are the same settings and encrypted values found in the SETTINGS
menu via the keypad. Enabling password security for the faceplate display will also enable it for Modbus, and vice-versa.
To gain COMMAND level security access, the COMMAND password must be entered at memory location 4008. To gain
SETTING level security access, the SETTING password must be entered at memory location 400A. The entered SETTING
password must match the current SETTING password setting, or must be zero, to change settings or download firmware.
COMMAND and SETTING passwords each have a 30-minute timer. Each timer starts when you enter the particular password, and is re-started whenever you “use” it. For example, writing a setting re-starts the SETTING password timer and
writing a command register or forcing a coil re-starts the COMMAND password timer. The value read at memory location
4010 can be used to confirm whether a COMMAND password is enabled or disabled (0 for Disabled). The value read at
memory location 4011 can be used to confirm whether a SETTING password is enabled or disabled.
COMMAND or SETTING password security access is restricted to the particular port or particular TCP/IP connection on
which the entry was made. Passwords must be entered when accessing the relay through other ports or connections, and
the passwords must be re-entered after disconnecting and re-connecting on TCP/IP.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-7
B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B.4MEMORY MAPPING
B.4.1 MODBUS MEMORY MAP
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 1 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Product Information (Read Only)
B
0000
UR Product Type
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0002
Product Version
0 to 655.35
---
0.01
F001
1
“0”
Product Information (Read Only -- Written by Factory)
0010
Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
0020
Manufacturing Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
0022
Modification Number
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0040
Order Code
---
---
---
F204
“Order Code x “
0090
Ethernet MAC Address
---
---
---
F072
0
0093
Reserved (13 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
00A0
CPU Module Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00B0
CPU Supplier Serial Number
---
---
---
F203
(none)
00C0
Ethernet Sub Module Serial Number (8 items)
---
---
---
F203
(none)
0 to 4294967295
0
1
F143
0
Self Test Targets (Read Only)
0200
Self Test States (2 items)
Front Panel (Read Only)
0204
LED Column x State (10 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F501
0
0220
Display Message
---
---
---
F204
(none)
0248
Last Key Pressed
0 to 42
---
1
F530
0 (None)
0 to 38
---
1
F190
0 (No key -- use
between real keys)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
Keypress Emulation (Read/Write)
0280
Simulated keypress -- write zero before each keystroke
Virtual Input Commands (Read/Write Command) (32 modules)
0400
Virtual Input x State
0401
...Repeated for module number 2
0402
...Repeated for module number 3
0403
...Repeated for module number 4
0404
...Repeated for module number 5
0405
...Repeated for module number 6
0406
...Repeated for module number 7
0407
...Repeated for module number 8
0408
...Repeated for module number 9
0409
...Repeated for module number 10
040A
...Repeated for module number 11
040B
...Repeated for module number 12
040C
...Repeated for module number 13
040D
...Repeated for module number 14
040E
...Repeated for module number 15
040F
...Repeated for module number 16
0410
...Repeated for module number 17
0411
...Repeated for module number 18
0412
...Repeated for module number 19
0413
...Repeated for module number 20
0414
...Repeated for module number 21
0415
...Repeated for module number 22
0416
...Repeated for module number 23
0417
...Repeated for module number 24
0418
...Repeated for module number 25
0419
...Repeated for module number 26
041A
...Repeated for module number 27
041B
...Repeated for module number 28
B-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 2 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
041C
...Repeated for module number 29
041D
...Repeated for module number 30
041E
...Repeated for module number 31
041F
...Repeated for module number 32
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Digital Counter States (Read Only Non-Volatile) (8 modules)
0800
Digital Counter x Value
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
1
F004
0
0802
Digital Counter x Frozen
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
1
F004
0
0804
Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
0806
Digital Counter x Frozen Time Stamp us
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
0808
...Repeated for module number 2
0810
...Repeated for module number 3
0818
...Repeated for module number 4
0820
...Repeated for module number 5
0828
...Repeated for module number 6
0830
...Repeated for module number 7
0838
...Repeated for module number 8
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F502
0
---
---
---
F200
(none)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
B
FlexStates (Read Only)
0900
FlexState Bits (16 items)
Element States (Read Only)
1000
Element Operate States (64 items)
User Displays Actuals (Read Only)
1080
Formatted user-definable displays (8 items)
Modbus User Map Actuals (Read Only
1200
User Map Values (256 items)
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C0
Target Sequence
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
14C1
Number of Targets
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
---
---
---
F200
“.”
Element Targets (Read/Write)
14C2
Target to Read
Element Targets (Read Only)
14C3
Target Message
Digital I/O States (Read Only)
1500
Contact Input States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1508
Virtual Input States (2 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1510
Contact Output States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1518
Contact Output Current States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1520
Contact Output Voltage States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1528
Virtual Output States (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1530
Contact Output Detectors (4 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
Remote I/O States (Read Only)
1540
Remote Device x States
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1542
Remote Input States (2 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
1550
Remote Devices Online
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
Remote Device Status (Read Only) (16 modules)
1551
Remote Device x StNum
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
1553
Remote Device x SqNum
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
1555
...Repeated for module number 2
1559
...Repeated for module number 3
155D
...Repeated for module number 4
1561
...Repeated for module number 5
1565
...Repeated for module number 6
1569
...Repeated for module number 7
156D
...Repeated for module number 8
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-9
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 3 of 34)
ADDR
B
REGISTER NAME
1571
...Repeated for module number 9
1575
...Repeated for module number 10
1579
...Repeated for module number 11
157D
...Repeated for module number 12
1581
...Repeated for module number 13
1585
...Repeated for module number 14
1589
...Repeated for module number 15
158D
...Repeated for module number 16
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Platform Direct I/O States (Read Only)
15C0
Direct Input States (6 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
15C8
Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 1
0 to 65535
ms
1
F001
0
15C9
Platform Direct Outputs Average Msg Return Time 2
0 to 65535
ms
1
F001
0
15D0
Direct Device States
0 to 65535
---
1
F500
0
15D1
Reserved
15D2
Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 1
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
15D3
Platform Direct I/O CRC Fail Count 2
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Ethernet Fibre Channel Status (Read/Write)
1610
Ethernet Primary Fibre Channel Status
0 to 2
---
1
F134
0 (Fail)
1611
Ethernet Secondary Fibre Channel Status
0 to 2
---
1
F134
0 (Fail)
0
Data Logger Actuals (Read Only)
1618
Data Logger Channel Count
0 to 16
CHNL
1
F001
1619
Time of oldest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
1
F050
0
161B
Time of newest available samples
0 to 4294967295
seconds
1
F050
0
161D
Data Logger Duration
0 to 999.9
DAYS
0.1
F001
0
-2147483647 to
2147483647
W
1
F060
0
Sensitive Directional Power Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
1680
Sensitive Directional Power 1 Power
1682
...Repeated for module number 2
Source Current (Read Only) (6 modules)
1800
Phase A Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1802
Phase B Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1804
Phase C Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1806
Neutral Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1808
Phase A Current Magnitude
180A
Phase A Current Angle
180B
Phase B Current Magnitude
180D
Phase B Current Angle
180E
Phase C Current Magnitude
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1810
Phase C Current Angle
1811
Neutral Current Magnitude
1813
Neutral Current Angle
-359.9 to 0
°
1814
Ground Current RMS
0 to 999999.999
A
1816
Ground Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1818
Ground Current Angle
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1819
Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
181B
Zero Sequence Current Angle
181C
Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
181E
Positive Sequence Current Angle
181F
Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
1821
Negative Sequence Current Angle
1822
Differential Ground Current Magnitude
1824
Differential Ground Current Angle
1825
Reserved (27 items)
1840
...Repeated for module number 2
B-10
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
0.1
F002
0
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
---
---
---
F001
0
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 4 of 34)
ADDR
1880
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
...Repeated for module number 3
18C0
...Repeated for module number 4
1900
...Repeated for module number 5
1940
...Repeated for module number 6
Source Voltage (Read Only) (6 modules)
1A00
Phase AG Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
1A02
Phase BG Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
0
1A04
Phase CG Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
1A06
Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
1A08
Phase AG Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
1A09
Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
1A0B
Phase BG Voltage Angle
1A0C
Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
1A0E
Phase CG Voltage Angle
1A0F
Phase AB or AC Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
0
1A11
Phase BC or BA Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
1A13
Phase CA or CB Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
1A15
Phase AB or AC Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
1A17
Phase AB or AC Voltage Angle
1A18
Phase BC or BA Voltage Magnitude
1A1A
Phase BC or BA Voltage Angle
1A1B
Phase CA or CB Voltage Magnitude
1A1D
Phase CA or CB Voltage Angle
-359.9 to 0
1A1E
Auxiliary Voltage RMS
0 to 999999.999
1A20
Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
1A22
Auxiliary Voltage Angle
1A23
Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A25
Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
1A26
Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A28
Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
1A29
Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
1A2B
Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
1A2C
Reserved (20 items)
1A40
...Repeated for module number 2
1A80
...Repeated for module number 3
1AC0
...Repeated for module number 4
1B00
...Repeated for module number 5
1B40
...Repeated for module number 6
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
°
0.1
F002
0
V
0.001
F060
0
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
-359.9 to 0
°
0.1
F002
0
---
---
---
F001
0
B
Source Power (Read Only) (6 modules)
1C00
Three Phase Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
W
0.001
F060
0
1C02
Phase A Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
W
0.001
F060
0
1C04
Phase B Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
W
0.001
F060
0
1C06
Phase C Real Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
W
0.001
F060
0
1C08
Three Phase Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
0
1C0A
Phase A Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
0
1C0C
Phase B Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
0
1C0E
Phase C Reactive Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
var
0.001
F060
0
1C10
Three Phase Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
0
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-11
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 5 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1C12
Phase A Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
0
1C14
Phase B Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
0
1C16
Phase C Apparent Power
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
VA
0.001
F060
0
0
1C18
Three Phase Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
1C19
Phase A Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
0
1C1A
Phase B Power Factor
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
0
-0.999 to 1
---
0.001
F013
0
---
---
---
F001
0
0
1C1B
Phase C Power Factor
1C1C
Reserved (4 items)
1C20
...Repeated for module number 2
1C40
...Repeated for module number 3
1C60
...Repeated for module number 4
1C80
...Repeated for module number 5
1CA0
...Repeated for module number 6
Source Energy (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1D00
Positive Watthour
0 to 1000000000000
Wh
0.001
F060
1D02
Negative Watthour
0 to 1000000000000
Wh
0.001
F060
0
1D04
Positive Varhour
0 to 1000000000000
varh
0.001
F060
0
1D06
Negative Varhour
0 to 1000000000000
varh
0.001
F060
0
1D08
Reserved (8 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
1D10
...Repeated for module number 2
1D20
...Repeated for module number 3
1D30
...Repeated for module number 4
1D40
...Repeated for module number 5
1D50
...Repeated for module number 6
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
2 to 90
Hz
0.01
F001
0
Energy Commands (Read/Write Command)
1D60
Energy Clear Command
Source Frequency (Read Only) (6 modules)
1D80
Frequency
1D81
...Repeated for module number 2
1D82
...Repeated for module number 3
1D83
...Repeated for module number 4
1D84
...Repeated for module number 5
1D85
...Repeated for module number 6
Source Demand (Read Only) (6 modules)
1E00
Demand Ia
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1E02
Demand Ib
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1E04
Demand Ic
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1E06
Demand Watt
0 to 999999.999
W
0.001
F060
0
1E08
Demand Var
0 to 999999.999
var
0.001
F060
0
1E0A
Demand Va
0 to 999999.999
VA
0.001
F060
0
1E0C
Reserved (4 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
1E10
...Repeated for module number 2
1E20
...Repeated for module number 3
1E30
...Repeated for module number 4
1E40
...Repeated for module number 5
1E50
...Repeated for module number 6
Source Demand Peaks (Read Only Non-Volatile) (6 modules)
1E80
SRC X Demand Ia Max
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1E82
SRC X Demand Ia Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E84
SRC X Demand Ib Max
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
1E86
SRC X Demand Ib Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E88
SRC X Demand Ic Max
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
B-12
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 6 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1E8A
SRC X Demand Ic Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E8C
SRC X Demand Watt Max
0 to 999999.999
W
0.001
F060
0
1E8E
SRC X Demand Watt Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E90
SRC X Demand Var
0 to 999999.999
var
0.001
F060
0
1E92
SRC X Demand Var Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E94
SRC X Demand Va Max
0 to 999999.999
VA
0.001
F060
0
1E96
SRC X Demand Va Max Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
1E98
Reserved (8 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
1EA0
...Repeated for module number 2
1EC0
...Repeated for module number 3
1EE0
...Repeated for module number 4
1F00
...Repeated for module number 5
1F20
...Repeated for module number 6
B
Breaker Arcing Current Actuals (Read Only Non-Volatile) (2 modules)
2200
Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase A
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
1
F060
0
2202
Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase B
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
1
F060
0
2204
Breaker x Arcing Amp Phase C
0 to 99999999
kA2-cyc
1
F060
0
2206
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
0
Breaker Arcing Current Commands (Read/Write Command) (2 modules)
220C
Breaker x Arcing Clear Command
220D
...Repeated for module number 2
Passwords Unauthorized Access (Read/Write Command)
2230
Reset Unauthorized Access
Fault Location (Read Only)
2350
Prefault Phase A Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
2352
Prefault Phase B Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
2354
Prefault Phase C Current Magnitude
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
2356
Prefault Zero Seq Current
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
2358
Prefault Pos Seq Current
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
235A
Prefault Neg Seq Current
0 to 999999.999
A
0.001
F060
0
235C
Prefault Phase A Voltage
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
235E
Prefault Phase B Voltage
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
2360
Prefault Phase C Voltage
0 to 999999.999
V
0.001
F060
0
2362
Last Fault Location in Line length units (km or miles)
-3276.7 to 3276.7
---
0.1
F002
0
-1000000000000 to
1000000000000
V
1
F060
0
Synchrocheck Actuals (Read Only) (2 modules)
2400
Synchrocheck X Delta Voltage
2402
Synchrocheck X Delta Frequency
0 to 655.35
Hz
0.01
F001
0
2403
Synchrocheck X Delta Phase
0 to 179.9
°
0.1
F001
0
2404
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
0 (Off)
Autoreclose Status (Read Only) (6 modules)
2410
Autoreclose Count
2411
...Repeated for module number 2
2412
...Repeated for module number 3
2413
...Repeated for module number 4
2414
...Repeated for module number 5
2415
...Repeated for module number 6
Expanded FlexStates (Read Only)
2B00
FlexStates, one per register (256 items)
Expanded Digital I/O states (Read Only)
2D00
Contact Input States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
2D80
Contact Output States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
2E00
Virtual Output States, one per register (64 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-13
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 7 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Expanded Remote I/O Status (Read Only)
2F00
Remote Device States, one per register (16 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F155
0 (Offline)
2F80
Remote Input States, one per register (32 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
Oscillography Values (Read Only)
B
3000
Oscillography Number of Triggers
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
3001
Oscillography Available Records
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
3002
Oscillography Last Cleared Date
0 to 400000000
---
1
F050
0
3004
Oscillography Number Of Cycles Per Record
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Oscillography Commands (Read/Write Command)
3005
Oscillography Force Trigger
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
3011
Oscillography Clear Data
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
---
---
---
F204
(none)
0
Fault Report Indexing (Read Only Non-Volatile)
3020
Number Of Fault Reports
Fault Reports (Read Only Non-Volatile) (10 modules)
3030
Fault Time
3032
...Repeated for module number 2
3034
...Repeated for module number 3
3036
...Repeated for module number 4
3038
...Repeated for module number 5
303A
...Repeated for module number 6
303C
...Repeated for module number 7
303E
...Repeated for module number 8
3040
...Repeated for module number 9
3042
...Repeated for module number 10
Modbus File Transfer (Read/Write)
3100
Name of file to read
Modbus File Transfer (Read Only)
3200
Character position of current block within file
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
3202
Size of currently-available data block
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
3203
Block of data from requested file (122 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Event Recorder (Read Only)
3400
Events Since Last Clear
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
3402
Number of Available Events
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
3404
Event Recorder Last Cleared Date
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F050
0
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
0
Event Recorder (Read/Write Command)
3406
Event Recorder Clear Command
DCMA Input Values (Read Only) (24 modules)
34C0
DCMA Inputs x Value
34C2
...Repeated for module number 2
34C4
...Repeated for module number 3
34C6
...Repeated for module number 4
34C8
...Repeated for module number 5
34CA
...Repeated for module number 6
34CC
...Repeated for module number 7
34CE
...Repeated for module number 8
34D0
...Repeated for module number 9
34D2
...Repeated for module number 10
34D4
...Repeated for module number 11
34D6
...Repeated for module number 12
34D8
...Repeated for module number 13
34DA
...Repeated for module number 14
34DC
...Repeated for module number 15
34DE
...Repeated for module number 16
34E0
...Repeated for module number 17
B-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 8 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
34E2
...Repeated for module number 18
34E4
...Repeated for module number 19
34E6
...Repeated for module number 20
34E8
...Repeated for module number 21
34EA
...Repeated for module number 22
34EC
...Repeated for module number 23
34EE
...Repeated for module number 24
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
RTD Input Values (Read Only) (48 modules)
34F0
RTD Inputs x Value
34F1
...Repeated for module number 2
34F2
...Repeated for module number 3
34F3
...Repeated for module number 4
34F4
...Repeated for module number 5
34F5
...Repeated for module number 6
34F6
...Repeated for module number 7
34F7
...Repeated for module number 8
34F8
...Repeated for module number 9
34F9
...Repeated for module number 10
34FA
...Repeated for module number 11
34FB
...Repeated for module number 12
34FC
...Repeated for module number 13
34FD
...Repeated for module number 14
34FE
...Repeated for module number 15
34FF
...Repeated for module number 16
3500
...Repeated for module number 17
3501
...Repeated for module number 18
3502
...Repeated for module number 19
3503
...Repeated for module number 20
3504
...Repeated for module number 21
3505
...Repeated for module number 22
3506
...Repeated for module number 23
3507
...Repeated for module number 24
3508
...Repeated for module number 25
3509
...Repeated for module number 26
350A
...Repeated for module number 27
350B
...Repeated for module number 28
350C
...Repeated for module number 29
350D
...Repeated for module number 30
350E
...Repeated for module number 31
350F
...Repeated for module number 32
3510
...Repeated for module number 33
3511
...Repeated for module number 34
3512
...Repeated for module number 35
3513
...Repeated for module number 36
3514
...Repeated for module number 37
3515
...Repeated for module number 38
3516
...Repeated for module number 39
3517
...Repeated for module number 40
3518
...Repeated for module number 41
3519
...Repeated for module number 42
351A
...Repeated for module number 43
351B
...Repeated for module number 44
351C
...Repeated for module number 45
351D
...Repeated for module number 46
GE Multilin
-32768 to 32767
C60 Breaker Management Relay
°C
1
F002
0
B-15
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 9 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
351E
...Repeated for module number 47
351F
...Repeated for module number 48
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
1
F001
0
Ohm Input Values (Read Only) (2 modules)
B
3520
Ohm Inputs x Value
3521
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 65535
Expanded Platform Direct I/O Status (Read Only)
3560
Direct Device States, one per register (8 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F155
0 (Offline)
3570
Direct Input States, one per register (96 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
Passwords (Read/Write Command)
4000
Command Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write Setting)
4002
Setting Password Setting
Passwords (Read/Write)
4008
Command Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
400A
Setting Password Entry
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
Passwords (Read Only)
4010
Command Password Status
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
4011
Setting Password Status
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0 (Disabled)
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4040
Invoke and Scroll through User Display Menu Operand
User Display Invoke (Read/Write Setting)
4048
LED Test Function
4049
LED Test Control
Preferences (Read/Write Setting)
4050
Flash Message Time
0.5 to 10
s
0.1
F001
10
4051
Default Message Timeout
10 to 900
s
1
F001
300
4052
Default Message Intensity
0 to 3
---
1
F101
0 (25%)
4053
Screen Saver Feature
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
4054
Screen Saver Wait Time
1 to 65535
min
1
F001
30
4055
Current Cutoff Level
0.002 to 0.02
pu
0.001
F001
20
4056
Voltage Cutoff Level
0.1 to 1
V
0.1
F001
10
Communications (Read/Write Setting)
407E
COM1 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
0
407F
COM2 minimum response time
0 to 1000
ms
10
F001
0
4080
Modbus Slave Address
1 to 254
---
1
F001
254
4083
RS485 Com1 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
1
F112
8 (115200)
4084
RS485 Com1 Parity
0 to 2
---
1
F113
0 (None)
4085
RS485 Com2 Baud Rate
0 to 11
---
1
F112
8 (115200)
4086
RS485 Com2 Parity
0 to 2
---
1
F113
0 (None)
4087
IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
56554706
4089
IP Subnet Mask
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
4294966272
408B
Gateway IP Address
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
56554497
408D
Network Address NSAP
---
---
---
F074
0
4097
Default GOOSE Update Time
1 to 60
s
1
F001
60
409A
DNP Port
0 (NONE)
409B
DNP Address
409C
DNP Client Addresses (2 items)
0 to 4
---
1
F177
0 to 65519
---
1
F001
1
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
40A0
TCP Port Number for the Modbus protocol
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
502
40A1
TCP/UDP Port Number for the DNP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
20000
102
40A2
TCP Port Number for the UCA/MMS Protocol
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
40A3
TCP Port Number for the HTTP (Web Server) Protocol
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
80
40A4
Main UDP Port Number for the TFTP Protocol
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
69
40A5
Data Transfer UDP Port Numbers for the TFTP Protocol
(zero means “automatic”) (2 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
B-16
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 10 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
40A7
DNP Unsolicited Responses Function
40A8
DNP Unsolicited Responses Timeout
40A9
DNP Unsolicited Responses Max Retries
40AA
DNP Unsolicited Responses Destination Address
0 to 65519
---
1
F001
1
40AB
Ethernet Operation Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F192
0 (Half-Duplex)
40AC
DNP User Map Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
40AD
DNP Number of Sources used in Analog points list
1 to 6
---
1
F001
1
40AE
DNP Current Scale Factor
0 to 8
---
1
F194
2 (1)
40AF
DNP Voltage Scale Factor
0 to 8
---
1
F194
2 (1)
40B0
DNP Power Scale Factor
0 to 8
---
1
F194
2 (1)
40B1
DNP Energy Scale Factor
0 to 8
---
1
F194
2 (1)
40B2
DNP Other Scale Factor
0 to 8
---
1
F194
2 (1)
40B3
DNP Current Default Deadband
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40B4
DNP Voltage Default Deadband
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40B5
DNP Power Default Deadband
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40B6
DNP Energy Default Deadband
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40B7
DNP Other Default Deadband
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40B8
DNP IIN Time Sync Bit Period
1 to 10080
min
1
F001
1440
40B9
DNP Message Fragment Size
30 to 2048
---
1
F001
240
40BA
DNP Client Address 3
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
40BC
DNP Client Address 4
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
40BE
DNP Client Address 5
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
---
---
---
F203
“UCADevice”
1 (Enabled)
40C0
DNP Communications Reserved (8 items)
40C8
UCA Logical Device Name
40D0
GOOSE Function
40D1
UCA GLOBE.ST.LocRemDS Flexlogic Operand
40D2
UCA Communications Reserved (14 items)
40E0
TCP Port Number for the IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol
40E1
IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Function
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 60
s
1
F001
5
1 to 255
---
1
F001
10
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
2404
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
40E2
IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Common Address of ASDU
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
40E3
IEC 60870-5-104 Protocol Cyclic Data Tx Period
1 to 65535
s
1
F001
60
40E4
IEC Number of Sources used in M_ME_NC_1 point list
40E5
IEC Current Default Threshold
1 to 6
---
1
F001
1
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40E6
IEC Voltage Default Threshold
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40E7
IEC Power Default Threshold
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40E8
IEC Energy Default Threshold
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40E9
IEC Other Default Threshold
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
30000
40EA
IEC Communications Reserved (22 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
4100
DNP Binary Input Block of 16 Points (58 items)
0 to 58
---
1
F197
0 (Not Used)
0 (Disabled)
Simple Network Time Protocol (Read/Write Setting)
4168
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
4169
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) Server IP Addr
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F003
0
416B
Simple Network Time Protocol (SNTP) UDP Port No.
1 to 65535
---
1
F001
123
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
0 to 7
---
1
F178
1 (1 min)
---
---
---
F600
0
0 to 235959
---
1
F050
0
Data Logger Commands (Read/Write Command)
4170
Clear Data Logger
Data Logger (Read/Write Setting)
4180
Data Logger Rate
4181
Data Logger Channel Settings (16 items)
Clock (Read/Write Command)
41A0
RTC Set Time
Clock (Read/Write Setting)
41A2
SR Date Format
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F051
0
41A4
SR Time Format
0 to 4294967295
---
1
F052
0
41A6
IRIG-B Signal Type
0 to 2
---
1
F114
0 (None)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-17
B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 11 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Fault Report Settings and Commands (Read/Write Setting)
41B0
Fault Report Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
41B1
Fault Report Trigger
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
Fault Report Settings and Commands (Read/Write Command)
B
41B2
Fault Reports Clear Data Command
Oscillography (Read/Write Setting)
41C0
Oscillography Number of Records
1 to 64
---
1
F001
15
41C1
Oscillography Trigger Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F118
0 (Auto Overwrite)
50
41C2
Oscillography Trigger Position
0 to 100
%
1
F001
41C3
Oscillography Trigger Source
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
41C4
Oscillography AC Input Waveforms
0 to 4
---
1
F183
2 (16 samples/cycle)
41D0
Oscillography Analog Channel x (16 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F600
0
4200
Oscillography Digital Channel x (63 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Trip and Alarm LEDs (Read/Write Setting)
4260
Trip LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4261
Alarm LED Input FlexLogic Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
User Programmable LEDs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
4280
FlexLogic Operand to Activate LED
4281
User LED type (latched or self-resetting)
4282
...Repeated for module number 2
4284
...Repeated for module number 3
4286
...Repeated for module number 4
4288
...Repeated for module number 5
428A
...Repeated for module number 6
428C
...Repeated for module number 7
428E
...Repeated for module number 8
4290
...Repeated for module number 9
4292
...Repeated for module number 10
4294
...Repeated for module number 11
4296
...Repeated for module number 12
4298
...Repeated for module number 13
429A
...Repeated for module number 14
429C
...Repeated for module number 15
429E
...Repeated for module number 16
42A0
...Repeated for module number 17
42A2
...Repeated for module number 18
42A4
...Repeated for module number 19
42A6
...Repeated for module number 20
42A8
...Repeated for module number 21
42AA
...Repeated for module number 22
42AC
...Repeated for module number 23
42AE
...Repeated for module number 24
42B0
...Repeated for module number 25
42B2
...Repeated for module number 26
42B4
...Repeated for module number 27
42B6
...Repeated for module number 28
42B8
...Repeated for module number 29
42BA
...Repeated for module number 30
42BC
...Repeated for module number 31
42BE
...Repeated for module number 32
42C0
...Repeated for module number 33
42C2
...Repeated for module number 34
42C4
...Repeated for module number 35
42C6
...Repeated for module number 36
B-18
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 1
---
1
F127
1 (Self-Reset)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 12 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
42C8
...Repeated for module number 37
42CA
...Repeated for module number 38
42CC
...Repeated for module number 39
42CE
...Repeated for module number 40
42D0
...Repeated for module number 41
42D2
...Repeated for module number 42
42D4
...Repeated for module number 43
42D6
...Repeated for module number 44
42D8
...Repeated for module number 45
42DA
...Repeated for module number 46
42DC
...Repeated for module number 47
42DE
...Repeated for module number 48
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Installation (Read/Write Setting)
43E0
Relay Programmed State
43E1
Relay Name
0 to 1
---
1
F133
0 (Not Programmed)
---
---
---
F202
“Relay-1”
1 (Enabled)
User Programmable Self Tests (Read/Write Setting)
4441
User Programmable Detect Ring Break Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
4442
User Programmable Direct Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
4443
User Programmable Remote Device Off Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
4444
User Programmable Primary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
4445
User Programmable Secondary Ethernet Fail Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
4446
User Programmable Battery Fail Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
4447
User Programmable SNTP Fail Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
4448
User Programmable IRIG-B Fail Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
1 to 65000
A
1
F001
1
0 to 1
---
1
F123
0 (1 A)
CT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4480
Phase CT Primary
4481
Phase CT Secondary
4482
Ground CT Primary
4483
Ground CT Secondary
4484
...Repeated for module number 2
4488
...Repeated for module number 3
448C
...Repeated for module number 4
4490
...Repeated for module number 5
4494
...Repeated for module number 6
1 to 65000
A
1
F001
1
0 to 1
---
1
F123
0 (1 A)
VT Settings (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
4500
Phase VT Connection
0 to 1
---
1
F100
0 (Wye)
4501
Phase VT Secondary
50 to 240
V
0.1
F001
664
4502
Phase VT Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
1
F060
1
4504
Auxiliary VT Connection
0 to 6
---
1
F166
1 (Vag)
4505
Auxiliary VT Secondary
50 to 240
V
0.1
F001
664
4506
Auxiliary VT Ratio
1 to 24000
:1
1
F060
1
4508
...Repeated for module number 2
4510
...Repeated for module number 3
Source Settings (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
4580
Source Name
---
---
---
F206
“SRC 1 “
4583
Source Phase CT
0 to 63
---
1
F400
0
4584
Source Ground CT
0 to 63
---
1
F400
0
4585
Source Phase VT
0 to 63
---
1
F400
0
4586
Source Auxiliary VT
0 to 63
---
1
F400
0
4587
...Repeated for module number 2
458E
...Repeated for module number 3
4595
...Repeated for module number 4
459C
...Repeated for module number 5
45A3
...Repeated for module number 6
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-19
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 13 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Power System (Read/Write Setting)
B
4600
Nominal Frequency
25 to 60
Hz
1
F001
60
4601
Phase Rotation
0 to 1
---
1
F106
0 (ABC)
4602
Frequency And Phase Reference
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
4603
Frequency Tracking Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
0.01 to 250
fi
0.01
F001
300
25 to 90
°
1
F001
75
0.01 to 650
fi
0.01
F001
900
Line (Read/Write Setting)
46D0
Line Pos Seq Impedance
46D1
Line Pos Seq Impedance Angle
46D2
Line Zero Seq Impedance
46D3
Line Zero Seq Impedance Angle
46D4
Line Length Units
46D5
Line Length
25 to 90
°
1
F001
75
0 to 1
---
1
F147
0 (km)
0 to 2000
---
0.1
F001
1000
1 to 60
s
1
F001
30
0 (Disabled)
Breaker Control Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
46F0
UCA XCBR x SelTimOut
Breaker Control (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4700
Breaker 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
4701
Breaker 1 Name
---
---
---
F206
“Bkr 1 “
4704
Breaker 1 Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F157
0 (3-Pole)
4705
Breaker 1 Open
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4706
Breaker 1 Close
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4707
Breaker 1 Phase A 3 Pole
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4708
Breaker 1 Phase B
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4709
Breaker 1 Phase C
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
470A
Breaker 1 External Alarm
0
470B
Breaker 1 Alarm Delay
470D
Breaker 1 Push Button Control
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0 to 1000000
s
0.001
F003
0
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
470E
Breaker 1 Manual Close Recal Time
0 to 1000000
s
0.001
F003
0
4710
Breaker 1 UCA XCBR x SBOClass
1 to 2
---
1
F001
1
0 (Disabled)
4711
Breaker 1 UCA XCBR x SBOEna
0 to 1
---
1
F102
4712
Breaker 1 Out Of Service
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4713
UCA XCBR PwrSupSt Bit 0 Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4714
UCA XCBR x PresSt Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4715
UCA XCBR x TrpCoil Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
4716
Reserved (2 items)
0 to 65535
1
F001
0
4718
...Repeated for module number 2
Synchrocheck (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
4780
Synchrocheck 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
4781
Synchrocheck 1 V1 Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
4782
Synchrocheck 1 V2 Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
1 (SRC 2)
4783
Synchrocheck 1 Max Volt Diff
0 to 100000
V
1
F060
10000
4785
Synchrocheck 1 Max Angle Diff
0 to 100
°
1
F001
30
4786
Synchrocheck 1 Max Freq Diff
0 to 2
Hz
0.01
F001
100
4787
Synchrocheck 1 Dead Source Select
0 to 5
---
1
F176
1 (LV1 and DV2)
4788
Synchrocheck 1 Dead V1 Max Volt
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
30
4789
Synchrocheck 1 Dead V2 Max Volt
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
30
478A
Synchrocheck 1 Live V1 Min Volt
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
70
478B
Synchrocheck 1 Live V2 Min Volt
0 to 1.25
pu
0.01
F001
70
478C
Synchrocheck 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
478D
Synchrocheck 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
478E
Synchrocheck 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
478F
Synchrocheck 1 Frequency Hysteresis
0 to 0.1
Hz
0.01
F001
6
4790
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 2
---
1
F139
0 (Therm Exponential)
Demand (Read/Write Setting)
47D0
B-20
Demand Current Method
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 14 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
47D1
Demand Power Method
47D2
Demand Interval
47D3
Demand Input
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 2
---
1
F139
0 (Therm Exponential)
0 to 5
---
1
F132
2 (15 MIN)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
0 to 65535
ms
1
F011
0
0 to 65535
ms
1
F011
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Demand (Read/Write Command)
47D4
Demand Clear Record
B
Flexcurve A (Read/Write Setting)
4800
FlexCurve A (120 items)
Flexcurve B (Read/Write Setting)
48F0
FlexCurve B (120 items)
Modbus User Map (Read/Write Setting)
4A00
Modbus Address Settings for User Map (256 items)
User Displays Settings (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
4C00
User display top line text
---
---
---
F202
““
4C0A
User display bottom line text
---
---
---
F202
““
4C14
Modbus addresses of displayed items (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
4C19
Reserved (7 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
4C20
...Repeated for module number 2
4C40
...Repeated for module number 3
4C60
...Repeated for module number 4
4C80
...Repeated for module number 5
4CA0
...Repeated for module number 6
4CC0
...Repeated for module number 7
4CE0
...Repeated for module number 8
User Programmable Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (12 modules)
4E00
User Programmable Pushbutton Function
0 to 2
---
1
F109
2 (Disabled)
4E01
Programmable Pushbutton Top Line
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E0B
Prog Pushbutton On Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E15
Prog Pushbutton Off Text
---
---
---
F202
(none)
4E1F
Programmable Pushbutton Drop-Out Time
0 to 60
s
0.05
F001
0
4E20
Programmable Pushbutton Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
4E21
User Programmable Pushbutton Events
4E22
Programmable Pushbutton Reserved (2 items)
4E24
...Repeated for module number 2
4E48
...Repeated for module number 3
4E6C
...Repeated for module number 4
4E90
...Repeated for module number 5
4EB4
...Repeated for module number 6
4ED8
...Repeated for module number 7
4EFC
...Repeated for module number 8
4F20
...Repeated for module number 9
4F44
...Repeated for module number 10
4F68
...Repeated for module number 11
4F8C
...Repeated for module number 12
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
16384
0 (millisecond)
FlexLogic™ (Read/Write Setting)
5000
FlexLogic Entry (512 items)
FlexLogic™ Timers (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
5800
FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Type
0 to 2
---
1
F129
5801
FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 60000
---
1
F001
0
5802
FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Dropout Delay
0 to 60000
---
1
F001
0
5803
FlexLogic™ Timer 1 Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
5808
...Repeated for module number 2
5810
...Repeated for module number 3
5818
...Repeated for module number 4
5820
...Repeated for module number 5
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-21
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 15 of 34)
ADDR
B
REGISTER NAME
5828
...Repeated for module number 6
5830
...Repeated for module number 7
5838
...Repeated for module number 8
5840
...Repeated for module number 9
5848
...Repeated for module number 10
5850
...Repeated for module number 11
5858
...Repeated for module number 12
5860
...Repeated for module number 13
5868
...Repeated for module number 14
5870
...Repeated for module number 15
5878
...Repeated for module number 16
5880
...Repeated for module number 17
5888
...Repeated for module number 18
5890
...Repeated for module number 19
5898
...Repeated for module number 20
58A0
...Repeated for module number 21
58A8
...Repeated for module number 22
58B0
...Repeated for module number 23
58B8
...Repeated for module number 24
58C0
...Repeated for module number 25
58C8
...Repeated for module number 26
58D0
...Repeated for module number 27
58D8
...Repeated for module number 28
58E0
...Repeated for module number 29
58E8
...Repeated for module number 30
58F0
...Repeated for module number 31
58F8
...Repeated for module number 32
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 (Disabled)
Phase TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5900
Phase TOC Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
5901
Phase TOC Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5902
Phase TOC Input
0 to 1
---
1
F122
0 (Phasor)
5903
Phase TOC Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5904
Phase TOC Curve
0 to 16
---
1
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5905
Phase TOC Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5906
Phase TOC Reset
0 to 1
---
1
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5907
Phase TOC Voltage Restraint
0 (Disabled)
5908
Phase TOC Block For Each Phase (3 items)
590B
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Phase TOC Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
590C
Phase TOC Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
590D
Reserved (3 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5910
...Repeated for module number 2
5920
...Repeated for module number 3
5930
...Repeated for module number 4
5940
...Repeated for module number 5
5950
...Repeated for module number 6
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5A00
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5A01
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5A02
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5A03
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5A04
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5A05
Phase Inst OC 1 Block for each phase (3 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
5A08
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5A09
Phase Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
B-22
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 16 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
5A0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5A10
...Repeated for module number 2
5A20
...Repeated for module number 3
5A30
...Repeated for module number 4
5A40
...Repeated for module number 5
5A50
...Repeated for module number 6
5A60
...Repeated for module number 7
5A70
...Repeated for module number 8
5A80
...Repeated for module number 9
5A90
...Repeated for module number 10
5AA0
...Repeated for module number 11
5AB0
...Repeated for module number 12
B
Neutral TOC (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5B00
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
5B01
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (Disabled)
0 (SRC 1)
5B02
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
1
F122
0 (Phasor)
5B03
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5B04
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
1
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5B05
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5B06
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
1
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5B07
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
5B08
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5B09
Neutral Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5B0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5B10
...Repeated for module number 2
5B20
...Repeated for module number 3
5B30
...Repeated for module number 4
5B40
...Repeated for module number 5
5B50
...Repeated for module number 6
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5C00
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5C01
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5C02
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5C03
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5C04
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5C05
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
5C06
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5C07
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5C08
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5C10
...Repeated for module number 2
5C20
...Repeated for module number 3
5C30
...Repeated for module number 4
5C40
...Repeated for module number 5
5C50
...Repeated for module number 6
5C60
...Repeated for module number 7
5C70
...Repeated for module number 8
5C80
...Repeated for module number 9
5C90
...Repeated for module number 10
5CA0
...Repeated for module number 11
5CB0
...Repeated for module number 12
0 (Disabled)
Ground Time Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (6 modules)
5D00
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
5D01
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5D02
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Input
0 to 1
---
1
F122
0 (Phasor)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-23
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 17 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
5D03
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
DEFAULT
1000
5D04
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Curve
0 to 16
---
1
F103
0 (IEEE Mod Inv)
5D05
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Multiplier
0 to 600
---
0.01
F001
100
5D06
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Reset
0 to 1
---
1
F104
0 (Instantaneous)
5D07
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
5D08
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5D09
Ground Time Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5D0A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5D10
...Repeated for module number 2
5D20
...Repeated for module number 3
5D30
...Repeated for module number 4
5D40
...Repeated for module number 5
5D50
...Repeated for module number 6
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (12 modules)
5E00
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
5E01
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5E02
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Pickup
0 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1000
5E03
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5E04
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
0
5E05
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
5E06
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
5E07
Ground Instantaneous Overcurrent 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
5E08
Reserved (8 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
5E10
...Repeated for module number 2
5E20
...Repeated for module number 3
5E30
...Repeated for module number 4
5E40
...Repeated for module number 5
5E50
...Repeated for module number 6
5E60
...Repeated for module number 7
5E70
...Repeated for module number 8
5E80
...Repeated for module number 9
5E90
...Repeated for module number 10
5EA0
...Repeated for module number 11
5EB0
...Repeated for module number 12
Sensitive Directional Power (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
66A0
Sensitive Directional Power Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
66A1
Sensitive Directional Power Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
66A2
Sensitive Directional Power RCA
0 to 359
°
1
F001
0
66A3
Sensitive Directional Power Calibration
0 to 0.95
°
0.05
F001
0
66A4
Sensitive Directional Power STG1 SMIN
-1.2 to 1.2
pu
0.001
F002
100
66A5
Sensitive Directional Power STG1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
50
66A6
Sensitive Directional Power STG2 SMIN
-1.2 to 1.2
pu
0.001
F002
100
2000
66A7
Sensitive Directional Power STG2 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
66A8
Sensitive Directional Power Block
---
---
---
F001
0
66A9
Sensitive Directional Power Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
66AA
Sensitive Directional Power Events
66AB
Sensitive Directional Power X Reserved (5 items)
66B0
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Autoreclose 1P 3P (Read/Write Setting)
6890
Autoreclose 1 Mode
0 to 3
---
1
F080
0 (1 & 3 Pole)
6891
Autoreclose 1 Maximum Number of Shots
1 to 2
---
1
F001
2
6892
Autoreclose 1 Block Breaker 1
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
6893
Autoreclose 1 Close Time Breaker 1
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
10
6894
Autoreclose 1 BKR Man Close
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B-24
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 18 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
6895
Autoreclose 1 Function
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
6896
Autoreclose 1 Blk Time Mnl Cls
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
1000
6897
Autoreclose 1 1P Init
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
6898
Autoreclose 1 3P Init
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
6899
Autoreclose 1 3P TD Init
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
689A
Autoreclose 1 Multi P Fault
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
689B
Autoreclose 1 BKR 1 Pole Open
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
689C
Autoreclose 1 BKR 3 Pole Open
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
689D
Autoreclose 1 3P Dead Time 1
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
50
689E
Autoreclose 1 3P Dead Time 2
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
120
689F
Autoreclose 1 Extend Dead T1
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
68A0
Autoreclose 1 Dead T1 Extension
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
50
68A1
Autoreclose 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
68A2
Autoreclose 1 Reset Time
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
6000
68A3
Autoreclose 1 BKR Closed
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
68A4
Autoreclose 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
68A5
Autoreclose 1 Pause
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
500
68A6
Autoreclose 1 Inc Seq Time
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
68A7
Autoreclose 1 Block Breaker 2
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
68A8
Autoreclose 1 Close Time Breaker 2
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
10
68A9
Autoreclose 1 Transfer 1 to 2
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
68AA
Autoreclose 1 Transfer 2 to 1
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
B
68AB
Autoreclose 1 Breaker 1 Fail Option
0 to 1
---
1
F081
0 (Continue)
68AC
Autoreclose 1 Breaker 2 Fail Option
0 to 1
---
1
F081
0 (Continue)
68AD
Autoreclose 1 1P Dead Time
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
100
68AE
Autoreclose 1 BKR Sequence
0 to 4
---
1
F082
3 (1 - 2)
68AF
Autoreclose 1 Transfer Time
0 to 655.35
s
0.01
F001
400
68B0
Autoreclose 1 Event
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
68B1
Reserved (16 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
Phase Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7000
Phase Undervoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7001
Phase Undervoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7002
Phase Undervoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
1000
7003
Phase Undervoltage 1 Curve
0 to 1
---
1
F111
0 (Definite Time)
7004
Phase Undervoltage 1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7005
Phase Undervoltage 1 Minimum Voltage
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
100
7006
Phase Undervoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7007
Phase Undervoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7008
Phase Undervoltage 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7009
Phase UV Measurement Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F186
0 (Phase to Ground)
700A
Reserved (6 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
7013
...Repeated for module number 2
0 (Disabled)
Breaker Failure (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
7200
Breaker Failure 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
7201
Breaker Failure 1 Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F157
0 (3-Pole)
7208
Breaker Failure 1 Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7209
Breaker Failure 1 Amp Supervision
0 to 1
---
1
F126
1 (Yes)
720A
Breaker Failure 1 Use Seal-In
0 to 1
---
1
F126
1 (Yes)
0
720B
Breaker Failure 1 Three Pole Initiate
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
720C
Breaker Failure 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
720D
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Supv Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
720E
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Supv Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
720F
Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 1
0 to 1
---
1
F126
1 (Yes)
7210
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 1 Pickup
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-25
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 19 of 34)
ADDR
B
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
1
F126
1 (Yes)
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
0 to 1
---
1
F126
1 (Yes)
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase A/3P
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Test On
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Hiset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
1050
7211
Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 2
7212
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 2 Pickup
7213
Breaker Failure 1 Use Timer 3
7214
Breaker Failure 1 Timer 3 Pickup
7215
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase A/3P
7216
7217
7218
7219
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Hiset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
721A
Breaker Failure 1 Phase Amp Loset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
721B
Breaker Failure 1 Neutral Amp Loset Pickup
0.001 to 30
pu
0.001
F001
1050
0
721C
Breaker Failure 1 Loset Time
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
721D
Breaker Failure 1 Trip Dropout Delay
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
721E
Breaker Failure 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
721F
Breaker Failure 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7220
Breaker Failure 1 Phase A Initiate
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7221
Breaker Failure 1 Phase B Initiate
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7222
Breaker Failure 1 Phase C Initiate
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7223
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase B
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7224
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 1 Phase C
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7225
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase B
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7226
Breaker Failure 1 Breaker Status 2 Phase C
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7227
...Repeated for module number 2
Breaker Arcing Current Settings (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
72C0
Breaker x Arcing Amp Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
72C1
Breaker x Arcing Amp Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
72C2
Breaker x Arcing Amp Init
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
72C3
Breaker x Arcing Amp Delay
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
72C4
Breaker x Arcing Amp Limit
0 to 50000
kA2-cyc
1
F001
1000
72C5
Breaker x Arcing Amp Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
72C6
Breaker x Arcing Amp Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
72C7
Breaker x Arcing Amp Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
72C8
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
“DCMA Ip 1 “
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
---
---
---
F206
“mA”
6 (4 to 20 mA)
DCMA Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (24 modules)
7300
DCMA Inputs x Function
7301
DCMA Inputs x ID
7307
DCMA Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items)
730B
DCMA Inputs x Units
730E
DCMA Inputs x Range
0 to 6
---
1
F173
730F
DCMA Inputs x Minimum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
4000
7311
DCMA Inputs x Maximum Value
-9999.999 to 9999.999
---
0.001
F004
20000
7313
DCMA Inputs x Reserved (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
7318
...Repeated for module number 2
7330
...Repeated for module number 3
7348
...Repeated for module number 4
7360
...Repeated for module number 5
7378
...Repeated for module number 6
7390
...Repeated for module number 7
73A8
...Repeated for module number 8
73C0
...Repeated for module number 9
73D8
...Repeated for module number 10
73F0
...Repeated for module number 11
7408
...Repeated for module number 12
7420
...Repeated for module number 13
B-26
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 20 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
7438
...Repeated for module number 14
7450
...Repeated for module number 15
7468
...Repeated for module number 16
7480
...Repeated for module number 17
7498
...Repeated for module number 18
74B0
...Repeated for module number 19
74C8
...Repeated for module number 20
74E0
...Repeated for module number 21
74F8
...Repeated for module number 22
7510
...Repeated for module number 23
7528
...Repeated for module number 24
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
RTD Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (48 modules)
7540
RTD Inputs x Function
7541
RTD Inputs x ID
7547
RTD Inputs x Reserved 1 (4 items)
754B
RTD Inputs x Type
754C
RTD Inputs x Reserved 2 (4 items)
7550
...Repeated for module number 2
7560
...Repeated for module number 3
7570
...Repeated for module number 4
7580
...Repeated for module number 5
7590
...Repeated for module number 6
75A0
...Repeated for module number 7
75B0
...Repeated for module number 8
75C0
...Repeated for module number 9
75D0
...Repeated for module number 10
75E0
...Repeated for module number 11
75F0
...Repeated for module number 12
7600
...Repeated for module number 13
7610
...Repeated for module number 14
7620
...Repeated for module number 15
7630
...Repeated for module number 16
7640
...Repeated for module number 17
7650
...Repeated for module number 18
7660
...Repeated for module number 19
7670
...Repeated for module number 20
7680
...Repeated for module number 21
7690
...Repeated for module number 22
76A0
...Repeated for module number 23
76B0
...Repeated for module number 24
76C0
...Repeated for module number 25
76D0
...Repeated for module number 26
76E0
...Repeated for module number 27
76F0
...Repeated for module number 28
7700
...Repeated for module number 29
7710
...Repeated for module number 30
7720
...Repeated for module number 31
7730
...Repeated for module number 32
7740
...Repeated for module number 33
7750
...Repeated for module number 34
7760
...Repeated for module number 35
7770
...Repeated for module number 36
7780
...Repeated for module number 37
7790
...Repeated for module number 38
GE Multilin
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
“RTD Ip 1 “
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
0 to 3
---
1
F174
0 (100 Ω Platinum)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-27
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 21 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
77A0
...Repeated for module number 39
77B0
...Repeated for module number 40
77C0
...Repeated for module number 41
77D0
...Repeated for module number 42
77E0
...Repeated for module number 43
77F0
...Repeated for module number 44
7800
...Repeated for module number 45
7810
...Repeated for module number 46
7820
...Repeated for module number 47
7830
...Repeated for module number 48
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0 to 1
---
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
F205
0 to 65535
“Ohm Ip 1 “
---
1
F001
0
Ohm Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (2 modules)
7840
Ohm Inputs x Function
7841
Ohm Inputs x ID
7847
Ohm Inputs x Reserved (9 items)
7850
...Repeated for module number 2
Neutral Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F00
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F01
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F02
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 1.25
pu
0.001
F001
300
7F03
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7F04
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7F05
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7F06
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7F07
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Events
7F08
Neutral Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items)
7F10
...Repeated for module number 2
7F20
...Repeated for module number 3
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
Auxiliary Overvoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F30
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F31
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F32
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
300
7F33
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7F34
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reset Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7F35
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7F36
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
7F37
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Events
7F38
Auxiliary Overvoltage 1 Reserved (8 items)
7F40
...Repeated for module number 2
7F50
...Repeated for module number 3
Auxiliary Undervoltage (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (3 modules)
7F60
Auxiliary UV 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
7F61
Auxiliary UV 1 Signal Source
0 to 5
---
1
F167
0 (SRC 1)
7F62
Auxiliary UV 1 Pickup
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
700
7F63
Auxiliary UV 1 Delay
0 to 600
s
0.01
F001
100
7F64
Auxiliary UV 1 Curve
0 to 1
---
1
F111
0 (Definite Time)
100
7F65
Auxiliary UV 1 Minimum Voltage
0 to 3
pu
0.001
F001
7F66
Auxiliary UV 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
7F67
Auxiliary UV 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
7F68
Auxiliary UV 1 Events
7F69
Auxiliary UV 1 Reserved (7 items)
7F70
...Repeated for module number 2
7F80
...Repeated for module number 3
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 65535
---
1
F001
0
2 to 90
Hz
0.01
F001
0
Frequency (Read Only)
8000
B-28
Tracking Frequency
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 22 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
---
---
---
F300
0
FlexState Settings (Read/Write Setting)
8800
FlexState Parameters (256 items)
FlexElement (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
9000
FlexElement 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
9001
FlexElement 1 Name
---
---
---
F206
“FxE 1 “
9004
FlexElement 1 InputP
0 to 65535
---
1
F600
0
9005
FlexElement 1 InputM
0 to 65535
---
1
F600
0
B
9006
FlexElement 1 Compare
0 to 1
---
1
F516
0 (LEVEL)
9007
FlexElement 1 Input
0 to 1
---
1
F515
0 (SIGNED)
0 (OVER)
9008
FlexElement 1 Direction
0 to 1
---
1
F517
9009
FlexElement 1 Hysteresis
0.1 to 50
%
0.1
F001
30
900A
FlexElement 1 Pickup
-90 to 90
pu
0.001
F004
1000
900C
FlexElement 1 DeltaT Units
0 to 2
---
1
F518
0 (Milliseconds)
900D
FlexElement 1 DeltaT
20 to 86400
---
1
F003
20
900F
FlexElement 1 Pickup Delay
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
9010
FlexElement 1 Reset Delay
0 to 65.535
s
0.001
F001
0
9011
FlexElement 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
9012
FlexElement 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
9013
FlexElement 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
9014
...Repeated for module number 2
-2147483.647 to
2147483.647
---
0.001
F004
0
0 to 5
---
1
F001
0
9028
...Repeated for module number 3
903C
...Repeated for module number 4
9050
...Repeated for module number 5
9064
...Repeated for module number 6
9078
...Repeated for module number 7
908C
...Repeated for module number 8
90A0
...Repeated for module number 9
90B4
...Repeated for module number 10
90C8
...Repeated for module number 11
90DC
...Repeated for module number 12
90F0
...Repeated for module number 13
9104
...Repeated for module number 14
9118
...Repeated for module number 15
912C
...Repeated for module number 16
FlexElement Actuals (Read Only) (16 modules)
9A01
FlexElement 1 Actual
9A03
...Repeated for module number 2
9A05
...Repeated for module number 3
9A07
...Repeated for module number 4
9A09
...Repeated for module number 5
9A0B
...Repeated for module number 6
9A0D
...Repeated for module number 7
9A0F
...Repeated for module number 8
9A11
...Repeated for module number 9
9A13
...Repeated for module number 10
9A15
...Repeated for module number 11
9A17
...Repeated for module number 12
9A19
...Repeated for module number 13
9A1B
...Repeated for module number 14
9A1D
...Repeated for module number 15
9A1F
...Repeated for module number 16
Setting Groups (Read/Write Setting)
A000
Setting Group for Modbus Comms (0 means group 1)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-29
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 23 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
A001
Setting Groups Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
DEFAULT
0
A002
FlexLogic Operands to Activate Groups 2 to 8 (5 items)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A009
Setting Group Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
A00A
Setting Group Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 5
---
1
F001
0
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
Setting Groups (Read Only)
A00B
Current Setting Group
VT Fuse Failure (Read/Write Setting) (6 modules)
A040
VT Fuse Failure Function
A041
...Repeated for module number 2
A042
...Repeated for module number 3
A043
...Repeated for module number 4
A044
...Repeated for module number 5
A045
...Repeated for module number 6
Selector Switch Actuals (Read Only)
A400
Selector 1 Position
1 to 7
---
1
F001
0
A401
Selector 2 Position
1 to 7
---
1
F001
1
0 (Disabled)
Selector Switch (Read/Write Grouped Setting) (2 modules)
A410
Selector 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
A411
Selector 1 Range
1 to 7
---
1
F001
7
A412
Selector 1 Timeout
3 to 60
s
0.1
F001
50
A413
Selector 1 Step Up
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A414
Selector 1 Step Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F083
0 (Time-out)
A415
Selector 1 Ack
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A416
Selector 1 Bit0
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A417
Selector 1 Bit1
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A418
Selector 1 Bit2
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
A419
Selector 1 Bit Mode
0 to 1
---
1
F083
0 (Time-out)
A41A
Selector 1 Bit Ack
A41B
Selector 1 Power Up Mode
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 2
---
1
F084
0 (Restore)
A41C
Selector 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
A41D
Selector 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
A41E
Selector 1 Reserved (10 items)
---
---
---
---
---
A428
...Repeated for module number 2
0 to 65535
ms
1
F011
0
0 to 65535
ms
1
F011
0
Flexcurve C (Read/Write Setting)
AC00
FlexCurve C (120 items)
Flexcurve D (Read/Write Setting)
AC78
FlexCurve D (120 items)
Non Volatile Latches (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
AD00
Latch 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
AD01
Latch 1 Type
0 to 1
---
1
F519
0 (Reset Dominant)
0
AD02
Latch 1 Set
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
AD03
Latch 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
AD04
Latch 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
AD05
Latch 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
AD06
Latch 1 Reserved (4 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
AD0A
...Repeated for module number 2
AD14
...Repeated for module number 3
AD1E
...Repeated for module number 4
AD28
...Repeated for module number 5
AD32
...Repeated for module number 6
AD3C
...Repeated for module number 7
AD46
...Repeated for module number 8
AD50
...Repeated for module number 9
AD5A
...Repeated for module number 10
B-30
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 24 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
AD64
...Repeated for module number 11
AD6E
...Repeated for module number 12
AD78
...Repeated for module number 13
AD82
...Repeated for module number 14
AD8C
...Repeated for module number 15
AD96
...Repeated for module number 16
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Digital Elements (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
B000
Digital Element 1 Function
B001
Digital Element 1 Name
B015
Digital Element 1 Input
B016
Digital Element 1 Pickup Delay
B018
Digital Element 1 Reset Delay
B01A
Digital Element 1 Block
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F203
“Dig Element 1 “
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 999999.999
s
0.001
F003
0
0 to 999999.999
s
0.001
F003
0
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B01B
Digital Element 1 Target
0 to 2
---
1
F109
0 (Self-reset)
B01C
Digital Element 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
B01D
Digital Element 1 Reserved (3 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
B020
...Repeated for module number 2
B040
...Repeated for module number 3
B060
...Repeated for module number 4
B080
...Repeated for module number 5
B0A0
...Repeated for module number 6
B0C0
...Repeated for module number 7
B0E0
...Repeated for module number 8
B100
...Repeated for module number 9
B120
...Repeated for module number 10
B140
...Repeated for module number 11
B160
...Repeated for module number 12
B180
...Repeated for module number 13
B1A0
...Repeated for module number 14
B1C0
...Repeated for module number 15
B1E0
...Repeated for module number 16
Digital Counter (Read/Write Setting) (8 modules)
B300
Digital Counter 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
B301
Digital Counter 1 Name
---
---
---
F205
“Counter 1 “
B307
Digital Counter 1 Units
---
---
---
F206
(none)
B30A
Digital Counter 1 Block
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B30B
Digital Counter 1 Up
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B30C
Digital Counter 1 Down
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B30D
Digital Counter 1 Preset
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
1
F004
0
B30F
Digital Counter 1 Compare
-2147483647 to
2147483647
---
1
F004
0
0
B311
Digital Counter 1 Reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
B312
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B313
Digital Counter 1 Freeze/Count
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B314
Digital Counter 1 Set To Preset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
B315
Digital Counter 1 Reserved (11 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
B320
...Repeated for module number 2
B340
...Repeated for module number 3
B360
...Repeated for module number 4
B380
...Repeated for module number 5
B3A0
...Repeated for module number 6
B3C0
...Repeated for module number 7
B3E0
...Repeated for module number 8
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-31
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 25 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
B
C000
Contact Input x Name
---
---
---
F205
“Cont Ip 1 “
C006
Contact Input x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
C007
Contact Input x Debounce Time
0 to 16
ms
0.5
F001
20
C008
...Repeated for module number 2
C010
...Repeated for module number 3
C018
...Repeated for module number 4
C020
...Repeated for module number 5
C028
...Repeated for module number 6
C030
...Repeated for module number 7
C038
...Repeated for module number 8
C040
...Repeated for module number 9
C048
...Repeated for module number 10
C050
...Repeated for module number 11
C058
...Repeated for module number 12
C060
...Repeated for module number 13
C068
...Repeated for module number 14
C070
...Repeated for module number 15
C078
...Repeated for module number 16
C080
...Repeated for module number 17
C088
...Repeated for module number 18
C090
...Repeated for module number 19
C098
...Repeated for module number 20
C0A0
...Repeated for module number 21
C0A8
...Repeated for module number 22
C0B0
...Repeated for module number 23
C0B8
...Repeated for module number 24
C0C0
...Repeated for module number 25
C0C8
...Repeated for module number 26
C0D0
...Repeated for module number 27
C0D8
...Repeated for module number 28
C0E0
...Repeated for module number 29
C0E8
...Repeated for module number 30
C0F0
...Repeated for module number 31
C0F8
...Repeated for module number 32
C100
...Repeated for module number 33
C108
...Repeated for module number 34
C110
...Repeated for module number 35
C118
...Repeated for module number 36
C120
...Repeated for module number 37
C128
...Repeated for module number 38
C130
...Repeated for module number 39
C138
...Repeated for module number 40
C140
...Repeated for module number 41
C148
...Repeated for module number 42
C150
...Repeated for module number 43
C158
...Repeated for module number 44
C160
...Repeated for module number 45
C168
...Repeated for module number 46
C170
...Repeated for module number 47
C178
...Repeated for module number 48
C180
...Repeated for module number 49
C188
...Repeated for module number 50
C190
...Repeated for module number 51
B-32
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 26 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
C198
...Repeated for module number 52
C1A0
...Repeated for module number 53
C1A8
...Repeated for module number 54
C1B0
...Repeated for module number 55
C1B8
...Repeated for module number 56
C1C0
...Repeated for module number 57
C1C8
...Repeated for module number 58
C1D0
...Repeated for module number 59
C1D8
...Repeated for module number 60
C1E0
...Repeated for module number 61
C1E8
...Repeated for module number 62
C1F0
...Repeated for module number 63
C1F8
...Repeated for module number 64
C200
...Repeated for module number 65
C208
...Repeated for module number 66
C210
...Repeated for module number 67
C218
...Repeated for module number 68
C220
...Repeated for module number 69
C228
...Repeated for module number 70
C230
...Repeated for module number 71
C238
...Repeated for module number 72
C240
...Repeated for module number 73
C248
...Repeated for module number 74
C250
...Repeated for module number 75
C258
...Repeated for module number 76
C260
...Repeated for module number 77
C268
...Repeated for module number 78
C270
...Repeated for module number 79
C278
...Repeated for module number 80
C280
...Repeated for module number 81
C288
...Repeated for module number 82
C290
...Repeated for module number 83
C298
...Repeated for module number 84
C2A0
...Repeated for module number 85
C2A8
...Repeated for module number 86
C2B0
...Repeated for module number 87
C2B8
...Repeated for module number 88
C2C0
...Repeated for module number 89
C2C8
...Repeated for module number 90
C2D0
...Repeated for module number 91
C2D8
...Repeated for module number 92
C2E0
...Repeated for module number 93
C2E8
...Repeated for module number 94
C2F0
...Repeated for module number 95
C2F8
...Repeated for module number 96
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Contact Input Thresholds (Read/Write Setting)
C600
Contact Input x Threshold (24 items)
0 to 3
---
1
F128
1 (33 Vdc)
1 to 60
s
1
F001
30
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F205
“Virt Ip 1 “
Virtual Inputs Global Settings (Read/Write Setting)
C680
Virtual Inputs SBO Timeout
Virtual Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
C690
Virtual Input x Function
C691
Virtual Input x Name
C69B
Virtual Input x Programmed Type
0 to 1
---
1
F127
0 (Latched)
C69C
Virtual Input x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-33
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 27 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
C69D
Virtual Input x UCA SBOClass
1 to 2
---
1
F001
1
C69E
Virtual Input x UCA SBOEna
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
---
---
---
F001
0
C69F
Virtual Input x Reserved
C6A0
...Repeated for module number 2
C6B0
...Repeated for module number 3
C6C0
...Repeated for module number 4
C6D0
...Repeated for module number 5
C6E0
...Repeated for module number 6
C6F0
...Repeated for module number 7
C700
...Repeated for module number 8
C710
...Repeated for module number 9
C720
...Repeated for module number 10
C730
...Repeated for module number 11
C740
...Repeated for module number 12
C750
...Repeated for module number 13
C760
...Repeated for module number 14
C770
...Repeated for module number 15
C780
...Repeated for module number 16
C790
...Repeated for module number 17
C7A0
...Repeated for module number 18
C7B0
...Repeated for module number 19
C7C0
...Repeated for module number 20
C7D0
...Repeated for module number 21
C7E0
...Repeated for module number 22
C7F0
...Repeated for module number 23
C800
...Repeated for module number 24
C810
...Repeated for module number 25
C820
...Repeated for module number 26
C830
...Repeated for module number 27
C840
...Repeated for module number 28
C850
...Repeated for module number 29
C860
...Repeated for module number 30
C870
...Repeated for module number 31
C880
...Repeated for module number 32
DEFAULT
Virtual Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
CC90
Virtual Output x Name
---
---
---
F205
“Virt Op 1 “
CC9A
Virtual Output x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
CC9B
Virtual Output x Reserved (5 items)
---
---
---
F001
0
CCA0
...Repeated for module number 2
CCB0
...Repeated for module number 3
CCC0
...Repeated for module number 4
CCD0
...Repeated for module number 5
CCE0
...Repeated for module number 6
CCF0
...Repeated for module number 7
CD00
...Repeated for module number 8
CD10
...Repeated for module number 9
CD20
...Repeated for module number 10
CD30
...Repeated for module number 11
CD40
...Repeated for module number 12
CD50
...Repeated for module number 13
CD60
...Repeated for module number 14
CD70
...Repeated for module number 15
CD80
...Repeated for module number 16
CD90
...Repeated for module number 17
B-34
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 28 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
CDA0
...Repeated for module number 18
CDB0
...Repeated for module number 19
CDC0
...Repeated for module number 20
CDD0
...Repeated for module number 21
CDE0
...Repeated for module number 22
CDF0
...Repeated for module number 23
CE00
...Repeated for module number 24
CE10
...Repeated for module number 25
CE20
...Repeated for module number 26
CE30
...Repeated for module number 27
CE40
...Repeated for module number 28
CE50
...Repeated for module number 29
CE60
...Repeated for module number 30
CE70
...Repeated for module number 31
CE80
...Repeated for module number 32
CE90
...Repeated for module number 33
CEA0
...Repeated for module number 34
CEB0
...Repeated for module number 35
CEC0
...Repeated for module number 36
CED0
...Repeated for module number 37
CEE0
...Repeated for module number 38
CEF0
...Repeated for module number 39
CF00
...Repeated for module number 40
CF10
...Repeated for module number 41
CF20
...Repeated for module number 42
CF30
...Repeated for module number 43
CF40
...Repeated for module number 44
CF50
...Repeated for module number 45
CF60
...Repeated for module number 46
CF70
...Repeated for module number 47
CF80
...Repeated for module number 48
CF90
...Repeated for module number 49
CFA0
...Repeated for module number 50
CFB0
...Repeated for module number 51
CFC0
...Repeated for module number 52
CFD0
...Repeated for module number 53
CFE0
...Repeated for module number 54
CFF0
...Repeated for module number 55
D000
...Repeated for module number 56
D010
...Repeated for module number 57
D020
...Repeated for module number 58
D030
...Repeated for module number 59
D040
...Repeated for module number 60
D050
...Repeated for module number 61
D060
...Repeated for module number 62
D070
...Repeated for module number 63
D080
...Repeated for module number 64
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Mandatory
D280
Test Mode Function (Read/Write Setting)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
D281
Force VFD and LED (Read/Write)
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
D282
Test Mode Initiate (Read/Write Setting)
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
1
D283
Clear All Relay Records Command (R/W Command)
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
---
---
---
F205
“Cont Op 1 “
Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (64 modules)
D290
Contact Output x Name
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-35
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 29 of 34)
B
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
D29A
Contact Output x Operation
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D29B
Contact Output x Seal In
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D29C
Latching Output x Reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D29D
Contact Output x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
1 (Enabled)
D29E
Latching Output x Type
0 to 1
---
1
F090
0 (Operate-dominant)
D29F
Reserved
---
---
---
F001
0
D2A0
...Repeated for module number 2
D2B0
...Repeated for module number 3
D2C0
...Repeated for module number 4
D2D0
...Repeated for module number 5
D2E0
...Repeated for module number 6
D2F0
...Repeated for module number 7
D300
...Repeated for module number 8
D310
...Repeated for module number 9
D320
...Repeated for module number 10
D330
...Repeated for module number 11
D340
...Repeated for module number 12
D350
...Repeated for module number 13
D360
...Repeated for module number 14
D370
...Repeated for module number 15
D380
...Repeated for module number 16
D390
...Repeated for module number 17
D3A0
...Repeated for module number 18
D3B0
...Repeated for module number 19
D3C0
...Repeated for module number 20
D3D0
...Repeated for module number 21
D3E0
...Repeated for module number 22
D3F0
...Repeated for module number 23
D400
...Repeated for module number 24
D410
...Repeated for module number 25
D420
...Repeated for module number 26
D430
...Repeated for module number 27
D440
...Repeated for module number 28
D450
...Repeated for module number 29
D460
...Repeated for module number 30
D470
...Repeated for module number 31
D480
...Repeated for module number 32
D490
...Repeated for module number 33
D4A0
...Repeated for module number 34
D4B0
...Repeated for module number 35
D4C0
...Repeated for module number 36
D4D0
...Repeated for module number 37
D4E0
...Repeated for module number 38
D4F0
...Repeated for module number 39
D500
...Repeated for module number 40
D510
...Repeated for module number 41
D520
...Repeated for module number 42
D530
...Repeated for module number 43
D540
...Repeated for module number 44
D550
...Repeated for module number 45
D560
...Repeated for module number 46
D570
...Repeated for module number 47
D580
...Repeated for module number 48
D590
...Repeated for module number 49
B-36
C60 Breaker Management Relay
DEFAULT
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 30 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
D5A0
...Repeated for module number 50
D5B0
...Repeated for module number 51
D5C0
...Repeated for module number 52
D5D0
...Repeated for module number 53
D5E0
...Repeated for module number 54
D5F0
...Repeated for module number 55
D600
...Repeated for module number 56
D610
...Repeated for module number 57
D620
...Repeated for module number 58
D630
...Repeated for module number 59
D640
...Repeated for module number 60
D650
...Repeated for module number 61
D660
...Repeated for module number 62
D670
...Repeated for module number 63
D680
...Repeated for module number 64
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Reset (Read/Write Setting)
D800
FlexLogic operand which initiates a reset
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
Control Pushbuttons (Read/Write Setting) (3 modules)
D810
Control Pushbutton 1 Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
D811
Control Pushbutton 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
D812
...Repeated for module number 2
D814
...Repeated for module number 3
D816
...Repeated for module number 4
D818
...Repeated for module number 5
D81A
...Repeated for module number 6
D81C
...Repeated for module number 7
Clear Relay Records (Read/Write Setting)
D820
Clear Fault Reports Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D822
Clear Event Records Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D823
Clear Oscillography Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D824
Clear Data Logger Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D825
Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 1 Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D826
Clear Breaker Arcing Amps 2 Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D827
Clear Demand Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D829
Clear Energy Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D82B
Clear Unauthorized Access Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D82D
Clear Platform Direct I/O Stats Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
D82E
Clear Relay Records Reserved
0 to 2
---
1
F144
0 (Disabled)
0 to 3
---
1
F131
0 (Disabled)
Force Contact Inputs (Read/Write Setting)
D8B0
Force Contact Input x State (96 items)
Force Contact Outputs (Read/Write Setting)
D910
Force Contact Output x State (64 items)
Platform Direct I/O (Read/Write Setting)
DB40
Direct Device ID
1 to 8
---
1
F001
1
DB41
Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 1 Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
DB42
Platform Direct I/O Data Rate
64 to 128
kbps
64
F001
64
DB43
Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 2 Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
DB44
Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
Platform Direct I/O Commands (Read/Write Command)
DB48
Platform Direct I/O Clear Counters Command
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
DB41
Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 1 Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
DB42
Platform Direct I/O Data Rate
64 to 128
kbps
64
F001
64
DB43
Platform Direct I/O Ring Ch 2 Configuration Function
0 to 1
---
1
F126
0 (No)
DB44
Platform Direct I/O Crossover Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-37
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 31 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
0
Platform Direct Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
B
DB50
Direct Input 1 Device Number
0 to 8
---
1
F001
DB51
Direct Input 1 Number
0 to 96
---
1
F001
0
DB52
Direct Input 1 Default State
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
DB53
Direct Input 1 Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
DB54
...Repeated for module number 2
DB58
...Repeated for module number 3
DB5C
...Repeated for module number 4
DB60
...Repeated for module number 5
DB64
...Repeated for module number 6
DB68
...Repeated for module number 7
DB6C
...Repeated for module number 8
DB70
...Repeated for module number 9
DB74
...Repeated for module number 10
DB78
...Repeated for module number 11
DB7C
...Repeated for module number 12
DB80
...Repeated for module number 13
DB84
...Repeated for module number 14
DB88
...Repeated for module number 15
DB8C
...Repeated for module number 16
DB90
...Repeated for module number 17
DB94
...Repeated for module number 18
DB98
...Repeated for module number 19
DB9C
...Repeated for module number 20
DBA0
...Repeated for module number 21
DBA4
...Repeated for module number 22
DBA8
...Repeated for module number 23
DBAC
...Repeated for module number 24
DBB0
...Repeated for module number 25
DBB4
...Repeated for module number 26
DBB8
...Repeated for module number 27
DBBC
...Repeated for module number 28
DBC0
...Repeated for module number 29
DBC4
...Repeated for module number 30
DBC8
...Repeated for module number 31
DBCC
...Repeated for module number 32
Platform Direct Outputs (Read/Write Setting) (96 modules)
DD00
Direct Output 1 Operand
DD01
Direct Output 1 Events
DD02
...Repeated for module number 2
DD04
...Repeated for module number 3
DD06
...Repeated for module number 4
DD08
...Repeated for module number 5
DD0A
...Repeated for module number 6
DD0C
...Repeated for module number 7
DD0E
...Repeated for module number 8
DD10
...Repeated for module number 9
DD12
...Repeated for module number 10
DD14
...Repeated for module number 11
DD16
...Repeated for module number 12
DD18
...Repeated for module number 13
DD1A
...Repeated for module number 14
DD1C
...Repeated for module number 15
DD1E
...Repeated for module number 16
B-38
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 32 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
DD20
...Repeated for module number 17
DD22
...Repeated for module number 18
DD24
...Repeated for module number 19
DD26
...Repeated for module number 20
DD28
...Repeated for module number 21
DD2A
...Repeated for module number 22
DD2C
...Repeated for module number 23
DD2E
...Repeated for module number 24
DD30
...Repeated for module number 25
DD32
...Repeated for module number 26
DD34
...Repeated for module number 27
DD36
...Repeated for module number 28
DD38
...Repeated for module number 29
DD3A
...Repeated for module number 30
DD3C
...Repeated for module number 31
DD3E
...Repeated for module number 32
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Platform Direct I/O Alarms (Read/Write Setting)
DE00
Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Function
DE01
Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Message Count
DE02
Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Threshold
DE03
Platform Direct I/O Ch 1 CRC Alarm Events
DE04
...Reserved (4 items)
DE08
Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Function
DE09
Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Message Count
DE0A
Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Threshold
DE0B
Platform Direct I/O Ch 2 CRC Alarm Events
DE0C
...Reserved (4 items)
DE10
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function
DE11
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count
DE12
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold
DE13
Direct I/O Ch 1 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events
DE14
...Reserved (4 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
100 to 1000
---
1
F001
600
1 to 1000
---
1
F001
10
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
100 to 1000
---
1
F001
600
1 to 1000
---
1
F001
10
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
100 to 1000
---
1
F001
600
1 to 1000
---
1
F001
10
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
DE18
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Function
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
DE19
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Msg Count
100 to 1000
---
1
F001
600
DE1A
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Threshold
1 to 1000
---
1
F001
10
DE1B
Direct I/O Ch 2 Unreturned Messages Alarm Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
DE1C
...Reserved (4 items)
---
---
---
F202
“Remote Device 1 “
Remote Devices (Read/Write Setting) (16 modules)
E000
Remote Device 1 ID
E00A
...Repeated for module number 2
E014
...Repeated for module number 3
E01E
...Repeated for module number 4
E028
...Repeated for module number 5
E032
...Repeated for module number 6
E03C
...Repeated for module number 7
E046
...Repeated for module number 8
E050
...Repeated for module number 9
E05A
...Repeated for module number 10
E064
...Repeated for module number 11
E06E
...Repeated for module number 12
E078
...Repeated for module number 13
E082
...Repeated for module number 14
E08C
...Repeated for module number 15
E096
...Repeated for module number 16
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-39
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 33 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
Remote Inputs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
B
E100
Remote Input x Device
1 to 16
---
1
F001
1
E101
Remote Input x Bit Pair
0 to 64
---
1
F156
0 (None)
E102
Remote Input x Default State
0 to 1
---
1
F108
0 (Off)
E103
Remote Input x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
E104
...Repeated for module number 2
E108
...Repeated for module number 3
E10C
...Repeated for module number 4
E110
...Repeated for module number 5
E114
...Repeated for module number 6
E118
...Repeated for module number 7
E11C
...Repeated for module number 8
E120
...Repeated for module number 9
E124
...Repeated for module number 10
E128
...Repeated for module number 11
E12C
...Repeated for module number 12
E130
...Repeated for module number 13
E134
...Repeated for module number 14
E138
...Repeated for module number 15
E13C
...Repeated for module number 16
E140
...Repeated for module number 17
E144
...Repeated for module number 18
E148
...Repeated for module number 19
E14C
...Repeated for module number 20
E150
...Repeated for module number 21
E154
...Repeated for module number 22
E158
...Repeated for module number 23
E15C
...Repeated for module number 24
E160
...Repeated for module number 25
E164
...Repeated for module number 26
E168
...Repeated for module number 27
E16C
...Repeated for module number 28
E170
...Repeated for module number 29
E174
...Repeated for module number 30
E178
...Repeated for module number 31
E17C
...Repeated for module number 32
Remote Output DNA Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E600
Remote Output DNA x Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
E601
Remote Output DNA x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
E602
Remote Output DNA x Reserved (2 items)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
E604
...Repeated for module number 2
E608
...Repeated for module number 3
E60C
...Repeated for module number 4
E610
...Repeated for module number 5
E614
...Repeated for module number 6
E618
...Repeated for module number 7
E61C
...Repeated for module number 8
E620
...Repeated for module number 9
E624
...Repeated for module number 10
E628
...Repeated for module number 11
E62C
...Repeated for module number 12
E630
...Repeated for module number 13
E634
...Repeated for module number 14
E638
...Repeated for module number 15
B-40
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
Table B–9: MODBUS MEMORY MAP (Sheet 34 of 34)
ADDR
REGISTER NAME
E63C
...Repeated for module number 16
E640
...Repeated for module number 17
E644
...Repeated for module number 18
E648
...Repeated for module number 19
E64C
...Repeated for module number 20
E650
...Repeated for module number 21
E654
...Repeated for module number 22
E658
...Repeated for module number 23
E65C
...Repeated for module number 24
E660
...Repeated for module number 25
E664
...Repeated for module number 26
E668
...Repeated for module number 27
E66C
...Repeated for module number 28
E670
...Repeated for module number 29
E674
...Repeated for module number 30
E678
...Repeated for module number 31
E67C
...Repeated for module number 32
RANGE
UNITS
STEP
FORMAT
DEFAULT
B
Remote Output UserSt Pairs (Read/Write Setting) (32 modules)
E680
Remote Output UserSt x Operand
0 to 65535
---
1
F300
0
E681
Remote Output UserSt x Events
0 to 1
---
1
F102
0 (Disabled)
0 to 1
---
1
F001
0
E682
Remote Output UserSt x Reserved (2 items)
E684
...Repeated for module number 2
E688
...Repeated for module number 3
E68C
...Repeated for module number 4
E690
...Repeated for module number 5
E694
...Repeated for module number 6
E698
...Repeated for module number 7
E69C
...Repeated for module number 8
E6A0
...Repeated for module number 9
E6A4
...Repeated for module number 10
E6A8
...Repeated for module number 11
E6AC
...Repeated for module number 12
E6B0
...Repeated for module number 13
E6B4
...Repeated for module number 14
E6B8
...Repeated for module number 15
E6BC
...Repeated for module number 16
E6C0
...Repeated for module number 17
E6C4
...Repeated for module number 18
E6C8
...Repeated for module number 19
E6CC
...Repeated for module number 20
E6D0
...Repeated for module number 21
E6D4
...Repeated for module number 22
E6D8
...Repeated for module number 23
E6DC
...Repeated for module number 24
E6E0
...Repeated for module number 25
E6E4
...Repeated for module number 26
E6E8
...Repeated for module number 27
E6EC
...Repeated for module number 28
E6F0
...Repeated for module number 29
E6F4
...Repeated for module number 30
E6F8
...Repeated for module number 31
E6FC
...Repeated for module number 32
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-41
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B.4.2 DATA FORMATS
F001
UR_UINT16 UNSIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
B
F002
UR_SINT16 SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER
F003
UR_UINT32 UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register.
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F004
UR_SINT32 SIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER (2 registers)
High order word is stored in the first register/
Low order word is stored in the second register.
F005
UR_UINT8 UNSIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F006
UR_SINT8 SIGNED 8 BIT INTEGER
F011
UR_UINT16 FLEXCURVE DATA (120 points)
A FlexCurve is an array of 120 consecutive data points (x, y) which are interpolated to generate a smooth curve. The y-axis is the user
defined trip or operation time setting; the x-axis is the pickup ratio and is pre-defined. Refer to format F119 for a listing of the pickup ratios;
the enumeration value for the pickup ratio indicates the offset into the FlexCurve base address where the corresponding time value is
stored.
F012
DISPLAY_SCALE DISPLAY SCALING
(unsigned 16-bit integer)
MSB indicates the SI units as a power of ten. LSB indicates the number of decimal points to display.
Example: Current values are stored as 32 bit numbers with three decimal places and base units in Amps. If the retrieved value is
12345.678 A and the display scale equals 0x0302 then the displayed value on the unit is 12.35 kA.
F013
POWER_FACTOR PWR FACTOR (SIGNED 16 BIT INTEGER)
Positive values indicate lagging power factor; negative values indicate leading.
F040
UR_UINT48 48-BIT UNSIGNED INTEGER
F050
UR_UINT32 TIME and DATE (UNSIGNED 32 BIT INTEGER)
Gives the current time in seconds elapsed since 00:00:00 January 1, 1970.
B-42
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F051
UR_UINT32 DATE in SR format (alternate format for F050)
F084
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR POWER UP
First 16 bits are Month/Day (MM/DD/xxxx). Month: 1=January,
2=February,...,12=December; Day: 1 to 31 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Year (xx/xx/YYYY): 1970 to 2106 in steps of 1
0 = Restore, 1 = Synchronize, 2 = Sync/Restore
F086
ENUMERATION: DIGITAL INPUT DEFAULT STATE
F052
UR_UINT32 TIME in SR format (alternate format for F050)
First 16 bits are Hours/Minutes (HH:MM:xx.xxx).
Hours: 0=12am, 1=1am,...,12=12pm,...23=11pm;
Minutes: 0 to 59 in steps of 1
Last 16 bits are Seconds
1=00.001,...,59999=59.999s)
B
0 = Off, 1 = On, 2= Latest/Off, 3 = Latest/On
F090
ENUMERATION: LATCHING OUTPUT TYPE
(xx:xx:.SS.SSS):
0=00.000s,
F060
FLOATING_POINT IEE FLOATING POINT (32 bits)
F070
HEX2 2 BYTES - 4 ASCII DIGITS
0 = Operate-dominant, 1 = Reset-dominant
F100
ENUMERATION: VT CONNECTION TYPE
0 = Wye; 1 = Delta
F101
ENUMERATION: MESSAGE DISPLAY INTENSITY
0 = 25%, 1 = 50%, 2 = 75%, 3 = 100%
F071
HEX4 4 BYTES - 8 ASCII DIGITS
F102
ENUMERATION: DISABLED/ENABLED
F072
HEX6 6 BYTES - 12 ASCII DIGITS
0 = Disabled; 1 = Enabled
F103
ENUMERATION: CURVE SHAPES
F073
HEX8 8 BYTES - 16 ASCII DIGITS
F074
HEX20 20 BYTES - 40 ASCII DIGITS
F080
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE MODE
0 = 1 & 3 Pole, 1 = 1 Pole, 2 = 3 Pole-A, 3 = 3 Pole-B
F081
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR FAIL OPTION
0 = Continue, 1 = Lockout
bitmask
curve shape
bitmask
0
IEEE Mod Inv
9
curve shape
IAC Inverse
1
IEEE Very Inv
10
IAC Short Inv
I2t
2
IEEE Ext Inv
11
3
IEC Curve A
12
Definite Time
4
IEC Curve B
13
FlexCurve™ A
5
IEC Curve C
14
FlexCurve™ B
6
IEC Short Inv
15
FlexCurve™ C
7
IAC Ext Inv
16
FlexCurve™ D
8
IAC Very Inv
F104
ENUMERATION: RESET TYPE
F082
ENUMERATION: AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P BKR SEQUENCE
0 = Instantaneous, 1 = Timed, 2 = Linear
0 = 1, 1 = 2, 2 = 1 & 2, 3 = 1 – 2, 4 = 2 – 1
F105
ENUMERATION: LOGIC INPUT
F083
ENUMERATION: SELECTOR MODES
0 = Disabled, 1 = Input 1, 2 = Input 2
0 = Time-Out, 1 = Acknowledge
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-43
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F106
ENUMERATION: PHASE ROTATION
F119
ENUMERATION: FLEXCURVE™ PICKUP RATIOS
0 = ABC, 1 = ACB
B
mask
value
mask
value
mask
value
mask
value
0
0.00
30
0.88
60
2.90
90
5.90
F108
ENUMERATION: OFF/ON
1
0.05
31
0.90
61
3.00
91
6.00
2
0.10
32
0.91
62
3.10
92
6.50
0 = Off, 1 = On
3
0.15
33
0.92
63
3.20
93
7.00
4
0.20
34
0.93
64
3.30
94
7.50
5
0.25
35
0.94
65
3.40
95
8.00
F109
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT OPERATION
6
0.30
36
0.95
66
3.50
96
8.50
7
0.35
37
0.96
67
3.60
97
9.00
0 = Self-reset, 1 = Latched, 2 = Disabled
8
0.40
38
0.97
68
3.70
98
9.50
9
0.45
39
0.98
69
3.80
99
10.00
F110
ENUMERATION: CONTACT OUTPUT LED CONTROL
0 = Trip, 1 = Alarm, 2 = None
10
0.48
40
1.03
70
3.90
100
10.50
11
0.50
41
1.05
71
4.00
101
11.00
12
0.52
42
1.10
72
4.10
102
11.50
13
0.54
43
1.20
73
4.20
103
12.00
14
0.56
44
1.30
74
4.30
104
12.50
F111
ENUMERATION: UNDERVOLTAGE CURVE SHAPES
15
0.58
45
1.40
75
4.40
105
13.00
16
0.60
46
1.50
76
4.50
106
13.50
0 = Definite Time, 1 = Inverse Time
17
0.62
47
1.60
77
4.60
107
14.00
18
0.64
48
1.70
78
4.70
108
14.50
19
0.66
49
1.80
79
4.80
109
15.00
20
0.68
50
1.90
80
4.90
110
15.50
21
0.70
51
2.00
81
5.00
111
16.00
F112
ENUMERATION: RS485 BAUD RATES
bitmask
bitmask
value
bitmask
value
22
0.72
52
2.10
82
5.10
112
16.50
0
value
300
4
9600
8
115200
23
0.74
53
2.20
83
5.20
113
17.00
1
1200
5
19200
9
14400
24
0.76
54
2.30
84
5.30
114
17.50
2
2400
6
38400
10
28800
25
0.78
55
2.40
85
5.40
115
18.00
3
4800
7
57600
11
33600
26
0.80
56
2.50
86
5.50
116
18.50
27
0.82
57
2.60
87
5.60
117
19.00
28
0.84
58
2.70
88
5.70
118
19.50
29
0.86
59
2.80
89
5.80
119
20.00
F113
ENUMERATION: PARITY
0 = None, 1 = Odd, 2 = Even
F122
ENUMERATION: ELEMENT INPUT SIGNAL TYPE
F114
ENUMERATION: IRIG-B SIGNAL TYPE
0 = Phasor, 1 = RMS
0 = None, 1 = DC Shift, 2 = Amplitude Modulated
F123
ENUMERATION: CT SECONDARY
F115
ENUMERATION: BREAKER STATUS
0 = 1 A, 1 = 5 A
0 = Auxiliary A, 1 = Auxiliary B
F124
ENUMERATION: LIST OF ELEMENTS
F117
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 1×72 cycles, 1 = 3×36 cycles, 2 = 7×18 cycles, 3 = 15×9 cycles
F118
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY MODE
bitmask
element
0
PHASE IOC1
1
PHASE IOC2
16
PHASE TOC1
17
PHASE TOC2
140
AUX UV1
0 = Automatic Overwrite, 1 = Protected
B-44
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
bitmask
element
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
bitmask
element
144
PHASE UV1
428
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 9
145
PHASE UV2
429
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 10
156
NEUTRAL OV1
430
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 11
214
DIR POWER 1
431
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 12
215
DIR POWER 2
432
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 13
224
SRC1 VT FF
433
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 14
225
SRC2 VT FF
434
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 15
226
SRC3 VT FF
435
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 16
227
SRC4 VT FF
512
DIGITAL ELEMENT 1
228
SRC5 VT FF
513
DIGITAL ELEMENT 2
229
SRC6 VT FF
514
DIGITAL ELEMENT 3
272
BREAKER 1
515
DIGITAL ELEMENT 4
273
BREAKER 2
516
DIGITAL ELEMENT 5
280
BREAKER FAIL 1
517
DIGITAL ELEMENT 6
281
BREAKER FAIL 2
518
DIGITAL ELEMENT 7
288
BREAKER ARCING 1
519
DIGITAL ELEMENT 8
289
BREAKER ARCING 2
520
DIGITAL ELEMENT 9
304
AUTORECLOSE 1
521
DIGITAL ELEMENT 10
305
AUTORECLOSE 2
522
DIGITAL ELEMENT 11
306
AUTORECLOSE 3
523
DIGITAL ELEMENT 12
307
AUTORECLOSE 4
524
DIGITAL ELEMENT 13
308
AUTORECLOSE 5
525
DIGITAL ELEMENT 14
309
AUTORECLOSE 6
526
DIGITAL ELEMENT 15
312
SYNCHROCHECK 1
527
DIGITAL ELEMENT 16
313
SYNCHROCHECK 2
544
DIGITAL COUNTER 1
336
SETTING GROUP
545
DIGITAL COUNTER 2
337
RESET
546
DIGITAL COUNTER 3
376
AUTORECLOSE 1P/3P
547
DIGITAL COUNTER 4
385
SELECTOR 1
548
DIGITAL COUNTER 5
386
SELECTOR 2
549
DIGITAL COUNTER 6
390
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 1
550
DIGITAL COUNTER 7
391
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 2
551
DIGITAL COUNTER 8
392
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 3
680
PUSHBUTTON 1
393
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 4
681
PUSHBUTTON 2
394
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 5
682
PUSHBUTTON 3
395
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 6
683
PUSHBUTTON 4
396
CONTROL PUSHBUTTON 7
684
PUSHBUTTON 5
400
FLEX ELEMENT 1
685
PUSHBUTTON 6
401
FLEX ELEMENT 2
686
PUSHBUTTON 7
402
FLEX ELEMENT 3
687
PUSHBUTTON 8
403
FLEX ELEMENT 4
688
PUSHBUTTON 9
404
FLEX ELEMENT 5
689
PUSHBUTTON 10
405
FLEX ELEMENT 6
690
PUSHBUTTON 11
406
FLEX ELEMENT 7
691
PUSHBUTTON 12
407
FLEX ELEMENT 8
420
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 1
421
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 2
422
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 3
423
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 4
424
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 5
425
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 6
426
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 7
F126
ENUMERATION: NO/YES CHOICE
427
NON-VOLATILE LATCH 8
0 = No, 1 = Yes
GE Multilin
B
F125
ENUMERATION: ACCESS LEVEL
0 = Restricted; 1 = Command, 2 = Setting, 3 = Factory Service
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-45
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B
APPENDIX B
F127
ENUMERATION: LATCHED OR SELF-RESETTING
F139
ENUMERATION: DEMAND CALCULATIONS
0 = Latched, 1 = Self-Reset
0 = Thermal Exponential, 1 = Block Interval, 2 = Rolling Demand
F128
ENUMERATION: CONTACT INPUT THRESHOLD
F140
ENUMERATION: CURRENT, SENS CURRENT, VOLTAGE,
DISABLED
0 = 17 V DC, 1 = 33 V DC, 2 = 84 V DC, 3 = 166 V DC
0 = Disabled, 1 = Current 46 A, 2 = Voltage 280 V, 3 = Current
4.6 A, 4 = Current 2 A, 5 = Notched 4.6 A, 6 = Notched 2 A
F129
ENUMERATION: FLEXLOGIC TIMER TYPE
F141
ENUMERATION: SELF TEST ERROR
0 = millisecond, 1 = second, 2 = minute
bitmask
F130
ENUMERATION: SIMULATION MODE
0
0 = Off. 1 = Pre-Fault, 2 = Fault, 3 = Post-Fault
error
ANY SELF TESTS
1
IRIG-B FAILURE
2
DSP ERROR
4
NO DSP INTERRUPTS
F131
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
5
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
9
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Energized, 2 = De-energized, 3 = Freeze
10
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
11
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
13
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
F132
ENUMERATION: DEMAND INTERVAL
14
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
15
LATCHING OUT ERROR
0 = 5 min, 1 = 10 min, 2 = 15 min, 3 = 20 min, 4 = 30 min,
5 = 60 min
18
SNTP FAILURE
19
BATTERY FAIL
20
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
F133
ENUMERATION: PROGRAM STATE
21
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
22
EEPROM DATA ERROR
0 = Not Programmed, 1 = Programmed
23
SRAM DATA ERROR
F134
ENUMERATION: PASS/FAIL
0 = Fail, 1 = OK, 2 = n/a
F135
ENUMERATION: GAIN CALIBRATION
24
PROGRAM MEMORY
25
WATCHDOG ERROR
26
LOW ON MEMORY
27
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
28
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
29
DIRECT RING BREAK
30
ANY MINOR ERROR
31
ANY MAJOR ERROR
0 = 0x1, 1 = 1x16
F136
ENUMERATION: NUMBER OF OSCILLOGRAPHY RECORDS
0 = 31 x 8 cycles, 1 = 15 x 16 cycles, 2 = 7 x 32 cycles
3 = 3 x 64 cycles, 4 = 1 x 128 cycles
F138
ENUMERATION: OSCILLOGRAPHY FILE TYPE
F142
ENUMERATION: EVENT RECORDER ACCESS FILE TYPE
0 = All Record Data, 1 = Headers Only, 2 = Numeric Event Cause
F143
UR_UINT32: 32 BIT ERROR CODE (F141 specifies bit number)
A bit value of 0 = no error, 1 = error
0 = Data File, 1 = Configuration File, 2 = Header File
F144
ENUMERATION: FORCED CONTACT INPUT STATE
0 = Disabled, 1 = Open, 2 = Closed
B-46
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F145
ENUMERATION: ALPHABET LETTER
bitmask type
bitmask type
F151
ENUMERATION: RTD SELECTION
bitmask type
bitmask type
0
null
7
G
14
N
21
U
1
A
8
H
15
O
22
V
2
B
3
C
9
10
I
J
16
17
P
Q
23
24
W
X
4
D
11
K
18
R
25
Y
5
E
12
L
19
S
26
Z
6
F
13
M
20
F146
ENUMERATION: MISC. EVENT CAUSES
bitmask
0
1
2
3
definition
EVENTS CLEARED
OSCILLOGRAPHY TRIGGERED
DATE/TIME CHANGED
DEF SETTINGS LOADED
4
TEST MODE ON
5
TEST MODE OFF
6
POWER ON
7
POWER OFF
8
RELAY IN SERVICE
9
RELAY OUT OF SERVICE
10
WATCHDOG RESET
11
OSCILLOGRAPHY CLEAR
12
REBOOT COMMAND
13
LED TEST INITIATED
14
FLASH PROGRAMMING
GE Multilin
T
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
bitmask
RTD#
0
NONE
17
RTD 17
33
RTD 33
1
RTD 1
18
RTD 18
34
RTD 34
2
RTD 2
19
RTD 19
35
RTD 35
3
RTD 3
20
RTD 20
36
RTD 36
4
RTD 4
21
RTD 21
37
RTD 37
5
RTD 5
22
RTD 22
38
RTD 38
6
RTD 6
23
RTD 23
39
RTD 39
7
RTD 7
24
RTD 24
40
RTD 40
8
RTD 8
25
RTD 25
41
RTD 41
9
RTD 9
26
RTD 26
42
RTD 42
10
RTD 10
27
RTD 27
43
RTD 43
11
RTD 11
28
RTD 28
44
RTD 44
12
RTD 12
29
RTD 29
45
RTD 45
13
RTD 13
30
RTD 30
46
RTD 46
14
RTD 14
31
RTD 31
47
RTD 47
15
RTD 15
32
RTD 32
48
RTD 48
16
RTD 16
F152
ENUMERATION: SETTING GROUP
0 = Active Group, 1 = Group 1, 2 = Group 2, 3 = Group 3
4 = Group 4, 5 = Group 5, 6 = Group 6
F155
ENUMERATION: REMOTE DEVICE STATE
0 = Offline, 1 = Online
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-47
B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F156
ENUMERATION: REMOTE INPUT BIT PAIRS
bitmask
B
RTD#
F168
ENUMERATION: INRUSH INHIBIT FUNCTION
bitmask
RTD#
0 = Disabled, 1 = Adapt. 2nd, 2 = Trad. 2nd
RTD#
bitmask
0
NONE
22
DNA-22
44
UserSt-12
1
DNA-1
23
DNA-23
45
UserSt-13
2
DNA-2
24
DNA-24
46
UserSt-14
F169
ENUMERATION: OVEREXCITATION INHIBIT FUNCTION
3
DNA-3
25
DNA-25
47
UserSt-15
0 = Disabled, 1 = 5th
4
DNA-4
26
DNA-26
48
UserSt-16
5
DNA-5
27
DNA-27
49
UserSt-17
6
DNA-6
28
DNA-28
50
UserSt-18
7
DNA-7
29
DNA-29
51
UserSt-19
8
DNA-8
30
DNA-30
52
UserSt-20
9
DNA-9
31
DNA-31
53
UserSt-21
10
DNA-10
32
DNA-32
54
UserSt-22
11
DNA-11
33
UserSt-1
55
UserSt-23
12
DNA-12
34
UserSt-2
56
UserSt-24
F171
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER CHANNEL INPUT TYPE
13
DNA-13
35
UserSt-3
57
UserSt-25
0 = dcmA IN, 1 = OHMS IN, 2 = RTD IN, 3 = dcmA OUT
14
DNA-14
36
UserSt-4
58
UserSt-26
15
DNA-15
37
UserSt-5
59
UserSt-27
16
DNA-16
38
UserSt-6
60
UserSt-28
17
DNA-17
39
UserSt-7
61
UserSt-29
18
DNA-18
40
UserSt-8
62
UserSt-30
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
bitmask
slot
19
DNA-19
41
UserSt-9
63
UserSt-31
0
F
4
K
8
P
12
U
20
DNA-20
42
UserSt-10
64
UserSt-32
1
G
5
L
9
R
13
V
21
DNA-21
43
UserSt-11
2
H
6
M
10
S
14
W
3
J
7
N
11
T
15
X
F157
ENUMERATION: BREAKER MODE
F170
ENUMERATION: LOW/HIGH OFFSET & GAIN
TRANSDUCER I/O SELECTION
0 = LOW, 1 = HIGH
F172
ENUMERATION: SLOT LETTERS
F173
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER DCMA I/O RANGE
0 = 3-Pole, 1 = 1-Pole
bitmask
dcmA I/O range
F159
ENUMERATION: BREAKER AUX CONTACT KEYING
0
0 to –1 mA
1
0 to 1 mA
0 = 52a, 1 = 52b, 2 = None
2
–1 to 1 mA
F166
ENUMERATION: AUXILIARY VT CONNECTION TYPE
3
0 to 5 mA
4
0 to 10 mA
5
0 to 20 mA
6
4 to 20 mA
0 = Vn, 1 = Vag, 2 = Vbg, 3 = Vcg, 4 = Vab, 5 = Vbc, 6 = Vca
F167
ENUMERATION: SIGNAL SOURCE
0 = SRC 1, 1 = SRC 2, 2 = SRC 3, 3 = SRC 4,
4 = SRC 5, 5 = SRC 6
F174
ENUMERATION: TRANSDUCER RTD INPUT TYPE
0 = 100 Ohm Platinum, 1 = 120 Ohm Nickel,
2 = 100 Ohm Nickel, 3 = 10 Ohm Copper
F175
ENUMERATION: PHASE LETTERS
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C
B-48
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
F176
ENUMERATION: SYNCHROCHECK DEAD SOURCE SELECT
bitmask
F190
ENUMERATION: SIMULATED KEYPRESS
bitmsk
synchrocheck dead source
keypress
bitmsk
keypress
0
--use between real keys
21
22
Enter
DV1 and LV2
1
1
23
Reset
DV1 or DV2
2
2
24
User 1
4
DV1 Xor DV2
3
3
25
User 2
5
DV1 and DV2
4
4
26
User 3
5
5
27
User-programmable key 1
6
6
28
User-programmable key 2
F177
ENUMERATION: COMMUNICATION PORT
7
7
29
User-programmable key 3
8
8
30
User-programmable key 4
0 = NONE, 1 = COM1-RS485, 2 = COM2-RS485,
3 = FRONT PANEL-RS232, 4 = NETWORK
9
9
31
User-programmable key 5
10
0
32
User-programmable key 6
11
Decimal Pt
33
User-programmable key 7
F178
ENUMERATION: DATA LOGGER RATES
12
Plus/Minus
34
User-programmable key 8
13
Value Up
35
User-programmable key 9
0 = 1 sec, 1 = 1 min, 2 = 5 min, 3 = 10 min, 4 = 15 min,
5 = 20 min, 6 = 30 min, 7 = 60 min
14
Value Down
36
User-programmable key 10
15
Message Up
37
User-programmable key 11
16
Message Down
38
User-programmable key 12
17
Message Left
39
User 4 (control pushbutton)
18
Message Right
40
User 5 (control pushbutton)
19
Menu
41
User 6 (control pushbutton)
20
Help
42
User 7 (control pushbutton)
0
None
1
LV1 and DV2
2
3
F180
ENUMERATION: PHASE/GROUND
0 = PHASE, 1 = GROUND
F181
ENUMERATION: ODD/EVEN/NONE
0 = Half-Duplex, 1 = Full-Duplex
F183
ENUMERATION: AC INPUT WAVEFORMS
0
F194
ENUMERATION: DNP SCALE
definition
A bitmask of 0 = 0.01, 1 = 0.1, 2 = 1, 3 = 10, 4 = 100, 5 = 1000,
6 = 10000, 7 = 100000, 8 = 0.001
Off
1
8 samples/cycle
2
16 samples/cycle
3
32 samples/cycle
4
64 samples/cycle
F197
ENUMERATION: DNP BINARY INPUT POINT BLOCK
bitmask
F185
ENUMERATION: PHASE A,B,C, GROUND SELECTOR
0 = A, 1 = B, 2 = C, 3 = G
Input Point Block
0
Not Used
1
Virtual Inputs 1 to 16
2
Virtual Inputs 17 to 32
3
Virtual Outputs 1 to 16
4
Virtual Outputs 17 to 32
F186
ENUMERATION: MEASUREMENT MODE
5
Virtual Outputs 33 to 48
6
Virtual Outputs 49 to 64
0 = Phase to Ground, 1 = Phase to Phase
7
Contact Inputs 1 to 16
8
Contact Inputs 17 to 32
9
Contact Inputs 33 to 48
10
Contact Inputs 49 to 64
11
Contact Inputs 65 to 80
GE Multilin
B
F192
ENUMERATION: ETHERNET OPERATION MODE
0 = ODD, 1 = EVEN, 2 = NONE
bitmask
Escape
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-49
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
bitmask
12
B
APPENDIX B
Input Point Block
F201
TEXT8: 8-CHARACTER ASCII PASSCODE
Contact Inputs 81 to 96
13
Contact Outputs 1 to 16
14
Contact Outputs 17 to 32
15
Contact Outputs 33 to 48
16
Contact Outputs 49 to 64
17
Remote Inputs 1 to 16
18
Remote Inputs 17 to 32
19
Remote Devs 1 to 16
20
Elements 1 to 16
21
Elements 17 to 32
22
Elements 33 to 48
23
Elements 49 to 64
24
Elements 65 to 80
25
Elements 81 to 96
26
Elements 97 to 112
27
Elements 113 to 128
28
Elements 129 to 144
29
Elements 145 to 160
30
Elements 161 to 176
31
Elements 177 to 192
32
Elements 193 to 208
33
Elements 209 to 224
34
Elements 225 to 240
35
Elements 241 to 256
36
Elements 257 to 272
37
Elements 273 to 288
38
Elements 289 to 304
39
Elements 305 to 320
40
Elements 321 to 336
41
Elements 337 to 352
42
Elements 353 to 368
43
Elements 369 to 384
44
Elements 385 to 400
45
Elements 401 to 406
46
Elements 417 to 432
47
Elements 433 to 448
48
Elements 449 to 464
49
Elements 465 to 480
50
Elements 481 to 496
51
Elements 497 to 512
52
Elements 513 to 528
53
Elements 529 to 544
54
Elements 545 to 560
55
LED States 1 to 16
56
LED States 17 to 32
57
Self Tests 1 to 16
58
Self Tests 17 to 32
4 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F202
TEXT20: 20-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
10 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
F203
TEXT16: 16-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F204
TEXT80: 80-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F205
TEXT12: 12-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F206
TEXT6: 6-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F207
TEXT4: 4-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F208
TEXT2: 2-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
F222
ENUMERATION: TEST ENUMERATION
0 = Test Enumeration 0, 1 = Test Enumeration 1
F300
UR_UINT16: FLEXLOGIC™ BASE TYPE (6-bit type)
The FlexLogic™ BASE type is 6 bits and is combined with a 9 bit
descriptor and 1 bit for protection element to form a 16 bit value.
The combined bits are of the form: PTTTTTTDDDDDDDDD,
where P bit if set, indicates that the FlexLogic™ type is associated
with a protection element state and T represents bits for the BASE
type, and D represents bits for the descriptor.
The values in square brackets indicate the base type with P prefix
[PTTTTTT] and the values in round brackets indicate the descriptor range.
F200
TEXT40: 40-CHARACTER ASCII TEXT
20 registers, 16 Bits: 1st Char MSB, 2nd Char. LSB
B-50
[0] Off(0) this is boolean FALSE value
[0] On (1)This is boolean TRUE value
[2] CONTACT INPUTS (1 - 96)
[3] CONTACT INPUTS OFF (1-96)
[4] VIRTUAL INPUTS (1-64)
[6] VIRTUAL OUTPUTS (1-64)
[10] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE DETECTED (1-64)
[11] CONTACT OUTPUTS VOLTAGE OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[12] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT DETECTED (1-64)
[13] CONTACT OUTPUTS CURRENT OFF DETECTED (1-64)
[14] REMOTE INPUTS (1-32)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
[28] INSERT (Via Keypad only)
[32] END
[34] NOT (1 INPUT)
[36] 2 INPUT XOR (0)
[38] LATCH SET/RESET (2 inputs)
[40] OR (2 to 16 inputs)
[42] AND (2 to 16 inputs)
[44] NOR (2 to 16 inputs)
[46] NAND (2 to 16 inputs)
[48] TIMER (1 to 32)
[50] ASSIGN VIRTUAL OUTPUT (1 to 64)
[52] SELF-TEST ERROR (see F141 for range)
[56] ACTIVE SETTING GROUP (1 to 6)
[62] MISCELLANEOUS EVENTS (see F146 for range)
[64 to 127] ELEMENT STATES
bitmask
element state
0
Pickup
1
Operate
2
Pickup Phase A
3
Pickup Phase B
4
Pickup Phase C
5
Operate Phase A
6
Operate Phase B
7
Operate Phase C
B
F505
BITFIELD: CONTACT OUTPUT STATE
F400
UR_UINT16: CT/VT BANK SELECTION
bitmask
F504
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Contact State, 1 = Voltage Detected, 2 = Current Detected
bank selection
0
Card 1 Contact 1 to 4
1
Card 1 Contact 5 to 8
2
Card 2 Contact 1 to 4
F506|
BITFIELD: 1 PHASE ELEMENT STATE
3
Card 2 Contact 5 to 8
0 = Pickup, 1 = Operate
4
Card 3 Contact 1 to 4
5
Card 3 Contact 5 to 8
F507
BITFIELD: COUNTER ELEMENT STATE
0 = Count Greater Than, 1 = Count Equal To, 2 = Count Less Than
F500
UR_UINT16: PACKED BITFIELD
First register indicates I/O state with bits 0(MSB)-15(LSB) corresponding to I/0 state 1-16. The second register indicates I/O state
with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 17-32 (if required) The
third register indicates I/O state with bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0
state 33-48 (if required). The fourth register indicates I/O state with
bits 0-15 corresponding to I/0 state 49-64 (if required).
The number of registers required is determined by the specific
data item. A bit value of 0 = Off, 1 = On
F509
BITFIELD: SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate
F511
BITFIELD: 3-PHASE SIMPLE ELEMENT STATE
0 = Operate, 1 = Operate A, 2 = Operate B, 3 = Operate C
F501
UR_UINT16: LED STATUS
Low byte of register indicates LED status with bit 0 representing
the top LED and bit 7 the bottom LED. A bit value of 1 indicates
the LED is on, 0 indicates the LED is off.
F515
ENUMERATION ELEMENT INPUT MODE
0 = SIGNED, 1 = ABSOLUTE
F516
ENUMERATION ELEMENT COMPARE MODE
F502
BITFIELD: ELEMENT OPERATE STATES
0 = LEVEL, 1 = DELTA
Each bit contains the operate state for an element. See the F124
format code for a list of element IDs. The operate bit for element ID
X is bit [X mod 16] in register [X/16].
F518
ENUMERATION: FLEXELEMENT™ UNITS
0 = Milliseconds, 1 = Seconds, 2 = Minutes
F519
ENUMERATION: NON-VOLATILE LATCH
0 = Reset-Dominant, 1 = Set-Dominant
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-51
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
F530
ENUMERATION: FRONT PANEL INTERFACE KEYPRESS
B
bitmask
keypress
bitmask
keypress
0
None
22
Value Down
1
Menu
23
Reset
2
Message Up
24
User 1
3
7
4
8
~
25
User 2
26
User 3
5
9
31
User PB 1
6
Help
32
User PB 2
7
Message Left
33
User PB 3
8
4
34
User PB 4
9
5
35
User PB 5
10
6
36
User PB 6
11
Escape
37
User PB 7
12
Message Right
38
User PB 8
13
1
39
User PB 9
14
2
40
User PB 10
15
3
41
User PB 11
16
Enter
42
User PB 12
17
Message Down
44
User 4
18
0
45
User 5
19
Decimal
46
User 6
20
+/–
47
User 7
21
Value Up
F600
UR_UINT16: FLEXANALOG PARAMETER
The 16-bit value corresponds to the modbus address of the value
to be used when this parameter is selected. Only certain values
may be used as FlexAnalogs (basically all the metering quantities
used in protection)
B-52
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX B
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
B
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
B-53
B.4 MEMORY MAPPING
APPENDIX B
B
B-54
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C UCA/MMS COMMUNICATIONSC.1OVERVIEW
C.1.1 UCA
The Utility Communications Architecture (UCA) Version 2 represents an attempt by utilities and vendors of electronic
equipment to produce standardized communications systems. There is a set of reference documents available from the
Electric Power Research Institute (EPRI) and vendors of UCA/MMS software libraries that describe the complete capabilities of the UCA. Following, is a description of the subset of UCA/MMS features that are supported by the UR relay. The reference document set includes:
•
Introduction to UCA version 2
•
Generic Object Models for Substation and Feeder Equipment (GOMSFE)
•
Common Application Service Models (CASM) and Mapping to MMS
•
UCA Version 2 Profiles
These documents can be obtained from the UCA User’s Group at http://www.ucausersgroup.org. It is strongly recommended that all those involved with any UCA implementation obtain this document set.
COMMUNICATION PROFILES:
The UCA specifies a number of possibilities for communicating with electronic devices based on the OSI Reference Model.
The UR relay uses the seven layer OSI stack (TP4/CLNP and TCP/IP profiles). Refer to the "UCA Version 2 Profiles" reference document for details.
The TP4/CLNP profile requires the UR relay to have a network address or Network Service Access Point (NSAP) in order
to establish a communication link. The TCP/IP profile requires the UR relay to have an IP address in order to establish a
PRODUCT SETUP
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK
communication link. These addresses are set in the SETTINGS
menu. Note that the UR relay supports UCA operation over the TP4/CLNP or the TCP/IP stacks and also supports operation over both stacks simultaneously. It is possible to have up to two simultaneous connections. This is in addition to DNP
and Modbus/TCP (non-UCA) connections.
C.1.2 MMS
a) DESCRIPTION
The UCA specifies the use of the Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) at the upper (Application) layer for transfer of real-time data. This protocol has been in existence for a number of years and provides a set of services suitable for
the transfer of data within a substation LAN environment. Data can be grouped to form objects and be mapped to MMS services. Refer to the “GOMSFE” and “CASM” reference documents for details.
SUPPORTED OBJECTS:
The "GOMSFE" document describes a number of communication objects. Within these objects are items, some of which
are mandatory and some of which are optional, depending on the implementation. The UR relay supports the following
GOMSFE objects:
•
DI (device identity)
•
PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
•
GCTL (generic control)
•
PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
•
GIND (generic indicator)
•
POVR (overvoltage relay)
•
GLOBE (global data)
•
PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
•
MMXU (polyphase measurement unit)
•
PUVR (under voltage relay)
•
PBRL (phase balance current relay)
•
PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
•
PBRO (basic relay object)
•
ctRATO (CT ratio information)
•
PDIF (differential relay)
•
vtRATO (VT ratio information)
•
PDIS (distance)
•
RREC (reclosing relay)
•
PDOC (directional overcurrent)
•
RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
•
PDPR (directional power relay)
•
XCBR (circuit breaker)
•
PFRQ (frequency relay)
UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
C-1
C
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
PEER-TO-PEER COMMUNICATION:
Peer-to-peer communication of digital state information, using the UCA GOOSE data object, is supported via the use of the
UR Remote Inputs/Outputs feature. This feature allows digital points to be transferred between any UCA conforming
devices.
FILE SERVICES:
MMS file services are supported to allow transfer of Oscillography, Event Record, or other files from a UR relay.
COMMUNICATION SOFTWARE UTILITIES:
The exact structure and values of the implemented objects can be seen by connecting to a UR relay with an MMS browser,
such as the “MMS Object Explorer and AXS4-MMS DDE/OPC” server from Sisco Inc.
NON-UCA DATA:
C
The UR relay makes available a number of non-UCA data items. These data items can be accessed through the "UR" MMS
domain. UCA data can be accessed through the "UCADevice" MMS domain.
b) PROTOCOL IMPLEMENTATION AND CONFORMANCE STATEMENT (PICS)
The UR relay functions as a server only; a UR relay cannot be configured as a client. Thus, the following list of supported services is for server operation only:
NOTE
The MMS supported services are as follows:
CONNECTION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
•
•
•
•
•
Initiate
Conclude
Cancel
Abort
Reject
VMD SUPPORT SERVICES:
•
•
•
Status
GetNameList
Identify
VARIABLE ACCESS SERVICES:
•
•
•
•
•
Read
Write
InformationReport
GetVariableAccessAttributes
GetNamedVariableListAttributes
OPERATOR COMMUNICATION SERVICES:
(none)
SEMAPHORE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
DOMAIN MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
•
GetDomainAttributes
PROGRAM INVOCATION MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
EVENT MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
C-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.1 OVERVIEW
JOURNAL MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
(none)
FILE MANAGEMENT SERVICES:
•
•
•
•
•
ObtainFile
FileOpen
FileRead
FileClose
FileDirectory
The following MMS parameters are supported:
•
STR1 (Arrays)
•
STR2 (Structures)
•
NEST (Nesting Levels of STR1 and STR2) - 1
•
VNAM (Named Variables)
•
VADR (Unnamed Variables)
•
VALT (Alternate Access Variables)
•
VLIS (Named Variable Lists)
•
REAL (ASN.1 REAL Type)
C
c) MODEL IMPLEMENTATION CONFORMANCE (MIC)
This section provides details of the UCA object models supported by the UR series relays. Note that not all of the protective
device functions are applicable to all the UR series relays.
Table C–1: DEVICE IDENTITY – DI
NAME
M/O
RWEC
Name
m
rw
Class
o
rw
d
o
rw
Own
o
rw
Loc
o
rw
VndID
m
r
Table C–2: GENERIC CONTROL – GCTL
FC
NAME
CLASS
RWECS
ST
BO<n>
SI
rw
DESCRIPTION
Generic Single Point Indication
CO
BO<n>
SI
rw
Generic Binary Output
CF
BO<n>
SBOCF
rw
SBO Configuration
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
BO<n>
d
rw
Description for each point
DC
Actual instantiation of GCTL objects is as follows:
NOTE
GCTL1 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SI1 to SI32); includes SBO functionality.
Table C–3: GENERIC INDICATORS – GIND 1 TO 6
FC
NAME
CLASS
RWECS
DESCRIPTION
ST
SIG<n>
SIG
r
Generic Indication (block of 16)
DC
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
RP
BrcbST
BasRCB
rw
Controls reporting of STATUS
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
C-3
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Table C–4: GENERIC INDICATOR – GIND7
FC
OBJECT
NAME
ST
SI<n>
DC
LN
SI<n>
BrcbST
BasRCB
RP
CLASS
SI
RWECS
DESCRIPTION
r
Generic single point indication
d
rw
Description for brick
d
rw
Description for all included SI
rw
Controls reporting of STATUS
Actual instantiation of GIND objects is as follows:
NOTE
C
GIND1 = Contact Inputs (96 total points – SIG1 to SIG6)
GIND2 = Contact Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND3 = Virtual Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
GIND4 = Virtual Outputs (64 total points – SIG1 to SIG4)
GIND5 = Remote Inputs (32 total points – SIG1 to SIG2)
GIND6 = Flex States (16 total points – SIG1 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
GIND7 = Flex States (16 total points – SI1 to SI16 representing Flex States 1 to 16)
Table C–5: GLOBAL DATA – GLOBE
FC
OBJECT NAME
ST
ModeDS
CLASS
RWECS
SIT
r
LocRemDS
ActSG
CO
DESCRIPTION
Device is: in test, off-line, available, or unhealthy
SIT
r
The mode of control, local or remote (DevST)
INT8U
r
Active Settings Group
EditSG
INT8u
r
Settings Group selected for read/write operation
CopySG
INT8U
w
Selects Settings Group for read/write operation
IndRs
BOOL
w
Resets ALL targets
CF
ClockTOD
BTIME
rw
Date and time
RP
GOOSE
PACT
rw
Reports IED Inputs and Outputs
Table C–6: MEASUREMENT UNIT (POLYPHASE) – MMXU
FC
OBJECT NAME
MX
V
PPV
CLASS
RWECS
WYE
rw
DESCRIPTION
Voltage on phase A, B, C to G
DELTA
rw
Voltage on AB, BC, CA
A
WYE
rw
Current in phase A, B, C, and N
W
WYE
rw
Watts in phase A, B, C
AI
rw
Total watts in all three phases
WYE
rw
Vars in phase A, B, C
AI
rw
Total vars in all three phases
WYE
rw
VA in phase A, B, C
AI
rw
Total VA in all 3 phases
WYE
rw
Power Factor for phase A, B, C
AI
rw
Average Power Factor for all three phases
TotW
Var
TotVar
VA
TotVA
PF
AvgPF
Hz
AI
rw
Power system frequency
ACF
rw
Configuration of ALL included MMXU.MX
CF
All MMXU.MX
DC
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
All MMXU.MX
d
rw
Description of ALL included MMXU.MX
BasRCB
rw
Controls reporting of measurements
RP
BrcbMX
Actual instantiation of MMXU objects is as follows:
NOTE
C-4
1 MMXU per Source (as determined from the ‘product order code’)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX C
C.1 OVERVIEW
Table C–7: PROTECTIVE ELEMENTS
FC
OBJECT NAME
CLASS
RWECS
ST
Out
BOOL
r
1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
Tar
Targets since last reset
CO
PhsTar
r
FctDS
SIT
r
Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp
INT8U
r
Settings group selected for use
DCO
w
1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar
BO
w
Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat
BO
w
Reset ALL Elements/Targets
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
ElementSt
d
r
Element state string
EnaDisFct
DC
DESCRIPTION
C
The following GOMSFE objects are defined by the object model described via the above table:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
PBRO (basic relay object)
PDIF (differential relay)
PDIS (distance)
PDOC (directional overcurrent)
PDPR (directional power relay)
PFRQ (frequency relay)
PHIZ (high impedance ground detector)
PIOC (instantaneous overcurrent relay)
POVR (over voltage relay)
PTOC (time overcurrent relay)
PUVR (under voltage relay)
RSYN (synchronizing or synchronism-check relay)
POVR (overvoltage)
PVPH (volts per hertz relay)
PBRL (phase balance current relay)
Actual instantiation of these objects is determined by the number of the corresponding elements present in the C60
as per the ‘product order code’.
NOTE
Table C–8: CT RATIO INFORMATION – ctRATO
OBJECT NAME
CLASS
RWECS
PhsARat
RATIO
rw
Primary/secondary winding ratio
NeutARat
RATIO
rw
Primary/secondary winding ratio
d
rw
Description for brick (current bank ID)
LN
DESCRIPTION
Table C–9: VT RATIO INFORMATION – vtRATO
OBJECT NAME
CLASS
RWECS
PhsVRat
RATIO
rw
Primary/secondary winding ratio
d
rw
Description for brick (current bank ID)
LN
DESCRIPTION
Actual instantiation of ctRATO and vtRATO objects is as follows:
NOTE
1 ctRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
1 vtRATO per Source (as determined from the product order code).
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
C-5
C.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX C
Table C–10: RECLOSING RELAY – RREC
C
FC
OBJECT NAME
ST
Out
CLASS
RWECS
BOOL
r
DESCRIPTION
1 = Element operated, 0 = Element not operated
FctDS
SIT
r
Function is enabled/disabled
PuGrp
INT8U
r
Settings group selected for use
SG
ReclSeq
SHOTS
rw
Reclosing Sequence
CO
EnaDisFct
DCO
w
1 = Element function enabled, 0 = disabled
RsTar
BO
w
Reset ALL Elements/Targets
RsLat
BO
w
Reset ALL Elements/Targets
CF
ReclSeq
ACF
rw
Configuration for RREC.SG
DC
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
ElementSt
d
r
Element state string
Actual instantiation of RREC objects is determined by the number of autoreclose elements present in the C60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
Also note that the Shots class data (i.e. Tmr1, Tmr2, Tmr3, Tmr4, RsTmr) is specified to be of type INT16S (16 bit
signed integer); this data type is not large enough to properly display the full range of these settings from the C60.
Numbers larger than 32768 will be displayed incorrectly.
Table C–11: CIRCUIT BREAKER – XCBR
FC
OBJECT NAME
CLASS
RWECS
DESCRIPTION
ST
SwDS
SIT
rw
Switch Device Status
SwPoleDS
BSTR8
rw
Switch Pole Device Status
PwrSupSt
SIG
rw
Health of the power supply
PresSt
SIT
rw
The condition of the insulating medium pressure
All CB poles did not operate within time interval
PoleDiscSt
SI
rw
TrpCoil
SI
rw
Trip coil supervision
CO
ODSw
DCO
rw
The command to open/close the switch
CF
ODSwSBO
SBOCF
rw
Configuration for all included XCBR.CO
DC
LN
d
rw
Description for brick
RP
brcbST
BasRCB
rw
Controls reporting of Status Points
Actual instantiation of XCBR objects is determined by the number of breaker control elements present in the C60 as
per the product order code.
NOTE
C.1.3 UCA REPORTING
A built-in TCP/IP connection timeout of two minutes is employed by the UR to detect "dead" connections. If there is no data
traffic on a TCP connection for greater than two minutes, the connection will be aborted by the UR. This frees up the connection to be used by other clients. Therefore, when using UCA reporting, clients should configure BasRCB objects such
that an integrity report will be issued at least every 2 minutes (120000 ms). This ensures that the UR will not abort the connection. If other MMS data is being polled on the same connection at least once every 2 minutes, this timeout will not apply.
C-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D IEC 60870-5-104 COMMUNICATIONSD.1OVERVIEW
D.1.1 INTEROPERABILITY DOCUMENT
This document is adapted from the IEC 60870-5-104 standard. For ths section the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used
in standard direction; Ë – not used;
– cannot be selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
1.
SYSTEM OR DEVICE:
Ë System Definition
Ë Controlling Station Definition (Master)
Ë
Controlled Station Definition (Slave)
2.
3.
NETWORK CONFIGURATION:
Point-to-Point
Multipoint
Multiple Point-to-Point
Multipoint Star
PHYSICAL LAYER
Transmission Speed (control direction):
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit
X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
D
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
Transmission Speed (monitor direction):
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Standard:
Unbalanced Interchange
Circuit V.24/V.28 Recommended
if >1200 bits/s:
Balanced Interchange Circuit
X.24/X.27:
100 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
2400 bits/sec.
200 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
4800 bits/sec.
300 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
9600 bits/sec.
600 bits/sec.
19200 bits/sec.
1200 bits/sec.
38400 bits/sec.
56000 bits/sec.
64000 bits/sec.
4.
LINK LAYER
Link Transmission Procedure:
Address Field of the Link:
Balanced Transmision
Not Present (Balanced Transmission Only)
Unbalanced Transmission
One Octet
Two Octets
Structured
Unstructured
Frame Length (maximum length, number of octets): Not selectable in companion IEC 60870-5-104 standard
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
D-1
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
When using an unbalanced link layer, the following ADSU types are returned in class 2 messages (low priority) with the
indicated causes of transmission:
The standard assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
A special assignment of ADSUs to class 2 messages is used as follows:
5.
APPLICATION LAYER
Transmission Mode for Application Data:
Mode 1 (least significant octet first), as defined in Clause 4.10 of IEC 60870-5-4, is used exclusively in this companion
stanadard.
Common Address of ADSU:
One Octet
Ë
Two Octets
Information Object Address:
D
One Octet
Ë
Structured
Two Octets
Ë
Unstructured
Ë
Three Octets
Cause of Transmission:
One Octet
Ë
Two Octets (with originator address). Originator address is set to zero if not used.
Maximum Length of APDU: 253 (the maximum length may be reduced by the system.
Selection of standard ASDUs:
For the following lists, the boxes indicate the following: Ë
– used in standard direction; Ë – not used;
selected in IEC 60870-5-104 standard.
– cannot be
Process information in monitor direction
Ë
<1> := Single-point information
M_SP_NA_1
<2> := Single-point information with time tag
Ë <3> := Double-point information
<4> := Double-point information with time tag
Ë <5> := Step position information
M_DP_TA_1
M_ST_NA_1
<6> := Step position information with time tag
Ë <7> := Bitstring of 32 bits
M_ST_TA_1
M_BO_NA_1
<8> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag
M_BO_TA_1
Ë <9> := Measured value, normalized value
M_ME_NA_1
<10> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag
Ë <11> := Measured value, scaled value
<12> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag
Ë
<13> := Measured value, short floating point value
<14> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag
Ë
<15> := Integrated totals
M_NE_TA_1
M_ME_NB_1
M_NE_TB_1
M_ME_NC_1
M_NE_TC_1
M_IT_NA_1
<16> := Integrated totals with time tag
M_IT_TA_1
<17> := Event of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TA_1
<18> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TB_1
<19> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag
M_EP_TC_1
Ë <20> := Packed single-point information with status change detection
D-2
M_SP_TA_1
M_DP_NA_1
C60 Breaker Management Relay
M_SP_NA_1
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 OVERVIEW
Ë <21> := Measured value, normalized value without quantity descriptor
M_ME_ND_1
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
<30> := Single-point information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_SP_TB_1
<31> := Double-point information wiht time tag CP56Time2a
M_DP_TB_1
<32> := Step position information with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ST_TB_1
<33> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
M_BO_TB_1
<34> := Measured value, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TD_1
<35> := Measured value, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TE_1
<36> := Measured value, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
M_ME_TF_1
<37> := Integrated totals with time tag CP56Time2a
M_IT_TB_1
<38> := Event of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TD_1
<39> := Packed start events of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TE_1
<40> := Packed output circuit information of protection equipment with time tag CP56Time2a
M_EP_TF_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <2>, <4>, <6>, <8>, <10>, <12>, <14>, <16>, <17>, <18>, and <19> or of the set
<30> to <40> are used.
Process information in control direction
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
<45> := Single command
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
D
C_SC_NA_1
<46> := Double command
C_DC_NA_1
<47> := Regulating step command
C_RC_NA_1
<48> := Set point command, normalized value
C_SE_NA_1
<49> := Set point command, scaled value
C_SE_NB_1
<50> := Set point command, short floating point value
C_SE_NC_1
<51> := Bitstring of 32 bits
C_BO_NA_1
<58> := Single command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SC_TA_1
<59> := Double command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_DC_TA_1
<60> := Regulating step command with time tag CP56Time2a
C_RC_TA_1
<61> := Set point command, normalized value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TA_1
<62> := Set point command, scaled value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TB_1
<63> := Set point command, short floating point value with time tag CP56Time2a
C_SE_TC_1
<64> := Bitstring of 32 bits with time tag CP56Time2a
C_BO_TA_1
Either the ASDUs of the set <45> to <51> or of the set <58> to <64> are used.
System information in monitor direction
Ë
<70> := End of initialization
M_EI_NA_1
System information in control direction
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
<100> := Interrogation command
C_IC_NA_1
<101> := Counter interrogation command
C_CI_NA_1
<102> := Read command
C_RD_NA_1
<103> := Clock synchronization command (see Clause 7.6 in standard)
C_CS_NA_1
<104> := Test command
C_TS_NA_1
Ë
<105> := Reset process command
<106> := Delay acquisition command
Ë
<107> := Test command with time tag CP56Time2a
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
C_RP_NA_1
C_CD_NA_1
C_TS_TA_1
D-3
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
Parameter in control direction
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
<110> := Parameter of measured value, normalized value
PE_ME_NA_1
<111> := Parameter of measured value, scaled value
PE_ME_NB_1
<112> := Parameter of measured value, short floating point value
PE_ME_NC_1
<113> := Parameter activation
PE_AC_NA_1
File transfer
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
<120> := File Ready
F_FR_NA_1
<121> := Section Ready
F_SR_NA_1
<122> := Call directory, select file, call file, call section
F_SC_NA_1
<123> := Last section, last segment
F_LS_NA_1
<124> := Ack file, ack section
F_AF_NA_1
<125> := Segment
F_SG_NA_1
<126> := Directory (blank or X, available only in monitor [standard] direction)
C_CD_NA_1
Type identifier and cause of transmission assignments
(station-specific parameters)
D
In the following table:
•
Shaded boxes are not required.
•
Black boxes are not permitted in this companion standard.
•
Blank boxes indicate functions or ASDU not used.
•
‘X’ if only used in the standard direction
D-4
<4>
M_DP_TA_1
<5>
M_ST_NA_1
<6>
M_ST_TA_1
<7>
M_BO_NA_1
<8>
M_BO_TA_1
FILE TRANSFER
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
X
X
C60 Breaker Management Relay
X
X
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
3
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
2
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
1
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
DEACTIVATION
M_DP_NA_1
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
<3>
ACTIVATION
M_SP_TA_1
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
M_SP_NA_1
<2>
INITIALIZED
<1>
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
X
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 OVERVIEW
<11>
M_ME_NB_1
<12>
M_ME_TB_1
<13>
M_ME_NC_1
<14>
M_ME_TC_1
<15>
M_IT_NA_1
<16>
M_IT_TA_1
<17>
M_EP_TA_1
<18>
M_EP_TB_1
<19>
M_EP_TC_1
<20>
M_PS_NA_1
<21>
M_ME_ND_1
<30>
M_SP_TB_1
<31>
M_DP_TB_1
<32>
M_ST_TB_1
<33>
M_BO_TB_1
<34>
M_ME_TD_1
<35>
M_ME_TE_1
<36>
M_ME_TF_1
<37>
M_IT_TB_1
<38>
M_EP_TD_1
<39>
M_EP_TE_1
<40>
M_EP_TF_1
<45>
C_SC_NA_1
<46>
C_DC_NA_1
<47>
C_RC_NA_1
<48>
C_SE_NA_1
<49>
C_SE_NB_1
GE Multilin
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
FILE TRANSFER
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
X
X
X
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
3
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
2
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
DEACTIVATION
1
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
M_ME_TA_1
ACTIVATION
<10>
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
M_ME_NA_1
INITIALIZED
<9>
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
NO.
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
C60 Breaker Management Relay
D-5
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
D-6
<58>
C_SC_TA_1
<59>
C_DC_TA_1
<60>
C_RC_TA_1
<61>
C_SE_TA_1
<62>
C_SE_TB_1
<63>
C_SE_TC_1
<64>
C_BO_TA_1
<70>
M_EI_NA_1*)
<100>
C_IC_NA_1
<101>
C_CI_NA_1
<102>
C_RD_NA_1
<103>
C_CS_NA_1
<104>
C_TS_NA_1
<105>
C_RP_NA_1
<106>
C_CD_NA_1
<107>
C_TS_TA_1
<110>
P_ME_NA_1
<111>
P_ME_NB_1
<112>
P_ME_NC_1
<113>
P_AC_NA_1
<120>
F_FR_NA_1
<121>
F_SR_NA_1
<122>
F_SC_NA_1
<123>
F_LS_NA_1
<124>
F_AF_NA_1
<125>
F_SG_NA_1
<126>
F_DR_TA_1*)
RETURN INFO CAUSED BY LOCAL CMD
FILE TRANSFER
INTERROGATED BY GROUP <NUMBER>
REQUEST BY GROUP <N> COUNTER REQ
UNKNOWN TYPE IDENTIFICATION
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
20
to
36
37
to
41
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
ACTIVATION TERMINATION
3
UNKNOWN INFORMATION OBJECT ADDR
DEACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
2
UNKNOWN COMMON ADDRESS OF ADSU
DEACTIVATION
1
UNKNOWN CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
ACTIVATION CONFIRMATION
C_BO_NA_1
ACTIVATION
<51>
REQUEST OR REQUESTED
C_SE_NC_1
INITIALIZED
<50>
SPONTANEOUS
MNEMONIC
BACKGROUND SCAN
D
NO.
CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION
PERIODIC, CYCLIC
TYPE IDENTIFICATION
44
45
46
47
X
X
X
X
C60 Breaker Management Relay
X
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
6.
D.1 OVERVIEW
BASIC APPLICATION FUNCTIONS
Station Initialization:
Ë
Remote initialization
Cyclic Data Transmission:
Ë
Cyclic data transmission
Read Procedure:
Ë
Read procedure
Spontaneous Transmission:
Ë
Spontaneous transmission
Double transmission of information objects with cause of transmission spontaneous:
The following type identifications may be transmitted in succession caused by a single status change of an information
object. The particular information object addresses for which double transmission is enabled are defined in a projectspecific list.
Ë Single point information: M_SP_NA_1, M_SP_TA_1, M_SP_TB_1, and M_PS_NA_1
D
Ë Double point information: M_DP_NA_1, M_DP_TA_1, and M_DP_TB_1
Ë Step position information: M_ST_NA_1, M_ST_TA_1, and M_ST_TB_1
Ë Bitstring of 32 bits: M_BO_NA_1, M_BO_TA_1, and M_BO_TB_1 (if defined for a specific project)
Ë Measured value, normalized value: M_ME_NA_1, M_ME_TA_1, M_ME_ND_1, and M_ME_TD_1
Ë Measured value, scaled value: M_ME_NB_1, M_ME_TB_1, and M_ME_TE_1
Ë Measured value, short floating point number: M_ME_NC_1, M_ME_TC_1, and M_ME_TF_1
Station interrogation:
Ë
Global
Ë
Group 1
Ë
Group 5
Ë
Group 9
Ë
Group 13
Ë
Group 2
Ë
Group 6
Ë
Group 10
Ë
Group 14
Ë
Group 3
Ë
Group 7
Ë
Group 11
Ë
Group 15
Ë
Group 4
Ë
Group 8
Ë
Group 12
Ë
Group 16
Clock synchronization:
Ë
Clock synchronization (optional, see Clause 7.6)
Command transmission:
Ë
Direct command transmission
Ë Direct setpoint command transmission
Ë
Select and execute command
Ë Select and execute setpoint command
Ë
C_SE ACTTERM used
Ë
No additional definition
Ë
Short pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Long pulse duration (duration determined by a system parameter in the outstation)
Ë
Persistent output
Ë
Supervision of maximum delay in command direction of commands and setpoint commands
Maximum allowable delay of commands and setpoint commands: 10 s
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
D-7
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
Transmission of integrated totals:
Ë
Mode A: Local freeze with spontaneous transmission
Ë
Mode B: Local freeze with counter interrogation
Ë
Mode C: Freeze and transmit by counter-interrogation commands
Ë
Mode D: Freeze by counter-interrogation command, frozen values reported simultaneously
Ë
Counter read
Ë
Counter freeze without reset
Ë
Counter freeze with reset
Ë
Counter reset
Ë
General request counter
Ë
Request counter group 1
Ë
Request counter group 2
D
Ë
Request counter group 3
Ë
Request counter group 4
Parameter loading:
Ë
Threshold value
Ë Smoothing factor
Ë Low limit for transmission of measured values
Ë High limit for transmission of measured values
Parameter activation:
Ë Activation/deactivation of persistent cyclic or periodic transmission of the addressed object
Test procedure:
Ë Test procedure
File transfer:
File transfer in monitor direction:
Ë Transparent file
Ë Transmission of disturbance data of protection equipment
Ë Transmission of sequences of events
Ë Transmission of sequences of recorded analog values
File transfer in control direction:
Ë Transparent file
Background scan:
Ë Background scan
Acquisition of transmission delay:
Acquisition of transmission delay
D-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 OVERVIEW
Definition of time outs:
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
t0
30 s
t1
15 s
Timeout of send or test APDUs
15 s
t2
10 s
Timeout for acknowlegements in case of no data messages t2 < t1
10 s
t3
20 s
Timeout for sending test frames in case of a long idle state
20 s
Timeout of connection establishment
SELECTED
VALUE
120 s
Maximum range of values for all time outs: 1 to 255 s, accuracy 1 s
Maximum number of outstanding I-format APDUs k and latest acknowledge APDUs (w):
PARAMETER
DEFAULT
VALUE
REMARKS
k
12 APDUs
Maximum difference receive sequence number to send state variable
12 APDUs
w
8 APDUs
Latest acknowledge after receiving w I-format APDUs
8 APDUs
Maximum range of values k:
1 to 32767 (215 – 1) APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Maximum range of values w:
1 to 32767 APDUs, accuracy 1 APDU
Recommendation: w should not exceed two-thirds of k.
SELECTED
VALUE
D
Portnumber:
PARAMETER
VALUE
REMARKS
Portnumber
2404
In all cases
RFC 2200 suite:
RFC 2200 is an official Internet Standard which describes the state of standardization of protocols used in the Internet
as determined by the Internet Architecture Board (IAB). It offers a broad spectrum of actual standards used in the Internet. The suitable selection of documents from RFC 2200 defined in this standard for given projects has to be chosen
by the user of this standard.
Ë
Ethernet 802.3
Ë Serial X.21 interface
Ë Other selection(s) from RFC 2200 (list below if selected)
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
D-9
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
D.1.2 POINT LIST
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN MMENC1 LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 1 OF 4)
POINTS
DESCRIPTION
POINTS
M_ME_NC_1 Points
D
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 2 OF 4)
2044
DESCRIPTION
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
Point
Description
2045
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
2000
SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS
2046
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
2001
SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS
2047
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
2002
SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS
2048
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
2003
SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS
2049
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
2004
SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
2050
SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power
2005
SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle
2051
SRC 1 Phase A Real Power
2006
SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
2052
SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
2007
SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle
2053
SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
2008
SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
2054
SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
2009
SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
2055
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
2010
SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
2056
SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
2011
SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
2057
SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
2012
SRC 1 Ground Current RMS
2058
SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
2013
SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude
2059
SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
2014
SRC 1 Ground Current Angle
2060
SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
2015
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
2061
SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
2016
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
2062
SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
2017
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
2063
SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
2018
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
2064
SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
2019
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
2065
SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
2020
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
2066
SRC 1 Positive Watthour
2021
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
2067
SRC 1 Negative Watthour
2022
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
2068
SRC 1 Positive Varhour
2023
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
2069
SRC 1 Negative Varhour
2024
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
2070
SRC 1 Frequency
2025
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
2071
SRC 1 Demand Ia
2026
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
2072
SRC 1 Demand Ib
2027
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
2073
SRC 1 Demand Ic
2028
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
2074
SRC 1 Demand Watt
2029
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
2075
SRC 1 Demand Var
2030
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
2076
SRC 1 Demand Va
2031
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
2077
Sens Dir Power 1 Actual
2032
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS
2078
Sens Dir Power 2 Actual
2033
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS
2079
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A
2034
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
2080
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B
2035
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
2081
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C
2036
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle
2082
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A
2037
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
2083
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B
2038
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle
2084
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C
2039
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
2085
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
2040
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle
2086
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
2041
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
2087
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
2042
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
2088
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
2043
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
2089
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency
D-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX D
D.1 OVERVIEW
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 3 OF 4)
POINTS
Table D–1: IEC 60870-5-104 POINTS (SHEET 4 OF 4)
DESCRIPTION
POINTS
2090
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
C_SC_NA_1 Points
DESCRIPTION
2091
Tracking Frequency
1100 - 1115 Virtual Input States[0] - No Select Required
2092
FlexElement 1 Actual
1116 - 1131 Virtual Input States[1] - Select Required
2093
FlexElement 2 Actual
2094
FlexElement 3 Actual
4000
Digital Counter 1 Value
2095
FlexElement 4 Actual
4001
Digital Counter 2 Value
2096
FlexElement 5 Actual
4002
Digital Counter 3 Value
2097
FlexElement 6 Actual
4003
Digital Counter 4 Value
2098
FlexElement 7 Actual
4004
Digital Counter 5 Value
2099
FlexElement 8 Actual
4005
Digital Counter 6 Value
2100
FlexElement 9 Actual
4006
Digital Counter 7 Value
2101
FlexElement 10 Actual
4007
Digital Counter 8 Value
2102
FlexElement 11 Actual
2103
FlexElement 12 Actual
2104
FlexElement 13 Actual
2105
FlexElement 14 Actual
2106
FlexElement 15 Actual
2107
FlexElement 16 Actual
2108
Current Setting Group
M_IT_NA_1 Points
D
P_ME_NC_1 Points
5000 5108
Threshold values for M_ME_NC_1 points
M_SP_NA_1 POINTS
100 - 115
Virtual Input States[0]
116 - 131
Virtual Input States[1]
132 - 147
Virtual Output States[0]
148 - 163
Virtual Output States[1]
164 - 179
Virtual Output States[2]
180 - 195
Virtual Output States[3]
196 - 211
Contact Input States[0]
212 - 227
Contact Input States[1]
228 - 243
Contact Input States[2]
244 - 259
Contact Input States[3]
260 - 275
Contact Input States[4]
276 - 291
Contact Input States[5]
292 - 307
Contact Output States[0]
308 - 323
Contact Output States[1]
324 - 339
Contact Output States[2]
340 - 355
Contact Output States[3]
356 - 371
Remote Input x States[0]
372 - 387
Remote Input x States[1]
388 - 403
Remote Device x States
404 - 419
LED Column x State[0]
420 - 435
LED Column x State[1]
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
D-11
D.1 OVERVIEW
APPENDIX D
D
D-12
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E DNP COMMUNICATIONSE.1DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
E.1.1 DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE
The following table provides a ‘Device Profile Document’ in the standard format defined in the DNP 3.0 Subset Definitions
Document.
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 1 of 3)
(Also see the IMPLEMENTATION TABLE in the following section)
Vendor Name: General Electric Multilin
Device Name: UR Series Relay
Highest DNP Level Supported:
Device Function:
For Requests:
Level 2
For Responses: Level 2
Ë Master
Ë
Slave
Notable objects, functions, and/or qualifiers supported in addition to the Highest DNP Levels Supported (the complete
list is described in the attached table):
Binary Inputs (Object 1)
Binary Input Changes (Object 2)
Binary Outputs (Object 10)
Binary Counters (Object 20)
E
Frozen Counters (Object 21)
Counter Change Event (Object 22)
Frozen Counter Event (Object 23)
Analog Inputs (Object 30)
Analog Input Changes (Object 32)
Analog Deadbands (Object 34)
Maximum Data Link Frame Size (octets):
Transmitted: 292
Received:
292
Maximum Application Fragment Size (octets):
Transmitted: 240
Received:
2048
Maximum Data Link Re-tries:
Maximum Application Layer Re-tries:
Ë
None
Ë Configurable
Ë None
Ë
Fixed at 2
Ë Configurable
Requires Data Link Layer Confirmation:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Never
Always
Sometimes
Configurable
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-1
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 2 of 3)
Requires Application Layer Confirmation:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Never
Always
When reporting Event Data
When sending multi-fragment responses
Sometimes
Configurable
Timeouts while waiting for:
Data Link Confirm:
Complete Appl. Fragment:
Application Confirm:
Complete Appl. Response:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
None
None
None
None
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Fixed at 3 s
Fixed at ____
Fixed at 4 s
Fixed at ____
Variable
Variable
Variable
Variable
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Others:
E
Transmission Delay:
Inter-character Timeout:
Need Time Delay:
Select/Operate Arm Timeout:
Binary input change scanning period:
Packed binary change process period:
Analog input change scanning period:
Counter change scanning period:
Frozen counter event scanning period:
Unsolicited response notification delay:
Unsolicited response retry delay
No intentional delay
50 ms
Configurable (default = 24 hrs.)
10 s
8 times per power system cycle
1s
500 ms
500 ms
500 ms
500 ms
configurable 0 to 60 sec.
Sends/Executes Control Operations:
WRITE Binary Outputs
SELECT/OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE
DIRECT OPERATE – NO ACK
Count > 1
Pulse On
Pulse Off
Latch On
Latch Off
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Queue
Clear Queue
Ë
Never
Ë
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Never
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Never
Never
Never
Never
Always
Always
Always
Always
Always
Ë Always
Ë Always
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Always
Always
Always
Always
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Ë Sometimes
Ë Sometimes
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Sometimes
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Configurable
Ë Configurable
Ë Configurable
Explanation of ‘Sometimes’: Object 12 points are mapped to UR Virtual Inputs. The persistence of Virtual Inputs is
determined by the VIRTUAL INPUT X TYPE settings. Both “Pulse On” and “Latch On” operations perform the same function in the UR; that is, the appropriate Virtual Input is put into the “On” state. If the Virtual Input is set to “Self-Reset”,
it will reset after one pass of FlexLogic™. The On/Off times and Count value are ignored. “Pulse Off” and “Latch Off”
operations put the appropriate Virtual Input into the “Off” state. “Trip” and “Close” operations both put the appropriate
Virtual Input into the “On” state.
E-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Table E–1: DNP V3.00 DEVICE PROFILE (Sheet 3 of 3)
Reports Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Never
Only time-tagged
Only non-time-tagged
Configurable
Sends Unsolicited Responses:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë No Counters Reported
Ë Configurable (attach explanation)
20
Ë
Default Object:
Default Variation: 1
Ë
Point-by-point list attached
Never
Binary Input Change With Time
Binary Input Change With Relative Time
Configurable (attach explanation)
Sends Static Data in Unsolicited Responses:
Never
Configurable
Only certain objects
Sometimes (attach explanation)
ENABLE/DISABLE unsolicited Function
codes supported
Default Counter Object/Variation:
Reports time-tagged Binary Input Change Events when no
specific variation requested:
Ë
Never
Ë When Device Restarts
Ë When Status Flags Change
No other options are permitted.
Counters Roll Over at:
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
Ë
No Counters Reported
Configurable (attach explanation)
16 Bits (Counter 8)
32 Bits (Counters 0 to 7, 9)
Other Value: _____
Point-by-point list attached
E
Sends Multi-Fragment Responses:
Ë
Yes
Ë No
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-3
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E
E.1.2 IMPLEMENTATION TABLE
The following table identifies the variations, function codes, and qualifiers supported by the UR in both request messages
and in response messages. For static (non-change-event) objects, requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be
responded with qualifiers 00 or 01. Static object requests sent with qualifiers 17 or 28 will be responded with qualifiers 17 or
28. For change-event objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 1 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
1
0
Binary Input (Variation 0 is used to request
default variation)
2
1
Binary Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
2
Binary Input with Status
(default – see Note 1)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
0
Binary Input Change (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)
request default variation)
Binary Input Change without Time
1 (read)
1
2
E
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
3
Binary Input Change with Time
(default – see Note 1)
Binary Input Change with Relative Time
1 (read)
1 (read)
(parse only)
10
12
20
Note 1:
0
Binary Output Status (Variation 0 is used to 1 (read)
request default variation)
2
Binary Output Status
(default – see Note 1)
1
Control Relay Output Block
1 (read)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
00, 01(start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
130 (unsol. resp.)
129 (response
130 (unsol. resp.)
17, 28 (index)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
3 (select)
129 (response)
echo of request
4 (operate)
5 (direct op)
6 (dir. op, noack)
00, 01(start-stop)
0
Binary Counter
1 (read)
(Variation 0 is used to request default
7 (freeze)
06(no range, or all)
8 (freeze noack)
07, 08(limited quantity)
variation)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28(index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1
32-Bit Binary Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1)
7 (freeze)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
8 (freeze noack)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
9 (freeze clear)
17, 28 (index)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
E-4
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 2 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
20
2
16-Bit Binary Counter
cont’d
21
22
23
Note 1:
5
32-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
6
16-Bit Binary Counter without Flag
0
Frozen Counter
(Variation 0 is used to request default
variation)
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
7 (freeze)
8 (freeze noack)
9 (freeze clear)
10 (frz. cl. noack)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
(default – see Note 1)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
9
32-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
10
16-Bit Frozen Counter without Flag
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
0
Counter Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
to request default variation)
1
32-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
(default – see Note 1)
2
16-Bit Counter Change Event
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5
32-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
6
16-Bit Counter Change Event with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
0
Frozen Counter Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
1
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
(default – see Note 1)
2
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-5
E
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
APPENDIX E
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 3 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
23
5
32-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
cont’d
6
16-Bit Frozen Counter Event with Time
30
E
32
34
Note 1:
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
RESPONSE
QUALIFIER
FUNCTION
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
CODES (DEC) CODES (HEX)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
0
Analog Input (Variation 0 is used to request 1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
default variation)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1
32-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
2
16-Bit Analog Input
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
3
32-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
4
16-Bit Analog Input without Flag
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
22 (assign class)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
5
short floating point
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
06(no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08(limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28(index)
0
Analog Change Event (Variation 0 is used 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
to request default variation)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
1
32-Bit Analog Change Event without
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
Time (default – see Note 1)
2
16-Bit Analog Change Event without Time 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
3
32-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
4
16-Bit Analog Change Event with Time
1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
5
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
without Time
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
7
short floating point Analog Change Event 1 (read)
06 (no range, or all)
129 (response)
17, 28 (index)
with Time
07, 08 (limited quantity) 130 (unsol. resp.)
0
Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
(Variation 0 is used to request default
06 (no range, or all)
variation)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
1
16-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
1 (read)
00, 01 (start-stop)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
17, 28 (index)
(default – see Note 1)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
(see Note 2)
17, 28 (index)
2 (write)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
E-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.1 DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT
Table E–2: IMPLEMENTATION TABLE (Sheet 4 of 4)
OBJECT
OBJECT VARIATION DESCRIPTION
NO.
NO.
34
2
32-bit Analog Input Reporting Deadband
REQUEST
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
1 (read)
cont’d
2 (write)
3
Short floating point Analog Input Reporting 1 (read)
Deadband
0
Time and Date
1 (read)
1
Time and Date
(default – see Note 1)
1 (read)
2 (write)
52
2
Time Delay Fine
60
0
Class 0, 1, 2, and 3 Data
1
Class 0 Data
2
Class 1 Data
3
Class 2 Data
4
Class 3 Data
1
Internal Indications
50
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
00, 01 (start-stop)
06 (no range, or all)
07 (limited qty=1)
08 (limited quantity)
17, 28 (index)
RESPONSE
FUNCTION
CODES (DEC)
129 (response)
QUALIFIER
CODES (HEX)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
00, 01 (start-stop)
17, 28 (index)
(see Note 2)
129 (response)
07 (limited quantity)
(quantity = 1)
80
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
1 (read)
20 (enable unsol)
21 (disable unsol)
22 (assign class)
2 (write)
06 (no range, or all)
E
06 (no range, or all)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
06 (no range, or all)
07, 08 (limited quantity)
00 (start-stop)
(index must =7)
------Note 1:
No Object (function code only)
13 (cold restart)
see Note 3
No Object (function code only)
14 (warm restart)
No Object (function code only)
23 (delay meas.)
A Default variation refers to the variation responded when variation 0 is requested and/or in class 0, 1, 2, or 3 scans. Type 30 (Analog
Input) data is limited to data that is actually possible to be used in the UR, based on the product order code. For example, Signal
Source data from source numbers that cannot be used is not included. This optimizes the class 0 poll data size.
Note 2:
For static (non-change-event) objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are only responded when a request is sent with qualifiers 17 or 28, respectively. Otherwise, static object requests sent with qualifiers 00, 01, 06, 07, or 08, will be responded with qualifiers 00 or 01 (for changeevent objects, qualifiers 17 or 28 are always responded.)
Note 3:
Cold restarts are implemented the same as warm restarts – the UR is not restarted, but the DNP process is restarted.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-7
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.1 BINARY INPUTS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY INPUT POINTS
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 1
Change Event Object Number: 2
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input with status)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Input Change with Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: 8 times per power system cycle
Change Event Buffer Size: 1000
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 1 of 9)
E
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 2 of 9)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
0
Virtual Input 1
2
32
Virtual Output 1
2
1
Virtual Input 2
2
33
Virtual Output 2
2
2
Virtual Input 3
2
34
Virtual Output 3
2
3
Virtual Input 4
2
35
Virtual Output 4
2
4
Virtual Input 5
2
36
Virtual Output 5
2
5
Virtual Input 6
2
37
Virtual Output 6
2
6
Virtual Input 7
2
38
Virtual Output 7
2
7
Virtual Input 8
2
39
Virtual Output 8
2
8
Virtual Input 9
2
40
Virtual Output 9
2
9
Virtual Input 10
2
41
Virtual Output 10
2
10
Virtual Input 11
2
42
Virtual Output 11
2
11
Virtual Input 12
2
43
Virtual Output 12
2
12
Virtual Input 13
2
44
Virtual Output 13
2
13
Virtual Input 14
2
45
Virtual Output 14
2
14
Virtual Input 15
2
46
Virtual Output 15
2
15
Virtual Input 16
2
47
Virtual Output 16
2
16
Virtual Input 17
2
48
Virtual Output 17
2
17
Virtual Input 18
2
49
Virtual Output 18
2
18
Virtual Input 19
2
50
Virtual Output 19
2
19
Virtual Input 20
2
51
Virtual Output 20
2
20
Virtual Input 21
2
52
Virtual Output 21
2
21
Virtual Input 22
2
53
Virtual Output 22
2
22
Virtual Input 23
2
54
Virtual Output 23
2
23
Virtual Input 24
2
55
Virtual Output 24
2
24
Virtual Input 25
2
56
Virtual Output 25
2
25
Virtual Input 26
2
57
Virtual Output 26
2
26
Virtual Input 27
2
58
Virtual Output 27
2
27
Virtual Input 28
2
59
Virtual Output 28
2
28
Virtual Input 29
2
60
Virtual Output 29
2
29
Virtual Input 30
2
61
Virtual Output 30
2
30
Virtual Input 31
2
62
Virtual Output 31
2
31
Virtual Input 32
2
63
Virtual Output 32
2
E-8
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 3 of 9)
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 4 of 9)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
64
Virtual Output 33
2
113
Contact Input 18
1
65
Virtual Output 34
2
114
Contact Input 19
1
66
Virtual Output 35
2
115
Contact Input 20
1
67
Virtual Output 36
2
116
Contact Input 21
1
68
Virtual Output 37
2
117
Contact Input 22
1
69
Virtual Output 38
2
118
Contact Input 23
1
70
Virtual Output 39
2
119
Contact Input 24
1
71
Virtual Output 40
2
120
Contact Input 25
1
72
Virtual Output 41
2
121
Contact Input 26
1
73
Virtual Output 42
2
122
Contact Input 27
1
74
Virtual Output 43
2
123
Contact Input 28
1
75
Virtual Output 44
2
124
Contact Input 29
1
76
Virtual Output 45
2
125
Contact Input 30
1
77
Virtual Output 46
2
126
Contact Input 31
1
78
Virtual Output 47
2
127
Contact Input 32
1
79
Virtual Output 48
2
128
Contact Input 33
1
80
Virtual Output 49
2
129
Contact Input 34
1
81
Virtual Output 50
2
130
Contact Input 35
1
82
Virtual Output 51
2
131
Contact Input 36
1
83
Virtual Output 52
2
132
Contact Input 37
1
84
Virtual Output 53
2
133
Contact Input 38
1
85
Virtual Output 54
2
134
Contact Input 39
1
86
Virtual Output 55
2
135
Contact Input 40
1
87
Virtual Output 56
2
136
Contact Input 41
1
88
Virtual Output 57
2
137
Contact Input 42
1
89
Virtual Output 58
2
138
Contact Input 43
1
90
Virtual Output 59
2
139
Contact Input 44
1
91
Virtual Output 60
2
140
Contact Input 45
1
92
Virtual Output 61
2
141
Contact Input 46
1
93
Virtual Output 62
2
142
Contact Input 47
1
94
Virtual Output 63
2
143
Contact Input 48
1
95
Virtual Output 64
2
144
Contact Input 49
1
96
Contact Input 1
1
145
Contact Input 50
1
97
Contact Input 2
1
146
Contact Input 51
1
98
Contact Input 3
1
147
Contact Input 52
1
99
Contact Input 4
1
148
Contact Input 53
1
100
Contact Input 5
1
149
Contact Input 54
1
101
Contact Input 6
1
150
Contact Input 55
1
102
Contact Input 7
1
151
Contact Input 56
1
103
Contact Input 8
1
152
Contact Input 57
1
104
Contact Input 9
1
153
Contact Input 58
1
105
Contact Input 10
1
154
Contact Input 59
1
106
Contact Input 11
1
155
Contact Input 60
1
107
Contact Input 12
1
156
Contact Input 61
1
108
Contact Input 13
1
157
Contact Input 62
1
109
Contact Input 14
1
158
Contact Input 63
1
110
Contact Input 15
1
159
Contact Input 64
1
111
Contact Input 16
1
160
Contact Input 65
1
112
Contact Input 17
1
161
Contact Input 66
1
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E
E-9
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 5 of 9)
POINT
INDEX
E
NAME/DESCRIPTION
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 6 of 9)
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
162
Contact Input 67
1
211
Contact Output 20
1
163
Contact Input 68
1
212
Contact Output 21
1
164
Contact Input 69
1
213
Contact Output 22
1
165
Contact Input 70
1
214
Contact Output 23
1
166
Contact Input 71
1
215
Contact Output 24
1
167
Contact Input 72
1
216
Contact Output 25
1
168
Contact Input 73
1
217
Contact Output 26
1
169
Contact Input 74
1
218
Contact Output 27
1
170
Contact Input 75
1
219
Contact Output 28
1
171
Contact Input 76
1
220
Contact Output 29
1
172
Contact Input 77
1
221
Contact Output 30
1
173
Contact Input 78
1
222
Contact Output 31
1
174
Contact Input 79
1
223
Contact Output 32
1
175
Contact Input 80
1
224
Contact Output 33
1
176
Contact Input 81
1
225
Contact Output 34
1
177
Contact Input 82
1
226
Contact Output 35
1
178
Contact Input 83
1
227
Contact Output 36
1
179
Contact Input 84
1
228
Contact Output 37
1
180
Contact Input 85
1
229
Contact Output 38
1
181
Contact Input 86
1
230
Contact Output 39
1
182
Contact Input 87
1
231
Contact Output 40
1
183
Contact Input 88
1
232
Contact Output 41
1
184
Contact Input 89
1
233
Contact Output 42
1
185
Contact Input 90
1
234
Contact Output 43
1
186
Contact Input 91
1
235
Contact Output 44
1
187
Contact Input 92
1
236
Contact Output 45
1
188
Contact Input 93
1
237
Contact Output 46
1
189
Contact Input 94
1
238
Contact Output 47
1
190
Contact Input 95
1
239
Contact Output 48
1
191
Contact Input 96
1
240
Contact Output 49
1
192
Contact Output 1
1
241
Contact Output 50
1
193
Contact Output 2
1
242
Contact Output 51
1
194
Contact Output 3
1
243
Contact Output 52
1
195
Contact Output 4
1
244
Contact Output 53
1
196
Contact Output 5
1
245
Contact Output 54
1
197
Contact Output 6
1
246
Contact Output 55
1
198
Contact Output 7
1
247
Contact Output 56
1
199
Contact Output 8
1
248
Contact Output 57
1
200
Contact Output 9
1
249
Contact Output 58
1
201
Contact Output 10
1
250
Contact Output 59
1
202
Contact Output 11
1
251
Contact Output 60
1
203
Contact Output 12
1
252
Contact Output 61
1
204
Contact Output 13
1
253
Contact Output 62
1
205
Contact Output 14
1
254
Contact Output 63
1
206
Contact Output 15
1
255
Contact Output 64
1
207
Contact Output 16
1
256
Remote Input 1
1
208
Contact Output 17
1
257
Remote Input 2
1
209
Contact Output 18
1
258
Remote Input 3
1
210
Contact Output 19
1
259
Remote Input 4
1
E-10
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 7 of 9)
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 8 of 9)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
260
Remote Input 5
1
448
PHASE UV1 Element OP
1
261
Remote Input 6
1
449
PHASE UV2 Element OP
1
262
Remote Input 7
1
460
NEUTRAL OV1 Element OP
1
263
Remote Input 8
1
528
SRC1 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
1
264
Remote Input 9
1
529
SRC2 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
1
265
Remote Input 10
1
530
SRC3 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
1
266
Remote Input 11
1
531
SRC4 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
1
1
267
Remote Input 12
1
532
SRC5 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
268
Remote Input 13
1
533
SRC6 VT FUSE FAIL Elem OP
1
269
Remote Input 14
1
576
BREAKER 1 Element OP
1
270
Remote Input 15
1
577
BREAKER 2 Element OP
1
271
Remote Input 16
1
584
BKR FAIL 1 Element OP
1
272
Remote Input 17
1
585
BKR FAIL 2 Element OP
1
273
Remote Input 18
1
592
BKR ARC 1 Element OP
1
274
Remote Input 19
1
593
BKR ARC 2 Element OP
1
275
Remote Input 20
1
608
AR 1 Element OP
1
276
Remote Input 21
1
609
AR 2 Element OP
1
277
Remote Input 22
1
610
AR 3 Element OP
1
278
Remote Input 23
1
611
AR 4 Element OP
1
279
Remote Input 24
1
612
AR 5 Element OP
1
280
Remote Input 25
1
613
AR 6 Element OP
1
281
Remote Input 26
1
616
SYNC 1 Element OP
1
282
Remote Input 27
1
617
SYNC 2 Element OP
1
283
Remote Input 28
1
640
SETTING GROUP Element OP
1
284
Remote Input 29
1
641
RESET Element OP
1
285
Remote Input 30
1
704
FLEXELEMENT 1 Element OP
1
286
Remote Input 31
1
705
FLEXELEMENT 2 Element OP
1
287
Remote Input 32
1
706
FLEXELEMENT 3 Element OP
1
288
Remote Device 1
1
707
FLEXELEMENT 4 Element OP
1
289
Remote Device 2
1
708
FLEXELEMENT 5 Element OP
1
290
Remote Device 3
1
709
FLEXELEMENT 6 Element OP
1
291
Remote Device 4
1
710
FLEXELEMENT 7 Element OP
1
292
Remote Device 5
1
711
FLEXELEMENT 8 Element OP
1
293
Remote Device 6
1
816
DIG ELEM 1 Element OP
1
294
Remote Device 7
1
817
DIG ELEM 2 Element OP
1
295
Remote Device 8
1
818
DIG ELEM 3 Element OP
1
296
Remote Device 9
1
819
DIG ELEM 4 Element OP
1
297
Remote Device 10
1
820
DIG ELEM 5 Element OP
1
298
Remote Device 11
1
821
DIG ELEM 6 Element OP
1
299
Remote Device 12
1
822
DIG ELEM 7 Element OP
1
300
Remote Device 13
1
823
DIG ELEM 8 Element OP
1
301
Remote Device 14
1
824
DIG ELEM 9 Element OP
1
302
Remote Device 15
1
825
DIG ELEM 10 Element OP
1
303
Remote Device 16
1
826
DIG ELEM 11 Element OP
1
304
PHASE IOC1 Element OP
1
827
DIG ELEM 12 Element OP
1
305
PHASE IOC2 Element OP
1
828
DIG ELEM 13 Element OP
1
320
PHASE TOC1 Element OP
1
829
DIG ELEM 14 Element OP
1
321
PHASE TOC2 Element OP
1
830
DIG ELEM 15 Element OP
1
444
AUX UV1 Element OP
1
831
DIG ELEM 16 Element OP
1
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E
E-11
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
Table E–3: BINARY INPUTS (Sheet 9 of 9)
E
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
CHANGE EVENT
CLASS (1/2/3/NONE)
848
COUNTER 1 Element OP
1
849
COUNTER 2 Element OP
1
850
COUNTER 3 Element OP
1
851
COUNTER 4 Element OP
1
852
COUNTER 5 Element OP
1
853
COUNTER 6 Element OP
1
854
COUNTER 7 Element OP
1
855
COUNTER 8 Element OP
1
864
LED State 1 (IN SERVICE)
1
865
LED State 2 (TROUBLE)
1
866
LED State 3 (TEST MODE)
1
867
LED State 4 (TRIP)
1
868
LED State 5 (ALARM)
1
869
LED State 6(PICKUP)
1
880
LED State 9 (VOLTAGE)
1
881
LED State 10 (CURRENT)
1
882
LED State 11 (FREQUENCY)
1
883
LED State 12 (OTHER)
1
884
LED State 13 (PHASE A)
1
885
LED State 14 (PHASE B)
1
886
LED State 15 (PHASE C)
1
887
LED State 16 (NTL/GROUND)
1
898
SNTP FAILURE
1
899
BATTERY FAIL
1
900
PRI ETHERNET FAIL
1
901
SEC ETHERNET FAIL
1
902
EEPROM DATA ERROR
1
903
SRAM DATA ERROR
1
904
PROGRAM MEMORY
1
905
WATCHDOG ERROR
1
906
LOW ON MEMORY
1
907
REMOTE DEVICE OFF
1
908
DIRECT DEVICE OFF
909
DIRECT RING BREAK
910
ANY MINOR ERROR
1
911
ANY MAJOR ERROR
1
912
ANY SELF-TESTS
1
913
IRIG-B FAILURE
1
914
DSP ERROR
1
916
NO DSP INTERUPTS
1
917
UNIT NOT CALIBRATED
1
921
PROTOTYPE FIRMWARE
1
922
FLEXLOGIC ERR TOKEN
1
923
EQUIPMENT MISMATCH
1
925
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED
1
926
SYSTEM EXCEPTION
1
927
LATCHING OUT ERROR
1
E-12
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.2 BINARY/CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT
Supported Control Relay Output Block fields: Pulse On, Pulse Off, Latch On, Latch Off, Paired Trip, Paired Close.
BINARY OUTPUT STATUS POINTS
Object Number: 10
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Default Variation reported when Variation 0 requested: 2 (Binary Output Status)
CONTROL RELAY OUTPUT BLOCKS
Object Number: 12
Request Function Codes supported:
3 (select), 4 (operate), 5 (direct operate), 6 (direct operate, noack)
Table E–4: BINARY/CONTROL OUTPUTS
POINT
NAME/DESCRIPTION
0
Virtual Input 1
1
Virtual Input 2
2
Virtual Input 3
3
Virtual Input 4
4
Virtual Input 5
5
Virtual Input 6
6
Virtual Input 7
7
Virtual Input 8
8
Virtual Input 9
9
Virtual Input 10
10
Virtual Input 11
11
Virtual Input 12
12
Virtual Input 13
13
Virtual Input 14
14
Virtual Input 15
15
Virtual Input 16
16
Virtual Input 17
17
Virtual Input 18
18
Virtual Input 19
19
Virtual Input 20
20
Virtual Input 21
21
Virtual Input 22
22
Virtual Input 23
23
Virtual Input 24
24
Virtual Input 25
25
Virtual Input 26
26
Virtual Input 27
27
Virtual Input 28
28
Virtual Input 29
29
Virtual Input 30
30
Virtual Input 31
31
Virtual Input 32
GE Multilin
E
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-13
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
E.2.3 COUNTERS
The following table lists both Binary Counters (Object 20) and Frozen Counters (Object 21). When a freeze function is performed on a Binary Counter point, the frozen value is available in the corresponding Frozen Counter point.
BINARY COUNTERS
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 20
Change Event Object Number: 22
Request Function Codes supported:
1 (read), 7 (freeze), 8 (freeze noack), 9 (freeze and clear),
10 (freeze and clear, noack), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Binary Counter with Flag)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Counter Change Event without time)
Change Event Buffer Size: 10
Default Class for all points: 2
FROZEN COUNTERS
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 21
Change Event Object Number: 23
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter with Flag)
E
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Frozen Counter Event without time)
Change Event Buffer Size: 10
Default Class for all points: 2
Table E–5: BINARY AND FROZEN COUNTERS
POINT
INDEX
NAME/DESCRIPTION
0
Digital Counter 1
1
Digital Counter 2
2
Digital Counter 3
3
Digital Counter 4
4
Digital Counter 5
5
Digital Counter 6
6
Digital Counter 7
7
Digital Counter 8
8
Oscillography Trigger Count
9
Events Since Last Clear
A counter freeze command has no meaning for counters 8 and 9. C60 Digital Counter values are represented as 32-bit
integers. The DNP 3.0 protocol defines counters to be unsigned integers. Care should be taken when interpreting negative
counter values.
E-14
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX E
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
E.2.4 ANALOG INPUTS
The following table lists Analog Inputs (Object 30). It is important to note that 16-bit and 32-bit variations of analog inputs
are transmitted through DNP as signed numbers. Even for analog input points that are not valid as negative values, the
maximum positive representation is 32767 for 16-bit values and 2147483647 for 32-bit values. This is a DNP requirement.
The deadbands for all Analog Input points are in the same units as the Analog Input quantity. For example, an Analog Input
quantity measured in volts has a corresponding deadband in units of volts. This is in conformance with DNP Technical Bulletin 9809-001 Analog Input Reporting Deadband. Relay settings are available to set default deadband values according to
data type. Deadbands for individual Analog Input Points can be set using DNP Object 34.
When using the C60 in DNP systems with limited memory, the Analog Input Points below may be replaced with a userdefinable list. This user-definable list uses the same settings as the Modbus User Map and can be configured with the Modbus User Map settings. When used with DNP, each entry in the Modbus User Map represents the starting Modbus address
of a data item available as a DNP Analog Input point. To enable use of the Modbus User Map for DNP Analog Input points,
COMMUNICATIONS
set the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting to Enabled (this setting is in the PRODUCT SETUP
DNP PROTOCOL menu). The new DNP Analog points list can be checked via the “DNP Analog Input Points List” webpage,
accessible from the “Device Information menu” webpage.
After changing the USER MAP FOR DNP ANALOGS setting, the relay must be powered off and then back on for the setting to take effect.
NOTE
Only Source 1 data points are shown in the following table. If the NUMBER OF SOURCES IN ANALOG LIST setting is increased,
data points for subsequent sources will be added to the list immediately following the Source 1 data points.
Units for Analog Input points are as follows:
•
Current:
A (amps)
•
Frequency:
Hz (hertz)
•
Voltage:
V (volts)
•
Angle:
degrees
•
Real Power:
W (watts)
•
Ohm Input:
ohms
•
Reactive Power:
var (vars)
•
RTD Input:
°C (degrees Celsius)
•
Apparent Power:
VA (volt-amps)
•
Energy
Wh, varh (watt-hours, var-hours)
E
Static (Steady-State) Object Number: 30
Change Event Object Number: 32
Request Function Codes supported: 1 (read), 2 (write, deadbands only), 22 (assign class)
Static Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (32-Bit Analog Input)
Change Event Variation reported when variation 0 requested: 1 (Analog Change Event without Time)
Change Event Scan Rate: defaults to 500 ms
Change Event Buffer Size: 800
Default Class for all Points: 1
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 1 of 4)
POINT
DESCRIPTION
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 2 of 4)
POINT
DESCRIPTION
0
SRC 1 Phase A Current RMS
7
1
SRC 1 Phase B Current RMS
8
SRC 1 Phase C Current Magnitude
2
SRC 1 Phase C Current RMS
9
SRC 1 Phase C Current Angle
3
SRC 1 Neutral Current RMS
10
SRC 1 Neutral Current Magnitude
4
SRC 1 Phase A Current Magnitude
11
SRC 1 Neutral Current Angle
5
SRC 1 Phase A Current Angle
12
SRC 1 Ground Current RMS
6
SRC 1 Phase B Current Magnitude
13
SRC 1 Ground Current Magnitude
GE Multilin
SRC 1 Phase B Current Angle
C60 Breaker Management Relay
E-15
E.2 DNP POINT LISTS
APPENDIX E
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 3 of 4)
POINT
E
DESCRIPTION
Table E–6: ANALOG INPUT POINTS (Sheet 4 of 4)
POINT
DESCRIPTION
14
SRC 1 Ground Current Angle
63
SRC 1 Phase A Power Factor
15
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Magnitude
64
SRC 1 Phase B Power Factor
16
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Current Angle
65
SRC 1 Phase C Power Factor
17
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Magnitude
66
SRC 1 Positive Watthour
18
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Current Angle
67
SRC 1 Negative Watthour
19
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Magnitude
68
SRC 1 Positive Varhour
20
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Current Angle
69
SRC 1 Negative Varhour
21
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Magnitude
70
SRC 1 Frequency
22
SRC 1 Differential Ground Current Angle
71
SRC 1 Demand Ia
23
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage RMS
72
SRC 1 Demand Ib
24
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage RMS
73
SRC 1 Demand Ic
25
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage RMS
74
SRC 1 Demand Watt
26
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Magnitude
75
SRC 1 Demand Var
27
SRC 1 Phase AG Voltage Angle
76
SRC 1 Demand Va
28
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Magnitude
77
Sens Dir Power 1 Actual
29
SRC 1 Phase BG Voltage Angle
78
Sens Dir Power 2 Actual
30
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Magnitude
79
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase A
31
SRC 1 Phase CG Voltage Angle
80
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase B
32
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage RMS
81
Breaker 1 Arcing Amp Phase C
33
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage RMS
82
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase A
34
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage RMS
83
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase B
35
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Magnitude
84
Breaker 2 Arcing Amp Phase C
36
SRC 1 Phase AB Voltage Angle
85
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Voltage
37
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Magnitude
86
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Frequency
38
SRC 1 Phase BC Voltage Angle
87
Synchrocheck 1 Delta Phase
39
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Magnitude
88
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Voltage
40
SRC 1 Phase CA Voltage Angle
89
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Frequency
41
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage RMS
90
Synchrocheck 2 Delta Phase
42
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Magnitude
91
Tracking Frequency
43
SRC 1 Auxiliary Voltage Angle
92
FlexElement 1 Actual
44
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Magnitude
93
FlexElement 2 Actual
45
SRC 1 Zero Sequence Voltage Angle
94
FlexElement 3 Actual
46
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Magnitude
95
FlexElement 4 Actual
47
SRC 1 Positive Sequence Voltage Angle
96
FlexElement 5 Actual
48
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Magnitude
97
FlexElement 6 Actual
49
SRC 1 Negative Sequence Voltage Angle
98
FlexElement 7 Actual
50
SRC 1 Three Phase Real Power
99
FlexElement 8 Actual
51
SRC 1 Phase A Real Power
100
Current Setting Group
52
SRC 1 Phase B Real Power
53
SRC 1 Phase C Real Power
54
SRC 1 Three Phase Reactive Power
55
SRC 1 Phase A Reactive Power
56
SRC 1 Phase B Reactive Power
57
SRC 1 Phase C Reactive Power
58
SRC 1 Three Phase Apparent Power
59
SRC 1 Phase A Apparent Power
60
SRC 1 Phase B Apparent Power
61
SRC 1 Phase C Apparent Power
62
SRC 1 Three Phase Power Factor
E-16
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F MISCELLANEOUSF.1CHANGE NOTES
F.1.1 REVISION HISTORY
Table F–1: REVISION HISTORY
MANUAL P/N
C60 REVISION
RELEASE DATE
1601-0100-A1
1.6x
11 August 1999
ECO
---
1601-0100-A2
1.8x
29 October 1999
URC-005
1601-0100-A3
1.8x
15 November 1999
URC-007
1601-0100-A4
2.0x
17 December 1999
URC-010
1601-0100-A5
2.2x
12 May 2000
URC-012
1601-0100-A6
2.2x
14 June 2000
URC-014
1601-0100-A6a
2.2x
28 June 2000
URC-014a
1601-0100-B1
2.4x
08 September 2000
URC-016
1601-0100-B2
2.4x
03 November 2000
URC-018
1601-0100-B3
2.6x
09 March 2001
URC-020
1601-0100-B4
2.8x
11 October 2001
URC-023
1601-0100-B5
2.9x
03 December 2001
URC-025
1601-0100-C1
3.0x
02 July 2002
URC-027
1601-0100-C2
3.1x
30 August 2002
URC-029
1601-0100-C3
3.0x
18 November 2002
URC-032
URC-033
1601-0100-C4
3.1x
18 November 2002
1601-0100-C5
3.0x
11 February 2003
URC-036
1601-0100-C6
3.1x
11 February 2003
URC-037
1601-0100-D1
3.2x
11 February 2003
URC-039
1601-0100-D2
3.2x
02 June 2003
URX-084
1601-0100-E1
3.3x
01 May 2003
URX-080
1601-0100-E2
3.3x
29 May 2003
URX-083
1601-0100-F1
3.4x
10 December 2003
URX-111
1601-0100-F2
3.4x
09 February 2004
URX-115
1601-0100-F3
3.4x
25 March 2008
08-0164
1601-0100-F4
3.4x
18 September 2009
09-1189
F
F.1.2 CHANGES TO THE C60 MANUAL
Table F–2: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION F4
PAGE
(F3)
PAGE
(F4)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-F4
Table F–3: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION F3
PAGE
(F2)
PAGE
(F3)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-F3.
5-8
5-8
Update
Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section
5-12
5-12
Update
Updated NETWORK sub-section
5-137
5-137
Update
The LATCHING OUTPUTS section is now a sub-section of the CONTACT OUTPUTS
E-8
E-8
Update
Updated BINARY INPUTS section
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
F-1
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
APPENDIX F
Table F–4: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION F2
PAGE
(F1)
PAGE
(F2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-F2.
3-16
3-16
Update
Updated TRANSDUCER I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827831A9-X1.
5-8
5-8
Update
Updated DISPLAY PROPERTIES section.
5-44
5-45
Update
Updated DUAL BREAKER CONTROL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827061AM.
5-87
5-88
Update
Updated PHASE TOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827072A4.
5-88
5-89
Update
Updated PHASE IOC1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827033A6.
5-96
5-97
Update
Updated PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE1 SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827039AB.
Table F–5: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION F1
F
PAGE
(E2)
PAGE
(F1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-F1.
1-5
1-5
Update
Updated software installation procedure.
2-1
2-1
Add
Added Neutral TOC, Neutral IOC, Ground TOC, and Ground IOC elements to DEVICE
NUMBERS AND FUNCTIONS TABLE.
2-3
2-3
Update
Updated ORDER CODES table to add the 67 Digital I/O option.
2-4
2-4
Update
Updated ORDER CODES FOR REPLACEMENT MODULES table to add the 67 Module option.
3-11
3-11
Update
Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 67 module.
3-13
3-13
Update
Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to show the 67 module.
5-53
5-54
Add
Added Neutral TOC, Neutral IOC, Ground TOC, Ground IOC, and Sensitive Directional Power
elements to FLEXLOGIC OPERANDS table.
5-86
5-90
Add
Added NEUTRAL TOC sub-section
5-86
5-91
Add
Added NEUTRAL IOC sub-section
5-86
5-93
Add
Added GROUND TOC sub-section
5-86
5-94
Add
Added GROUND IOC sub-section
5-112
5-120
Update
Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 1 of 3) diagram to 827089AG
5-113
5-121
Update
Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 2 of 3) diagram to 827090AA
5-114
5-122
Update
Updated SINGLE POLE AUTORECLOSE LOGIC (Sheet 3 of 3) diagram to 827833A9
5-123
5-131
Update
Updated VT FUSE FAIL SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827093AF
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.4x
Table F–6: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION E2
PAGE
(E1)
PAGE
(E2)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-E2.
4-4
4-4
Update
Updated UR VERTICAL FACEPLATE PANELS figure to remove incorrect reference to UserProgrammable Pushbuttons.
F-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
APPENDIX F
F.1 CHANGE NOTES
Table F–7: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION E1
PAGE
(D1)
PAGE
(E1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-E1.
2-5
2-5
Update
Added specifications for SELECTOR SWITCH, CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS, USER-DEFINABLE
DISPLAYS, DIRECT INPUTS, DIRECT OUTPUTS, LATCHING OUTPUTS, and LED TEST.
Updated DIGITAL I/O MODULE ASSIGNMENTS table to add the 4A, 4B, 4C, and 4L modules.
3-11
3-11
Update
3-13
3-13
Update
Updated the DIGITAL I/O MODULE WIRING diagram to 827719CX.
3-30
3-29
Add
Added section for IEEE C37.94 Direct I/O communications.
5-9
5-9
Add
Added CLEAR RELAY RECORDS section.
5-21
5-22
Update
Updated USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs section to include LED Test feature.
5-22
5-25
Add
Added CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS section.
5-24
5-28
Update
Updated USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS section.
5-25
5-30
Update
Updated DIRECT I/O section to include CRC Alarm and Unreturned Messages Alarm features.
5-88
5-96
Add
Added SELECTOR SWITCH section.
5-114
5-127
Add
Added LATCHING OUTPUTS section.
5-124
5-139
Update
Updated TESTING section.
7-3
7-3
Update
Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section.
B-8
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.3x features.
Table F–8: MAJOR UPDATES FOR C60 MANUAL REVISION D1
PAGE
(C6)
PAGE
(D1)
CHANGE
DESCRIPTION
Title
Title
Update
Manual part number to 1601-0100-D1.
1-6
1-6
Update
Updated CONNECTING URPC WITH THE B30 section to reflect new URPC software.
2-2
2-2
Update
Updated OTHER DEVICE FUNCTIONS table to include User-Programmable Self Tests.
5-13
5-13
Update
Updated UCA/MMS PROTOCOL sub-section to include two new settings.
5-22
5-22
Add
Added USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF-TESTS section.
5-49
5-47
Update
Updated FLEXLOGIC™ OPERANDS table to include firmware revision 3.2x features.
5-91
5-91
Update
Updated SYNCHROCHECK SCHEME LOGIC to 827076A9.
5-95
5-92
Update
Updated AUTORECLOSE element description and logic and timing diagrams.
5-113
5-110
Update
Updated VT FUSE FAILURE SCHEME LOGIC diagram to 827093AD.
7-3
7-3
Update
Updated RELAY SELF-TESTS section.
B-9
B-8
Update
Updated MODBUS MEMORY MAP to reflect new firmware 3.2x features.
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
F
F-3
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
APPENDIX F
F.2ABBREVIATIONS
F.2.1 STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS
A..................... Ampere
AC .................. Alternating Current
A/D ................. Analog to Digital
AE .................. Accidental Energization, Application Entity
AMP ............... Ampere
ANG ............... Angle
ANSI............... American National Standards Institute
AR .................. Automatic Reclosure
ASDU ............. Application-layer Service Data Unit
ASYM ............. Asymmetry
AUTO ............. Automatic
AUX................ Auxiliary
AVG ................ Average
BER................ Bit Error Rate
BF................... Breaker Fail
BFI.................. Breaker Failure Initiate
BKR................ Breaker
BLK ................ Block
BLKG.............. Blocking
BPNT.............. Breakpoint of a characteristic
BRKR ............. Breaker
F
CAP................ Capacitor
CC .................. Coupling Capacitor
CCVT ............. Coupling Capacitor Voltage Transformer
CFG................ Configure / Configurable
.CFG............... Filename extension for oscillography files
CHK................ Check
CHNL ............. Channel
CLS ................ Close
CLSD.............. Closed
CMND ............ Command
CMPRSN........ Comparison
CO.................. Contact Output
COM............... Communication
COMM............ Communications
COMP ............ Compensated, Comparison
CONN............. Connection
CONT ............. Continuous, Contact
CO-ORD......... Coordination
CPU................ Central Processing Unit
CRC ............... Cyclic Redundancy Code
CRT, CRNT .... Current
CSA................ Canadian Standards Association
CT .................. Current Transformer
CVT ................ Capacitive Voltage Transformer
D/A ................. Digital to Analog
DC (dc)........... Direct Current
DD .................. Disturbance Detector
DFLT .............. Default
DGNST........... Diagnostics
DI.................... Digital Input
DIFF ............... Differential
DIR ................. Directional
DISCREP ....... Discrepancy
DIST ............... Distance
DMD ............... Demand
DNP................ Distributed Network Protocol
DPO ............... Dropout
DSP................ Digital Signal Processor
dt .................... Rate of Change
DTT ................ Direct Transfer Trip
DUTT.............. Direct Under-reaching Transfer Trip
ENCRMNT ..... Encroachment
EPRI............... Electric Power Research Institute
.EVT ............... Filename extension for event recorder files
EXT ................ Extension, External
F ..................... Field
FAIL................ Failure
FD .................. Fault Detector
FDH................ Fault Detector high-set
FDL ................ Fault Detector low-set
FLA................. Full Load Current
FO .................. Fiber Optic
F-4
FREQ ............. Frequency
FSK................ Frequency-Shift Keying
FTP ................ File Transfer Protocol
FxE ................ FlexElement™
FWD............... Forward
G .................... Generator
GE.................. General Electric
GND............... Ground
GNTR............. Generator
GOOSE.......... General Object Oriented Substation Event
GPS ............... Global Positioning System
HARM ............ Harmonic / Harmonics
HCT ............... High Current Time
HGF ............... High-Impedance Ground Fault (CT)
HIZ ................. High-Impedance and Arcing Ground
HMI ................ Human-Machine Interface
HTTP ............. Hyper Text Transfer Protocol
HYB ............... Hybrid
I...................... Instantaneous
I_0.................. Zero Sequence current
I_1.................. Positive Sequence current
I_2.................. Negative Sequence current
IA ................... Phase A current
IAB ................. Phase A minus B current
IB ................... Phase B current
IBC................. Phase B minus C current
IC ................... Phase C current
ICA................. Phase C minus A current
ID ................... Identification
IED................. Intelligent Electronic Device
IEC................. International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE............... Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers
IG ................... Ground (not residual) current
Igd.................. Differential Ground current
IN ................... CT Residual Current (3Io) or Input
INC SEQ ........ Incomplete Sequence
INIT ................ Initiate
INST............... Instantaneous
INV................. Inverse
I/O .................. Input/Output
IOC ................ Instantaneous Overcurrent
IOV................. Instantaneous Overvoltage
IRIG ............... Inter-Range Instrumentation Group
ISO................. International Standards Organization
IUV................. Instantaneous Undervoltage
K0 .................. Zero Sequence Current Compensation
kA................... kiloAmpere
kV................... kiloVolt
LED................ Light Emitting Diode
LEO................ Line End Open
LFT BLD ........ Left Blinder
LOOP............. Loopback
LPU................ Line Pickup
LRA................ Locked-Rotor Current
LTC ................ Load Tap-Changer
M.................... Machine
mA ................. MilliAmpere
MAG............... Magnitude
MAN............... Manual / Manually
MAX ............... Maximum
MIC ................ Model Implementation Conformance
MIN ................ Minimum, Minutes
MMI................ Man Machine Interface
MMS .............. Manufacturing Message Specification
MRT ............... Minimum Response Time
MSG............... Message
MTA................ Maximum Torque Angle
MTR ............... Motor
MVA ............... MegaVolt-Ampere (total 3-phase)
MVA_A ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase A)
MVA_B ........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase B)
MVA_C........... MegaVolt-Ampere (phase C)
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
F.2 ABBREVIATIONS
APPENDIX F
MVAR ............. MegaVar (total 3-phase)
MVAR_A......... MegaVar (phase A)
MVAR_B......... MegaVar (phase B)
MVAR_C ........ MegaVar (phase C)
MVARH .......... MegaVar-Hour
MW................. MegaWatt (total 3-phase)
MW_A ............ MegaWatt (phase A)
MW_B ............ MegaWatt (phase B)
MW_C ............ MegaWatt (phase C)
MWH .............. MegaWatt-Hour
SAT ................ CT Saturation
SBO ............... Select Before Operate
SCADA .......... Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SEC ............... Secondary
SEL ................ Select / Selector / Selection
SENS ............. Sensitive
SEQ ............... Sequence
SIR................. Source Impedance Ratio
SNTP ............. Simple Network Time Protocol
SRC ............... Source
SSB................ Single Side Band
SSEL.............. Session Selector
STATS............ Statistics
SUPN............. Supervision
SUPV ............. Supervise / Supervision
SV .................. Supervision, Service
SYNC............. Synchrocheck
SYNCHCHK... Synchrocheck
N..................... Neutral
N/A, n/a .......... Not Applicable
NEG ............... Negative
NMPLT ........... Nameplate
NOM............... Nominal
NSAP ............. Network Service Access Protocol
NTR................ Neutral
O .................... Over
OC, O/C ......... Overcurrent
O/P, Op........... Output
OP .................. Operate
OPER ............. Operate
OPERATG ...... Operating
O/S ................. Operating System
OSI ................. Open Systems Interconnect
OSB................ Out-of-Step Blocking
OUT................ Output
OV .................. Overvoltage
OVERFREQ ... Overfrequency
OVLD ............. Overload
F
P..................... Phase
PC .................. Phase Comparison, Personal Computer
PCNT ............. Percent
PF................... Power Factor (total 3-phase)
PF_A .............. Power Factor (phase A)
PF_B .............. Power Factor (phase B)
PF_C .............. Power Factor (phase C)
PFLL............... Phase and Frequency Lock Loop
PHS................ Phase
PICS............... Protocol Implementation & Conformance
Statement
PKP ................ Pickup
PLC ................ Power Line Carrier
POS................ Positive
POTT.............. Permissive Over-reaching Transfer Trip
PRESS ........... Pressure
PRI ................. Primary
PROT ............. Protection
PSEL .............. Presentation Selector
pu ................... Per Unit
PUIB............... Pickup Current Block
PUIT ............... Pickup Current Trip
PUSHBTN ...... Pushbutton
PUTT.............. Permissive Under-reaching Transfer Trip
PWM .............. Pulse Width Modulated
PWR............... Power
QUAD............. Quadrilateral
R..................... Rate, Reverse
RCA................ Reach Characteristic Angle
REF ................ Reference
REM ............... Remote
REV................ Reverse
RI.................... Reclose Initiate
RIP ................. Reclose In Progress
RGT BLD........ Right Blinder
ROD ............... Remote Open Detector
RST ................ Reset
RSTR ............. Restrained
RTD ................ Resistance Temperature Detector
RTU ................ Remote Terminal Unit
RX (Rx) .......... Receive, Receiver
s ..................... second
S..................... Sensitive
F-5
T..................... Time, transformer
TC .................. Thermal Capacity
TCP................ Transmission Control Protocol
TCU ............... Thermal Capacity Used
TD MULT........ Time Dial Multiplier
TEMP............. Temperature
TFTP .............. Trivial File Transfer Protocol
THD ............... Total Harmonic Distortion
TMR ............... Timer
TOC ............... Time Overcurrent
TOV................ Time Overvoltage
TRANS........... Transient
TRANSF ........ Transfer
TSEL.............. Transport Selector
TUC ............... Time Undercurrent
TUV................ Time Undervoltage
TX (Tx)........... Transmit, Transmitter
U .................... Under
UC.................. Undercurrent
UCA ............... Utility Communications Architecture
UDP ............... User Datagram Protocol
UL .................. Underwriters Laboratories
UNBAL........... Unbalance
UR.................. Universal Relay
URC ............... Universal Recloser Control
.URS .............. Filename extension for settings files
UV .................. Undervoltage
V/Hz ............... Volts per Hertz
V_0 ................ Zero Sequence voltage
V_1 ................ Positive Sequence voltage
V_2 ................ Negative Sequence voltage
VA .................. Phase A voltage
VAB ................ Phase A to B voltage
VAG................ Phase A to Ground voltage
VARH ............. Var-hour voltage
VB .................. Phase B voltage
VBA................ Phase B to A voltage
VBG ............... Phase B to Ground voltage
VC.................. Phase C voltage
VCA ............... Phase C to A voltage
VCG ............... Phase C to Ground voltage
VF .................. Variable Frequency
VIBR .............. Vibration
VT .................. Voltage Transformer
VTFF.............. Voltage Transformer Fuse Failure
VTLOS ........... Voltage Transformer Loss Of Signal
WDG .............. Winding
WH................. Watt-hour
w/ opt ............. With Option
WRT............... With Respect To
X .................... Reactance
XDUCER........ Transducer
XFMR............. Transformer
Z..................... Impedance, Zone
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
F.3 WARRANTY
APPENDIX F
F.3WARRANTY
F.3.1 GE MULTILIN WARRANTY
GE MULTILIN RELAY WARRANTY
General Electric Multilin Inc. (GE Multilin) warrants each relay it manufactures to be free from
defects in material and workmanship under normal use and service for a period of 24 months from
date of shipment from factory.
In the event of a failure covered by warranty, GE Multilin will undertake to repair or replace the relay
providing the warrantor determined that it is defective and it is returned with all transportation
charges prepaid to an authorized service centre or the factory. Repairs or replacement under warranty will be made without charge.
Warranty shall not apply to any relay which has been subject to misuse, negligence, accident,
incorrect installation or use not in accordance with instructions nor any unit that has been altered
outside a GE Multilin authorized factory outlet.
F
GE Multilin is not liable for special, indirect or consequential damages or for loss of profit or for
expenses sustained as a result of a relay malfunction, incorrect application or adjustment.
For complete text of Warranty (including limitations and disclaimers), refer to GE Multilin Standard
Conditions of Sale.
F-6
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
Index
INDEX
10BASE-F
communications options ................................................. 3-17
description .................................................................... 3-19
interface ........................................................................ 3-28
redundant option ........................................................... 3-17
settings ......................................................................... 5-12
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
A
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................................... F-4
AC CURRENT INPUTS .......................................2-8, 3-8, 5-38
AC VOLTAGE INPUTS ................................................ 2-8, 3-9
ACTIVATING THE RELAY ........................................1-12, 4-12
ACTIVE SETTING GROUP ............................................... 5-71
ACTUAL VALUES
maintenance ................................................................. 6-20
metering .......................................................................... 6-8
product information ........................................................ 6-21
records ......................................................................... 6-17
status .............................................................................. 6-3
ALARM LEDs ................................................................... 5-25
ALTITUDE ....................................................................... 2-10
ANSI DEVICE NUMBERS ................................................... 2-1
APPARENT POWER ................................................. 2-7, 6-13
APPLICATION EXAMPLES
breaker trip circuit integrity .......................................... 5-128
contact inputs .............................................................. 5-135
sensitive directional power ........................................... 5-102
APPROVALS ................................................................... 2-11
ARCHITECTURE ............................................................. 5-53
ARCING CURRENT ....................................................... 5-131
AUTORECLOSE
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
description .................................................................. 5-116
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55
logic ....................................................... 5-122, 5-123, 5-124
sequence .................................................................... 5-125
settings ................... 5-115, 5-117, 5-118, 5-119, 5-120, 5-121
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
AUXILIARY OVERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55
logic ............................................................................ 5-100
settings ....................................................................... 5-100
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55
logic .............................................................................. 5-99
settings ......................................................................... 5-99
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE CHANNEL ....................................... 3-9
AUXILIARY VOLTAGE METERING ................................... 6-12
B
BANKS ............................................................. 5-6, 5-38, 5-39
BATTERY FAIL .................................................................. 7-4
BINARY INPUT POINTS ..................................................... E-8
BINARY OUTPUT POINTS ............................................... E-13
BLOCK DIAGRAM .............................................................. 1-3
BLOCK SETTING ............................................................... 5-4
BREAKER ARCING
GE Multilin
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-55
BREAKER ARCING CURRENT
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
logic ............................................................................ 5-132
measurement ............................................................... 5-132
settings ....................................................................... 5-131
BREAKER CONTROL
actual values ................................................................. 6-20
control of 2 breakers ........................................................ 4-9
description ....................................................................... 4-8
dual breaker logic .......................................................... 5-45
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-55
settings ......................................................................... 5-43
BREAKER FAILURE
description ..................................................................... 5-73
determination ................................................................. 5-74
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-55
logic .................................................... 5-77, 5-78, 5-79, 5-80
main path sequence ....................................................... 5-74
settings ................................................................ 5-72, 5-75
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
BREAKER-AND-A-HALF SCHEME ...................................... 5-6
BRIGHTNESS .................................................................... 5-8
C
C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS .................................... 3-29, 3-30
CE APPROVALS .............................................................. 2-11
CHANGES TO MANUAL ...................................... F-1, F-2, F-3
CHANNEL COMMUNICATION .......................................... 3-21
CHANNELS
banks ................................................................... 5-38, 5-39
CIRCUIT MONITORING APPLICATIONS ......................... 5-126
CLEANING ....................................................................... 2-11
CLEAR RECORDS ........................................... 5-10, 7-1, B-37
CLOCK
setting date and time ........................................................ 7-2
settings ......................................................................... 5-17
COMMANDS MENU ............................................................ 7-1
COMMUNICATIONS
10BASE-F ................................................... 3-17, 3-19, 5-12
channel ......................................................................... 3-21
connecting to the UR ................................................. 1-8, 1-9
CRC-16 error checking .................................................... B-2
dnp ................................................................ 5-12, 5-17, E-1
G.703 ............................................................................ 3-24
half duplex ...................................................................... B-1
HTTP ............................................................................. 5-15
IEC 60870-5-104 protocol............................................... 5-16
inter-relay communications ............................................. 2-10
Modbus .................................................. 5-12, 5-17, B-1, B-3
network ......................................................................... 5-12
overview ........................................................................ 1-10
RS232 ........................................................................... 3-17
RS485 ......................................................... 3-17, 3-18, 5-11
settings ............................................... 5-12, 5-15, 5-16, 5-17
specifications .......................................................... 2-9, 2-10
UCA/MMS ............5-15, 5-43, 5-136, 5-140, 5-141, 5-142, C-1
web server ..................................................................... 5-15
COMTRADE ............................................................... B-6, B-7
CONDUCTED RFI ............................................................ 2-11
CONTACT INFORMATION .................................................. 1-1
CONTACT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
dry connections ............................................................. 3-15
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-58
C60 Breaker Management Relay
i
INDEX
Numerics
INDEX
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9
module assignments ...................................................... 3-11
settings ....................................................................... 5-134
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
thresholds ................................................................... 5-134
wet connections ............................................................. 3-15
wiring ............................................................................ 3-13
CONTACT OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9
module assignments ...................................................... 3-11
settings ....................................................................... 5-137
wiring ............................................................................ 3-13
CONTROL ELEMENTS ................................................... 5-104
CONTROL POWER
description....................................................................... 3-8
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
CONTROL PUSHBUTTONS
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-55
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-37
settings ......................................................................... 5-26
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
settings ....................................................................... 5-129
CRC ALARM .................................................................... 5-36
CRC-16 ALGORITHM ........................................................ B-2
CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY ......................................... 2-9, 3-8
CSA APPROVAL .............................................................. 2-11
CT BANKS
settings ......................................................................... 5-38
CT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-9, 5-6, 5-38
CT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-9
CURRENT BANK ............................................................. 5-38
CURRENT DEMAND ........................................................ 5-21
CURRENT METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-11
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
CURVES
definite time.......................................................... 5-86, 5-96
FlexCurves™ ........................................................ 5-46, 5-86
I2T ................................................................................ 5-86
IAC ............................................................................... 5-85
IEC ............................................................................... 5-84
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-83
inverse time undervoltage .............................................. 5-96
types ............................................................................. 5-82
D
INDEX
DATA FORMATS, MODBUS .............................................B-42
DATA LOGGER
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
Modbus ................................................................... B-6, B-7
Modbus registers ...........................................................B-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-21
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
DATE ................................................................................. 7-2
DCMA INPUTS ................................................................. 6-16
settings ....................................................................... 5-147
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
DEFINITE TIME CURVE .......................................... 5-86, 5-96
DEMAND METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
ii
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12
settings ..........................................................................5-21
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
DEMAND RECORDS
clearing ...................................................................5-10, 7-2
DESIGN ............................................................................ 1-3
DEVICE ID ..................................................................... 5-140
DEVICE PROFILE DOCUMENT .......................................... E-1
DIELECTRIC STRENGTH ..........................................2-11, 3-7
DIGITAL COUNTER
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-56
DIGITAL COUNTERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
logic ............................................................................ 5-130
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
settings ........................................................................ 5-129
DIGITAL ELEMENT
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-56
DIGITAL ELEMENTS
application example ...................................................... 5-127
logic ............................................................................ 5-126
settings ........................................................................ 5-126
DIGITAL INPUTS
see entry for CONTACT INPUTS
DIGITAL OUTPUTS
see entry for CONTACT OUTPUTS
DIMENSIONS .................................................................... 3-1
DIRECT DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-7
DIRECT I/O
see also DIRECT INPUTS and DIRECT OUTPUTS
application example ........................................... 5-144, 5-145
configuration examples ................................. 5-32, 5-36, 5-37
settings ..............................................5-32, 5-36, 5-37, 5-143
DIRECT INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
application example ........................................... 5-144, 5-145
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
settings ........................................................................ 5-143
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
DIRECT OUTPUTS
application example ........................................... 5-144, 5-145
clearing counters ............................................................. 7-2
settings ........................................................................ 5-144
DIRECTIONAL POWER
see entry for SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
DISPLAY ............................................................ 1-10, 4-8, 5-8
DISTURBANCE DETECTOR
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-57
internal ..........................................................................5-41
DNA-1 BIT PAIR ............................................................. 5-142
DNP COMMUNICATIONS
binary counters ............................................................. E-14
binary input points ........................................................... E-8
binary output points ....................................................... E-13
control relay output blocks ............................................. E-13
device profile document ................................................... E-1
frozen counters ............................................................. E-14
implementation table ....................................................... E-4
settings ..........................................................................5-12
user map .......................................................................5-14
DUPLEX, HALF ................................................................. B-1
E
ELECTROSTATIC DISCHARGE ........................................2-11
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
INDEX
F
F485 ............................................................................... 1-10
FACEPLATE ...................................................................... 3-1
FACEPLATE PANELS ................................................. 4-4, 4-7
FAST FORM-C RELAY ....................................................... 2-9
FAST TRANSIENT TESTING ............................................ 2-11
FAULT LOCATOR
logic .............................................................................. 6-18
operation ....................................................................... 6-17
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
FAULT REPORT
actual values ................................................................. 6-17
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
settings ......................................................................... 5-18
FAULT TYPE ................................................................... 6-17
FAX NUMBERS ................................................................. 1-1
FEATURES ........................................................................ 2-1
FIRMWARE REVISION .................................................... 6-21
FIRMWARE UPGRADES .................................................... 4-2
FLASH MESSAGES ........................................................... 5-8
FLEX STATE PARAMETERS
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
settings ......................................................................... 5-29
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
FLEXCURVES™
equation ........................................................................ 5-86
settings ......................................................................... 5-46
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
table ............................................................................. 5-46
FLEXELEMENTS™
actual values ................................................................. 6-15
direction ........................................................................ 5-68
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
hysteresis ..................................................................... 5-68
pickup ........................................................................... 5-68
GE Multilin
scheme logic ................................................................. 5-67
settings ....................................................... 5-66, 5-67, 5-69
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
FLEXLOGIC™
editing with URPC ............................................................ 4-1
equation editor ............................................................... 5-65
evaluation ...................................................................... 5-60
example ............................................................... 5-53, 5-61
example equation ......................................................... 5-104
gate characteristics ........................................................ 5-59
operands .............................................................. 5-54, 5-55
operators ....................................................................... 5-60
rules .............................................................................. 5-60
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
timers ............................................................................ 5-65
worksheet ...................................................................... 5-62
FLEXLOGIC™ EQUATION EDITOR .................................. 5-65
FLEXLOGIC™ TIMERS .................................................... 5-65
FORCE CONTACT INPUTS ............................................ 5-149
FORCE CONTACT OUTPUTS ......................................... 5-150
FORCE TRIGGER ............................................................ 6-19
FORM-A RELAY
high impedance circuits .................................................. 3-11
outputs ........................................................ 3-10, 3-11, 3-15
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
FORM-C RELAY
outputs ................................................................. 3-10, 3-15
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
FREQUENCY
actual values ................................................................. 6-14
settings ......................................................................... 5-40
FREQUENCY METERING
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-12
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
values ........................................................................... 6-14
FREQUENCY TRACKING ................................................. 5-40
FREQUENCY, NOMINAL .................................................. 5-39
FUNCTION SETTING ......................................................... 5-4
FUSE ................................................................................. 2-8
FUSE FAILURE
see VT FUSE FAILURE
G
G.703 .................................................... 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-28
GE TYPE IAC CURVES .................................................... 5-85
GOMSFE .......................................................................... C-1
GOOSE ................ 5-15, 5-140, 5-141, 5-142, 5-143, 5-144, 6-5
GROUND CURRENT METERING ...................................... 6-11
GROUND IOC
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
logic .............................................................................. 5-95
settings ......................................................................... 5-95
GROUND TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for GROUND TOC
GROUND TOC
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-56
logic .............................................................................. 5-94
settings ......................................................................... 5-94
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
GROUPED ELEMENTS .................................................... 5-71
H
HALF-DUPLEX .................................................................. B-1
C60 Breaker Management Relay
iii
INDEX
ELEMENTS ....................................................................... 5-3
ENERGY METERING
actual values ................................................................. 6-13
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-12
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
ENERGY METERING, CLEARING ............................. 5-10, 7-2
EQUATIONS
definite time curve .................................................5-86, 5-96
FlexCurve™ .................................................................. 5-86
I²t curves ....................................................................... 5-86
IAC curves .................................................................... 5-85
IEC curves .................................................................... 5-84
IEEE curves .................................................................. 5-83
ETHERNET
actual values ................................................................... 6-6
configuration ................................................................... 1-8
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-12
specifications .................................................................. 2-9
EVENT CAUSE INDICATORS ............................................. 4-5
EVENT RECORDER
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
clearing ......................................................................... 5-10
Modbus ........................................................................... B-7
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2
EVENTS SETTING ............................................................. 5-4
EXCEPTION RESPONSES ................................................. B-5
INDEX
HTTP PROTOCOL ........................................................... 5-15
HUMIDITY ....................................................................... 2-10
I
I2T CURVES .................................................................... 5-86
IAC CURVES ................................................................... 5-85
IEC 60870-5-104 PROTOCOL
interoperability document ................................................ D-1
points list ...................................................................... D-10
settings ......................................................................... 5-16
IEC CURVES ................................................................... 5-84
IED .................................................................................... 1-2
IED SETUP ........................................................................ 1-5
IEEE C37.94 COMMUNICATIONS ........................... 3-29, 3-30
IEEE CURVES ................................................................. 5-83
IMPORTANT CONCEPTS ................................................... 1-4
IN SERVICE INDICATOR .......................................... 1-12, 7-3
INPUTS
AC current .............................................................. 2-8, 5-38
AC voltage ............................................................. 2-8, 5-39
contact inputs .................................... 2-8, 3-13, 5-134, 5-149
dcmA inputs .................................................2-8, 3-16, 5-147
direct inputs ..................................................................... 2-8
IRIG-B .................................................................... 2-8, 3-19
remote inputs ............................................. 2-8, 5-140, 5-141
RTD inputs ...................................................2-8, 3-16, 5-148
virtual .......................................................................... 5-136
INSPECTION CHECKLIST .................................................. 1-1
INSTALLATION
communications ............................................................. 3-17
contact inputs/outputs ...................................3-11, 3-13, 3-14
CT inputs ......................................................................... 3-9
RS485 ........................................................................... 3-18
settings ......................................................................... 5-37
VT inputs ......................................................................... 3-8
INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
INSULATION RESISTANCE .............................................. 2-11
INTELLIGENT ELECTRONIC DEVICE ................................. 1-2
INTER-RELAY COMMUNICATIONS .................................. 2-10
INTRODUCTION ................................................................ 1-2
INVERSE TIME UNDERVOLTAGE .................................... 5-96
IOC
see PHASE, GROUND, and NEUTRAL IOC entries
IP ADDRESS ................................................................... 5-12
IRIG-B
connection ..................................................................... 3-19
settings ......................................................................... 5-17
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
ISO-9000 REGISTRATION ............................................... 2-11
K
KEYPAD ................................................................... 1-11, 4-8
L
INDEX
LAMPTEST ........................................................................ 7-2
LASER MODULE .............................................................. 3-22
LATCHING OUTPUTS
application example ...........................................5-138, 5-139
settings ....................................................................... 5-137
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
iv
LED INDICATORS ................................ 4-5, 4-6, 4-7, 5-25, B-8
LED TEST
FlexLogic™ operand .......................................................5-58
settings ..........................................................................5-23
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
LINE
settings ..........................................................................5-42
LINE LENGTH ..................................................................5-42
LINK POWER BUDGET .....................................................2-10
LOGIC GATES .................................................................5-60
LOST PASSWORD ............................................................ 5-7
M
MAINTENANCE COMMANDS ............................................. 7-2
MANUFACTURING DATE .................................................6-21
MEMORY MAP DATA FORMATS ..................................... B-42
MENU HEIRARCHY ................................................. 1-11, 4-10
MENU NAVIGATION ......................................... 1-11, 4-9, 4-10
METERING
conventions ............................................................. 6-8, 6-9
current ............................................................................ 2-7
demand .......................................................................... 2-7
frequency ........................................................................ 2-7
power ............................................................................. 2-7
voltage............................................................................ 2-7
METERING CONVENTIONS .............................................. 6-9
MIC ................................................................................... C-3
MMS
see entry for UCA/MMS
MODBUS
data logger .............................................................. B-6, B-7
event recorder ................................................................. B-7
exception responses ........................................................ B-5
execute operation ............................................................ B-4
flex state parameters ......................................................5-29
function code 03/04h ....................................................... B-3
function code 05h ............................................................ B-4
function code 06h ............................................................ B-4
function code 10h ............................................................ B-5
introduction ..................................................................... B-1
memory map data formats ............................................. B-42
obtaining files ................................................................. B-6
oscillography ................................................................... B-6
passwords ...................................................................... B-7
read/write settings/actual values ...................................... B-3
settings ................................................................. 5-12, 5-17
store multiple settings ..................................................... B-5
store single setting .......................................................... B-4
supported function codes ................................................. B-3
user map .......................................................................5-17
user map Modbus registers .............................................. B-9
MODEL INFORMATION ....................................................6-21
MODIFICATION FILE NUMBER .........................................6-21
MODULES
communications .............................................................3-17
contact inputs/outputs .................................. 3-11, 3-13, 3-14
CT .................................................................................. 3-9
CT/VT ...................................................................... 3-8, 5-6
direct inputs/outputs .......................................................3-22
insertion .......................................................................... 3-4
order codes ..................................................................... 2-4
ordering .......................................................................... 2-4
power supply ................................................................... 3-8
transducer I/O ................................................................3-16
VT .................................................................................. 3-9
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
INDEX
withdrawal ....................................................................... 3-4
MONITORING ELEMENTS ............................................. 5-131
MOUNTING ....................................................................... 3-1
OVERVOLTAGE
auxiliary ................................................................ 2-5, 5-100
neutral .................................................................... 2-5, 5-98
N
P
NAMEPLATE ..................................................................... 1-1
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL IOC
NEUTRAL IOC
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
logic .............................................................................. 5-92
settings ......................................................................... 5-92
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NEUTRAL OVERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
logic .............................................................................. 5-98
settings ......................................................................... 5-98
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NEUTRAL TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for NEUTRAL TOC
NEUTRAL TOC
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
logic .............................................................................. 5-91
settings ......................................................................... 5-91
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
NON-VOLATILE LATCHES
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-56
settings ......................................................................... 5-70
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
PANEL CUTOUT ................................................................ 3-1
PASSWORD SECURITY ..................................................... 5-7
PASSWORDS
changing ....................................................................... 4-13
lost password ......................................................... 4-13, 5-7
Modbus .......................................................................... B-7
overview ........................................................................ 1-12
security ........................................................................... 5-7
settings ........................................................................... 5-7
PC SOFTWARE
see entry for URPC
PERMISSIVE FUNCTIONS ............................................... 5-96
PER-UNIT QUANTITY ........................................................ 5-3
PHASE ANGLE METERING ................................................ 6-9
PHASE CURRENT METERING ......................................... 6-11
PHASE INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE IOC
PHASE IOC
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-57
logic .............................................................................. 5-89
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
PHASE ROTATION .......................................................... 5-40
PHASE TIME OVERCURRENT
see entry for PHASE TOC
PHASE TOC
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-57
logic .............................................................................. 5-88
settings ......................................................................... 5-87
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
PHASE UNDERVOLTAGE
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-57
logic .............................................................................. 5-97
settings ......................................................................... 5-97
specifications ................................................................... 2-5
PHONE NUMBERS ............................................................. 1-1
PICS ................................................................................. C-2
POWER METERING
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
values ........................................................................... 6-12
POWER SUPPLY
description ....................................................................... 3-8
low range ........................................................................ 2-8
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
PRODUCT INFORMATION ............................................... 6-21
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-8
PRODUCT SETUP ............................................................. 5-7
PRODUCTION TESTS ...................................................... 2-11
PROTECTION ELEMENTS ................................................. 5-3
PU QUANTITY ................................................................... 5-3
PUSHBUTTONS, USER-PROGRAMMABLE
see USER-PROGRAMMBLE PUSHBUTTONS
ONE SHOTS .................................................................... 5-60
OPERATING TEMPERATURE .......................................... 2-10
OPERATING TIMES ........................................................... 2-5
ORDER CODES ..................................................2-3, 6-21, 7-2
ORDER CODES, UPDATING .............................................. 7-2
ORDERING ................................................................ 2-3, 2-4
OSCILLATORY TRANSIENT TESTING ............................. 2-11
OSCILLOGRAPHY
actual values ................................................................. 6-19
clearing .................................................................. 5-10, 7-1
Modbus ........................................................................... B-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-19
specifications .................................................................. 2-7
with URPC ...................................................................... 4-2
OUTPUTS
contact outputs ........................................... 3-11, 3-13, 5-137
control power .................................................................. 2-9
critical failure relay .......................................................... 2-9
Fast Form-C relay ........................................................... 2-9
Form-A relay ......................................... 2-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-15
Form-C relay .................................................. 2-9, 3-10, 3-15
latching outputs .....................................................2-9, 5-137
remote outputs .................................................. 5-142, 5-143
virtual outputs ............................................................. 5-139
OVERCURRENT CURVE TYPES ...................................... 5-82
OVERCURRENT CURVES
definite time .................................................................. 5-86
FlexCurves™ ................................................................ 5-86
I2T ................................................................................ 5-86
IAC ............................................................................... 5-85
IEC ............................................................................... 5-84
IEEE ............................................................................. 5-83
GE Multilin
R
REACTIVE POWER ................................................... 2-7, 6-12
REAL POWER ........................................................... 2-7, 6-12
REAL TIME CLOCK .......................................................... 5-17
REAR TERMINAL ASSIGNMENTS ...................................... 3-5
C60 Breaker Management Relay
v
INDEX
O
INDEX
RECLOSER CURVES .............................................. 5-49, 5-86
RECLOSING
description................................................................... 5-116
logic ....................................................... 5-122, 5-123, 5-124
sequence .................................................................... 5-125
settings .................. 5-115, 5-117, 5-118, 5-119, 5-120, 5-121
REDUNDANT 10BASE-F .................................................. 3-17
RELAY ACTIVATION ........................................................ 4-12
RELAY ARCHITECTURE .................................................. 5-53
RELAY MAINTENANCE ...................................................... 7-2
RELAY NAME .................................................................. 5-37
RELAY NOT PROGRAMMED ............................................ 1-12
REMOTE DEVICES
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
device ID ..................................................................... 5-140
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58
Modbus registers ............................................................ B-9
settings ....................................................................... 5-140
statistics .......................................................................... 6-5
REMOTE INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-58
settings ....................................................................... 5-141
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
REMOTE OUTPUTS
DNA-1 bit pair .............................................................. 5-142
UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................5-143, 5-144
REPLACEMENT MODULES ................................................ 2-4
RESETTING .......................................................... 5-58, 5-143
REVISION HISTORY ..........................................................F-1
RFI SUSCEPTIBILITY ...................................................... 2-11
RFI, CONDUCTED ........................................................... 2-11
RMS CURRENT ................................................................. 2-7
RMS VOLTAGE .................................................................. 2-7
ROLLING DEMAND .......................................................... 5-22
RS232
configuration ................................................................... 1-8
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
wiring ............................................................................ 3-17
RS422
configuration ................................................................. 3-26
timing ............................................................................ 3-27
two-channel application .................................................. 3-26
with fiber interface ......................................................... 3-28
RS485
communications ............................................................. 3-17
description..................................................................... 3-18
specifications ................................................................... 2-9
RTD INPUTS
actual values ................................................................. 6-16
settings ....................................................................... 5-148
specifications ................................................................... 2-8
S
INDEX
SALES OFFICE .................................................................. 1-1
SCAN OPERATION ............................................................ 1-4
SELECTOR SWITCH
actual values ................................................................... 6-5
application example ..................................................... 5-110
FlexLogic™ operands .................................................... 5-57
logic ............................................................................ 5-110
settings ....................................................................... 5-105
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
timing ................................................................5-108, 5-109
SELF-TESTS
vi
description ...................................................................... 7-3
error messages ............................................................... 7-4
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-59
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-8
SENSITIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
actual values ..................................................................6-15
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-56
logic ............................................................................ 5-103
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10
settings ............................................................. 5-101, 5-103
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
SENSTIVE DIRECTIONAL POWER
characteristic ............................................................... 5-102
SERIAL NUMBER .............................................................6-21
SERIAL PORTS ................................................................5-11
SETTING GROUPS ...................................... 5-57, 5-71, 5-104
SETTINGS, CHANGING ....................................................4-11
SIGNAL SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
metering ........................................................................6-11
settings ..........................................................................5-41
SIGNAL TYPES ................................................................. 1-3
SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM ............................................. 2-1, 2-2
SITE LIST, CREATING ...................................................... 4-1
SNTP PROTOCOL
settings ..........................................................................5-17
SOFTWARE
installation ...................................................................... 1-5
see entry for URPC
SOFTWARE ARCHITECTURE ............................................ 1-4
SOFTWARE, PC
see entry for URPC
SOURCE TRANSFER SCHEMES ......................................5-96
SOURCES
description ...................................................................... 5-5
example use of ...............................................................5-41
metering ........................................................................6-11
Modbus registers ........................................................... B-10
settings ................................................................. 5-40, 5-41
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................. 2-5
ST TYPE CONNECTORS ..................................................3-19
STANDARD ABBREVIATIONS ........................................... F-4
STATUS INDICATORS ....................................................... 4-5
SURGE IMMUNITY ...........................................................2-11
SYMMETRICAL COMPONENTS METERING ...................... 6-9
SYNCHROCHECK
actual values ..................................................................6-14
FlexLogic™ operands .....................................................5-58
logic ............................................................................ 5-114
settings ............................................................. 5-111, 5-112
specifications .................................................................. 2-6
SYSTEM FREQUENCY .....................................................5-39
SYSTEM SETUP ..............................................................5-38
T
TARGET MESSAGES ........................................................ 7-3
TARGET SETTING ............................................................ 5-4
TARGETS MENU ............................................................... 7-3
TCP PORT NUMBER ........................................................5-15
TEMPERATURE, OPERATING ..........................................2-10
TERMINALS ...................................................................... 3-5
TESTING
force contact inputs ...................................................... 5-149
force contact outputs .................................................... 5-150
lamp test ......................................................................... 7-2
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin
INDEX
self-test error messages .................................................. 7-3
THERMAL DEMAND CHARACTERISTIC .......................... 5-22
TIME ................................................................................. 7-2
TIME OVERCURRENT
see PHASE, NEUTRAL, and GROUND TOC entries
TIMERS ........................................................................... 5-65
TOC
ground .......................................................................... 5-94
neutral .......................................................................... 5-91
phase ............................................................................ 5-87
specifications .................................................................. 2-5
TRACKING FREQUENCY ................................................. 6-15
TRANSDUCER I/O
actual values ................................................................. 6-16
settings ............................................................. 5-147, 5-148
specifications .................................................................. 2-8
wiring ............................................................................ 3-16
TRIP LEDs ...................................................................... 5-25
TROUBLE INDICATOR ............................................. 1-12, 7-3
TYPE TESTS ................................................................... 2-11
TYPICAL WIRING DIAGRAM .............................................. 3-6
U
V
VAR-HOURS ............................................................. 2-7, 6-13
VIBRATION TESTING ...................................................... 2-11
VIRTUAL INPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-3
commands ....................................................................... 7-1
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-58
logic ............................................................................ 5-136
Modbus registers ..................................................... B-8, B-9
settings ....................................................................... 5-136
VIRTUAL OUTPUTS
actual values ................................................................... 6-4
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-58
settings ....................................................................... 5-139
VOLTAGE BANKS ............................................................ 5-39
VOLTAGE DEVIATIONS ................................................... 2-11
VOLTAGE ELEMENTS ..................................................... 5-96
VOLTAGE METERING
Modbus registers .......................................................... B-11
specifications ................................................................... 2-7
values ........................................................................... 6-11
VOLTAGE RESTRAINT CHARACTERISTIC ....................... 5-87
VT FUSE FAILURE
logic ............................................................................ 5-133
settings ....................................................................... 5-133
VT INPUTS ........................................................ 3-9, 5-6, 5-39
VT WIRING ........................................................................ 3-9
VTFF
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-57
see VT FUSE FAILURE
W
WARRANTY .......................................................................F-6
WATT-HOURS .......................................................... 2-7, 6-13
WEB SERVER PROTOCOL .............................................. 5-15
WEBSITE ........................................................................... 1-1
WIRING DIAGRAM ............................................................. 3-6
Z
ZERO SEQUENCE CORE BALANCE .................................. 3-9
INDEX
UCA SBO TIMER
for breaker control ......................................................... 5-43
for virtual inputs .......................................................... 5-136
UCA/MMS
device ID ..................................................................... 5-140
DNA2 assignments ...................................................... 5-142
MIC .................................................................................C-3
overview .........................................................................C-1
PICS ...............................................................................C-2
remote device settings ................................................. 5-140
remote inputs .............................................................. 5-141
reporting .........................................................................C-6
SBO timeout ........................................................ 5-43, 5-136
settings ......................................................................... 5-15
UserSt-1 bit pair ................................................ 5-143, 5-144
UL APPROVAL ................................................................ 2-11
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS
resetting ................................................................. 5-10, 7-2
UNDERVOLTAGE
auxiliary .......................................................................... 2-5
phase ..................................................................... 2-5, 5-97
UNDERVOLTAGE CHARACTERISTICS ............................ 5-96
UNIT NOT PROGRAMMED .............................................. 5-37
UNPACKING THE RELAY .................................................. 1-1
UNRETURNED MESSAGES ALARM ................................. 5-37
UPDATING ORDER CODE ................................................. 7-2
URPC
creating a site list ............................................................ 4-1
event recorder ................................................................. 4-2
firmware upgrades ........................................................... 4-2
introduction ..................................................................... 4-1
oscillography ................................................................... 4-2
overview ......................................................................... 4-1
requirements ................................................................... 1-5
USER-DEFINABLE DISPLAYS
example ........................................................................ 5-31
invoking and scrolling .................................................... 5-30
Modbus registers ............................................................. B-9
settings ................................................................ 5-30, 5-31
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE LEDs
custom labeling ................................................................ 4-7
defaults ........................................................................... 4-6
description ....................................................................... 4-6
settings ......................................................................... 5-25
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE PUSHBUTTONS
FlexLogic™ operands ..................................................... 5-59
settings ......................................................................... 5-28
specifications ................................................................... 2-6
USER-PROGRAMMABLE SELF TESTS
settings ......................................................................... 5-26
USERST-1 BIT PAIR ........................................... 5-143, 5-144
GE Multilin
C60 Breaker Management Relay
vii
INDEX
INDEX
viii
C60 Breaker Management Relay
GE Multilin